All Refresher - NO ANSWER

..,.
82 I JPT- REFRESHER
..
111111 . B. Parallel Parking C. Perpendicular Parking
D. Parking Beside the Road
721. What is the most economical but unsafe in backing-out?
-lai
\ A. Buffer Parking C. Perpendicular Parking
B. Parallel Parking D. Parking Beside the Road
722. What is economical, safe in backing-out, and the most efficient?

A. Buffer Parking C. Perpendicular parking
B. Parallel Parking D. Parking beside the road
723. What is economical, and safest? .
La A. Buffer Parking
B. Parallel Parking
C. Perpendicular parking
D. Parking beside the road
La 724. Non-temporary parking for single space.

A. Parking Zone C. Parking Space
-
B. Parking Lot D. Garage
725. Which is your least consideration for parking spaces?

A. Dimension C. Density
B. Handicapped Accessibility D. Flow of Traffic
726. When you imagine something and then engineer it into fruition, it is called:
A. Brainstorming C. Creative Thinking
B. Walt Disney filmmaking D. lmagineering
Given the figure:
727. Identify the type of lot for #1

A. Inside Lot C. Corner Lot
B. Interior Lot D. Corner Through
--
A. Inside Lot
C. Corner Lot
B. Interior Lot
D. Corner Through
A. Inside Lot
B. Interior Lot
-- 101
83 I JPT - RE FRESHE.R
- C. · Corner Lot
D. CornerThrough
Given the figure:

[ -; a,
i ,-
ca
-
-
- 730. Identify the different types of lots corresponding to the shaded portions.
-
731. From the Figure, what is the most ideal slope of site for a Vacation House?
C:
-
-
-
- 732.
A.
Important feature on site that should be considered by thg developer on housing
project to attract client.
Church
B. Creek
,
C.
D.
·
Small lake inside the property
733. What is the most. ideal fo r a residential resort to develop especially if facing a lake?
..
A. 0-2% slope C. 3-5% slope
B. 6-~5% slope D. 15-30% above
734. What is the most expensive to develop "plumbing-wise"

A. 0-2% slope
-•
C. 6-15% slope
B. 3-5% slope D. 15-30% slope
735 . For a La keside development, wh ich is least de sired?

A. 1.SOrn Ca nopy C. 3.0m Eaves
B. 0.)0rn Sun Brea kers D. 1.20m Balcony
•- 736.
A. S.OOrn
For ;i lot with a 4% slope and depth of 125m, what is the difference in elevation?
I
102
·-- --- ---- t& ::e:n:mr:t"etN ;t:M dK
31\ \ ; ;>T - i1FF RE5Ht: k
Ll B. 7.50m
C.
D.
31.2':irn
3.20m
737. ldrntify the ty i)c o f road iri the fig 11re at righ t.
0 A.
B.
Cul-d e -sa c
Bra nch
C.
D.
Tee
0 738. Fcom the gi"eo fig"'° • ,deot, fy w hat is iodk.,tc<I r ~-/)\

I '
tJ A.
B
c.
Cul-de-s ac
Arterial Road
T- Road .
___J
1--, -I 7~
1
· D. Rotond a ·
739. Fro m t he give n fi gure, iden l ifv t he type of strPet.
LJ A. Cul-de-sac
B. Arterial Road
C. Collectur Road
0. Crescent
D
tJ
740.
--
-:---=:::
Identify th 0 ty pe of road .
CJ 10EN TIF
TYPE
I
F!GURE2
741. What is the f unction of an Arterial Road?
~ -
742. w:, a: type of street has high velocity and high vol ume cf traffic flow ?
A. Arterial Stricet C. Collecto r Street
B. Minor Street D.
743. What ty \Je of st reet comes from a rn llector'street t o an ind,vidual property and provides
access to an abutting prop erty?
C. M arginal Access Street
A. Cu l de Sat
8. Mi nor StrcPt D.
744. What is t he most effective layout for sub div isio n lots?
A. l ot lines ~re perpendi cular or radiate from street lines
B. Lot lines fo llow co ntour of stre ets
C. Lot lines are o; dlf 'r ii to streets
D. Lot lines are pa r:i llel to streets
7£15. Wh;,t is the ,Jart of the RRO W fo und right after the prope1ty line?
A. Front Ya,·d C. Curb
B. Perimeter D.
c::::1 74 6 What is ti ,e itif al ',lope fm Pl;iy Arr>,.1?

A. 1- 2%
B. 3 7%
l. · 8-1~%
D. Abov e 16%
747. The ideal slope of th e land for econom ic subdivisio n ho · · · • .

system. usi rg 111 re1at1u 11 to drammg
A. 6-8% C. 15%
~ - l:l. 1-2% n.
'/4 8 , Whi~li sluµlc dr, i:,, 1'Jl J 1,tin w ell <l' ll d n"ed $· t u L, e µ:1v<!d
103
.
85 I JPT - REFR ESH["" ~
u A. 1%
B. 2%
C. 3%
D. 4%
749. Y0 t1 arc ;J',kr: d to erect a Two Sto re y Residen t ial bu ilding so mewhere in Sa m paloc. The
u 750 .
lot area is J SClsqm with a 10 m w ide Frontdge. If the lot is sl oping at 2% from the rear port io n t o
t he front, wh2t is t he di fference in elevatio n be tween the rear po rtion and the front portio n?
In Subdivisi o n Plan ni ng, w hat sho uld yo u avoid?
J A. Inte rse ctio n

B. Dea d End
C. Blind Spot
D.
t1 7S1.
val ue?
W hat is a pi ece of land th at is unsig h tly, d il c1 pidated and wh ich deprer.:iat es t he land
A. Ugly C. So re Eyes
tJ 752 .
B. Blighted D.
In plann ing, bedroom are usu all y orie nted in what direct io n?
t:l A.
B.
North
East
C. Sout h
D. \/'/est
753. Wh ci t is a Topo graphic Map?
754. Fro m t he Figure, dete rm ine t he best locatio n fo r il rest aura nt/vacation house.
tj
t:l
755 . · Wh at is the be st height of a Firewall for a Condominiu m Project?
c;, A. 2.70m
B. 1.80m
C. 3.20m
D. 2.40m
756. Wha t is considered most lega l?
t::J A.
B.
C.
Col um n Fooling projecting 500mm from the Property Lin e to Highway
Zocalo Wa ll
Colu rr,n Foot ing projecti ng 250 mm t o the Adjacent Propert y Line
D. Firewall on 3 Side s
757. Whic h part of M etro Man il a is allowed t o have Ar cades?
t:Ji A. Quiapo
B. Recto
C. Espana
D M
. orayta
758. Who determines if a pla ce ~hall be arcaded or not ?

A. Lo cal Pl an ning Authori t y c. Barangay
B. Mayor D D
. PW H
iC-1 759.
A.
Wh at would yo u recom me nd to use us a tra ffi c separator belo A d ,
BollanJ . w rc a es -
C. Pl anting St rips
r;1 B. r ountil in
D. Fence
104
I 86 \ JPT -:- RE FRESH ER
Given a Plan of a Subdivision .

---,
··· •, ..._.
.. ••.·.,·• ·,. - .. '•
.. .•... ~.
.......
,
'
'•• "'
" ... . .......
• A ... . •o~-,. •• ...,
,. . . 4 ._: ·•
".' ',.".J',•
. "' ,.,"~• .,.•· .. • ..~· ,,. '1\--,..,; ••_ '
U l
.. ••
.
'\.'<I ,t
· ·, ,
'•'• . "'·
. · • · • } •• { • · - .
......_
~., i•,.~•. •~~; ,, • •
• I /· ~
..
' OJ I • '•o, 1
' • :• • : ·•• .
~
u .- .. f · , ..,. • .,.". . . , ' ,•."~
•• • UM I J / _ ' .
_a • , M • "·u •• • ' / ./ o ·, •1
•• "
·• 1 "p1:•·
... "
q
" "_.
"•
•
I ',Vw;,;»U
'•. • ,,. " ...
' ,
>;•~,•,.,• ·~
·~
..,._,t• . :.tt· '.... """· "

•
N -~u,
•••• . •~'o" . ' "•" •••./• ' .
'q,. " .,
• ··,:••.
;;r
. .·,. / •
I • M
• • • , / ; , ~ ,·
.,.·.r.. .·~ -" ' .

. . I
I•, 2 t ~
.
I
••
,., , " • . .
• . ...'•-~....
f O , 4
'--~ ..
,,•,l'. _ .•'"• I
" · ,-;_' , ~Y::' , ,

. . ......
' •..;:->
.
•
.
'
•• ,
, i
...,
.
•:' •
. •
••·.,. -.. . ,
q"
,,..'' .
u'$c • • • •...,.
It,, .• I
. .•... ' .·•' .·•.. ·;..._•"'lt-•

.... .- . .
... .•
·,•
,
.:.,
I '
.
•
. ,• • .. . . ~.,., ~~/,'o~
.,al' ,
...._ ·,,•'.. ,; '
.
• J •.
. . ........
0 ••
'
,
.._•~
· -: ..-.,_. _ _
'!f/T~~
'
---
.·
,. , o ,. .
,' ;-.
.... .
......
::. . .-· -··- yW
••• '
- •. . ,-•u:- :
..... " . . • ; .• ••
• '.'·•· • • •• .
,-,; • ..•.#. ' .. ": -
,........., ._,,,, ~ - - •. .,, • . • . .,, ,'.4.
. . .....,0.,0,-:-,...
·····.•t.'.':·....... .....·~ .•,·:. .....
. . ·-
..~_..
,__ ·-Jto'4·o· ...., _ . ' ' .
, '. ~ - ~ >
~ ' ...._ •.,
,..._..__
.·;;.a_ : "• •• • --~ -
.. _
. : .........
760. . How do you descri be the lots near the road?

A. Regular lots near the road are more expensive
B. Irregular lots near the road are more expensive
761. Identify the Cul -de-Sac.

762. Identify the BIGGEST lot.
763. What lot has the LEAST privacy?
764. What lot has the MOST privacy?
765. Which is the most expensive?
A. Block 13 C. Block 7
B. Block 1 D. Block 22
766. Which is the least valuable?

A. Block 12 C. Block 1
B. Block 21
D. Block 17
767. Wh ich is the hardest to sell?

A. Block 21
C. Bl ock 1
B. Block 12
D. Block 17
105. .,
;_
87 \ JPT - REFRESHER
i Carbon Footprint and Embodied Energy
Embodied energy is defined as the commercial energy (fossil fuel s, nuclear, etc) that wa s used in the
work to make any product, bring it to market, and dispose of it.
- A carbon footprint is "th e total set of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions caused by an organ ization, event,
product or person." Greenhouse gases can be emitted through transport, land clearance, and the
production and consumption of food, fuels, manufactured goods, mate~ials, wood, roads, buildings, and
services. For simplicity of reporting, it is often expressed in terms of the amount of carbon dioxide, or its
equivalent of other GHGs, emitted.
1.... • · - - ~ - . . ..
1-11•,1 : 1an11=
MJ/kg
•-=-~•=--a
MJ/m3
Aggregate 0 . 10 150
Straw bale 0 .24 31
Soil-cement 0 .42 819
Stone (local) 0.79 2030
Concrete block 0.94 2350
Concrete (30 Mpa) 1 .3 3180
Concrete precast 2.0 2780
Lumber 2 .5 1380
Brick 2.5 5170
Cellulose insulation 3 .3 112
Gypsum wallboard 6 .1 5890
Particle board 8 .0 4400
Alum inum (recycled) 8.1 21870
Steel (recycled) 8.9 37210
Shingles (asphalt) 9.0 4930
Plywood 10.4 5720
Mineral wool insulation 14.6 139
Glass 15.9 37550
Fiberglass insulation 30.3 970
Steel 32.0 251200
Zinc 51.0 371280
Brass 62.0 519560
PVC 70.0 93620
Copper 70.6 S.'31164
Paint 93.3 117500
Linoleum 116 150930
·Polystyrene Insulation 117 3770
Carpet (synthetic) 148 84900
AJuminum 227 515700
NOTE: Embodied energy values based on several
international sources - local values may vary.
768. Which has the least embodied energy?

A. Steel
B. ~oncrete
C. Plywood
D. PVC
769. Which is a renewable resource?
A. Fossil Fuel
C. Coal
B. Biomass D. Natural Gas
770. The most widely used and recognized rating wstem devised to evaluate the
environmental performance of a building and encourage market transformation towards
sustainable design.
A. LEED
C. ISO Certification
B. BERDE D. QSAS
106
BLDG TECH JPT REVI EW CENTER INC
BUILDING
TECHNOLOGY
Situation: As Project Manager for a 3-Storey Residence, you were told by the
f
owner that he would like a finish on his fence to still show the CHB. What would you
tell your foreman/mason to tidy up?
a. Soleras c. Palitada
b. Kostilyahes d. Kostura
Situation: In a condominium high rise design ....
1. Most windows installed are fixed and minimal openings are provided for safety purposes,
what does this sacrifice?
a. Comfort, in line with proper ventilation c. Cost
b. View d.
2. What special feature does the main entry door of the condominium have as an additional
security feature?
a. No duplicates for the key c.
b. Only one company is allowed to do duplication d.
3. A kind of hinge that is used for a door between the main kitchen and the dining area.
a. Pivot Hinge c. Double Acting Gravity Hinge
b. Drop Leaf Hinge d. Continuous Hinge
4. What type of window gives you protection from rain in the absence of a canopy?
a. Casement c. Awning
b. Sliding d. Fixed
5. What type of window admits 95% of air?
a. Casement c. Awning
b. Sliding d. Louvers with 150mm width blades
6. To block excessive sunlight, what "new material" is used for windows?
a. Louvers c. Solar Tint
b. Painted Tint d. Blinds
7. Which window is the easiest to clean?
a. Awning c. Louvers
b. Sliding d. Casement
Situation: Match the following
Studs
1.
a. Wall Framing c. Slip Form .
b. Floor Framing d. Ceiling Framing
2. Furring
a. Wall Framing c. Slip Form
3. Joists I I
_a. Wall Framing c. Slip Form
4. Silo
a. Wa ll Framing c. Slip Form
Page 1 I 78
107
0 BLDG 1ECH
JPT REVI EW CENTER INC
o Situation: Other topics you should know
Q 1. W hich will you apply last before Painting ?

a. Plaster c. Ne utralizer
b . Putty d . Paint
0 2. You need to buy 4 gallons of Paint for your wa ll. However, upon reaching the hardwa re ,
it is only available in 1 pint cans. How m any ca ns will you buy?
a. 16 b. 8 c. 32 d. 1
0 3. A pail of paint has how many gallons?

a. 2 b. 4 c. 8 d. 16
4. Wh ich paint is used for Wood?
0 a. B600 QDE .
b. B7501 Perrnacoat
c. 8 7410 Healthy Home
d. Virtuoso Si lk Touch
5. Which is a 100% acrylic w ater-based paint that is low od or, low V OC , lead free and has
0 outstanding color retention. It dries to a luxurious silk fin ish that is distinct ively smooth to
touch. W ith Teflon surface protector, oil and dirt cannot easily stick maki ng it e asy to
wipe off common everyd ay stains.
[] a. Xyladecor
b. Virtuoso
c. DECORe
d . Matte Shield
6. Which is a 100% acrylic latex paint w ith excellent hiding , durability and dirt p ick-up
[] resistance that is principally used for interior and exterior such as concrete, stucco,
bricks plaster, hollow blocks , drywall surfaces and properly primed wood.
a a . Acrytex
b. Permacoat ,
c. Xyladecor
d. Permatex
7. Which is a water-based, full-bodied paint that dries to a fine rubbery coating, creating a
beautiful textured fin ish on interior walls and ceilings bringing elegance to the home -~
0 interior. It adheres easily on wood, masonry and drywall surfaces. It a lso conceals
hairline cracks and minor surface imperfections, and dries to a fine rubbery coating that
does not become brittle, leaving virtually no room for cracking , chipping or peeling off.
CJ a. Acrytex
b. Permacoat
c. Xyladecor
d. Permatex .
?- (·'
8. After installation, how soon can you paint a drywall?
tl a. After application of neutralizer
b. After application of skim coat
c. immediately
d. 8 hours ,ij
9. W hich paint is noted fo r its excellent adhesion and long--term durability that can be used ' \'/ii
tJ as topcoat for Masonry, Wood and Metal surfaces?
a. B600 OD E . c. B7410 Healthy Home
·-;r
b. 87501 Permacoat d. Flat #1701 Acrytex
tJ
"._.O:'
__- ·
10. What type of Paint is used for Metal?

a. B600 ODE c. B7 410 Healthy Home .'.' ?'.
"l
or .
}!;~
.,~l'..':4: . i
t, b. 87501 Perrnacoat
11. Acrytex is a product of?
a. Asian Coatings Philippines Inc.
d. Flat #1701 A crytex
c. Pacific Paints (Boysen) Philippines Inc.

/Iit:tij, :- ._.,,_
tj b. Davies Paints Philippines Inc.

12. Virtuoso is a prorluct of?
d . Boysen Philippines Inc.
a. Asi~n Coatings P~_il ippines Inc. c. Pacific Paint (Boysen) Philippines Inc.
tj b. ~av1:s Paints Ph1l1ppmes Inc.

13. Which 1s a solvent based, d_
d. Boysen Philippines Inc.
e ep penetr_atin_g type of stain that combines decorative, water
repeflen! and wood pres~rvI~1g properties in one and dries to a silk matte finish. It
ti empha sizes the grain, bringing out the natural beauty in any kind of wood .
a. Healthy Home
b. Virtuoso
c. DECORe
d. Xyladecor
tJ 14. Wh at type of raint is used for Con crete?

a. Latex
b. Enam el
c. Lacqu er
d. Acrylic
C]
fl::: c'. ,, 2 I 78
t:l
1o·s
Cl
BLDG TECH JPT REVIEW CENTER INC
15. What Paint Finish is NOT used for Ceiling?

a. Textured Finish c. Ducco Finish
b. Roller Finish d.
16. It is a high qua lity, two-component paint that has excellent corrosion resistance and
- sealing properties. It is highly alkali-resistant so there is no need for neutralization of new
concrete prior to application. It can be applied and normally used on metal, GI, wood and
masonry.
a. Permacoat c. Wallguard
b. Epoxy Enamel Paint D. Permatex .
17. Why do we put Epoxy Primer before painting with Epoxy Pamt?
a. To neutralize lime activity in new masonry surface c.
b . To remove scratches/imperfections on the surface d.
18. Fluorocarbon
19. Boysen is a manufacturer of
a. Brush c. Roofing
b. Paint d. Cladding
20 . Which does NOT belong?
a. Nippon c. Davies
b. Acrytex d. Boysen
21. Which is NOT a product of Boysen? Several choices given
22. A manufacturer of Paints
a. Crown c. Davies
b. Schlage d. Emerald
23. Which of the following does NOT belong?
a. Boysen c. Rain or Shine
M
b. Philflex d. Davis
24. Which is NOT a Paint Brand?
a. Nippon c. Davies·
. b. Acrycast d. Boysen
25. Which manufactures Megacryl?
a. Pacific Paint Philippines Inc c. Nippon Paint Philippines
b. Davies Paints Philippines Inc d. Rain or Shine
26. What is the main cause of Paint Coagulation?
27. What is applied to Wooden Doors after achieving the desired color (staining), prior to
application of lacquer?
28. What is the term used for the initial coat on Structural Steel from the factory prior to its
shipment? ·
a. Inhibiting Primer c. Shop Coat
b. Top Coat d. Red Paint
29. Which is the best primer for metal surfaces?
a. Red Lead c. Red Oxide
b. Epoxy Primer d. Red Paint
30. Red Lead/Red Oxide (Difference)
31. Type of paint used for aluminum
32. Water Based Paint - define
33. A number of steel bars had been left in the rain and had rusted. What would you do
with them?
a. Brush them with steel brush and use them since a little rust is good for adhesion to
concrete
b. Pour oil on them to remove the rust
C.
34. It is used to remove rust in rebars
a. Oil c. Heat
b. Steel Brush d.
e "' g e 3 I 78
10'1 ·
,
BLDG TEC H JPT RE VIEW CE NTE R INC
f
35 . A lligatorin g - The formation of cracks on the surface of pa int layers Jl'i~11HWJ1t

36 Peeling - a very common pa int problem caused either by moisture
or poor adhesion. It is characterized by the paint peeling and 1•,:
separati ng from an ea rlier paint layer (intercoat peeling) or from the . ' ' 1;, ",, ,:f'.. "/'·.-~
i ti•,. , ... \"
:·
.'.,;ff!'_ :j1 '( ·, /· ! ! ··:,,·. Ll! 'l ,
substrate leaving some paint behind . Sometimes portion s of earlier (.\{, .k. ..'l 11II•'•.• l I
pai nt layers are visible under the curling , peel ing paint layer. -,..~:w,~~? · -,:: " .1l "-'-,;, ._
37 . Bliste ri ng and . Bubbl ing - Bl istering occurs when the upper layer of
"~ ' -" )i t'. ·, ,. '.-: . J'~.),\!
paint loses adhesion and separates from older layers . Typically , this
1
·:t ' ' · 1
happens after the paint has dried completely, and there are no good
guidelines for determining if or when it will occur. The problem can
.
-
~ ~ •.:~~- ;
,)!. ,( ,! 't,~ \, Ill'#'
crop up within a day, or not until a year later.

The most common cause of blistering is applying paint to a
damp or wet suriace . Allow the substrate to dry complete ly before
- prim ing and painting . If there is a continual moisture problem (in a
leaky basement, for examp le) , it must be corrected before painting .
It's also important to let the paint dry before exposing it to
wet cond itions . The weather channel is your friend! Avoid painting
within fou r hours of a rainstorm; high humidity often causes blisters
(so metimes water-filled ) to form . If the surface dries out quickly, sometimes these will
disa ppear If a bubble remains after the surface dries, however, you 'll need to scrape it
off and repaint
In other cases , blistering is caused by applying paint to a dirty or incompatibly
fi nished surface . As the paint dries, it shrinks slightly, pulling up poorly adhered sections
of old paint. It's important to thoroughly clean walls (both interior and exterior) before
pa inting. Never app ly oil-based paint over a latex base. It is possible to use latex paint
over oil based primers and paints, but it's better to stick with one type of formula . ff your
sid ing has been treated with linseed oil in the past, prime and paint with oil-based
products
Bubbles form as the _result of a chemical reaction . This problem is far more
common when paint is applied to a hot surface. Essentially, the top layer of paint dries,
forming a barrier that prevents the solvents from escaping easily. At the same time , the
hot surface causes the solvents to vaporize . These expand ing gases put enough
pressu re o_n the paint to force it _away fro~ the substrate , creating a1,_,;,;:J:~. ;?'_.:·*. ?i'!-al
·bubble . Thrs occurs early on , during the rnrt,al drying phase , . ' ,-?· .:" ,, •.:~,:~--~
38. Wrinkling - occurs under three conditions - applying a coat of paint~,,-~).:':r . 't~- ;_ "'i'}j
when the_outside temperature is too low, when paint is applied _too .f ·~ A . ,_., . ... 1~ :+<"
·t.
heavily on a hot surface or 1n the hot sun , or when not enough time,}, :_,c\j:: ::.:,t:f;.t:t•;.:.,j
has been_ allowed for the undercoats to dry properly. In eitherf, ·,~-ti•'~:;,:"',,::~,. ( ·
condition , the only solution to the problem is to sand the wrinkled~t:.,5~?:i:ri~~,tl,ftiid
fi nish, re-prime the area, and repaint. Wrinkl_ing can be avoided by brushing all coats out
thoroughly and painting in temperatures above 55 degrees and
below ·90 degrees Fa hrenheit
39 . Efflorescence - a pa int defect that is identifiable by crusty wh ite salt
deposits that bubble _through the paint film from a masonry
structure. Salts in _the brick or concrete become dissolved with water
and then leach to the surface as the water evaporates .
40. Chalking - The formation of chalk (fine , white powder) on the
surface of a painted surface is primarily due to weathering, which can give the
appearance of color fading . While some degree of cha lking is
normal and can be a desirable way for paint to wear, excessive
paint _film _erosion may result in unsightly heavy chalk . Excessive
chalking_ 1s cau sed by the disintegration of the paint fi lm during
weathering Some common causes of heavy chalking include
applrcat,on to an un sealed surface, overspread ing the paint, or poor
quality parnt
4 I 78
110
.1 I ,i ,) \; I. (I l
J,'1.l ·. ,t \\ '(•\J'~ K IU(,
0 41 I h is f-'a 111t d cfEct 1s c 11a ral,le 11zed by !he mIriralI0 11 o f I~1c ,:olo r ir r .rn;:, p1F. . •,1 I I" co at II1iu
t1 t he f resh ly a pp lierl top co at Tl ,i s u s uJ ll y ncrn rs w h e11 a l19/i i cclor rs ripplrcd o ver a d arf<
. co lo , , p,lliicu la rly rl~ds c1 11d I1 1dI00 I,s .
a. B,md, ng c I-,.1d m 9
b. B lecrlm ci d . Flooding
4 :2 A ca bine t in a k1t<.her1 was fJbncr1 tPd us in 0 ma rine plywo oj V\'1r1t p :111 11 s hcJtJ/d you 1I·.; e
in side the cab met'l
tJ -l 3
a I::i o lyu1etlia 11e
b Epo xy l:: 11 a111el
H ow is concrete I1eutral 1;;:e r n 1Ixcd
c _ Hi gh C~ ICls.3 Var nIs,
cl. Aqua Epo xv
1
tJ 44
a Dilute at ·1 I
b D il ute at 1 16
c IJ1lu tA 1 _·J 0
d Dilute I c
W h at rn a te11a l 1s u::,eci to prepa re maso I1ry c,1 Jrfcl cl--:S fur fX'I. 1t11 ,g'"l
[:J a _ Polyur·e th a n e
b. Con c rete Neuira l1ze1·
c Gypsum f-)tr lt
cJ Plaste r
45 W h at m e1te r1 a l is a pp li ed before th e "r 11 ;1s h1n ~( pa int?
tJ 46 .
a N e utrcilizer
b c:;I az in o Putt v
Wha t t hin ner Is 11sed toi Al kyd Palll P
c . (Jypsum P 11' ly
d
t1 a Water
b . Paint l 1711rnP. r
<J
4 7 \/Vl11 ch 1s tl,e bes t aµpl 1cat 1011 fur Polyur c t11 a11e'?
c . I FIcq1 IL, 1· rlrn ,·1c: I
b a . ln te ri o ,· Corni ce
Ii E xte ri or Fu rrntu,
c . lnte 11or ()Jt1cr · I '' " ,' ur r::
rl A ll of the db '.:lvc
48 . W h ich pc1 111t s hould NOT be us,'!d 111 a fully e nclo scirJ, ar tif1c1ally '/f::I1I ,,E:tecJ ar e a ':'
a Aut omotive Lc1cq 11 e , c Epoxv Paint
b Qu ick D,y E11 amel d . Textu red Lat -.,;,
g
49 . An Owne r had hi s h') use pai nted He a ske d tl,e pa inter to use th e e x" es s pa int fo r the
cabin ets However. whe n the pa i(lter ap plied th e p a int, it 00esn' td ry properly and ,t
co cigulates 'J'./hat h app ened to the paint? What ca uses ,t tcJ coaJ ul ate 'J
50 vVh at material 1s applie d to wo od to en hance its gra,n a ppecnrn ce?
51 P a int (emu ls ion/a l (yd/solven t)
I 52 . When a surface ,s uneven and ca nnot be tota lly fla tt e ne d, wha t Is the best pa int to u se to
h de tile une ven swfi:i ce? ·
t_:j a
b
Semi -g loss
Eggshe ll
c . Flat P c1i1 1t
d . Gl ossy
1
53. Nhat does the s upplier of Tex tured Pa int do n 't tell ab o11t the ir p roduct th a t rhe A rch ite ct
d should k11 ow?

a . Lim it ed co lo r:·; dVailable
b P ro re to catch d1 1st c . O nly ,1 b1·ush co I1 be used for ap p li c a t10 11
e:, d.
54 Why shoLld ra d s NO T be le ft b e side ca n of p;:i in ts at cl 1ob s1te espec ia lly du rin g nigh t
t1rr,e whe n 1t 1s most likely to be unatte1 1ded ?
a _ It w ill 1ncre u ':,e nu m rd •ty c. It m igh t. iy nite a fi re
11 It vd l abc;orb m o isture and ;:iffec t the po in t d . R ags w .li be sto le n whe n unatter:,ded
NOTE- · In r:ve1ry :c: sE
0
of SiYJntaneov s c o rnb us l101° of dry ing o ils that I huv1° f,i1 111d , the cause has be e n a
:--_j buncn of 01 :.Ud~ -,' rJr;s It sr:c •11 s tha t, as II ,e 0 11 uxI0 Izes tt 1,;' I .-19s eel as a 11 I11'.;ula tor a ll o w ing the
JX1d1/ 1ny 01110 becu 1,_. hot eno ugh to r·.iuse th e clo th to sI I10Ke .11,rl F·v e ntual l,· Ig n ItP. T he bi gg er tl1e
:Jile ·1 0 g1ec,lr-'!1 l11e viss 1ble h:: Jt dn d th e grec1 ter the n::,k f~00 11 , t~mpcra t11rP. Is a lso a tactm Th(,
.vz,1_ :nr.,1 : is ·· e c,u1c :u;r 'l 1e r3q s ca,, rca,: h IgnIt I01, IP.1roµe ra rur,
SS It 1s tn e most cc,mrnon r.;c, Jse of p a int d 1:o fects
56 Tr) avo id c r,ali -1 ng or a pa in t, wl1c:Jt sh ou ld b(j cJon ("'?
Buy il 11ev1 1r>lk:r
r1a Ne"N peiI n 1
c Do , Iol p ;·:i nt
d.
'1 1'
11e n hum id
S7 Why is ocr111c •.:i te x c:: ons1,/, -1 rP<J tho rnns t flex 1b 1,-, pa int
D r~a n /Je 1111Y1::o w :lh ;:111 y k ind of lh 11 1ncr
::_j b Uc.Cd In V;'l l Od, CO/lC i ( •l r!, u ' 1J
c. /1dt:11or c=1n rJ r,, 'c::1 ''JI odr)1 IP.c-~,
f,tc r~I
::l ,., 'O
::1 111
ii.I l, • 1( I I I I 1, t \ I l IA Ll N I L H 11\, L
4 I 1 his l-1a1nt r1 etec t I~ r ha1acl e riLerl by !he rn Ig rvl Ion of lh t=> co lo r tro ni a prev io us co at into
the fresh ly app l1e\l lop coal Th is us uall y occ urs w hen a light r. olor Is app lied o ve r a dark
r::0l01 , part ic ularly I ed s C:ll1 CI rnarc ons .
a Band lllg c I- ad1 11g
b Blee d111~ d . Flood ing
42 A cabmel 111 ;:i k1tc: he11 wa::i fnbricated using marin e pl ywciod Wh,;1 t p;J I11 t sho uld you use
in s ide the cabin et~'
u Pulyuretl Idt 18 C , High Gloss V cl l ll/ S ,l
b Epo xy E11..rn re l d. /\qua Epoxy

How is con crete neu trali ze r 1111 xed
a Dilute ,ll 1 1 c Di lute -1-'I 0
b Drlu te at 1 16 d . D1 l11te I 8
'14 ~\/ ha t 1nate1 1al I'S u::,ed to prepaI e 111 aso11 ry s1 1rfacP.s for pc11 r1t 11 1~J?
a _ Polyuretha ne c. Gy psum Putty
b . Con crete Neutrali zer d . Pl aste r
4::i What ma1e~1a l Is ;ipp llecJ befo re t11 e "f1n 1shin~J" pa int ?
a _ Ne11trali2er c. Gypsum Pu tty
b. c; lazing Putty d_
4L'i W hal th inn er is tist~d tor A lkyd Pa int ?
a \/\fater c LcJcque: r T/7 111111- '
b . Pai;1t Th1nn e1 cJ _ -
47, Wh ich is the b~st aµp l1cat1on fu1 Polyur ell rane?
a _ lnterio1· Corni ce c In te ri or Otf1cl: Fur nI ture
b f::xter1or Fum11ur e rl _ A ll of th e above
4 3. Which pa int should NOT be used 111 a fully enclose d, artifrcral ly ve ritilated are a?
a Auto motive Lacquer c. Epox y Paint
b Qu ick Dry En ci rn el d _Textured L3!E:x
49 , A n Owner hau his /l ouse pamted He as ked the pa inter to use th e exces s pa int for th e
cabrn ets _ Howeve r, w hen the painter app l:ed th e paint. It does n't d ry prope rly an d it
coagu !ates Wh;:ic happe ned to th e paint? W hat causes it lo co agula te '?
50 Wha t mat0 rr8 I Is applie d to wo od to enhance_its gra in appe.J ran ce ?
5 1 Pa in t (emul sion/a lkyd/sol ve nt)
52 Wh en o surface is L,neven an d ca nnot be to tall y fl atte ned , w t1 at rs the best pa int to use to
hrde th e uneven surface? -
a Semi-g loss c Flat Paint
b Eggshe ll d c; Jossy
5::, _ W hat does the sup pl ie r of Tex tured Pa int don't te ll about th e ir prod uct tha t the Arc hitect
sho uld know?
a _Limited colors avai lab le c. O nly a brush ca I1 be used for app l1 cat 1o n
b _ Prone to c,a tch dust d_
'5 4 W hy sho uld ra gs NO r· be le ft beside ca n of pain ts at a 1olJs 1te es pecia lly d u ring night
lIm 8 wh 1=; n it Is most likely to be un atte nd ed ?
a It will increase hum id ity c. It mi ght iynite a fire
b It w ill ahso rh mnisture and atfo c t the parnt cl Rags wrll be stole n wh en unattende d
NOTE· 1n F,11~-,y ,;,; •~ ri f , po11taI 1•!U1,J s <,oinbusl1on of d1 y1 119 0IIs t11at I lii:l v(, fo1 1nd the cause has been a
bun ch of 011soAi' f,rl mg~ It seE:: ms llia t, as ltie 01/ o:<1d1zes, the rags ~i-; t .:is e111 In•;ulator allow111g th e
o, 101z1n'J oil w l_ccume hot e, Iougl1 10 c.:it,,;;e Ille clo th 10 smoke ,met ~vt:: nlually Ig nI te The bigger the
i,dr:: ll1e ')• eaIe1 the r,o:,s1ble heat unrf lt1P gr r ➔ a t e r the •rsk Roo11 1le1n~'ie1ature Is al,;;o a factor Th e
Wi.ri 11<;1Ii ,, ti r_ qt:Is-·er the r.:igs con re ac h 1g111l 10n len I1eI ,1iI1 1t•
I
:5 It ,s rl 1e most comrnor. r.aI1sP. of pa11 1l cJe fec ts
56 , Tu <-1 v1J,cJ c. hJ lk,ng of ,, ra int what shou lii be dc111 e ?
a Buy u nc;w ro ller c Do II0 t µ;_i 111 t \ d l t· n I1u1 11 1cJ
h /,J P, N f') ,Wl' c,l,
s7 VVhy Is : _i cryI Ic la1 f~X ,-;onsrd1.;1e d th lj must flex 1L>ln p;-i Ir,r
a _ C cJ 11 u-:i n1i.. e J wrl l , c.11 Iy k11 1d :J f t/ 11111 10,
u u~~d 111wuoJ 1,,U /)l, l f,; (t;, cJi lU r,te;d
c . ln!l; t ror ,1J1 d c: xlc.•11r)1 odo rle•:-,
' L >
111
Acrylic latex paints tend to be the most durable and flexible. Most often used for
exterior painting, they are suitable for a number of different applications, including house
painting , decorative and faux painting and even in the fine arts . Acrylic is the most expensive
binder used in latex paints because it is particularly flexible and durable. This makes it
especially suitable for painting exterior surfaces such as wood, vinyl and metal. Most paints
are a blend of vinyl and acrylic. Because exteriors are subjected to more expansion and
contraction due to changes in temperature and humidity, flexibility is an important criterion.
Look for paint labeled "100% acrylic" for exterior use. It can also be used for the interiors.
Sometimes called acrylic enamel, this paint is well suited for interior woodwork and trim,
kitchens, bathrooms and other areas that need to withstand t1urnidity and frequent cleaning.
Enamel typically refers to satin, semigloss and high gloss finishes.
58. Which paint would you recommend for exterior concrete walls without prior paint?
l a. Latex
b. Enamel
59. What happens when Enamel is applied to .metals.
I a. Takes a long time for drying
b. It will not bond
c. It will adhere
d. Blistering
60 . Best Primer for Enamel paint.
a. Water Based c. Lacquer Based
b. Oil Based d. Turpentine
61. . Best Thinner for Enamel paint.
i a. Water Based
b. Oil Based
c. Lacquer Based
d. Turpentine
62. What paint is NOT commonly used for Spray Painting?
J a. Latex
b. QDE
c. Acrylic
d. Lacquer
63. What paint is NOT commonly used for $pray Painting?
2 a. Varnish
b. Enamel
c. Acrylic
d.
64. What will you use to paint a Steel Gate of a perimeter fence?
I a. Quick Dry Enamel
b. Latex
c. Duca
d. Acrylic
65. What kind of paint is Duca?
Ii a. Polyurethane
b. Automotive
c. Stain
d.
66. Area to avoid flat paint
j a. Rough surface
b. Crowded and Busy Kitchen
c. Wood
d. Ceiling
67. Why is glossy paint not used as a primer?
68. Best finish for high quality narra door
a. Varn ish c. Lacquer
b. Epoxy paint d.
:J 69. What paint will you use for a Doctor's Office?
a. Enamel c. Epoxy
b. Flat d.
:JI 70. A visco~s substan_ ce extracted from plants, particularly coniferous trees, used in the
_ production of varnishes, adhesives, plastic, incense and perfume.
p a. Sap
b. Latex
c. Mucilage
d. Resin
71. What is Cellulose Nitrate Lacquer and where is it used?
;J 72 . You want to protect your wooden deck but at the same time you don't want to hide the
beauty of the wood. What should you do? · .
a. Paint it brown c. Use bleach to remove mildew and mold
;1 b. Staining d. Use sand paper and seal cracks

73. Where do yo11 use xy!adecor? Wood stain that at the same time prevents fungi, mold
and insect atta cks. ft 1s also a water repellent
a. Exterior and Interior wood surfaces c. Metal Surface
b. Concrete d. Plastic
r ,i i;, e: 6 .I 78
11f
1
JPT RE VIEW CE NTER INC

BL DG f Elh
74 . Xyladec or is manufac tured by ?

a. Dutch Boy c . Rain or Shin e
b Boys en d . Davies Paints
7 5 This Paint co mpany started its· operatio n in 1953 as a repacke r of paint and thin ne rs
th e
under th e trade name of Columbu s . In 1958 , th ey started pain t producti on with
, they obtain ed a
introd uction ol an econom y grade paint called NATION . Fina ll y, in 1960
ct ure
license from Wa lter N. Boysen Compan y of Oakland , Californi a , USA to manufa
Boysen Paints in the Philippin es . Today , it is one of the world 's largest paint
manufacturer. What is its "current" Corpora te Name?
a Nation Paint Manufac turing , Inc. c. Pacific Paint (Boysen ) Phil ipp ines , Inc
b. Boysen Ph ilippines , Inc. d . Pacific Paint & Oil Manufac turing , Inc.
l 76 . Which is best for waterpro ofing walls and floors?

a. Xyladec o r c. Latex
b Elastom eric Pa int d. Red Oxide
77 Caulking - To make watertig ht or airtight by filling or sealing
ld chemica l
78. You noticed a red stain caused by Fungi on a Painted Wall. Which househo
will you use to remove it?
a a. Alcohol
b. Kerosen e
c. Bleach
d. Vinegar
79. Paint Estimating : How many square meters can be painted by two persons in a regular 1
i] day work if they work continuously? How much paint in gallons will they use?
ceiling height of 2.40m , two windows of 1m x
80 . Given a room dimension of 5m x 5m with a
1 20m and a door 2.0m x 1m , single coating . How many Gallons of paint will you buy if,
[l 25sqm = 4 liters?
a.4gal c. 3gal
b. 2 gal d. 5 gal
81 . What Area DOES NOT require waterproofing?
a. Balcony over Lana i c. 2 nd Floor Toilet
b. Ground Floor Toilet d. Roof Deck
[] 82 . It is best for Waterproofing Balconies,
a. 1/8" thk Membrance
Roof Decks
c.
& Basement
b. 3/16" thk Membrance d.

[j 83 . More appropriate waterproofing terminolo in Roofdecks
gy
c. Effluent
a. Leakage
b. Seepage d. Distillation
[J
~-=· .~' . . ·,.
CJ ~ ·1c,
.~;-,_. ; :,;';_~:-:~
'
I • ' \ I,. . ., • '\'
~ ';,••'t' ~~it • 4
cj-
• I· t_.
.
r.,'
~
\1 . ~~t ·/f~).;.~~~
• p\ -. ~, ."'_-- ~ "l~
, ,i. . . :{ ""
' ~""-'
l· ,-.I)
i.;."1 ~
l;J • ,.
~
.-~
:~"'1,',a8
..
)
,,
:>(
~
.
··.. 't -W:.,~ t'i •
1~- ~
B."'. .
' ....
"' I •
, I
.j
a.I 84 Alf Flat Roof assemblies consist of the same basi c elements assembled in
topped with a waterpro ofing
a logical
membra ne as
order a deck, covered wrth 1nsu lat1on and
Cl shown 1n Figu re A above . However, an advancement

and designers an opti on to, actually
.. d d " .
in tech nology has given
rearrang e th e sequ ence that prod uce d an
.
builders
ups1 e own approac 1 w11 ere1n the insu lation is now pla ced on to P o f th e waterproof
p·
1
7 I rn
111
membrane thereby improving the membrane's effectiveness and insulation efficiency as

ahown in figure B above. What is this called?
a. Upsidedow n Waterproofing c. Inverted Roofing
b . P aved Membrane Roofing d. Protected Membrane Roofing
85 . In Waterproofing a Balcony, up to where is the extent of the waterproofing installation ?
a. Along the whole area of the floor of the ba lcony
b. Along the Perimeter of the balcony
c. Along the whole floor area of the balcony up to the adjacent wall connected
d. along the whole perimeter ~all and whole floor of the balcony
86. It is a Material used to Waterproo f G.I. Gutters
a. Rivets c. Contact Cement
l b . Vulcaseal d.
87. Waterproofing can be rend ered ineffective or damaged by whai factor?
a . Acids and alkali transmitted by direct contact to waterproofing
I b. Moisture
C.
88 . What material is best used in waterproofing the Fire Wall of a Building?
fj 89. Concrete treatment wherein a material, usually a membrane or applied compound , is
applied to make .a surface impervious to water
90. What is the main reason why waterproofing and paint sometimes do not adhere to the
D surface?
91. What area is NOT recommended to use Capillary Membrane Waterproofing?
a. Cistern c. Escalator and Elevator Pit
ll b. 2 nd Floor Balcony
92 . Disadvantages of cernentitious water proofing
d. Storage Tank
The chief disadvantage is that cementitious products just doesn't stretch to any
degree worth mentioning. They will stand up fine to a head of water, but will tolerate
almost no crack or joint movement.
93 . What is the advantage of Integral Waterproofing? It works within the matrix of the
CJ concrete itself giving it a waterproof quality and thus it is faster, cheaper and more
reliable.
94. Common waterproofing for firewalls
a. Elastomeric Paint c. Sahara
I · b. Boysen ® Ai.::qua Epoxy d.
95. Paint used foi swimming pools
CJ a. Elastomeric Paint
b. Boysen ® Acqua Epoxy
c. Plexibond
d.
96. Paint used for Exterior and Interior Floors
~ · a. Red Oxide c. Quick Dry Enamel
b. Boysen ® Acqua Epoxy d. Latex
97 . Common waterproofing for roofdeck
0 I
a. Elastomeric
b. Sahara ·
c. 3.0kg Polybond
d. 4.5mm Polybond
98. Type of waterproofing intended for roofdeck.
t? a. Integral
b. Membrane.
99. Where should the waterproofin g be installed?
c. Cementitious
d.
.
a. In between the slab and ·topping c. Under the Slab

b. Above the FFL d Above tli fl
I - 1 oo w h· h h . . e oar topp1ng
·
. 1c as a minimum of 5 years warranty·
a. Roofdeck Waterproofing c. Floor Laminate
b. T & B Wate_rrroofing d. Glass Window
10 1. _Waterproof ing on roofdeck fa ils and there is seepage . What is NOT the reason it
failed?
a. Corners were not properly sealed c. Melts in the ra in
b. It was not properly protected by Flashing d. ·
~ b c 8 I 78
0
1
r
d., 114
BLDG TECH
JPT REVIEW CENT ER INC
102. A treatment of Concrete or Mortar to retard the passage or absorption of water or

water vapor , either by applying a suitable coating to exposed surfaces or by us ing a
suitable admixture
a. Waterproofing c.
b . Damp proofing d.
l "1 03 . As per ASTM definition , what is the main difference between waterproofing and damp
proofing?
a. Direction of water c. Costing
I b. Pressure d. Thickness of material applied
m I
I . .
A - B
I
•Ii (' · I)
104 . What type of waterproofing is shown in Figure A?
E
•
.a Rubber c. Bentonite
b. Membrane d. Cementitious
105 What type of waterproofing is shown in Figure B?
a Cementitious c. Bentonite
b. Membrane d. Liquid
C
106. What type of waterproofing is shown in Figure C?
a Membrane c. Liquid
b. Integral d. Capillary
107 . What is the use of Figure D?
a. Threshold for Door Entry d. used in floors to prevent moisture
b. Used in Construction Joint seepage from ground
c. Prevent leak in Window Sill
"- 108. What type of waterproofing is shown in Figure E?

a. Membrane
b. Liquid
c. Cementitious
d. Bentonite
--
--
-
illi ~ .. ~1'; _• , _
109 . What type of waterproofing is shown above ?
a. Membrane c. Cernentit1ous
.....
b. Liquid d. Ben ton ite
9 I I'd
; 115
110. What type of w aterproofing is Aquashield Plus?

111 . Manufacturer of the elastomeric waterproofing paint Aqua Guard
a. Universal Paint & Coatings (H-Chem) c. Davies Pai nts Ph ilippines Inc
b. Pacific Paint (Boysen) Philippines Inc d. Asian Coatings Philippines Inc
112. How many days should you let the concrete cu re before you introduce waterproofing?
a. 3 days c . 14 days
b. 7 days d. 28 days
113. ·1.2 meters
a. Batter Board c. Scaffolding
b. Shoring d. Bench Mark .
114. Hori zontal Boards nailed to corner posts located just outside the corners of a
proposed building to assist in the accurate layout of foundation and excavation lines.
a. Grade Line Board c. Stake Boa rd
b. Batter Board . d. Plumb Board
115. Before Setting up Batter Boa'rds and Staking , what activity is to be done first?
a. Obtain supply of Water and Electricity
b. Verify monuments are in the ·correct position
c. Build quarters for workers and storage for materials
d . Erect fence to cover the area
116. · What is the activity that the surveyor performs after he verifies the points from the lot
description and places the monuments in the proper locations? ·
a. Relocation c. Verification
b. Monumenting d. Surveying
117 . What is urelocation of points"?
a. Verifying and location of monuments c. Setting up stakes and batter boards
b. Alignment of grid d.
118. What is to be done before Excavation on site?
a. Verify correct lot and grid lines c.
d.
l b.
119. What is the point that Surveyors mark as an elevation reference in order to ensure
that a leveling rod can be repositioned accurately iri the same place in the future?
a. Leveling Point c. Bench Mark
i b. Marking Point d. Survey Mark
120. What will happen if Excavation is not correctly followed?
a. Increase in # of bars c. No effect
i b. Increase in volume of
121 . At every how many millimeters
concrete
should a
d.
"fill" be compacted?
122. This relatively small machine is very useful for residential soil compaction.
i a. Vibratory Roller
b. Tampering Machine
c. Single-Smooth Drum Roller
d. Single-Padfoot Drum Roller
123. Prior to excavation , what procedure should be undertaken?
i 124. What is the distance from the excavation to the batter board?
125. What shou ld you do if your lot is (-)15.00m from street line level?
i a. Cantilever
b. Caisson
c. Sheet Pile
d. Retaining Wall
126. If excavation is beyond 3 meters with an adjacent structure, what should you use?
i a. Bored Pile
b. Sheet Pile
c. Wooden Pile
d. Plyboard
127. A Hydrologic Soil Test should be made
i ·a . Before Excavation
b. After Excavation
c. During Excavation
d. Never mind
128. From which part of the site will you get a sample for the soil test?
i a. Where the Column shall be located
b. Where there is a sig n of water penetration/ seepage
c. Where the soil is soft
i d.
129 . Minimum number of bore for a soil test
P0 se 10 I 78
I 11,
I
BLDG TECH
JPT REVIEW CENTER INC
I 130. Minimum depth of soil boring test?
a. 1m C. 2m
b. 1.5m d. 3m
131 .. This is done to determine the parameters for
foundation design such as bearing
capacity, seismicity, soil expansion and contraction as well as liquefaction
considerati ons.
132. When excavating, what will you do if you over excavated the soil?
a. Fill the excavation with gravel c. Put back soil to desired elevation
b. Place Mass Concrete d.
133. Where should the excavation start if the structure has a basement? (R-1 & C-2)
l 134. Where should you start the excavation for the basement if the site is sloping to the
south with an adjacent building on it?
Note: In answering these type of questions, read th e problem carefully and take into
consideration the situations stated. Major consideration will be the movement of workers
and materials. Excavation must not impede the mobility of workers/ materials.
135. Where should you start excavation?
a. 1m from Constructio n Line . c. 0. 75m beyond the property fine
b. Just after the Property Line d.
136. Excavated Soil is referred to in terms of
a. Per Square Meter c. Per Ton
b. Per Cubic Meter d. Per Elf
137. Discuss backfilling including dump truck .capacity for backfill materials.
138. You asked the Gravel supplier to deliver one (1) truck load of G-1 gravel using a
standard 10-wheeler dump trucks. How much gravel will be delivered to your jobsite?
a. 10.00 cu. m. c. 20.00 cu.m.
b. 16.00 cu . m. d. 25.00 cu .m .
139. A truck load of Ready Mix Concrete is
a. 3 - 5 cu .m. c. 6 - 10 cu.m.
b. 5 - 9 cu.m . d. 9 - 12 cu.rn
140. If the jobsite is sloping, where should you start excavation?
a. At the Rear c. At the Front
b. At the Sides of the Lot d. At the Lowest Elevation
141. Which does not belong to the group?
a. Atlanta c. Royu ·
b. Koten d . Panasqnic
142. Which Roofing has a 15-year warranty?
a. Asphalt Sh,nglAs c. Tegula
b. Longspan d. Slate Roofing Tiles
143. Which roofing material is so durable that it can last for hundreds of years?
a. Asphalt Shingles c. Tegula
144. Which of the following is the heaviest per square meter?
a. Asphalt Shingles c. Tegula
145. Which of the following will require the least support?
a. Asp halt S.hingles c. Tegula
146. What is the minimum slope for G.I. Roof?
a. 0 C.3
b. 1 d. 5
147. .A.nether term for Roof Slope is?
a. A ngle c. Slant
b. Pitch d. A ngle
148. Whal is the rnfnirnu m roof pitch (in degrees) for a shed using GI Corrugated sheets?
149. Wh at is width of a Longspan G.I. ?
P J g 1:.· 11 I 78
117
150. What is the usual gauge of a Longspan G.I.?

a. 26 c. 22
b. 24 d.
151 . What is the thickness of a Ga 22? 24? 26? 29?
152. What kind of RoOfing is made of Thermoplastic material and has strips which under
the Sun's heat will melt and cause it to bind as one Roof.
a . Sheathing c. Metal Shakes
b . Polycarbonate d. Asphalt Shingles . .
153. There are two types of roofing shingles today, the Organic and Fiberglass Shing les.
What material is common for both kinds of Shingle that also makes them waterproof?
a . Plastic · c. Ceramic Granules
b. Asphalt d. Urea-Formal_d ehyde Resin
154. What protective coating is applied to Asphalt Shingles?
a. Lacquer c. Polyurethane
b . Semi-gloss Latex d. Asphalt
155. A type of roofing that uses marine plywood undersheathing?
a. Corrugated G.I. c. Polycarbonate
b . Asphalt Shingles d. Longspan
156. A structural element that supports asphalt shingles.
a: Purlins c. Sheeting
b. Rafter · d.
157. Which element supports the sheeting?
a. Purlins
b . Rafter
158. When installing roof sheathing, why do you usually provide a 1/8-inch gap?
a. To provide for seasonal expansion c. For economy
b. For aesthetics d. For hot air to escape
159. The edges of a roof which overhang the face of a wall and normally project beyond
the side of a building. It forms an overhang to throw water clear of the walls.
a: Fascia c. Eaves
b. Gutter d. Anti-ponding Board
160. Why is there a need to provide spacing in between sheets of polycarbonate roofing?
161. What does the supplier of Polycarbonate don't tell about their product that the
Architect should know?
a. Color is unstable
b. They break _easily on installation
c. They are not Flexible
d. Water through capillary action seep inside voids at the edges, encouraging the
growth of moss
162. Which roofing material will you use for a Waiting Shed in Manila?
a . Polycarbonate c. Curvilinear GI Sheet
b. Glass d.
163. Which Roofing materials should not be combined?
a. Struc~ural Steel and Aluminum · c. Stainless Steel and Copper
b. Aluminum and Copper d. Stainless Steel and G .I.
164. What is used for Aluminum Roofing consisting of a pin head and a long shank?
a. Blind Rivet c. Bolt .
b. Pin Rivet d . Tekscrew
165. What is used to support Purlins on a Wooden Roof Fra'me?
a. Cleat c. Rafter
b. Joist d.
166. What are longitudinal members on top of Chords supporting the Roof?
a. Purlins c. Rafter
b. Joist d.
µ ,; ee 12 I 78
118
,
BLDG Tl:C H
, JPT REV IEW CENTER INC
'
J
]
] 167 . The figures shown above , cons isting of parallel chords and a triangular web system 1s
called a
a . Open Web Steel Joist c. Flat Truss
b. Open Deck Truss d . Joist Truss
I ;•
_,,..,'<' l
1' ,
I
''
...... _., ,,,,,
' I . / ...-- 'i ,
~-•-•H-
,...... ... ,.,....
i
;,: ... ,, I •
' / ' ·.,,,.. I • ~ ' . ~,..
I ,,,:
._
.,
' 1
,,,...... ,,,,.,, I , /
/ / ~~--~,.,--- ·-
,.;;.. ,
,__,...., ,_
i
i
i
I 168 . Fam iliarize yourself with the parts of the figure above Q
The parts will be replaced by letters and you will be asked to identify each ...
169. A 44m Open Web Steel Joist (OWSJ) whose depth is 52in to 120in is classified as
I a. K-Series
b: CJ-Series
c. LH-Series
d . DLH-Series
170. The "L" in LH-Series and DLH-Series stands for
a. Length of Joist
r b. Longspan
c. Liveload the Joist can carry
d. Lead Content of Joist
171 . What material is used for Purlins of G .I. Roofing?
a. Light Gauge Metal Channel c. W-Flange
b. Standard Steel Channel d.
172 . Which will result to a lesser number of Purlins?
a. Corrugated c . Polycarbon ate
b. Ceramic tiles d . Cement Tiles
173. The figure shown above is often used as a wall girt or a roof purlin in a structural
system . What is this roll form called?
a . Z Section
c. Reverse L Section
b. C Section d. Strut Channel
13 I 78
11'1
JPT REVIEW CENTEF 1" :
BLDG TECH
J
I
i
i
I -- - -
-l:i Deaiqnat ion DiJlon•io na

~- -- Web Fl.nqe Section al
Width fllic:tnes s
L°h'"
Th.iCltne H Area
l11peria : "' t., t, (in')
-• 21
-- - -·--
x a,
W 24 X 1: "
:n)
:·o. 7
24.3
(in)
9.96
12.e
Un>
0.460
0.55
(in)
0.640
0. 8 ~0
24.I
34.4
Ill W 21 X U
• 18 x· 106
20.7
18.7
6.~
12.2
0.3~0
0.590
0.450
0 .940
13.0
31.1
II 174.
W 12 X 22 12. 31 4.03 0.2~
From the Figure above, what is the depth of W12x22 111 inches?
0.425 6.S
II a. 12.31
b . 18.70
C. 20.70
d. 24.30
175. From the Figure above, which of the following is the largest?
II a. W27x84
b. W24x1 17
c. W21x44
d. W18x10 6
176. From the Figure above, what is the depth of the C-Purlin in millimete rs?
II a. 5
b. 120
C. 50
d. 12
177. From the•Figure above, identify "X"
"II
a. Valley Jack c. Valley Rafter
b. Hip Rafter d. Jack Rafter
178. From the Figure above, what is the length of the eaves?
179. What type of Nail is used for Asphalt Shingles ?
a. Common Wire Nail c. Staple Wire
b. Elastomeric d.
180. What is used for Asbestos Cement Boards?
a. CWN
c. Aluminum Screw
b. GI Nail
I d.
P.::i g e 14 I 78
120
BLDG TECH
J 181. What is a system of triang les used to support of roof?
,~
-
1 ~ /
/
J I~ / I/
/
//
] /
"""!~ I/ /
V
J I/ I~ "' r"
a I/ ~ """
I// "
""" "
'
y
I,/
II
a ~
/
(\j
X u/ -·- -
ROOF FRAMING PIAN

NOT ORAI\NTO SCALE
i 182. What type of roof is shown above?

a. Hip c. Hip and Gable
b. Gable d. Mansard
i 183. From the Figure above, what is X?
a. Sagrod c. Rafter
b. Purlin d. Strut
' 184. From the Figure above, what is Y?

a. Hip
b. Valley
c. Ridge
d. Half Truss
185. In 1958, Jacinto Steel came into being as the pioneer manufacturer of G.I. sheets in the
Philippines. As a trailblazer, they were the first to produce locally pre-painted long span .
G.I. sheets in the 1970's which became known for its anti-corrosion and paint adhesion
properties. However, the Asian Financial crisis in the late 1990's greatly affected the
operations of the company. Today, under the stewardship of Mr. Ramon P. Jacinto, son
of the late Fernand9 P. Jacinto (father of the Philippine Steel Industry), the company is
experiencing a rebirth. What i? its current corporate name?
a. Jacinto Steel Inc. c. Coloroof Steel Inc.
b. JacintoColor Steel Inc. d. RJ Color Steel Inc.
186. Who is the manufacturer of COLORSTEEL roofing?
a. Jacinto ColorSteel Inc. . c. Coloroof Systems Corporation
b. Colorsteel Systems Corporation d. Atienza Colorsteel Systems Inc.
187. What is the Advantage of Longspan Roofing?
188. -What is the Standard Width of a Corrugated G.I. Sheet?
189. Which of the following is used to connect G.I. Roofing Sheets·to Steel Purlins?
a. Roof Nail c. Machine Bolt Nutw/
b. Self-Tapping Screws d. Expansion Bolt
190. Which is used to control the deflection of and stiffen the purlins?
a. Turnbuckle c. Tie Rod
b. Sagrod . . d. Buckling Rod
191. A bungalow house is constructed between two 2-storey houses, what is the best
Roofing material to be used?
a. Long span G.I. Roofing c. Asphalt Shingles
b. Corrugated G.I. Roofing d. Roof Tiles
0 ,1 g 1: 1s I 78
121
BLDG TECH JPT REVIEW CE NTER INC
13
j
J
J
j
1
rL
ti
• 192. From the Figur e abov e. ident ify A.
a . Batte n Seam c. Flat Seam
•
b . Doub le Lock Seam d. Snap Lock Seam
193. From the Figur e above , ident ify B.
•
b . Doub le Lock Seam d . Snap Lock Seam
194. From the Figur e above , ident ify C .
b . Doub le l,..ock Se;3m d. Snap Lock Seam
:!
195. From the Figur e above , ident ify D .
a. Batte n Seam c. Flat Seam
b . Doub le Lock Seam d. Snap Lock Seam
196. From the Figur e above, identify E.
a. Back -to-B ack with Lock Seam c. Reve rse C Seam
b . Doub le C with Lock Seam d. Tee Seam
197 . Whic h amon g the given is the .best insula ting
mate rial?
a . Felt Pape r c. Foil
b . Kraft Pape r d.
198. Unde rlaym ent mem br~ne used for asph alt roof
shing les, tile . fiber ceme nt, and slate
roofing . It serve s as an extra weath er barrie r.
a. Roofing Felt c. Plain GI Shee t
b. PVC sheet d. Plast ic Shee t
199. A heavy -duty pape r used in const ructio n . It is
made by impre gnati ng pape r or fiberg lass
mat with Tar, produ cing a water proof mate rial used
for roofin g. It is distin guish ed from
Roofing Felt which is impre gnate d with Asph alt inste
ad of Tar. Howe ver, these two
produ cts are used the same way and is mostl y interc
hang ed .
a. Felt Pape r c. Tar Pape r
b._Kraft Pape r d. Black Pape r
200 . Although it has its adva ntage s , the introd uction
of Roofi ng Insul ation and Impe rviou s
Roofing Felt also has its down turns . It provi des an
envir onme nt susce ptible to
conde nsatio n within the roof space . With this damp
ness come s the asso ciate d timbe r
defec ts . What do you call this probl em?
a. Hot Roof c. Roof Cond ensa tion
b . Cold Roof d. Mois t Roof
20 1. Best roofing for a hous e locate d at a Coas tal
Area.
202 . DECR A is know n for
a . Roof Insula tion c. Color ed Steel Roofi ng
b . Stone Coate d Steel Roof d. Solar Wate r Heat er
203 . Conv ersio n of Roofi ng Gaug e to inch to mm
(Sam ple: Gaug e 26= 0 .0188 "= 0.478 mm)
204 . Indica te the prope r Gaug e for: Roofi ng , Flash
ing , Gutte r, etc .)
16 I 78
1t t
BLDG H-.C\i
205 . Best rooting material tor a bakery

206 What Roofing material is best suited for an industrial plant where hazardous/toxic fumes
are emitted?
a. Polycarbonate Roofing c. Plain Galvanized Iron Sheath
b . Corrugated GI Roofing d.
207 . What type of Roofing material is ovenbaked and is waterproof?
a. Shingles c. Long Span Roofing
b . 1egula d. Clay Roof Tiles
208 . What is the best location for a Roof Insulation?
a. Between the Roof and the Ceiling c. Right below the Roof
· b. On the Ceiling d. Below the Purlins
t
I V ..
, -
i B
•
209 . From the Figure above , which is made of fiber cement and used for eaves ?
a A . c. D .
;
b. C . d. E
210 . From the Figure above , which is made of natural materials and used for eaves?
a A c. D .
b. C d. E
211 . From the Figure above , which is made of uPVC and used for eaves?
a. A c. D
;
b. B d. F
212 . From the Figure above, which is made of vinyl and used for eaves?
a A c. D
b. B d. F ·
213 . From the Figure above, which is made of metal and used for eaves?
a. A c. D
b. B d. F
214 . From the Figure above, which is made of aluminum and used for eaves?
a. A c. D
b. B d. F
215 . It is used for shedding rainwater so
as to keep it from running down a wall or from
entering a sill
216 What do you call an opening in a wall or parapet that allows water to drain from a
roof?
217 . A receptor designed to collect surface water
or storm water from an open parking
area .
a. Downspou t c. Area Drain
b. Catch Basin d.
218 . A pipe installed to drain water from the roof gutter
a Roof Scupper c. Roof Leader
b Roof Drain d . Rain Chain
t7 I /8
1t3
BLDG TECH
219 . Most common rnofing size

a. 6m-12m - c. 6m-10m
b. 6rn-14m d. 6m-20m
\ 220 . What is the nominal dimension of a corrugated GI Roof?
221 . Minimum end lapping for corrugated GI Roofing
a. 30cm c. 25cm
J b. 20cm d. 60cm
222. Minimum side lapping for corrugated GI Roofing
a. 1 ½" c. 2 ½"
b. 2" d. 3"
223. Gutter and Roof Accessories are
a. Thicker than roof c. Equal in thickness
b . Thinner than roof d.
224. What type of Gutter is installed in such a way that it is hidden when viewed from the roof
edge?
a. Inside Gutter · c. Valley Gutter
b. Hang-on Gutter d.
225. What is the smallest gutter size?
a. 12" C. 48"
b . 24" d. None of the above
226. When a Valley Gutter always experiences flooding and overflow, what will
be the most
effective way of treating it in order to remedy it and also to avoid further problems
in the
future?
a. Add more Downspo uts c. Increase Gutter Size
b. Add Manholes d. Waterproof
227 . It is a metal used for collecting water and is attached to the fascia board.
a. Downspout · c. Roof
b. Gutter d. Batten
r1<1"Ulk.h ,w, b»tten - - - -- - - - - - - - -
-- - - - ~
4 " • 2• Dtk. t-~w , H>I C.., ·
-•ffle• - - --- - - - - - - --,.- - -

Hl<l4M> Gal•anl....S si...t llracllal - - - - -
,1,.._ ,., h.w, bAtlon/,:urlln
1,
7• x 5" S.•ntl•s.a Om.Am6ntal

Gu1tw rlMtad to leada - • d - -- -
wllh r.t . . 1 -
Oma-ta! f•"'- t lnhlnt

,t. .tod to Inda bGaMI wllh
a&eel a.c,ew to Match ~ lth
Cutt.. proftlff
11• • 1• 1h11. h,w. U -

hacle bo.lNI
228. Aside from Roofing purposes , where can you use
Polycarb onate?
229. Study Flashing/ Counter Flashing/ Corner Flashing
230. When the top of the roof butts a wall, use
a . Step Flashing c.
b. L- Flashing d.
I' age 18 I 78
1t4
Bl DG TECH JPT REVIEW CENTER INC
231 . When the side of a roof butts a wall, use

a. Step Flashing C.
b. L: Flashing d.
232. Roof for entry of light
a. Clerestory c . Triforium
b. Skylight d. Glass
233. A Steel section which is commonly used for Skylight
a . Tubular c. C- Channel
b. Angular d.
234. What steel section is commonly used for Skylight installation?
a. l"ubular \-ISS c. Channel
b. Angular d . Flange
235. Why are there gaps in installed Skylights?
236. A tapered , semi-cylindrical roofing tile laid convex side up to overlap planking, similar
tiles laid concave side up.
a. Mission Tiles c. Roman Tiles
b. Pantiles d.
237 . A material used for roofing that melts when exposed to the Sun, hence is transformed
as one
a. GI c. Asphalt
· b. Polycarbonate d.
238. In polycarbonate roofing , why is there a need to provide gaps
a. For sealant c.
b . For thermal expansion d.
239. What is galvanized?
a. Zinc coated on one side c.
b. Zinc coated on two sides d.
240. In a busy airport, what material is used on the roof?
a. Concrete Slab c. Ceramic Tile
b . Thick thatch roof d. GI roof with double bubble foil insulation
241 . What is the correct location for roofing insulation?
242. For a structure near the sea, what is the best type of roofing?
a. Asphalt roofing c. Concrete
b. Galvanized Iron roofing d. Fiber Cement Board
243. If the project is 500m from the sea, which material will you use for the roofing?
a. Longspan GI c. Polycarbonate
b. Concrete d. Shingles
244. Where is the gutter attached
a. Fascia Board c. Cleats
b. Purlins d.
245. How are Gutters joined?
a. Aluminum Rivets c. Vulcaseal
b. Tekscrew d.
246. An Iron coated with zinc is called
a. Galvanized C.
b. Zinced d.
247. Material to fasten G.I.
a. Rivet C.
b. d.
24~. Used to connect G. I. Roofing to Steel Purlin
a. Self tapping screw c. Machine Bolt with Nut
b. Roof Nail .d. Expansion Bolt
249. What is the maximum length of long span roof?
250. Commercial length of Long span roof
251. Advantage of long span roofing
252. Best roofing material for a house near the seashore.
ri a ge 19 I 78
1f.S
BLDG TECH JPT REV IEW CENTER INC
j
253. Study about rafter. A rafter is one of a series of sloped structural members, that
extend from the ridge or hip to the downslope perimeter or eave. designed to support
J the roof deck and its associated loads .
254 . It is a gable-e nd rafter on a roof overhang that runs parallel to the common ra fters and
is supported by the lookout rafter.
J a. Fly Rafter c. Edge Rafter
b. Sheathing Rafter d . Last Rafter
] 255 . What is the better way of insulating the roof?
a. Roofing sheet, an air space or gap, then aluminum insulation . ,, L1 , i /S..r
b. Roofing sheet with aluminum insulation underneath . . __d.-..,
f-
1 256 . Identify the Figure shown at right.
257 . Type of roofing in forested area - Steep Gable Roof
~r
~
i 258 . It is used to attach aluminum gutter to roof.

a. Rivets
b. Screws
c. Nails
d. Weld
i 259. Where is a gutter attached?

a Fascia Board
b. Top Plate
c. Batter Boards
d. Ceiling Joists
i 260. From the Figure shown at right, how is the Top Chord
connected to the Bottom Chord?
a. Gusset Plate
\
c. Screws On ly
i b. Rivets Only d. Welded
i ,, - -\~, / /--~I
l-. _ j /
I
A B C D
I 261 . From the Figures above, identity the Mansard Roof.
a. A c. C
b. B d. D
262. From the Figures above, identify the Gable Roof.
r a. A c. C
b. B d. D .
263. · From the Figures above, identify the Jerkinhead Roof.
a. A c. C
b. B d. D
264 .· From the Figures above, identify the Gambrel Roof
a.A c. C
b. B d. D
265. The roof at right is
a. Gable with Dormer C.
b. Hip with Dormer d.
266. The roof at right is
a. Gable with Dormer c
b Hip with Dormer d ·
267 · A Roof th at is a usually Symmetrical two-s.i ded ioof with
two slopes on ea~h side. The upper slope is positioned at a
shallow angle, while the lower slope is steep. This design
provides !"he ~dvantages of a sloped roof wh ile maximizing
headroom in side the buildings upper le vel and shortening what T
J
would otherwise be a tall roof.

a. Mansard Roof
c. Gable Roof
b. Gambrel Roof
d . Je rkinhead Roof
20 I 78
BLDG Tr.CH Jf'T RE\ ltW Ct NTER INC.
268 . A Flemish Gable or Gablet Roof is a gable whose sides have a shape made up of o ne
or more curves and has a pediment at the top . It can also be a Hip Roof w ith a sma ll
1 a
gable on top It is also called as
a . British Gable c . Australasian Gable
b . Victorian Gable d . Dutch Gable
1 269 . What can be an alternative for connecting the truss members
j
270 . Which Truss connection is easily recyclable?
a Welded . c . Riveted
Q b . Bolted
271 . Which is used for connecting Web members?
d.
a a. Base Plate
b . Bearing Plate
272 . Steel coated with Zinc is also called
a. Galvanized
c . Gusset Plate
d.
c.
f;j b . Powder- coated d.
273 . What is the commercial length of a longspan roofing?
a. 18m c. 12m
tj b . 10m d. None of the above
27 4 . Identify the type of Roof Truss shown in the Figure at righ t.
27 5. Which roofing material is best for a Beach Rest House?
[j a. Shingles
b . Metal Deck
c. Long Span GI
d. Polycarbonate ~ - --
276 . Which is best used for truss members
[j a. C-channels
b. Angle Bars
c. SHS
d. RHS
b
277 . When do you use the sag rod, cross brace, cleats ... (ala sa notes pero nadiscuss sa
lectures ... be keen sa minute details sa lectures specially the "kwentos" kung di ka
I nakatambay sa field pero kung on-site training /experience ka the exam is very easy)
278. Which helps in preventing movement of trusses?
a. Sag Rod c. Rafter
b. Bracing d. Turnbuckle
279. What roof is ideal for a Green house?
c;i a. Shingles c. Long Span GI
--
b. Metal Deck d. Polycarbonate
280. Which type of roof is ideal for a sidewalk?
a. Curvilinear GI Sheet c. Slate
b. Polycarbonate d. Concrete
281 . What roof wil l you recommend for a Wa_ rehouse / Factory?
a. Shingles c. Long Span GI
--
b. Metal Deck d. Polycarbonate ·
282 . What roofing Is best for a Cottage in a resort?
28 3 Given a detail with measurements in the English system , identify the meas urements ,
In Metric system, of the fol lowing parts:
a. Rafter c. Web Member
b. Collar Plate d. Purlins
--
284. The truss shown at right is a very simple truss with 2 principal
rafters, a tie beam and a central vertical post. It is commo nly used in
con1unctIon with with 2 angled struts.
a. King Post Truss
c. Scissor Truss
b Queen Post Truss
d. Pyram id Truss .
285. From the figure at right, identify #1
-'-1
a. King Post .r
c. Verti ca l Chord 2
b. Queen Post
d. V ertical Strut
21 I 78
127
BLDGl ECH JPT REV IEW CENTER IN(
286 . It is the joint in a truss where the top and bottom chord s meet.
a Tie c. Panel Point
b. Hee\ d. Plumb Cu t
287 Identify the part shown in the figure
Heel
Hc1gh1
!
Double fop Pl~ le
I++ §
""
Ovc rha11;1 t1l
bea11ng
ov~rhang l - - - - ---.--l.l.lW..l;u.u.:U01."-UIJUl.lo.llJUlj.-_ _ _ _~7

cant1leser
.,-.- ·7
- . ,
he1 1
h••ghl
~ull
<u l
288 . Identity the parts of the truss as shown in the figure

289 . What is the difference between Rafter Roof Truss
and the Standard Root Truss? ,. . . r
a. Ratter Truss is a system of Rafters that serve as the ........,
·
primary support of the Roof . While both are tnangu Iar RAFTERS + CEILING JOIST
shaped , trusses have more triangular elements inside the main framework.
29 0. If you want to have an exposed truss system for your roof, which steel section would be
best to use?
a Tubular c. I
b. C-Chann el d. Angular
29 1. This devi ce is used for adjusting the tension or length of
cables , tie rod s and other tensioning system It normally
consists of two threaded eye bolts, one screwed into each end
of a small metal frame , and having opposite threads .
a. Bolt and Eye c. Belt Buckle
b. Turnbu ckl e d.
292 . Mr. John's house is located in a forested area and surrounded by trees . Which part of
the house should not be installed ?
a. Eaves c. Gutter
b. Ve nt d. Ridge Cap
293 . Sand melts when 1t is heated to 1700 °C. When allowed to cool , a new material is
form ed . What is this material?
a Steel c. Lime Silica
b. Calcium Carbonate d. Glass
22 I 78
121
BLlJG TECH
294 . Heat absorbing Glass with blue green or gray color reflects hea t corning into a space
This is because of its
a. Strength of Stress c. Weight and Density
b. Chemical Composition and Color d. Th ickness
295 . What do you call the installation of Glass?
296 . It is used to cut glass
B C
A
D E
297 . Which is used for Ra ilings?
a . Figure A c. Figure C
b . Figure B d. Figure D
298 . Which is used for Shelves?
a. Figure E c. Figure B
b . Figure D d . Figure A
299 . Which is used for Sliding Doors?
a. Figure B c. Figure D
b. Figure A d. Figure E
300 . Wh ich is used for Swing Doors?
a. Figure B c . Figure D
b. Figure C d. Figure E
301 . Which is used for Handrails?
a. Figure E c. Figure A
b . Figure D d. Figure C
--- B
.\\ V
C
E
302 . From the figures above , which is used for Awning Windows?
a. D c. A
b. E d. C
303 . From the figures above . which is used for Sliding Doors ?
a. D c. A
b. E d. B
304. From the figures above , whrch rs used for Glass Sh elves?
a. D c. B
b E c. C
.!. 3 I t '/3
1t')
JPT REVIEW CLNH
BLUG TE:.CH
305 From the figures above, which is used for Flush Doors?
C. E
a D d A
b. C f H draiis?
306 From the figures above , wh ich is used or an ·
D C.E
a d A
b. C . t· t ·ght that 1s used to
307 . What do you call fitting shown in the igu_re a? ri
connect glass in many various configurations · C t
c Glass onnec or
a . Octopus Connector d. 4 -Legged Connector
b . Spider Connector ·
a
,,r:.r~ ~ , ,3)
,.
308 The figure shown above is called a c. Glass Balustrade Fitting s
0 a. Glass Clamp
b. Glass Connector
d. Patch Fittings
tJ '1
.I
~'~-
- 309 . The figu re shown above 1s called a ·
a. Glass Clamp
c. Glass Balustrade F1tt1ngs
-•
d. Patch Fittings
b. Glass Connector.
:)
--
.1
,t
L
ff
310. The figure above is ca lled
Iii a. Glass Clamp
b. Glass Connector
c. Glass Balustrade Fittings
d. Patch Fittings
311 . A glazing system in which sheets of tempered glass are suspended from special
Iii clamps , stabilized by perpendicular stiffeners of tempered glass, and joined by a
-
structural silicone sealant or by metal patch plates.
a. Glass Mullion System c.
b. Curtain Wall System d.
•ill
312. What is a Tempered Glass?
313. This type of glass helps maintain room temperature. It keeps the room either warm or
cold by using a special microscopically th in coating- thinner than a human hair- that was
developed to minimize the amount of ultraviolet (causes fading of interior materials such
as curtains) and infra red (heat energ y) that can pass thro ugh the glass w ithout
compromising the amount of visible light that is transmitted . However, this glass has
been blamed , albeit unproven yet, for damage to adjacent buildings and parked vehicles
due to the amou nt of heat th at it reflects back.
bl 24 I 18
f.j 1'30
tl
JPT REVILW CE NTl:: R INC
l:.IL DG Tf: CH
c . Satin Glas s
a. Tinte d Glas s
d . Text ured Glas s
b . Low Emiss1v1ty or Low -e Glas s , wha t type
partition betw een th e Bedr oom and T &B
314 . You r clien t wan ts to use glas s as a
cy?
of g lass will you use with out sacr ificin g priva
c . Text ured Glas s
21 Tinte d Glas s
d . Etch ed Glas s
J b . Wi red Glas s
3 15. Wha t do you call a type of Glas s with
mini mal Disto rtion ?
c. Floa t
a Plate
J tJ Shee t
316. Wha t does a Doub le Insu latin g Glas
s have
d.
that is able to let shor t wav elen gths thru
such as ultra v iolet heat ?
such as light but block s long wave leng ths
J a. Ultra viole t fi lte r b.
317 . A glas s having one or both sides acid
c.
-etch ed or sand blas ted
c. Patte rned Glas s
to
d.
obsc ure visio n
a. Spandrel Gla ss
j b. Wire .Glass
318. A Glas s wher e Art is created by appl
d. Obs cure Glas s
ying Acid to it.
c. Etch ed Glas s
a. Stained Glass
j b. Figured Glass
d. Caus tic Glas s
patte formed in the ro llrng proc ess to obsc
rn ure
319 . A glass having an irreg ular surfa ce
vision .
r-l a. Figured Glass c. Sheet Glas s
1.;-.;iJ d. Reflect ive Glas s
b. Crown Glass
320 . Different types of Glass
0 321 . What does Fi re-resistive glass conta
glass does not have?
in in the gap betw een two glas s pane ls that
othe r
a. Air c . Wate r
'J
t:1
I
b. PVB Laye
322. Doub le Glaz
r
ing
d.
to hold a glas s
- I
323 . In the figu re shown at right, #3 is used

0 pane in place What 1s
a Spacer
it calle d?
c.
b -
b Glazing Bead
324 . What will happen to brightly color
window when they are constantly expo
.:i25 . What 1s the main reason why
ed
Conv
pack
enie
sed
nce
d.
ages
to sunl
Store
in a disp lay
ight?
s use
:?
Cl
glass in there store
a. To attract customers
front
b . To discourage burg lars

326 . In a reflective glass, what will
are on?
s ?
you see at
c. To keep the dust out
d. To filter UV Rays
arou nd 8p h · ·
m w en you are insid e and the light s
.
, I ~ in lieu of glass. It filters light & acts as a

327 . An oyster shell used in window panes ·
protective barri er.
a. Pa skona Placenta
c ·
c. apiz
b. Pa skonidae d. Stained Glas s .
328 o· • g ca nopy, what would be the best t . .
. . isreg ard1n of wind ow agai nst rain?
has the grea test effec . ype
329 . A natural force that of
t 111 th e plac eme nt, orien tatio n and desi gn
fenestration?
·
a. Wind
Sun c. Rain
b.
· d. Heat . . .
030 y our ci ient want s a window that will be o .
..., . g hod agai nst stron g wind s and rain , whic h
happ ens almost half of the year How ever
'. e spec1f1cally told you that it mus t NOT
co mpromise th e view and let th~ air i d w ill you
use? n unng sum mert une . Wha t kind of wind ow
' a Fixe d c. Case m en t
b. Louv ererl d. Sliding
2s I ,·o
191
Jr' I I\ t V I L I • '- ' • ' - ' '
BLD G TE CH
A window that can be used as a Fire Esca pe?

331 . c. Awn ing
a . Cas_ ern ent d. Louvered
b . Sllding . ooden w indow?
332 · What is the main d isadvantaged of usinga alewak
a . Water w ill eventually seep an causeh in the weather
l b . It will shrink and expand due to th e c ange

c. It will even tually rot
d. . Museum for National Arts It wil l have a d isp lay
] 333 You were commiss ioned to design a
area where rare artifacts are to be showcasidSheet Glass
a . Float Glass d. Wired G lass .
J b . Plate Glass . . .d .
334 For a highrise building and _cons1 . e;1ng sa
f~ty what wou ld be the most economical and
,
effective type of window against rain . . . surface
j 335 It is a type of glass used in mirrors for a d1stort1on-freGel
·
a . Float Glass
c Pattern
d.
ass
..
b . Plate _Glass . .d De artment Stores mounted on the ceiling
0 336 This Mirror is usually used m Groceries an
or wall for surveillance/securi ty purposes .
p
c. One-way M irror
a a. Concave Mirror
b Convex Mirror d.
337 What is the best type of glass to use for a Shower Sta ll .
·a w·ire d GI ass
?
c · Textured Glass
[j b. Etched Glass
338 What do you call Etching Glass?
d . Tempered Glass
•
a. Annealed Glass c. Flat Glass
b. Plate Glass d . Pattern Glass
339 . It is a type of glass used in Fire-Exit Doors
I-ii
a. Wired c.
b. Float d.
340. What glass is used when distortion is not of importance?
a. Plate c. Float
b. Sheet d.
341 . How are insulating glasses separated? BY VACUUM/HERME TICALLY-SEALE D
[, SPACES
342 . In a luxury show room, what type of glass should be used?
--
a. Laminated or Safety glass - consists of two or more plies of flat glass bonded under
heat and pressure to interlayers of polyvinyl butyral resin that retains the fragments if
the glass is broken . Security glass is laminated glass that has exceptional tensile and
impact strength .
b . Float glass - manufactured by pouring molten glass onto a surface of molten tin and
all owing it to cool slowly. The resulting flat , parallel surfaces minimize distortion and
--
eliminate the need for grinding and polishing . Float glass is the successor to plate
glass and accounts for the majority of flat-glass production .
c. Sheet - fabricated by drawing the molten glass from a furnace (drawn glass), or by
forming a cylinder, dividing it lengthwise, and flattening it (cylinder glass) . The
firepolished surfaces are not perfectly parallel , resulting in some distortion of vision .
To minimize this distortion, glass should be glazed w ith the wave distortion running
--
horizontally .
d.
343 . Glass with no distortions
a. Sheet
b. Float
c. Tempered - annealed glass that is_reheated to just below the softening point and then
rapidly cooled to induct compressive stresses in the surfaces and edges of th I
·1 t · h · . e g ass
an d. tens, e s resses 1n t e interior. Tempered glass has three to five times the
resistance of annealed glass to impact and therma l stresses but t b
canno
-I- e a 1tered
26 I 78
132.
JPT RE\.'11: W Lt111 i en ,. ,..__
BLIJ G TEC H
sized
red , it breaks into rel ative ly ha rmless pebb le-
ctu
afte r fab rica tion. When fra
pa rtic les . al str es se s .
d slo wly to rel iev e intern a pro ce s s of
Annealed glass - is co ole d gla ss tha t is pa rtially tem pe red by
- is an ne ale
Heat-strength glass en ed gla ss ha s ab ou t
twice the str en g th
co oling. He at- str en gth
reh eating an d sud de n
sa me thi ckn es s.
of an ne ale d gla ss of the gla ss into a pla te tha t is s ub se qu en
tly gro un d
by rolling mo lte n
d . Pla te glass - for me d dis tor ted vision .
olin g . Pla te gla ss pro vid es vir tua lly cle a r, un
an d polish ed after co ak a La mina ted gla ss ?
4. Wh at ha pp en s wh en so me on e trie s to bre
34
J a. It w ill bre ak into sm all
er ha rm les s pa rtic les
lin ter ac ros s the roo m
b. It will bre ak bu t will no t sp
J c. It will not bre ak
d.
so me on e tries to bre ak a Te mp ere
d gla ss ?
ha pp en s wh en
34 5 . Wh at
r harm less pa rtic les
J a. It will break into sm alle
b. It will break but will no
t sp lint er ac ros s the roo
m
c. It will not bre ak

0 d.
346. Ho w do you cut a
tempered gla ss ON SIT E?
ld never be cut on site c.
Dia mond Tip
a. Tempere d glass shou d. Special La ser
ne aling an d se co nd
tj b. Tile Cu tter
NOTE: Tempere d Gla ss can on ly be cut 2 ways, first is through an
in eff ec t
Wh en you an ne al a tem pe red gla ss, you are
through a Spec ial Las er. ss. As for the
the fini sh pro du ct is no longe r tem pe red gla
[j removing the stre sses
Special Laser, the question
he nce
sta tes tha t the cut ting is to be do ne ON SITE.
Th is de vic e
me tho ds are im pra ctic al
to
NO T ava ilab le at the jobsite . In any case, bo th
is de fini tely
tl do at the jobsite .
34 7. Type of Glass use d
for display windows .
c. Tempered Gla ss
a. Clear Glass d.
t1 b. Tinted Glass
34 8. What type of
cifi
gla
ca
ss
lly
sho
ins tru
uld
cte
be
d
use
the
d as a floo ring mater ial at the se co
architect that he wants a
nd flo or if the
cle ar vie w of the gro un d
owner spe
r-1 floor
a. Te mpered G!ass
c. Glass Blocks
d. Laminated Safety Gla
ss
b. Clear Glass ~e w arc hit ect s) an sw ere d ugl as s
students (now
ti !~ote:
bloc~s . We
W~
don t
not
kno
ice
w
d
ho
tha
w
t
the
ma
PR
ny
BoA answered this but the
the construc_tion industry.
correct an sw er is ca lled
This is no w being us ed
in
b "St ruc !ur al" Gl~ ss in l hig hri se vie win g

Laminated e one being emplo yed in
severa
nst ruc t1on an? 1s the sam ss Blo cks ca n be
modern co_ ck. Although Gla
the Sears Tower Sky De
platforms _like_the o~es 1n ar view of the ground floor.
cle
used too, 1t will not give a building during nig ht tim ·
e
t; i 349. Type of Gla
a. Tin ted Glass
ss wh ere in you can see the people inside the
c. Tempered Glass
d. Ins ulated Glass
b. Reflect~d Glass
ilCI 350. Study tinted glass, its
35 1. What is Insula ted Gla
uses etc.
ss?
embled ·nt ·
y referredto as
When mul tiple glass pan es or "lites" are ass Ltts, the y are con_imonl
ble Glazed Uni ts (UK' od uro pe) or Insu latin g Gla ss Units (JGU)
tl I
insulated glas s, dou
(North America and Au stra
ble
These units use the therma

glaz ing
lia).
, Dou
l and aco usti c insu lating

an
AJ~ SPA Cr~
GL• ss ur::
~ 1'
ce
uum) contain ed in the spa
properties of a gas (or vac
i::J form ed by tire unit . The
with ou t. sacri fic in g transpa
y can pro vide goo d ins ulat ion
ren cy (visual transm ittan
ve gla sse s can
ce s LI LO'- : ~, A.
DEss1 cA~-
d and refl ecti
(VT): Single glazed tinte e
insulaiio n, but for the sam
tJ prov1de s1m 1lar th1::,-ma l
1n sulat1on perform anc
pro vide little protection aga
e are harder to see through and
inst unwanted sound.
Bu- ,L su .•
e
glazed, but IGU s with thre
t::1 Mo st IGUs are dou ble
re
glaz in g" are becoming mo
sheets or more. i.e "triple
'' ,' 2. = 27 I 78
133
BUJG TECH
a sash, frame or in a curta in

common due to higher ene rgy costs. Insulated glazi ng may be framed in
wall.
at the South
352. For better Energy conservation , which material is NOT advisable for use
part of a project ?
a. Heavy Tinted Glass and thick concrete wall
1 b. Transp arent Glass and Light Metal Panels

c. Translucent Glass and Light Colored Masonry
d.
e of
353. A high end residential is adjacent to a busy and heavy traffic main road. Becaus
J the nuisance of vehicles, the upper floors are affected. What should be
problem
done to
minimize the noise if price would not be a
J a. Double glazing window

b. Heavy drapes
t face?
c.
d.
354. What type of glass has the wavies
ings in fro nt of
tJ 355. If you are inside a structure using Reflective Glass , you can see build
you in the morning. At night, when you are inside, you can see
c. Trees
a. Cars
t1 b. Yourself
356. A type of Glass used for
a. Lamina ted Glass
Skyligh ts
d. Birds
c. Wire Glass
tJ 357.
b. Corn Glass
A type of Glass used for Skyligh ts
d.
c. Float
a. Temper ed
tJ 358.
b. Wired
What type of glass is ideal for Skyligh ts?
d. Etched
c. Lamina ted G lass

a. Temper ed glass
tJ b. Float Giass
359. Among
a. Polycar
the
bonate
given choices , which is best
d.
for
c.
W ired Glass
Skyligh t?
Float Glass
tJ b. Sheet Glass
360. Arno_ng the choices which is the most
d.
appropr
c.
Plate
iate
Temper
Glass
for Skyligh ts?
ed Glass ·
a. Lan:1ma ted Giass
d b. Stained Glass d. Plate
361. Amo_ng the choices which is the most appropr iate for Skyligh ts?·
c
Glass
a. Laminated c. lear Plate Glass

0 b T
· empere
d
362. You we:e comm issioned by a bank for its branch at ~a

for the exterior ?
d. Glass W k
paloc,
•
Manila.
. .
Wh ich kind of
glass w ill you specify
~ a. Laminated Glass
b T
· empere
d GI
ass
c w· d GI
. ire
d. Float Glass
as
363. A type of Glass that is translucent in the morni . .

E:j viewed from the inside of a building
a. Float Glass ·
ng but like a mirror at night when
c. Reflecti ve Glass
b. Clear Glass
t=J 364. A _type of Glass used for Fire Exit
a. Wired Glass
d.
c. Lamina ted Glass

b. Float Glass
1::1 365. What Window is hardest to reach?
a. Clerestory ·
d.
b. Casement c. Awn ing

c:1 366. What kind of wi ndow will ou
a. Caseme nt y
_d .
use for a Kitchen !fit is next to a Lanai?
b. Awn ing c. Sliding
9
t:j
367. What type of Glass is dust-f ?
a. Float
b. Glass Block
~6 3. What wou ld be the prime c
ree ·
.d .
d.
d.
Jalousie
c. Jalousi e
Lamina te
,,.
ons1 erat1on for the insta llation of Glass Blocks?
~ I
1' a g e 28 I 78
Cl
I
BLDGTECH
369. From among the choices, where shou ldn't Glass Blocks be used?
a. Walls/ Partitions b. Floors c. Roofs d. Columns
370. How do you install Glass Blocks on Floors?
a. Install like you would normally on Walls
b. Cast into a reinforced concrete gridwork or set into a metal frame
l c. It's not possible because it will break and cause an accident
d. Bed the blocks tog ether in Portland cement based mortar
NOTE: Glass Blocks are usually sealed using White Cement, Silicone Sealant or other
1 similar Caulking products.
371. Glass blocks provide a noise reduction of between 40 to 50 decibels which is
comparable to double glazing. This is far superior even to that of brick walls of identical
J thickness. Why is this so?
a. Glass Property (Molecular) c. Sound bou nces from glass surface
n b. Air Space within the Blocks (partial vacuum)

372. You used glass blocks for the wall, how can you give your clients some privacy at
night?
a. Double Wall c. Choose glass that obscures vision
b. Roll-up Sunshade d. Curtain that can be sided
373 . What kind of window is easiest to clean?
a: Awn ing c . Double Hung
0 b. Casement
374. Wh ich w indow type is the easiest to clean?
d . Sliding
a. Casement c. Sliding
tj b . Awning d. Louvers
37 5. This kind of window found above a door is used to provide ventilation while enjoying the
security of a locked or closed door. It is also useful in allowing light into rooms while
0 maintaining a level of privacy that you may require for bedrooms and bathrooms.
a. Lintel W indow c. Door window
b. Transom Window d. Decorative 1/Vindow
Cl 376. It is the desired type of window for highrise buildings .
377. A relatively new material in the market today which is an embod iment of the dictum "the
more beaui iful, the more expensive."
CJ a. Brushed powder-coated aluminum window frames
b. PVC window frames painted to look like wood
c.
d.
g 378. What type of window does not require weatherproof sealant?

a. Louver c. Sliding
•ti
b. Awning d . Casement
379. What type of wind ow_is commonly used in condominiums, where safety and
waterproofi ng are main concerns?
a. Tilt-and-turn c. Casement
b. Awn_ing . d. Sliding
380. Steps 1n Window construction/insta llation
381. In the insta llation of anodized windows, what should you do first?
Bl a. A~~ch first the window frames then finish the sides

b. Finish first the opening then install the frames
C.
·
C, 382. W~ere do we use a gondola? It is a sus ended . .

cleaning window~/ curtain w_all_s of highrise ~uild ing!ccess equipment usually used ,n
383. An outer covering of a building in wh ich the outer wall are non-
r:t ~tr~;~ural, but merely to keep the weather out and the occupants
in. oes _not carry any dead load other than its own and will
transfer wind load s that a_re incident upon it to the main build in
t:1 struct~ re t_hrough con~ect1ons at floors or columns. It is clesi n;d
to ~es1_st a,r and wat_er infiltration , sway induced by wind and g
se1sm1c forces and ,ts own dead weig ht Glass i
C1 as a material.
a. Glass Wall b. Curtain Wall
· s common 1Y used
c. Shear Wall d · F a9ade Wall

P :, g r 29 I 78
135
....._
BLDG TECH JPT RE VIEW CE NTER INC
'l 384 . The figu re show n at right is

a . Glaz ed Wall
b. Alum inum Curt ain Wall
385 . Wha t is prov ided betw een glaz ed
c. Mod ular Wall
d . Glas s Wall
. . .>-~
.,._,,
w indo ws?
a . Air
c . Scre en
b . Silic on . . d.
386 Wha t wind ow is used in T & B espe cially
.a Cas eme nt
at show er .
?
c . Wall Hun g
\ ·~
n b . Awn ing
387 . This type of wind ow prov ides the
d. Sl1d1ng. .
best natu ral vent1lat1on
a . Awn ing
fi b . Case men t
3 88 . Wha t is the main reas on why jalou
c. Jalo usie
d. Slidi ng d b th era\ publ ic?
sie is wide ly acceptet Y e gen
a . Cos t ·
c. Easy to ins a II
t1 b . 100% V entil ation
389 . Typi cal Jalou sie width
d.
fl a . 100 mm
b . 150 mm
390 . A mate rial used for a typic al jalou sie
c . 200 mm
d . 125 mm
wind ow?
a. Mild Stee l
li 391
b. Wrou ght Iron
Whic h wind ow woul d seem ingly be chea per
c . Cop per Tin A lloy
d . A lumin um . . . ?
beca use of its ordin ary hing es ·
i a. Alum inum Awn ing

b . Alum inum Sliding
392. The figure at right is for whic h kind
c. Woo d Case men t
d . Jalo usie
•
of wind ow?
·
i a. Awn ing
b Slid ing
393 . Wind ow com mon ly used in hosp itals
c . Doub le Hung
d . Hopp er
I a. Awn ing
b. Steel Case men t
394 The figure at right is for whic h kind
c. Jalou sie
d . Slidi ng
of w indo w?
i a. Slidin g
b . Double Hung
395. Wha t type of wind ow is NOT reco mme
c. Case men t
d . Jalo usie
nded to be used In an area whe re the open
ra of the wind ow is in a hallw ay?
a. Case ment Wind ow
b. Sliding Wind ow
c. Pictu re Wind ow
ing
d . Louv er Wind ow
d 396. The figure at right is for whic h kind
a. Sliding
of wind ow?
c. Case men t
b. Double Hung
d . Jalou sie
I 397 It is a wind ow th at proje cts from the
main w a ll of a build ing but do not
reach to the ground , supp orted by corb els
or bra ckets .
a. Awning Wind ow
c. Case men t W indo w
I b. Oriel Wind ow
398 . Why are uPVC Wind ow Fram es reco
d . Pictu re Wind ow
mme nded to be colo red wh ite?
a To Disti _ nguish from Alum inum
t b. Expensive when using anot her colo r
399. ln _trop1cal countries, what Is the best
c. Colo r fade unde r cons tant Sun expo sure
d . Not appe aling in anot h er colo r
type of w indo w that allow s max imum ai rflow
a Sliding
I b. Case men t
400. Wind ows that does not requ ire finish
c. Awn ing
d . Louv e red
ing befo re insta llatio n
a Case men t
I b. Louv er
c. Slidi ng
d.
' Awn ing W indo ws
30 I 1s
JPT REVIEW CE NTER INC
BLD G TE CH
9 w ni ng Y.Vird ow.s desig ned to provide light an
d
ng wi nd ow s ar e
Pros - Awni tha t need
grea t fo r be drooms and other areas
□ breeze. Th ey're
bu t sti ll let som e lig ht in.
Awnin gs ca n be
to maintain pr ivacy
tion. Th ey can be po
sitio ned in a
ow ventila
open ed slightly to all in columns ,
pla ce s: ne xt to ot he r windows, arranged
va riety of sh air.
tio do or s to cre ate a wall of light and fre
pa
or placed above large g windows are set on
the inside ,
- Sc re en s fo r aw nin
Cons y fa lls into
an tha t al/ the dirt and dust that normall
which can me tead.
y onto your floors ins
the sash makes its wa
Case ment Windows ht , fresh air
- Ca se me nt wi nd ow s op en outward for lig
--~
... .._-~ Pros energy efficiency
sid e bre ez es . Th ey 're tight ly sealed for
. and as over sinks and
-to -reach places, such
I
I
an d gr ea t for ha rd
en . Ca se me nts crank open , as op
posed
I appliances in the kitch
.I , ma king them easier to mane
uver.
I
Ito sliding up an d do wn
, check on the
,l If yo u'r e mo vin g into an older home
Co ns -
rdware . Though
ment hinge s and ha
stability of your case ru sty ha rd wa re
ua lly tou gh to br eak into, faulty or
casements are us for re pla ce me nt
factor. Consult with a profe ss ion al
inc reases your risk
sements.
parts or quality new ca
'
s
Double Hung Window fo r th eir un iqu e
wind ows are ch os en
Pros - Double hung
style, ease of
I access and
I 0 superior
ventilat ion
capabilities .
be opened
~ -f t, e Je;1~~
ow ca n
Th~ top of the wind
I ~h 1I: the bottom rem
ains closed_ great for
-
d
kids _rooms . Double hu
practically anywhere
pe rfect for kitchens, off
. Cons
mind that on ly
ng windows can go
in your home. They 're
ices and bedrooms.
ha lf
Double hung
FM<
stoo
more air than othe

w1_ndows tend to leak this . d
of
win ow opens
l
.
r wrndows. An d keep
up h
, w ereas different
in
tJ types can open completel y.
= D
Picture Windows
• dows creat
Pros - p·icture win
be t . e unobstruc. ted. views
of the
••
tdo ors . Th ey 're as wh
ou s rn are er~ ventrlatron isn 't
a big
installin th
concern. Th ink about the wa lls of dark
an d ha llw ay s for inf ini t;ly : : hr~h o_n co mb ina tion
with . rooms e e~ hghtrng . In
ors or op en -an d- clo se . s bri ng the
. patio do e window
lance of ligh t an d ve nti lat io; rn dows, pictur
perfect ba
Cons - Thes e wind
ows ar
ly. An d the la rge
ke the e fo r looks on
~
ca n ma
expans e of glass m more vulne rab le to brea ka ge.
.
Bay Wmd ow s
i' J g t 31 I 78
137
JPT REV IE:W CEN TER IN l
~L UG H. CH
rs
ope n , pea cef ul fee l ind oo
Pros - Ba y win dow s cre a te an
m differe r:t
w ligh t to str eam in fro
~ Th eir mu ltip le vie ws allo a ,r
thewindow can be ope ned for
ang les . Plu s , the sid es of
en ess
ss up any hom e wit h un iqu
circ ula tion . Ba y w ind ow s dre ple tely
win dow wit h a ba y can com
and sty le . Re pla cin g a flat
prim aril y use d for
tha t roo m rec eiv es . Th ey 're
cha nge the am oun t of ligh t and ma ste r
cha rac ter to family roo ms
kitc hen s , but can als o add
bed roo ms .
w ind ow s ope n and typ ica lly
Co ns - On ly the sid es of bay
pro ble m.
inc om ing pes ts cou ld be a
don 't com e w ith scr een s, so
Jal ou sie Wi nd ow s can

sla ts set in metal clip s tha t
, Jal ous ies are ma de of gla ss ver ed
uni son . Als o cal led a lou
· -~-? be ope ned and clo sed in like a gla ss shu tter . Thi s typ e
of
;~~ :-1 win dow , a jalo usi e is ma de
to ope n or clo se the ove rlap
pin g
i ~
1
win dow is ma nua lly rota ted
pan els as req uire d , and can
be ope ned by deg ree s to
con tro l
are bes t sui ted
thro ugh . Jal ous ie win dow s
how mu ch air or light pas ses coo l a hom e,
0 for are as with yea r-ro und com fort abl e clim ate s. Th ey hel p
ma kin g it diff icu lt to kee p hea
t and A/C air
but are imp oss ible to sea l,
a ins ide and ext rem e we ath er

out.
Ho ppe r Win dow s in

j are mo st ofte n ins tall ed
These pop ula r win dow s ent
dow is bas ica lly a cas em
- bas em ent s. The hop per win to ope n,
ent ire pan e tilts inw ard
a ~
.-
win dow flipped on its sid e. The
allowing for ma xim um ven tila
priva cy and hom e dec or an issu
tion . Ho ppe r win dow s can
e. Bec aus e the y tilt into the
roo m ,
ma ke
blin ds,
jun ctio n ith
w
ssin gs are diff icu lt to use in con
i sha des and oth er win dow
hop per windows . Their tilt des
dre
igns also ma kes the m a poo
r cho ice for
m . Als o , the y 're
latio n on a rain y day ; wa ter will drip righ t into the roo
[j ven ti
usually placed in basements
, so there 's an add ed sec urit
y risk for any
l.
win dow s installed at ground leve
ti 401 . Why is the fram e of a slid

ing win dow lim ited to 1.6 m?
c. Glass will bre ak
a. Frame will bend
L1 b. For aesthetic considera tion
,_
d.
. --.. . . _
I ,'1jr..>
C1 A --~'--t B
a J'
(•~ \)-1
,~ ,.. ( • I
~ c·' D
.... . '~
'V r •,·..,
l1 402 Fig ure A abo ve Is used for?

a Casement c. Sliding
a 403
b. Awnin g
F1yure 13 al)o ve Is used for?
d . Ca sem ent and Aw nm g
32 I 18
ti 138 I
q
a . Casement c. Jalousie
b . Awning d. Casement and Awning
4 04. Figure C above is used for?
a. Awning c. Double Hung
b. Jalousie d. Awning and Jalousie
405. Fig ure D. above is used for?
a . Casement c. Sliding
b. Double Hung d. Double Hung and Sliding
406. What is the proper method of installing a steel window frame?
a. Finish the window opening first before installing the frame.
b . Install the frame before finishing the window opening.
c . Either way is good , depends on the installer.
d . It doesn't matter
4 07. What is the most effective mechanism for a window in stormy weather?
n a . Hole and Peg
b. Magnetic Catch
c. Hook and Eye
d. Frictional Resistance
n 408. It is a moulding/strip used as a Stopper between 2 Doors

409. It is placed on one leaf of a double-leafed door to prevent smoke, etc. from
penetrating
a. astragal c. Cornice
il b. moldura
410. What type of Door is best for Maintenance?
d.
a. Panel c.
i b. Hollow Core d.
411 . A door formed by inserting a thin lumber, plywood or composite material into the
frame formed by the stiles, rails and mullions of the door.
i a. Panel Door
b. Solid Core Door
c. Hollow Core Door
d. Flush Door
412. A flat-faced door that may have a variety of door facings and may be hollow-core or
I solid-core
a. Flush Door
b. French Door
I 413 . A door consisting of stiles, top and bottom rail and divided glass panels.
a. Flush Door
b. French Door
I 414._ A _ door that has _corrugated cardboard between the stiles and rails and is made up of
interior frame of stiles and rails, covered by a skin of veneer or hardboard, plastic or
metal.
fj a. Solid-core Door c. Solid Wood Door
b. Hollow-core Door d.
41 5. A door with a solid, unified slabs of wood.
tl a. Solid-core Door
b. Hollow-core Door
c. Solid Wood Door
d.
,a 4 16. A door with a solid_ interi~r made of composite wood , ag ri-fiber, wood staves, particle
board or fire-rated mineral fiber.
a. Solid-core. Door c. Solid Wood Door
C, b. Hollow-core Door d.
~
L1
4 17.
0 A B C D
Given the illustrations above, identify Door A.
rJ 41 8. Given the illustrations above, identify Door B.
rd s i_" 33 I 78
Cl
13CJ
~
419. Give n the illus trati ons abo ve, iden

tify Doo r C .
420. Give n the illus trati ons abo ve , iden
tify Doo r D . . p .
421 . Wha t type of Doo r is use d for Fire
Exit s? Fire Proo f Doo r with arnc 8 ar
422 . Wha t is Kala mei n Doo r?
423. An illus trati on of a Doo r Swin g was
sho wn. Ana lyze . _ _
424 . Rou ghin g in is alre ady finis hed but
the Clie nt cha nge d his ~tnd and wan !e~ to reve
the swin g of the doo r goin g outs ide to rse
the stud y area . How ""'.'II you solv e this
· b c Don 't do anyt hing Just reve rse the · .
a . R eve rse th e 1 am swin g
b. Rev erse the hing e - '
d . It cann ot be don e
425 . Whi ch coul d be use d for Doo rs?
a . Gyp sum c. Plyw ood
b . Fice m d.
426 . Different type s of Doo rs
427 . From the given illustration , wha t is
I a. Cen ter Pos t
b . Mull ion
Part A?
c. Mid Stile
d . Mid Rail
I 428 . From the give n illustration, wha t is
a . Mid Rail
b. Mull ion
Part B?
c. Lock Rail
.
d. Hing e Rail
429. From the given illustration, wha t is
i a. Mullion
b. Hing e Stile
Part C? _
c. Jam b Stile
d . Casing Stile
I 430 . From the given illustration, Wha t is D
Part D?
a. Bottom Rail
c. Hori zont al Stile
b. Saddle Rail
d. Foo t Rail
I 431. Doo r Jam b - definition
432. Door Clos er - defin e and identify
•II
433. If an arch itect wants a door to look
like part of the woo d pan eling on the wall
of hinge should be specified? s, what type
a. Invisible hinge
c.
b. Piano hinge
434. Wha t type of Doo r gives the mos t amo d .
unt of open ing? (Sliding with side wall pock
435 . Wha t should you do when the door ets)
jamb is too large for the doo r?
436 . A built-up frame of high quality cons
truction was insta lled for a doo r fram e.
Upo n
Ii installation, it was noticed that there is a
this?
a. Move the frame by reconstruction of the
gap of abo ut 10m m. How wou ld you rem
edy
opening
Iii b. Add a suitable sized plate on the gap
c. Use an astragal
attached to one fram e
••
437. A wooden two-leafed louvered door
is to be installed in the doo rway of a utilit
However, whe n the doors were measure y room .
d it turned out that the doo rway was bigg
that the leaves would not mee t in the midd er and
le. The re is a prob lem in insta lling the
but the work manship of the door was abov lock ,
e standard . Wha t is the best poss ible solu
for this? tion
a. Install a solid wood strip on the door fram
--
es equa l to the gap
b. Install an _astragal
c. Adjust the jamb s
d.
438. Wha t do you call the beam on top of
the door?
439 . What type of door is best for an Indu
strial Building?
440. A type of Door knob commonly used
in Hotel rooms that can be lock ed/u nloc
either side. Choose from the given illustratio ked on
ns.
441 . Questions about Locks, Keys , Kno
bs and Deadbolts usin g illustrations and
II situations
442 . Wha t is a Dutch Doo r? A door divid
ed horizontally in such a fash ion that the
diffe rent
half may rem ain shut whil e the top half open bott om
II keep animals out of farm houses, while allow
s. The initia l purp ose of this doo r was to
ing light and air to filter thro ugh the ope
n
- P .:l g e 34
140
I 78
BLDG Tl:CH !PT RE VIEW CENTER INC
top later modifica tions included doors where both halves c an be closed o r opened
together
443. \t is the horizonta l distance from the face of a lock or latch to the center of the keyhole
.
knob or block cylinder
a. Inset c . Onset
b. Backset d.
44 4. A type of H ing e with removabl e pin
445 It is a transvers e horizonta l structural beam or bar , or a crosspiec e separa ting a door
from a window above it.
a . Grade Beam c . Door Jamb
b . Lintel Beam d . Transom
446. It is found above doors and windows used to carry masonry C R l PP LE STUD
and other loads
a. G rade B eam c. Door Jamb
b . Lintel Beam d . Transom
447 . Cripple Stud - a type of stud that is used above a door or
above or beneath a window . They aren't very different from
other studs except that they are cut shorter so there is room
tor the opening .
l 44 8. It 1s a Hinge used for Frameless Glass Doors
449 . Turnstile
4 50 It is an Ornamen tal or Protective Plate around a Keyhole
a 451 . Which is not Part of a Lockset?
a. Knob c. Strike Plate
b. Escutcheon
l\ 452 Parts ot a Lockset
d. Hasp
a
tj
0 4 53 . A known ma nufacturer of locksets
a. Crown
b . Davies
c. HCG
d. Schlage
454 . What is not a part of a sliding door?
fj a. Roller c. Hanger
b. Mortise Hinge d.
t1 455 . What is added to the Jamb of a door to allow it to swing in ONE direction only?
456 . Where do you place a door stopper to prevent the door from hitting the wa ll? ·
a. Door Jamb c. Wall ·
rJ b Floor
457 What do you ca ll a door stopper?
2:1 Munlin
d.
c. Astragal
tl 4""8 Th -
;; .
b Mullion d V · d
. ac1a a
e figu re shown at right 1s desig ned to keep doors open while
helping to ri revent wall damage. It is called a
t:J a Door Stopper

_
b Magnetic D_oor Stopper
E
c. lectnc ·
Door Stopper
d. Wall Protector
459. What door 1s used in hospital operating rooms?
fj· 8 Double door, double swing
.
b [J ouhi e d oor, sin!-Jle swing
c. Single door , t
d.
ou swing
4 rl ll. ArJ vari la(Je of nn Aluminum Door over a Wooden Door
fJ '161 . Identify the fiqure al right·

c:1 . Folding Door c. Panel Door
P.
Q '41
\3 LDG TL CH JPT RE VIEW CENTf:R INC
b. P ass -by Door d.
462 . Where should you locate the door jamb for a T&B?
a Abov e the threshold c. After the threshold 1ns1de the T&B
b . Before the threshold outside the T&B d. Doesn 't matter
463 . The figu re shown at right is used on Aluminum
1
Glazed Doors . What is this?
a. Concealed Door Closer
b. Pneumatic Door Closer
Q
464 . When a solid wooden door is installed where the
exterior side is cold and the interior side temperature
n different , what was the prime consideration?
a. Strength c. Thermal
a Insulation
b. Dimensional Stability d.
46 5. The fi gure at right shows a device that allows one person to
a pass at a time . It ca n be used to enforce one-way traffic , and in

addition , it can restrict passage only to people who insert a coin ,
a ticket . a pass or something similar. It is called a
a. Toll Gate c. Intelligent Gate
ll b. Turnstile
466 . Weatherstrip - application/uses
d. Single-pass Gate
o 467 . What do you use when there's a difference in the room ele vation and the corridor?
a. Threshold
b. Weatherstrip
c. Gap
d.
468 . What is used between 2 different materials at the door entry?
I a. Threshold
b. Weatherstrip
c. Gap
d.
469 . Given a set of door illustrations , which type does not need hinges ?
tl a. Accordion Door
b. Swing Door
c. Sliding Door
d. Bi-Fold Door
470 A type of bolt which can be accessed at one side only
tl a. Dead Bolt
b. Flush Bolt
c. Barrel Bolt
d. Lockset
471 . Which is not a hardware that supports a door?
~ a. Pivot Hinge c. Floor Flange
b. Jamb d. Lockset
D 472 . What would you recommend for used in a hospital door?

a. Gravity Hinge .
b. Double Action hinge
c. Vertical Spring Hinge
d. Pivot Hinge
fj 4 73 . In a heavy panel door, what is_the most appropriate to use so that the door will
automatically close without pushing or pulling?
a. Gravity Hinge c. Key Operated Lock
~ b. Door Closer d. Automated Door Controller

.,
-I A
, C I .. ,-;f
I
I) D
r . ~~ii _
E
iii
c~
F
474 From th e Figu res above , which is used fo r offices ?
ll 3b I /8
0 141
,;;, T R: \ IF\\ UNTEH 11\ 1...
a. Figure A c. Figu re A, Band D

b F igu re A a nd B d . Fig ure A a nd D
4 75 Fo11T1 the F igu res above , which 1s used at the kitchen ?
a Figu re A c. Figu re C
b . f 1g ure B d . Fig ure B and C
4 7G . I rom the r 1gure s above , whic h are "heavy duty"
a Fig ure B c . F igure F
b 1.:: 1gu re E d . Figure E a nd F
4 77 . From the Fig ure s above , which is the strongest ?
a . Figure A c . Figure E
b . F 1gure B d . Figure F
4 78 . F rom the Figures above , which is the most secure (aka vandal-proof/ant1-
sabotage ca nnot be tam pered )?
a . Figu re A c . Figure E
j b . Fig u re C d. Figure F
479 From the Fig ures above, wh ich is recommended for use o n gates?
a . Figure C c . Figure F
J 480
b . Figure E
Identify the figure shown
d . Figure E and F
t:l
4 8 1. Identity the figure sh own at right
4 82. Wh ich among the following is the most rigid door frame ?
a. Canto Mesa c. Ra betted
b . Tenon and Mortise d. Overlapping Frame
483. A type of door that disa ppea rs , when fully opened , into a com partment in the adJacent
c::1 wall . It has a distinct advantag e over hinged doors in th at it saves about ten squa re
feet of floor space.
a . Full-sw ing Door c. Invisible Door
tj b . Pocket Door d. Compartment Door
4 84 . Kenneth&Mock 1s a local company that started in 1997 th at provides top qua lity
European product and technology to the loca l construction industry. What do they
[j supply/instal l?
a High-quality wood en doors c. A luminum Doors and W indows
b PVC-U Doors and Windows d. Fire-resistant Doors and Windows
485 . What prevents a Sliding door from swaying ve rtically?
a. U-c hannel at the bottom c.
b Horizontal railing on top d.
486 Type of hinge used in fo lding door
a . Invisible Hinge c.
b . Butt Hinge d.
.:187 A type of Bolt that ca n be accessed on one side only.
4?,8 Filler of a flush door
o Styropore b c. cl
4 89 Wh at is !ht: tyJ.)e of hinge , to be used on a flu sh type o f door?
a Concealed hinge c.
tJ Butt l 1inye d
490 A type of hinge to, single swing door
A Conr.ealed hinge: C.
b Butt llll l(j e d
\ I I I 8
l
1'13
•
JPT REVI EW CENTER INC
l\l.lJG TEC H
49 1.What is used to stop a Single leaf swing door?

a Vaciada c. Door Stopper
b Door closer d. Astragal
492 Study about different Locksets for specific areas
r1 -->"\
, ,.; ' ~:t(,j,/
A C
l
I \
E
i 493 .
a A
From the Figure above , which wi ll you use for a Bath room Door?
c. D
b. C d. E
i 494. From the Figure above, which is best for the Entrance Door?
a.A c. C
b. B d. D
ri 495. From the Figu re above, which is used for a Sliding Door?
a. A c. C
b. B d. D
tJ 496 . From the Fig ure
a. A
above, which will you use
c.
for
C
the Bedroom ?
b. B d. D
I 497 .
a.
From
A
the Figure above, which will you use
c.
for s Storage Room ?
C
b. B d. E
tl 498 . A. Fireproof Door with metal Covering
a. Kalame in c. Metal Door
s b. PVC Door d.
499. What do you call the opening of doors and windows ..

a. Schedule of Doors and Windows c. Shell
fl b. Fenestration d . Building Envelope
•II
500 . A vertica l element that forms a division between units of a window or door or
decorative purpose
a. Saddle Bar C. Mullion
b. Munlin d. Stranch1on Bar
501 It serves as a Door Stopper
a. Basciada c. Munlin
~f
b Mullion d . Astragal
502 Study Hinges
503 . The Hinge shown at right comes 1n two part. The threaded part
~
of tt1e hinge is screwed into a pre-drilled hole. They are easy to
fit and once attached . can be easily dismantled .
a Butt Hinge c. Butterfly Hinge
b Flush Hinge d. Ba rrel Hinge
I 504 . Identify the Hi11ge shown at right. It does not requ ire a
.~,
14'1 -
,·, ·~
.....
recess to be cut and is used for light-weight doors and small box construction .
a. Concealed Hinge c. Flush Hinge
b. Butt Hinge d. Butterfly Hinge
505. Study best Door knobs for Bedroom/ Closet/ etc. We were given an illustration with
like 12 sets of different types of door knobs with their descriptions. EG: Inside can be
opened with a push pin, outside can be opened if you put a coin on it (obviously that's
for the T&B). It is sort of similar with the illustration below; only theirs was a simpler
version in terms of drawing and description.
D nodo~lodl
PASSAGE Door Lev""' or Knobs are used on noc,rs rhat do nol requre an,· IOcking
00 rnoo,ar~sm. This usually applies to \iallway doors. cl<>sets. pentfy o.- laundry room
doors You wrll nned to ordet a passa<Je levet set, both ,ns,oo anct outside ctoor
0
handles.
IN OUT
pushbutton loc:k PRIVACY Door Lev,,r llolldtes or Knobs are used on doors IJial reQu,re a oo,ir to t>e
locked from Ins.de a room but do not rGQUire a key. The IOCk ,s adivatoo by a push bu!kJn
()0 0< rota~ng button The'iC lod:s are cies,gned so the door will unlock automatrca!ly when
fl IN OUT
'°1Jed door loci<
opened rrom ,ns,de. Trus usualty appr,,,s to bathroom. bedroorn C< Clff,ce doors Some
models may nave a pinhote on the outs,de for unlocking 111e door ,n an ~mergency.
ENTRANCE Door Lever Handles or Knobs are used on cloors that requ.-e a key lo lock
a (8)0
IN OUT
llie door lrom the out~ide or inside. Some key!ock der.,gns aio'N ye,., to e,Jt the roorn
w,tnout untocimg the cloor whict, locks agam auuimaLJc;;i!y when tt1e !Joor Closes. Others
require you LO tum a small rota~no knob IO IXllGCk lhe ooor a1vJ ex1l Other types requre a
key for both door handles These locks rue most commonly usec: for extenor doors.
D 110 lock or latch
00
DUMMY Door Lever H~ndlcs or Knobs r,,y.i used oo doors the! requ,re a h.andle but
11eiUlef a do01 lock nor a lalch. They do not rotate and are for purely ornamental pur-
poses. T ltey are typically surface mounted to a sold cJW< th3l ctoes not have a 1y hole cut
-
out for o handle. Ttiey are most com11'10f11y u;ec, on French Doors or other decoret1ve
lN OUT 1nte00< applicallcns wt.ere s.~curi1y and pnvacy 1s no! n concern.
• ~~J+~-~:1£~1¥~~o~fr
t1 .~~i=°t~~~~~~~==--
•• 506. Study different types of door openings and its illustrations (left-handed/right-
handed/inward/outward/etc.)
507. For a Hospital Operating Room with Double Doors, which is the most appropriate
a. Deadbolt
b. Knob Type Door Lock on one side and Deadbolt at the other side
c. No Lock, Double Swing Door
d. Doub!~ Swing Door with hydraulic mechanism to close the doors automatically at the
tj top of oath leaves
508. What is the most appropriate type of Door for a Hotel entrance?
c. Double- Swing Doo~
Cl a. Double- Sliding Door
b. Revolving Door d.
l Rooms with a Connecting Door, which is the most appropriate
oa
509. For adjacent Hote_
a. Deadbolt on one side
b. Lever Type Locksets on both sides
c. Knob T~pe Door lock on one side and Deadbolt on the other side
d. Magnetic Strip lock
t:.1 510. The most appropriate type for a Residential Door is
a. Door Knob with push lock on both sides of the leaf
t:J b. Lever Type locksets on both sides

c. K~o_b Type Door lock on one side and Deadbolt on the other side
d. Sliding Door with Barrel lock
r;l 511. Type of Door best used for toilet is (choose from given illustrations)
512. Type of Lockset best used for toilet is
a. Outs!de and Inside knobs can be opened with keys
d b. Outside knob can be opened with a coin

c. No lock on both sides
tl P cl f'. C 39 j 78
145
BLDG TEC H JPT RFVI E\i\' CENH.R INC
I
) I '"
....o. -
u
p L e v er H a ndl e Doo rk n ob
lkl H a ndlcset Typ es of ··ooorknob s"
a
P assage Privacy K e yed Entrance Lock
513. Study the figures above 1J
514 . Type of Doo rknob best used for toilet
a Keyed c Privacy
b. Dummy d . Passage
515 When two doors close into ea ch other, and only one doo r 1s opened and closed
regula rly , which doorknob will you use for "balance " and aesthetics?
a Keyed c . Privacy
516 When your client wants a doorknob , for the children 's playroom , that does not lock on
either side of the door, which will you recommend?
a. Keyed c. Privacy
517 Which Doo r Knob is best for an Outdoor Storage?
518 . W hich Door Knob is best used on a bedroom closet
'r --
)
A B C
519 Fig ure A 1s used in wha t kind of door ?
a. Wooden c . Plas tic
b. Metal d , Fire Doo r
520 In th e Phi lippines , wh ich materia l 1s usuall y used for Figure B ?
a. Stee l c. Silver
b . Coppe r d . Alum inum
52 1. Fig ure C 1s used for
c1 . Awning Win dows onl y c . Bifold Door
..J O \ 78
1&JC,
BLDG TFCr1 JPT Rl::V IEv\ Cl: l'I TER INC
b Cc1se rne nt Windows onl y d . Both Awnmg and Cas em ent

522 . It is a lock ing device that is att ached to the surface of a door. It is insta lled o n th e face
and the frame of the door using scre ws . nails or fasten ers .
a . Rim Lock c. Mortise Lock
b . Cylinder Lock d . Dead Bo lt
g
] 523 .
a.
Th e figure show n above 1s called?
Rin'l Lock c. Electri c Rim Lock
b. IT Ri m Lock d . Automa tic Door Lock
524 . It 1s a lo ck that is requi res a pocket to be cut into the door into which 1t 1s fitted . It acts
as a door knob and a dead bolt.
a . Rim Lock c. Mo rt ise Lock
b . Cylinde r Lock d. Dead Bolt
@] B
':,'
'1.;
t: - I
C
1
I.I
I
I
I
tl
D E
525 . From the figures above , which is the Wedg e Bolt/ Parrot Beak Hook ?
526 . From the figures above, which is the Security Pins?
52 7. Fro m the figures above, which is the Deadbolt?
528 From the figures above, which is the Mushroom?
529 From the fig ures above , which is the Downward Hook?
530. Identify the Figure at right
a. Foldable Pa rt ition c Fi xed Wall
b. Movable Partition d . Zigzag Wall
A C
y
c:~
' 531 .
a M e tal
h . 11PVC
c. Wood
r'
From th e figures above . le tter A 1s a Sl1d1ng Door hardwa re for
d . A lum inu m
532 . From !he figu ,es above , le!te , B 1s a Schlosser window security hand le fm
rl . M e ta l c Wood
4l I /8
147
~LDG l t CH JPT RE VIE:W CENTER IN(
b . uPV C d. Aluminum
533 . From the fig ures above , letter C 1s a Sliding Door Mortise Lock for
a . Metal c. Wood
b . uPVC d . Aluminum
) A\ l BI C
. ,·· r,
•~ )
u I , --- \!_; \
-~
j
a
u I
I. )....,
...
,\
JI'
, .
m 534 . From the figures above , where

a. Kitchen
can you see letter A?
c. T & B
b. Office d. Main Door
I 535 . From the figures above , where

a. Glass Bedroom Door
can you find letter B?
c. Glass Main Door
b. uPVC Door d. Glass Shower Door
I 536 . From the figures above , where

a. Chairs
can you find letter C?
c. Slid ing Glass Door
b. Tables d Sliding Screen Door
I 537 . How do you install a Stainless

a. From the top
Steel Sink?
c. Depends on the Arch 1tecl/Owner
b. From the bottom d. Depends on the Design of the Sink
I '
I \
I \
II
II 538 . The Owner has a ready Stainless Steel Sink shown above . How should it be installed?
a. From the top c. Depends on the ArchitecUOwner
-- b. From the bottom
()
d. It is old, do not use it
--
-
539 The Owner has a read y Stainless Steel Sink shown above . How should it be installed ?
a. From th e top
-12 I 78
148
~Ll.JG TECH JPT REVIF W CENTER INC
b . Fram th e bottom
butting
540. W hat 1s a short flat piece of lumber which is bolted, nailed or screwed to two
I pieces in order to splice them together ?

54 1 A type of Joint used for tensione d joinery
a . Fish Joint c. Scarf Joint
l b . Mortise Joint d. Squared Splice Joint

542 . It 1s the simplest form of the splice joint and is common ly used to Join structura
ers
l
are to be
member s where either great strength is NOT required or mechan ical fasten
] used .
a . Half Lap Splice Joint c. Tabled Splice Joint
b . Bevel Lap Splice Joint d. Tapered Finger Splice Joint
] 543. It is the Art or Craft of form ing joints especial ly in Woodwo rk
544 . Wood Connect ors are Stronge r when
a. Perpend icular to Grain c. Diagona l to Grain
b . Parallel to Grain d.
Bow, Cup, Crock)
545 . Lumber Defects (Knots, Cross Grain , Checks, Shakes, Splits, Twist,
to accomm odate another member in
o 546 . In the vernacul ar term, what is cut in solid wood

order to prevent water seepage
a. vaciada c.
b. canto mesa d.
□ 547 . It 1s the Vernacu lar Term for Rabbet Joint

548 . How are you going to put¾" thick plywood, in uneven surface?
a. A ngle bar plus plywood c. Concrete nail
□ b. Liquid nail d . Not possible

549 . Rabetted Door Jamb
550. Which of the following moldings is used to avoid term ination?
t1 a. Cyma Reversa
b. Cyma Reeta
c. Ovolo
d.
Astragal
CJ 1 fillet and fascia, 2 torus ,
3 reeding , 4 cavetto,
t1 55 1.
5 scotia, 6 conge, 7 beak
A molding curv ing away from a given surface and
terminating that surface
(j 552 . Wh ich molding is best for ceiling corners?
a.
[J
b
Cl 553. The Joint shown at right is the simplest and weakest joint.
What is this Joint?
C] a. Lap Joint c. Miter Joint
b Finger Joint d . Butt Joint
eJ 554 . Identify the type of wood joint used ,n the figure

a Lap Joint c. Miter Joint
b Finger Jo,nt d Butt Joint
rJ 555 , What c:1 11gle 1s used for Miter?
a. 4 5 deg c. 60 deg
a 'J'J6
b '30 deg
The Joi nt shown at right is a
a Miter Joint
d 40 cleg
I'
Q b Rabbet Jo111t
L Spl1n,1 J(J1n l
I
( 3 I 18
1qq
BLDG l lCH JPT REV IEW CE NTER 1NC
d F1nge 1 Joint
557 It is the least ettect1ve joining method , but most com m only used due to its ease
558 What kind of joint is shown at ri ght?
a Miter
b Rabb et
c. Spline
d . Finge r
559 . A woodworking Joint made by cutting a set
complementary cu t in two pieces of wood which are then glued togeth E
Fing er Joint. The Finger Joint shown at right is also called as a
I• ',,.-1
a. Complementary Joint c. Overlapping Joint
r r-
b . Spline Joint
560. The Join t at rig ht is ca lled
d . Box Joint
e(; / ✓
a Lap Joi nt .,, . / "-i __ .,/
(, . ' . I
'"-":?:~ ¥
b. Mortise and Tenon ............... ,.,.
c. Miter Joint
d. Butt Joint
l 561 . Wl1at is the most rigid type of Wood Joint?
a. Finger Joi nt c. Dado Joint .
. .
b Mortise an d Te non d. Scarf Joint

I 562 . How many Board Foot is 250pcs - 2"x 3"x 10' ?
563 . A nom inal dimension of wood refers to
a. Dressed c. Smooth
l b. Surfaced d. Rough
564 . It refers to lumber that has been processed through a planning machine In order to
attain a smooth surface and uniformity of size on at least one side or edge .
l a. Sun-dried
b . Kiln-dried
c. Dressed
d. Rough
565 . A lumber which is cut but not finished is referred to as?

a. S4S c. Kiln-Dried
l b. Su n-Dried d. Rough Lumber
566 A lumber surfaced on 4 sides which is less than the advertised dimension when sold .
a. Sandblasted Lumber c. Kiln-Dried
j b . S4S d. SLR1E
56 7. A board that has 2 flat faces and then has one edge ripped straight is referred to as?
a. S2S c. S4S
I b. S3S
568 It re fers to undressed lumber
d. Sandblasted Lumber
a. Green Lumber
l b. Rough Lu mber
569 . The Figure is what type of joint?
c. Cull
d.
570 Th e Figu re is wha t type of joint?

/·
4 /,,. _
57 1
. «-:?·
rhe figure Is what type of joi nt?
a Dov eta il
b Butterfl y
c. Mi ter
cJ . Mortise ancJ Tenon
150
- JPT RE VI EW CEN TER INC
BLDG TECH
r 572. The joint sh own at right is used when the

length required. What do you call this joint?
maten
. 1 b ·
a s erng
· · d is not availa ble in the
Jome
r a. Finger Joint
b. Mortise and Tenon
c. Dado .
d . Scarf Joint
r 573 . The joint shown at rig ht is

a. Doweled Joint
b. Tongu e and Groove
c. Mo1iise and Tenon
o d. Shiplap
574. A post supporting one end of a handrail at the top or bottom
of a
r 575.
flight of stairs is called?
a. Balluster
b . Curtail
The te rminal
·
feature of a
> ·- ·· · ·.
newef_ post·s
c. Newel
d.
ffown at. right is called ?
c. Newel Cap
j a. BallLister
b. Curtail
·
d . Newel Ball
576 . What is 2" x ·12" and suppor ts the treads
~ ,
a. Riser ,,. ~: ., c. Nosing
b . Closer d. String er
a 577. -The projecting pa1i of a.stair tread

a. Closer
b. Nosing
578 . The step at tile foot of a flight of stairs
extend
,
ing
c.
d.
widene
beyon d the riser.
d at one or both
.
ends and
• · .
having a
[f scroll termin ation.
a. Curtail Step c. Step Boa rd
·
b. Side Step d. Scroll Step

t]: 579. Where is Cocoiurnber least used?
a. Fu rniture c. Forms
d. Face String
a b. Door Jarnb
580. Building products made of wood that are produc
mojdings, door and window frames, door, windo ws, blinds
ed in a ptanni ng
and stairs
·
mill such as
but exclud ing
·
flooring , ceiling s an d sidings are collect ively called?
tl a. Carpentry wo !'ks
b. M ; ! ht ✓ or k
c. Wood works
d . Lumbe r orod ucts
58 1. Wh ich of the followi ng is NOT a rnillwo rk? '
2- . Chaii handle c. Dress er
~ b. Cor_:i!ce . . d . Ra ilings
5o2 . WrHcn of the f0How1ng 1s i\iOT a millwo rk?
a. BalustradE, c . Baseb oard
,· ,,., t . Cornice . · d . Cabin et Drawe r
:.J8.:i. Which of lhe following is NOT a millwo rk?
a . Do or Stopper C.
IA/
I
r o D. vvo?den LecJgo d.
oo4. ::Vh1ch of the foliowing is NOT a m illwork ?
a. vharr Handle
, c .
o. ornI ce .
c. Dress er
d R .1.
c35 11iA '/1wor k P·1aced betwee n Wall and Ceiling . el l mo
J • · m
a. Wooden Ledge , . .,, .
b. Cornic e c. Wain_ ,cot
f r ·
586 ·rh·18 type o vl1flwork is stron r · ti -,·
, . d . Ra il .
._ .
·
a. Wood g , ign weight, resi sts watm and insect infesta tion.
c. Wood -adhe sive compos ites ·
b. PVC
S8 7 Wh at i<' v,· .d • I~ .d .1 . d. Synth
of ·i·
etics
· _, • k 1.o w ' imperfections at edges~, ?e1 1ngs .
?
a. 13ase Board
J:>. Cornice c. Mullion
I' · u:,ull t0 lvJ0 t h e ➔ curtain rod?
. I·, r~; d.
t ,) )'8. . Wh
>' - ,c
:.:1 . b as8 Btx:1rd
c. Cu rt ain Covt)
P age 45 I 78
151
b. Cornice d. Curta in
589. Which of the following is not a hardware?
a. D·o or Jamb c. Door Panel
b. Door Knob d. Door Stopper
590. Which of the following is a hardware item?
a. Door Jamb c. Door Casing
b. Door Lea"f d. Door Stopper
591. Matimco is known for?
a. Natural Stone c. Steel
b . Wood Products d. Concrete
592. A kind of wood that has a lot of knot
l 593. The wood derived from a Conifer or gymnosperm trees is a
a. Hardwood c.
b. Softwood d.
594. The wood derived from non-monocot angiosperm trees is a
J a. Hardwood c.
b. Softwood d.
I 595 . Which of the following is not a hardwood?
a. Ta ng uile c. Molave
b. ·Teak d . Pine
0 596 . A piece of lumber with knots can be used for what?
a. Door Jamb c. It is weak and cannot be used
b. Interior Beam d.
B 597. It is a Wood Product with Solignum
598. Which is not a Termite Treatment? Several choices were given
599. How will you prevent termite infestation?
a a. Lason
b. Soil treatment
c. Soil Poison
d. Hire a termite specialist
600. An organic, non-toxic treatment for wood against term ites and other insects.
a. Lindane c. Pentachlorophenol
b. D~Wrin d.Borax
C 601. It is used as a Jamb Preservative
602. Pertains to lumber seasoned under controlled conditions of heat, air circulation and
a humidity
a. Oven-baked
b. Kiln-dried
a
a
a
I
r
r
P d g e 46 I 78
152
BLDG TECH JPT REVIEW Cl:N I 1:H INL
PART2
603 . Why are Metal Tubes Square?

604 . Why are Round Columns better?
a . Have the same Radius of Gyration on all sides
b . Easier to Detail
c. More Economical
d. Faster to Install
605. Why is Steel more Economical to use in Spaces?
a. It has a high Height to Weight Ratio c.
b. d. .
606. When Rust is present in Structural Steel, it can be rem edied by
a. Scraping the Rust off c.
b. Coating with Rust Converter d.
607 . It is the most common material for Trusses .
a. Angle Bar b. Channel c. Wide Flange d. Tubular
608. This is NOT used to connect Steel Trusses
l a. Bolts and Nuts b. Rivets
609 . Which of the following can be reused?
c. Liquid Nail d. Welding
a. Rivets c. Liquid Nail

I b. Bolts and Nuts
610. This material is NOT recommended for Purlins
d. Welding Rods
a. Wood c. PVC
I b. Flat Bar
611. Wh ich of the fo llowing is the weakest?
d.
a. Rivets c. Bolts
I b. Nails d. Welding
NOTE: This question is lacking since it is not specific as to what type of connector and
what is being connected. Many will automatically answer rivets thinking of "blind
I rivets" but you should know that all three choices except for UNails" are being used in
connecting Structural Steel. Thus, making Nails the "weakest"
612. It is the Steel commonly used for the Sidings of Warehouses
I 613. What is the purpose of Rigid Frames Form?
614 . The figure denotes
r
rt
a. Balloon Frame Construction
I b. Steel Construction
c. Pre-fab Construction
d. Space Frame Construction
]
I 615. What is the relationship of an enclosed building with not much natural lighting to one
with skylights but with complicated wall frame system?
616 . Which steel section will you use for a door jamb in order to give an illusion of a
!I wooden fin ish?
a. Tubular HSS c. Channel
b. Angular d. Flange
I 617. A metal forming process in which metal stock is passed through one or more pairs of
ROLLS to re.duce the thickness and to make the thickness uniform. The concept is
I similar to the rolling of dough in bakeries. If metal is rolled above its recrystallization
temperature, it is called
a. Cold Rolling c. Roll Forming
I b. Hot Rolling d. Controlled Rolling

618 . A metal formi ng process in which metal stock is passed through one or more pairs of
ROLLS to reduce the thickness and to make the thickness un iform. The concept is
I similar to the rolling of dough in bakeries . If metal is rolled below its recrystallization
temperature, it is called
a. Cold Rolling c. Roll Forming
I b. Hot Rolling d. Controlled Rolling

fi 19. It is the act of Plugging an open ing with Oakum, Lead.
P a ge 47 I 78
t
JPT REVIEW CENT ER INC
BLDG TE.C H
620 Why is a 15 x 30 Beam /Colu mn NOT advis able?

er foreca st says tha t a storm Is ab out to
621 . Pouri ng of Conc rete was sched uled but weath
come . What are you going to do?
a . Chan ge the Mix of Conc rete c . Provi de a large cloth over the area
b . Add Enha ncers d . Resch edule the pourin g of concr ete
it starts to rain heavi ly , what w ill you
622 . Pouri ng of Concr ete is ongoi ng when sudde nly
do?
a. Cove r concr ete with tarpau lin c.
b . Stop and resch edule pourin g d.
nd floor slab , it is very impor tant to maint ain moist ure
623 . After pourin g concr ete for your 2
mend ?
on the concr ete for prope r curing . Which would you recom
a. Cove r the slab with wet cardb oard boxes
lin
b. Cover the slab with polye thylen e sheet s or tarpau
c. Wate r Pondi ng
d. Nothin g . The faster it dries the better.
624 . Ceme nt Admix tures
625 . What are Plasti cizers ?
l 626 . What is Concr ete?
627. What is added to concr ete to alter its prope rties?
b. Retar der c. Plasti cizer d . Accel erato r
a. Admix tures
I 628 . Curing time for concr ete in # of days
629 . Unit weigh t of Concr ete
.m
a. 2354 kg/cu m . b. 23 .54 kN/cu .m. c. 24 .00 kN/cu .m . d . 2400 km/cu
I I B I
'___ J
I
I
I
I LfJ
-
-I
.
~
-~
,,
;~
.,
. . . . . .....
v:.,... . . ,..~ - •..-r- ..... . .
:·~ ' .,
-.... ~
-·-- llll
~
I
,ib i_ e_ I
--
' 630. From the figu re s above , identif y lette r A
a. Porta ble Gene rator
b. Sump Pump
c. V ibrato ry Com pactor
d . Conc rete Vibra to r
..i8 I 78
151
631 . From the figures above , "A" is used for?

632. From the figures above, identify letter 8
a. Air Gunning c. Sand Blasting
b. Shotcrete- Wet Gunning d. Gunite- Dry Gunning
633. From the figures above, identify letter C
a. Floor Sander c. Concrete Float
b. Power Trowel d. Marble Sander
634 . From the 'figures above, "C" is used for?
635. From the figures above, identify letter D
a . Transit mixer c. Boom Conc,·ete Pump (pumpcrete)
b. Stationary Concrete Pump (pumpcrete) d . Telescopic Crane Pump
G36 . From the figures above, "D" is used for?
637 . From the figures above, identify letter E
a. Philips Screw c. Lag Bolt
l b. Hex Bolt
638. From the figures above , letter F is used where?
d. Carriage Bolt
a. Concrete c. Timber
l b. Steel d. Concrete and Steel
639. From the figures above , letter Fis a weld stud that is used
a. to bend rebars c. as a decoration
I b. as a shea r connector d. for lifting steel elements

640 . .A.t the start of concrete pouring , a cylinder test is done. How many days is the concrete
cured before being tested to get roughly half the strength of its final cured strength?
a. 7 days c. 28 days
b. 14 days d.
641. The allowable maxim um slump for Slabs, Beams and Colum ns is
a a. 2in
b. 3in
c.4in
d.6in
642. Steps in Laying of Wall and Column Footing
tl 643. You want to erect a house with raised flooring, what do you ca ff the exposed concrete
colu mns?
a. Stilt c. Pedestal
b. Pier d. Pile
644. In Prefab Construction, what do you call the process of transferring and reconstruction
of parts on the site?
tl a. Installation
b. Assembly
c. Reassembly
d.
645. What is the disadvantage of using Precast Concrete Beams?
j a. Larger Beam Depths c. The beam s tend to lose anchorage
b. Weak Concrete d.
646. What type of Precast is popular because aside from providing structural support, it could
also be utilized as a floor?
c. Tee and double tee beams c. Soffit
d . Waffle Slabs d.
0 !~
647. Wha_t the advantage of conventional construction over precast
a. Flex1b1l1 ty , c. Faster
a b. Cost d. Good Quality Control

648. What is the BEST way to avoid Damage of Aluminum sections during Concreting/
Masonry works?
c. Cover with Plastic
a a. P_owder Coat
b. Finish ALL Masonry Works
649. Given 300, nm x 300mm Columns
before Installation d.
and 200mm wide beams. For sim plicity of d · ,
-i•r b·i·ty d . es1gn
t t I
s ru_c ura s a , 1 an economical purposes , where is the best placement of
Perimeter Beams'!
a. Outer Side of the Columns c. Center of the Columns
b. Inner SicJe:: of the Columns d . Doesn't Matter
~) c1 .'?- , 49 I 78
165
Jf>T REVltW Lt l'l I ti\ ,m ..
BLDG TECH
650. A simple beam extending beyon d its suppo rt at ONE end.

a. Overh angin g Beam c. Conti nuous Beam
b. Doub le Overh anging Beam d. Truss ed Beam
651. A beam exten ding over more than two supports
a. Overh angin g Beam c. Conti nuous Beam
b. Double Overh angin g Beam d. Truss ed Beam
beyon d its suppo rts on both ends
652 . A simple beam with both ends exten ding
a. Overhanging Beam c. Conti nuous Beam
b. Doub le Overhanging Beam d. Truss ed Beam
of a sleev e openi ng in a RC Beam ?
653. W here is the best location
a. Near the Supp ort c. L/2
b. L/3 d. L/4
654. Walls at Prope rty Lines
c. Shea r Wall
a. Retaining Wall
d.
t b. Fire Wall
655. Walls at the Basem ent
a. Retaining Wall c. Shea r Wall
l b. Fire Wall
656. Where should the Perim eter of a Basem ent be?
d .
a. Aligne d with the Perim eter Wall of the Building

I b. From the Prope rty Line
c. 2m from the sides and rear of the building and 4 .5m
from the front
d.
I 657. W hen building a small reside nce house, which of
a. Pre cast c.
the follow ing is not practi cal
b. On site d.
only used in the Philip pines .
m 658. Weigh t of a typical ceme nt bag
a. 25 kg
most comm
c. 40 kg
b. 30 kg d. 50 kg
! 659. A small reside ntial project with an area of_
with concrete. What is best?
sqm on the secon d floor will be poure d
a. Manual mix c. 2 Bagge r mixer

i b. Ready mix concrete
660. What is the most practical method to use if you
d. 1 Bagge r mixer
will pour concr ete for a 4 cu.m. slab?
i b. Ready mix concrete d. 1 Bagge r mixer
661 . What is the most practical method to use if you
will pour concr ete for a 5 cu.m. slab?
jj b. Ready mix concrete d. 1 Bagge r mixer
662. What is the mosi practical method to use if you
will pour concr ete for a 6 cu.m . slab?
a. Manu al mix c. 2 Bagge r mixer
b. Ready rn ix concr ete d. 1 Bagg er mixer
66 3. The floor slab nses about 0.10 - 0.15m from this
c. Eaves
i1 a. Ledge
b. Gutte r
how
d.
many
Fascia Board
bags of ceme nt will you use?
664. For a 1 cu.m. Class A concrete mix,
a a. 10 bags
b. 9 bags
c. 8 bags
d. 7 bags
665. For a 2 cu.rn. Class B concrete mix, how many 40kg
bags of ceme nt will you use?
40kg bags of ceme nt will you use?
66G. For a 3 cu.m. Class C concrete mix, how many
d 667. Class A is NOT recommend ed for
c. Slab on fill
·
a. Beam & Girde r
a b. Pathwalk
668. What 1s the ratio for a Class A concrete mix?
a. 1·11/2:3
d. Slab
C. 1:21/2 :5
u b. 1:2:4 d . 1:3:6
fl t1 ,; c so I 78
669 . A Concrete mixture of 1:1 ½:3 is classified as?

a. Class AA c. Class B
b . Class A d. Class C
670 . A concrete m ixture of 1:2 ½:5 is classified as?
a. Class AA c. Class B
b. Class A d. Class C
671 . What is the strength of a Class B mixture?
a. 2500 psi c. 3500 psi
} b . 3000 psi d. 4000 psi
672. A Con crete mixture of 1:3:6 is classified as?
a . Class AA c. Class B
J b. Class A
673. A mixture of 1 :2:4 has a strength of?
d. Class C
a. 2500 psi c. 3500 psi

J b. 3000 psi
674 . For mass concrete, machinery foundation
d. 4000 psi
and bind ing, this concrete m ix is used
a. 1:2:3 c. 1:3:6
ra b. i :2:4 d. 1:3.5:7
675 . Using 40kg Cements bags, 0.5cu.m. Sand and 1cu.m. gravel , how many cement bags
will you use to come up with a concrete strength of 3500psi?
0 a. 12
b. 9.0
C. 7.5
d. 6.0
676 . Using 40kg Cements bags, 0.5cu.m. Sand and 1cu.m. gravel, how many cement bags
will you use to come up with a concrete strength of 2000psi?
a. 6.0 C. 9.0
o b. 7. 5
677. Concrete Mixtures Proportion (Class)
678 . Wh ich is NOT considered for a concrete mix?
d. 12
a. Strength c. Economy
b. Durabilrty d. Flexibility
67 9. Proper sequence in mixing concrete
a. Cement, Sand , Gravel, Water c. Sand, Cement, Gravel, Water
b. Sa nd, Cement, Water, Gravel d. Sand, Gravel. Cement, Water
680. Using Class B mixture for a wa ll measuring 3m x 3m x 0.1 0m, how many bags of
cement will you use?
[j 681 . Wh ich is NOT a cement brand?
a. Dragon c. Island
b. Rock Land d. Rizal
682. When water is added to cement, several chemical reactions occur that causes the
formation of a cement paste which will harden or become solid. What do you call this
t1 process?
a. Plasticization
b. Hyd ration
c. Solidification
d. Stratification
Cl 683. Identify what is shown in the figure at right . ·,:0caNc~i! S_\ile- flCOl<
a. Sleeper c. Screed · _l · · ~
ti b. Nailer
684. Adv isable thickness for
d.
c.
a. Interio r Walls
b. Exterior Walls d.
685. What is used to adhere Concrete Plaster on the surface of a Plywood Wall?
686. How many CHB can be placed in 1sqn, ?
If"-•':'~• · "' ·.:•· "Lll.~ :~i-;;-, ·-.•:..·".~
ij 687 Identify the Figure at right
a. Garden wall bon d
f;' · ,., •
! . :ic,., .dy-~m
..1!:l
a
b. English bond
c. Flemish I'
~ • , R~ '"'"'' -Jr..J;.:-~~;a :f!J
-
~
r,.:JL ~ .·
1?~~~
_ , I ::i-1-;_ ,Ml!.!.~ ~
·"' .i/,;:t, ~ l!l..,H.!,lm:JlMl! G
ilW ...w,,oll!l,i.J~\I IC:li ~ I
r J g c s1 I 78
1!7
BLDG TEC H JPT R!:: VIEW CENTER INC
6 88. Identify the Figure at right

l a . Flemish Bond
b . Running Bond
c. English
j d English Garden Bond
] 689 . Identify the fig ure at right

a . Flemish Bond
b . Running Bond
J c. English Bond
d. Stack Bond
n 690 . Identify the figure at right

a. Flem ish Bond
b . Running Bond
i c. English Bond
d. Stack Bond
i
i
.. -;'
A
11
I C
-
D
E F
69 1. From the figures above , identify Figure A
)J a. Header b. Shiner c. Sailor d. Stretcher
692. From the figures above, identify Figure B
a. Rowlock b. Header
ij c. Soldier
693 . From the figu res above, identify Figure C.
d . Stretcher
a. Shiner b. Stretcher c. Header d. Rowlock

694. From the figures above, identify Figure D.
I a. Stretcher b. Header
695 . From the figures above, identify Figure E.
c. Rowlock d . Soldier
I a. Soldier b. Sailor
696. From the figures above, identify Figure F.
a. Soldier b. Sailor
c. Rowlock
c. Rowlock
d . Header
d. Header
I 697. STUDY DK CH ING's topic on Concrete Masonry Units

698. The CH B is also called in other countries as
a. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) c. Concrete Hollow Unit (CHU )
I b Con crete Masonry Block (CMB) d. Concrete Block Unit (CBU)
-
-
--
- 151
52 I 18
699 . Which material used for Garden Wall is easily broken by hand ?
a. Sandstone c. Flagstone
,,
b. Limestone
- ,.,~
d.
..,
l
A
'
j B E
l
i C
700 . From the figures above , identify A
F
a . Header Block C. Bu llnose Block

] b Slump Block
70 1. From the figures above, identify B
d. Scored block
a . Bond Beam Block c. Sill Block

! b . Corner Block
702 . From the figures above , identify C
d. Scored Block
a. Lintel Block C . Sill Block
:2 703
b. Corner Block
From the fi gures above , identify D
d . Slump Block
a. Bond Beam Block C. Adobe Block

i b. Bullnose Block
704 . From the figures above , identify E
d. Slump Block
a. Bullnose Block c. Scored Block

i b. Lin tel Block
70 5. From the figures above, identify F
d. Sill Block
a. Lintel Block C. Scored Block

tl 706
b. Bullnose Block
Purp ose of CHB with two hollow core
d. Sill Block
I, i ,1..11)~t,·•I J1q 1f 'S l )1 ,·n1:
ii
jl
Iv J"1• ,•(! w111rJ."1 ,..,1tt1 l'uv, 1 Mt• 'Jol\

.,
I •1 , ,
h h.1• ',
"'1-'·' ' ') '·,Jt·f•l /Jl,lfJ fhl:1/i.,
I
II
I 707 Th e construction system shown above uses high streng th, load bea ri ng modular
panels with a layer of galvanized mesh on either side of an EPS core, welded together
4 by galvanized steel diagonals wh ich penetrate through the EPS (Expanded
53 I 78
l 151
JPT REV IE W CENTER INC
BL DG TECH
Polystyrene) core. The panels are joined the the desired con figuration on site and
sprayed with concrete to form a sandwich type construction . What is th is co nstruction
system?
a EPS Construction System c. EPS-30 Construction System
b. Galvanized Wesh Co nstruction System d. EVG-30 Construction System
]
]
r r
~ 708 . What is sh ow n in the Figure above?

a. Sa ndwich Panel Board c. EVG-3D
b. EPS Core Pa nel d. Polyethylen e Panel
a 709. A hardener mixture mixed with dust

a. Tefl on
b. Po lymer
to fi ll-up gaps in marble and wall finishes
c. Truscon
d.
a '.' ... -. ,:\t~;~-r,,i

L · ~~~(?· ·t.. 1
f il ~::"1t.\}:-~ . . ,.7(
. .. t ?,'.~~ ~ v·~(( ~~.), '
□
I. -,.:
; ·. L ' .\.tlf·\.~,\, ,./

~(.J~- -·~~:.1•t •it~dZ!'J. .~
A B C
0
t1
t1 7 10 .
0 E
Wha t is the finish made of chips of marble or other stone pieces set in cement binder
wh ich is shown in Figure A?
tl a. Terrazzo
711. What do you call the
b. Marble Fin ish
economical concrete
c. Granite Tile
finish shown in Figure B?
d. Marble Tile
d. Trowel Finish
a. Float Fin ish b. Broom Finish c. Brush Finish
t1 7 12 What do you call the finish shown

a. Paper/Plast ic Li ning b. Stenciling
in Figure C?
c. Embossed Pavers d. Painted Paver
713 What 1s shown in Figure D?
Lt a. Pebble Washo ut
b. Exposed Aggregate Finish
c. Sand Blasted
d. Bush Hammered
71 4. What do you call th e style of fin is h shown on Figure E?
(1 a. Con crete Stencil c. Brick Flooring
b. Decorative Sh ine Finish d. Stamped Concrete
715. What will absorb more heat?
tJ a. Da rk Bri ck b. Light Brick
71 6 What material decreases heat gain ?
c. Clay Brick d.
a. Ye llow Pa vers b. Concrete Pav ers c. Black Pavement d. Green Pavers

tl
s-1 I 18
'"o
BLDG TEC H
7 17 . If you are to cove r a pathway that is 3m x 1Om us ing 2 " x

4'' x 6" pavers , how many pave rs will you use?
718 . What material is Heat absorbing , used as Unglazed Tile,
2·· Stamped Pav ement Dark Brick?
7 19. What building material should be used on a path wa lk to
dec re ase heat and glare?
720 . Which mate rial used fo r pavement comes in different
shapes and co lor?
a. Concrete Pavement c. CHB
b . Concrete Pavers d.
721 . Which could be used for Exterior Wa ll? , . , ., 1
l a. Gypsum
b. 19mm Plywood
c. Ha rdboard
d. Plyboard
t,, ,.1rlt
t,.-. 11th , •.. ,,

u
722 . Which W al l material TRAN SM ITS the most heat into the
room?
a. Glass c. CHB
b Plywood d.
723 . Which Wall ma teri al PREVENTS the most heat from
entering the room ? I ,.r 1 ..... ,11 ..
c. CHB
a
a. Glass 1.,,. ·1 11
1},w,r l.1h
1
b. Plywood d. " iNB!NidTM

L
724 . An enlarged area between th e THROAT of a Fireplace
and the CHI MNEY .
a. Ch imney Flu e
b Th roa t Damper
c c. Smoke Chamber
d. Smoke Shelf
725 . A passive sol ar bu ilding technique where a Wall is bu ilt with a Glass external layer to
absorb heat du ring sunlit hours and then slowly release the heat at night. This was
il patented by Edward S. Morse in 1881 . It was later fully developed as an arch itectura l
element by the French engineer Felix Trombe and
~
fl!?;
~i•
- ~
-·-.· ,.._ ,,n,
architect Jacq ues Michel. 0
c. Morse Wall 11\i ·· •• ,.. ro" '"& M<•"

a. Trombe Wall
b Michel Wall
at rig ht is
d. Solar Heated Wall
~ \
111
·
1
~=====
8
·"•c
,P,
0
"'
72 6. The figure shown

a. Trombe Wall c. Exterior and Interior Finish System --- - - .uh""'
b. EIFS Wall d. Solar Heated Wall ~t ; ~, ~
727 . What is EIFS? ,..
tl a. Environmenta l Interior Frame System

b. Environ mental In sulation Finishing System
c. Exterior Insulation Finishing System
t1 d. Exterior-Interior Frame System
728 . A type of cement that sets and hardens when combined with water
a. Liquid Cement c. Hydraulic Cement ·
tl b. Water Cement d. Waterproofi
729. A mixture of amorphous silica that reacts to water
ng Cement
a. Cement c. Gravel
t1 73
b. Sand d. Plywood
o. Wha t _do you call aggrega tes that pass thru a No . 40 sieve but is reta ined on a No ·
200 sieve?
a. Gravel c. Fine Sand
, b. Coarse Sand d. Silt-Clay
731 What do you ca ll agg regate s that pa ss thru a No . 1o sieve but is retained on a No · 40
sieve?
a. Gravel c. Fine Sand
b Coarse Sa nd d. Silt-Clay
':i '.) I 78
'" 1
BLDG TFCH JPT REVIE W CEN TER INC
732 What do you call aggregate s that pass thru a 3" sieve bu t Is reta ined on a No 10
sieve?
a Gravel c. Fine Sand
b Coarse Sa nd d . Silt-Clay
733 What do you ca ll aggregates that pass th ru a No. 200 sieve?
a. G ravel c. Fine Sand
b. Coarse Sand d. Silt-Clay
734 . How do you order Sand?
a Pe r Square Meter c. Per Kilo
b. Per Cubic Meter d. Per Elf
735 . What happens to the newly placed concrete in the beams , slabs or columns if it 1s not
properly vibrated?
a Honeycomb . c. Slow to harden
b. The concrete w ill not achieve its design strength d .
736 . Honeycomb can be minimized by using
a . Chlordane chemical c. Concrete Vibrator
b . Admixtures d. Oil on Forms
737. It is the receptacle in which concrete is placed , so that it will have the desired shape or
outline when hardened. Once the concrete develops adequate strength , it is removed .
It is usually made of materials like plywood or steel.
a. Camber c. Stripping
b. Forms d. Lubricants
I 738. Wh ich is not applied to wooden forms?
a. Neoprene c. Oil
b. Diesel d. Wax
I 739 It is provided in the formwork for horizontal members to counteract the effect of
deflection caused by the weight of reinforcement and the concrete.
a. Lubricants c. Camber
I b. Grease
740 . Amount of cam ber if the beam span is 4 00m?
d. Oil
a. 25mm c. 60mm
I b 50mm
741 . It used to stabilize unstable formworks
d. 80mm
a. Shoring c. Nailing
I b. Diagonal Bracing d. Platform
742 . After how many days can you remove the forms used for the footing ?
743 . After concrete pouring (no additives) for the slab , how soon ca n you step on it?
I a. 1 day
b. 2 days
c. 3 days
d. 1 week
744. What holds the mixture of Cement, Sand and Gravel after concrete pouring until it
I becomes solid?
a Water c. Formwork
d. Concrete Binder
I b. Scaffolding
74 5. I~ estimating the amount of formwork , how much allow ance should you add?
c. 15%
a. 51/o
b 10% d. 20%
r 746 The remova l of forms is called
a. Deforming c. Extraction
747 b. Stripping . d. Form Ridging
When should you remove Formwork for side of Beams and Columns ?
a 48 hours c. 7 days
b. 3 days d. 14 days
74 8. When should you re,nove Formwork for Slab/Soffit (props left under)?
a 48 hour~ c. 7 days
IJ 3 days d. 14 days
Sb I 713
1,1.
JPT RE VIEW CENTl:R INC
BLUG Tl:CH
er) ?
rks for Bea m Soff its (pro ps le ft und
749 Whe n sh ould you rem ove Fon nwo
c. 7 day s
a. 48 hou rs
d. 14 day s
b. 3 day s
the prop s?
750 . For 2F Slab s , whe n do you rem ove d . 28 day s
b. 7 day s c. 14 day s
a 3 day s
you rem ove the prop s?
75 1. For Bea ms spa nnin g 6m, whe n do d . 28 day s
a.7 day s
whe n do you rem ove the prop ? s
752 . For Bea ms spa nnin g mor e than 6m, d . 28 day s
,
a 7 day s
ova l.
753 . Pro per proc edu re for For mw ork rem th
nd ) Slab Soff it, (3 rd ) Bea m Soff it , (4 ) Rem
ova l
ms and Colu mns , (2
a (P ) Side s of Bea
1
of prop s for Bea ms
of props for Slab s , (5 ) Rem ova l
th
J nd ) Bea m Soff it, (3 rd ) Rem ova l of prop s tor Slab
th
s , (4 ) Rem ova l of
b. ( p t; Slab Soff it, (2
ms and Col umn s
props for Bea ms , (5t1 ) Side s of Bea nd
1
rd
ms, (2 ) Rem ova l of prop s for
Slab s , (3 ) Slab Sof fit.
c. ( p t) Rem ova l of prop s for Bea
ms and Col umn s
(4 th ) Beam Soff it, (Slh) Side s of Bea rd
nd l of prop s for Bea ms , (3 ) Side s
d. (P 1) Beam Soffit, (2 ) Rem111ova
Soffit, (5 th ) Rem ova l of
of Beams and Colu mns , (4 ) Slab
props for Sla bs and
of pou red- in-p lace con cret e slab
I 754 . This sl ab system con sists
precast/ prestressed inve rted T-B eam
s whic h is ligh t yet cap able
syst em elim inat es the use
of heavy loads and long spa ns . This
i of plywood forms . Wha t do you call
a. Inve rted T
b. T-Joist
the inve rted T-B eam s?
c. Jac ked -T
d . T-P urlin s J-.-c
.
j
. (' • .j '
-
-i' f '
~ ~~ ~ - ·' c· /· ' If~ - - .

I ;.:....,. dci· '- ·· .. m.-c:
-.:- ·- - - ":': -.
-"'-~
. / _- , ,___ ·,;,t./~~'71// , :%~
·: ·,,-( · -~ -~:- ·-, ~ ~ . :~.~~~
/. .,
:,;/'~/,/~f-'0;,.'1 \, r)· '
~.Z'/-b//:'.,::.~ /~?~---- l C
.
✓
.
,.
'
r:·1
, ·l
in ~
l · .: I
-<•• •J . lf
\.:. __ J
-
r~ --- ~
I 755 Wh at is Part A in the ill ustration abo
a . Con crete Insu latio n
ve?
c. Car pet
d. Wat erpr oofi ng
b. Concrete To pping
I 756 . What 1s Part B 1n the illus
a . Concrete Insulatio n
trati on abo ve?
c . Tiles
d. Wat erpr oofi ng
i b . Concre te Top ping
75 7 Wh at is Part C in the illus trati on abo ve?
c. 4"thk Insu latio n r·
<i,
a. Concrete Sla b
d. Wat erpr oofi ng '! I
I ,:; _ b. Concrete Topp ing
7 ,., 8 Wha t is Part D in th e illus trati on abo ve?
c. T-Jo ist
a . Inve rted T
d T p 1.
I 7r.:9 Wh
:J .
b. Jacked-T
at do yo u call the port ion of
•
. - ur ins
the build ing abo ve the grou nd·?·
a. Sub structure c. Sup erst ruct ure
b Column
I 760 From the given illustration at
d. Slab
right, iden tify part A ~ ' " """"'
~ ~
syst ~ni • ....'T"~
d for a floo r
76 1. The . fig ure sho wn is use " _ ~ ·; · • ~-- - . -- 11
sed slab s with ~
cons1st1 ng or prec as t pres tres "" \ . . , ~ f~ i::; ; - ,___ ..
dud in al co res The s e core s op tim ize the use of , ,
long ~c":'.t J- ""
the con cret e volu me
stru ctu ral co n_c rete by_ redu cing
inin g ade qua te I'~ . . . : : ~ ~
~~ ~ ...... -~- .:_ ··;.._1
~nd _slab _weight whil e . still ma inta
ight , cap able f I ' - ·xa1 -·:. , . ~.:".. .
I ~ ~
sec tion p1oµ ert1es . It IS ligh twe , ~ ~ ,--' \ ". ·1

lo nger sµans and doe s not nee d fo rm
slab . Its smo ot h soffit or slab bott
wo rks for tt o
om elim inat es
. ..,, '\ •.,, - .
t ~= .. ~~. .a•
•
A"· '' ½·:.,~~;ti
57 I 78
ff,3
BLDG TECH JPT R[ VIEW CENTER IN C
need for drop ceiling and is ready for painting.

a . Ribbed Slab System c. Hollow Core Slab System
b . T-Joist System d . Precast Beam-Bl ock Slab System
762. The leading manufac turer of Load Bearing CHB in the Philippin es
a. Pacific Concrete Products c. Allied Concrete Products
b. Jackbilt d. Vasquez
763. A building method usually used for the construct ion of silos/ct1imneys, towers and
lately even buildings wherein it relies on the quick-set ting propertie s of concrete and a
balance between early strength gain and workabili ty. Concrete needs to be workable
enough to be placed to the formwork and strong enough to develop early strength so
that concrete pouring is uninterru pted and is poured on a continuo usly moving form .
The result is a cast-in-pl ace, no joint, concrete structure . In the Philippin es, this
method was used in the construct ion of the Pagbilao Power Plant's Chimney .
a. Tunnel Form Method c. 30 Volumetr ic Method
b. Slip Form Method d. Insulating Concrete Formwor k Method
764. The concrete is already mixed but there's an anticipate d heavy rain . What is the best
thing to do?
I a. Put tarpau lin on concrete after pouring
b. Add admixture s to decrease the time of hardenin g
c. Resched ule the pouring of concrete
I d.
765. Due to the anticipated rain , it was decided that pouring for the concrete beam should
be halted. What is the proper way stop concrete pouring?
I a. Perpendi cular to the span
b. Diagonal ly across the span
c. Parallel to the span
d. Half of the Span
766. What is Curing?
I a. Fast drying of concrete
b. Voids in concrete after drying
c. Retaining of water through hydration
d. Mixing of water and cement
767. In a one-store y building, what do you call the concrete where the foundatio n rests?
I a. Blinding/ Lean Concrete
b. Mat
c.
d.
CHB
768. What concrete has no reinforcem ent?

I a. Lean Concrete
b . Concrete Hollow Block
c. Lean Concrete
d. Mass Concrete
769. Ready Mix Concrete should be tested at
I a . Site
b. Plant
c. Office
d. ASTM
is incomple te. Depends on what kind of tes t will be performe d .
I NOTE: question
770. Which of the ff. is NOT applicable when pouring on concrete connectio ns?
a. Connections should be kept clean and free from foreign objects
b. There should be dowels extending beyond the hardened concrete to be able to
I connect to the newly poured concrete
c. Connectio ns between old and new concrete should be perfectly cut at right angles
d. Concrete should be pour~d at a saf~ length of L/3 to L/4 maintain a monolithi c pouring
I 771. T~ese bars are provided m preparati on for the next batch o'f co ncrete pouring.
. c. Stirrups
a. Ties
d. Joists
'
b. Dowels
772. Prior !o concrete po~ring, reinforcin g bars must be in proper position. What do you call
a device for supporting and holding steel TOP bars in its proper position?
c. High Chair
'
a. Bolster
b. Positione r d. Wedge
call
773. Prior !o concrete po~ring, reinforcing bars must be in proper position. What do you
a device for supporting and holding steel TOP bars in its proper position?
a. Bolster c. High Chair
b. Positione r d. Wedge
774. Rough Plas ter finish obtained by flinging on a wall
a. Broom Finish b. Tyrolean Finish c . Ducco Finish d.
·' ·' f c 58 I 78
'"'
775. A skilled person who is utilized for finishing/ plastering/ block laying/ insta lling
tiles/etc.
a. Carpenter c. Painter
b. Finishing Mason d. Forem an
776 . System to be used in filling beams and slabs of concrete together at second floor of
the building
a. Transit Mix c. 2 bagger
b . 1 bagger d. Transit mix with duct
777. System that is best used for a 4 cu.m concrete mix
a . 1- Bagger c. Transit Mix
b. 2- Bagger d. Hand Mix
778 . System that is best used tor a 5 cu.m . concrete mix.
a. 1-Bagger c. Transit Mix
b . 2-Bagger d . Hand Mix
i 779. A filler product used to fill gap between Tiles
a. Tile Adhesive c. Cement
b. Mortar
I 780. Grout is used as
a. Adhesive
d . Grout
c. Admixtu re
b. Cement
I d. Agg regates
781. Material used for laying out tiles to make them aligned
a. Grout c. Leveling Compound
b. Tile Ad hesive d.
I 782 . Best used for tile setting on concrete surface.
a. Tile Grout c. Portland Cement w ith fine Sand
b. Cement Grout
I d. Tile Adhesive
783. A cage filled with rocks for use against erosion, retaining wa lls, flood walls, etc
a. Box Rock c. Wire mesh Corbeille
b. Gabion d. Wickerwork
i 784. A newly married couple asked their Architect to extend a part of their parent's house
to be used as their master bedroom. It is located adjacent to the swimming pool. What
should be the substrate of the master bedroom if its 'floor line is at the same level as the
i swimming pool?
a. Concrete c.
b. W aterproofing membrane
ii d.
785. The original flooring of their parent's house was made of marble. Unfortunately, the
newly married couple can't afford to buy marble for their new master bedroom. What
I would you recommend as a substitute?

a. Vinyl Tiles w/ Marble Design
786 . Type of Gypsum used in Bathroom
b. C. d.
Ill 787. What type of Tiles is Best for Toilets?

a. Cement Tiles b . Vitrified Tiles C. d.
-I
788. Splashboard
789. Used as Adhes ives for Ceramic Tiles aside from Cement
a. Contact Cement b. Grout c. Tile A dhesives d.
790. Thickness of Tile Setting
791. From the given choices, which is the best floor tile in terms of acoustics
a. Vinyl b. Carpet c. Ceramic d.
792. What is used to apply tile adhesives?
I a. Squeegee b. Notch Trowel c. d.

793. Which of the following is the most resilient material suitable for installation in a
Warehouse
I a . Vinyl Tile
b. Ceramic Tile
794. Another term for Resilient Flooring?
c . Granite Tile
d. Linoleum
I a. Vinyl file
b. Ceramic Tile
c. Gra11ite Tile
d. Linoleum
a g '= s9 I 78
l ?
1'5
795. Which of the following Sports Flooring is the material of choice for Basketball Courts?
a. Sports Vinyl c. Laminate Flooring
b. Maple Hardwood d. Vulcanized Rubber
796. Which of the following Sports Flooring is the material of choice for Track Surface and
Gyms and will last more than 20 years?
a. Recycled Rubber with EPDM c . Cork Flooring
b. Pad and Pour Polyurethane d. Vulcanized Rubber
797. Which of the following materials, made of petroleum, is slowly becoming popular for
use in hospitals, sporting halls and transport hubs?
a. Vinyl c. Rubber Flooring
b. Linoleum d . Parquet
798. Which of the following is best used for the stall counter of a Wet and Dry Market?
a. Ceramic c. Vinyl
b. Granite d. Plain Cement
799. What are the advantages of using white ceramic tiles on walls?
800. Aside from the adjustments in the layout of tiles, what is the space between tiles for?
a. To provide space for prying off tiles during reworking/replacement
b. To provide a compression point so that when a tile ctacks, it does not affect the other
tiles
I c. For aesthetic consideration

d.
801 . What causes a Marble to have a foul odor when it is already old?
I 802. Discuss problems with marble countertops.

803. Materials used for Marble Installation
804. Advantages of using Granite
I 805. What is mixed with marble dust to cover defects in marble tiles?
a. Polymer
b. Grout
c.
d.
806. What is used to remove mold from Natural Stone?
I a. Steel Brush
b. Paint it
c. Apply Muriatic Acid
d.
807. What material is used at T & B?
I a. Granite
b. Vitrified Tile
c. Cement Tile
d. Marble
I 808. What area is NOT recommended to use Cement Tile?

a. Lanai
b. Terrace
c. Balcony
d.
i 809. What Flooring is best for Fastfood Dining Area?

a. Vitrified Tiles
b. Vinyl Tiles
c. Ceramic Tiles
d. Marble
i 810. For a Heavy Loaded Hallway, what type of Flooring material is best suited?
a. Vinyl Tiles
b. Polyurethane Epoxy Paint
c. Rough Concrete Slab
d. Ceramic Tiles
I 811 . What Flooring is best for a Recording Studio?

a. Wood c. Vinyl Tiles
b. Carpet . d.
I 812. What Flooring is best for a Generator Room where the equipment is already provided
with a generator pad?
a. Plain Concrete with Hardener c. Vitrified Tiles
I b. Rubber Flooring d . Acoustic Flooring
813. Which of the following flooring material is best for a Genset?
a. Ceramic c. Engineered Wood
I b. Vinyl d. Granite
81 4 . Which flooring material would you recommend for offices?
a. Ceramic c . Engineered Wood
b. Vinyl d . Granite
815. Which flooring material would you recommend for a workshop?
:, ·1
1,,
g e 60 I 78
BLDG TECH
JPT REVI EW CENTER IN C
a. Ceram ic c. Engineer ed Wood

b . V inyl d. Granite
8 16. A local brand supplying Vinyl tiles
a. Kent c. Mabuhay V inyl Corp
b . Matimco d. Armstrong
81 7. Absorpti ve Materials and Reflectiv e Materials
81 8. What is the most suitable flooring material for children and elderly people wh ich is
low-
maintena nce and has a horny feeling?
a . V inyl T iles c. T & G Wood Parquet
b . V inyl Sheet d. Carpet
819. Mrs. An ne and his son decided to get a condomi nium unit at Fort Bonifacio due to
its
proximity to a hospital. Mrs. Anne's son is differentl y-abled and is suffering from asthma
and has difficulty walking. Which type of flooring would you recomme nd?
a. Non-skid Rubber Floor Tiles c. Ceramic Tiles
b. Carpet Tiles d. Wooden Planks .
820 . This material is derived from clay having the mineral kaolinite. It is made by heating
the clay in a kiln to temperat ure between 1,200 to 1,400 °C .
a. Travertin eTile c. Porcelain Tile
b. Granite Tile d. Marble Tile
821 . Which flooring is best for heavy traffic?
a. Vitrified Tiles c. Place Concrete
b. Porcelain Tiles d. Vinyl Tiles
822. Ceramic tiles of varying shapes for finishing an angle
a. Trimmer c. Tile Trim
b. Edging d.
823. What is the most common profile of a tile trim?
a. Flat c. Quarter Round
b. Square d. Half Round
824 . You were asked to instali Cables, Wires, Ceiling and Floor Tiles. Which should you
install last?
a. Cables c. Ce;ling
b . W ires d. Floor Tiles
825 . What is the purpose of placing space between pebble wash finish?
a. Prevent Slipping c. Prevent Accumul ation of Dust
b . Prevent Creeping Crack d. Aesthetic s O nly
8 26. What material is best suited to be used for a gym fitness center of a food
manufac turing plant
a . 3mm vinyl c. Laminate d wood plank with rubber pad
b . Tanguile T&G d . Granite
827. What does the supplier of Laminate d Flooring don't tell about their product that the
a. Moisture build up between the finish and sub floor
b. Surface preparati on and installatio n may cost as much as the p roduct itself
c. It will not feel and act like real wood
d.
828 . In or?er to solve
the undesira ble propertie s of Laminate d Floori ng, underlayment is
required . Which material will you use?
a. Self-Leve ling Compou nd c. Plastic Bubbles
b . Foam d . Cardboa rd
829. in what rnannPr is Laminated Wood ordered ?
a. Pe r B?-< c. Per Square Mete r
b. Per P1ew d . Per Linear Meter
830. What is t/1(: most '3[)rJrupria te Flooring Material for use in a G ym of a Factory?
a. Vinyl Tiles c. Asphalt
b. Carpet d.
83·1. Wh ich o f ,~.e io1.0,v,:1y :!': tr P 1nost resilient 1nateriRI suitable for a warehou se staff
gym ?
r a .i; ': 61 I 78
1(,7
I BLDG TECH JPT REVIEW CENTER INC
l a. Vinyl Strips c. Linoleum

b. Vinyl Tiles d. Ceramic Tiles
I 832 . What does the supplier of Vinyl Tiles don't tell about their product that the Architect
should know?
a. They break easily c. Prescribed installation method usually fails
J b. They don't last as long as advertised d. Does not conceal imperfections of subfloor
833. Given a 40.10sqm room and assuming a 1% wastage, how many 0.30 x 0.30 ceramic
tiles will you use?
J a. 220
b. 150
c.445
d.450
834. Given a 40. 10sqm room with a 1.30m x 1.50m T&B and assuming a 1% wastage, how
0 many 0.30m x 0.30m ceramic tiles will you use?
a. 200 c.424
b . 140 d . 429
835. Tiles are delivered per box. How many tiles will you find in each box of:
a. 30 x 30= =
d. 30 x 60
b. 40 X 40 =
I C. 60 X 60 =
836. Ideal "drop" for a T&B flooring from FFL
e. 20 X 20 =
f. 50 X 50 =
- a. 12 mm
b. 25 mm
· c. 50 mm
d. 75 mm
837. Best materials to be used in a Ship terminal (high class) in flooring , walls & ceiling .. .
- 838. What is the best material for the fa9ade of a Ship Terminal?
a. Aluminum Composite Panel c. Fiber Cement Board
-II
b. Gypsum Board d. Precast Steel Wall
839. What material should be used in a walkway pavement to prevent accidents
a. Tile/brick on cement c. Asphalt
b. Flagstones d. Concrete Tile
840. What material should NOT be used in a walkway to prevent accidents.
a. Tile/brick on cement c. Asphalt
-II
b. Flagstones d. Concrete Tile
841. What does the supplier of Brick Pavement don't tell about their product that the
a. Slippery when damp due to the formation of moss at the surface
b. Hard to rea rrange when installed completely
c. Emits foul odor
d. Burns together with leaves being burnt
I 842. You are asked to cover a floor with new tiles but the surface has an uneven level.
What do you do?
a. Lay the Tiles as usual since its easy to level the tiles as they are laid
I b. App ly leveling grout first

c. Doesn't matter
d.
Iii 843. What material is used to adhere vinyl tiles to the floor?
844. Tiles to use in an area where heavy traffic is expected
845. What is used to clean Bricks?
II a. Wired Brush
b. Muriatic Acid
c.
d.
846. What tool is used to clean Bricks (Steel/Wire Brush)
II 84 7. Spandrel Ceiling
a 848. After Steel Framing, what's next?

a. Scaffolds c. Steel Decking
b. Forms d.
I 849. Scaffolding vs Shoring
850. Short discussion/Sample estimate of steel decking
P .., g e 62 I 78
I
1,a
BLDG TECH
JPT REVIEW CE NTER INC
·. ,. .
~
·,-,:-, . : ~r ~ crrrr!-",..-.....
' '?.,,,..:;' ).
.
,. •
~ ~
I '
.I .
....
\--?~,t-P..
,,_.,---
J A B C
]
] 851 . F rom the figure s above , which is the Form Decki ng ?
g a. A
b. B
c. C
d. D
852 . From the figure s above , which is the Acous tical Decki ng?
a. B
I b. C
85 3. From the figure s
c. C
d. D
above , which is the Comp osite Decking ?
a. A
I b. C
854 . From the figure s
c. D
d. E
above , which is the Raise d Acces s Floori ng Syste m?
a A
I b. B
855 . From the figure s above , which is the Cellul ar
c. C
d. E
Decki ng?
a. B
i b. C
c. D
d. E
856 . It refers to any tempo rary eleva ted platfo rm and
its suppo rting struct ure used to
suppo rt worke rs and/o r mater ials.
I a . Scaffo lding
b . Shorin g
c . Steel Decki ng
d , Formw ork
857 . It refers to the sheat hing, joists and string ers which
I a. Scaffo lding
b. Shorin g Deck
act as a mold for liquid concr ete
c. Steel Decki ng
d.
858 . Formw ork is al so called ?
I a . Scaffo ld ing
b. Shoring Deck
c . Steel Decki ng
d.
II 859. A Scaffo ld and Shorin g Deck can be differe ntiate

d based on how it is used as well as
the appl ication of Safety Stand ards. At what heigh t shoul
protec tion?
d a Scaffo ld Platfo rm have fall
I a . 6 feet
b. 10 feet
th an 10 feet
c. more than 6 feet
d. more
I 860 . From the figure sh own , which is the concr ete

a. D c. A
slab ? ol cj
b. H d. C
I 86 1. From the figu re shown , which is the re inforc emen
a. C c. G
t?
b. H d. B
I 862 . From the figure shown , which is the steel sheet
a. H c. D
ing ?
11 I
Il
b. A d. F
'
863 From the fig ure shown , which is the to p flange ?
a. F c. E
b G d. H
6.3 I 18
1G,tJ
I BLDG TE CH JPT REVIEW CE NTEH INC
I 864 From the figure shown, which is the shear connector?

a. B c. G
b C d. E
865. C-Clamp
866 . What are Cross-Ties?
867 . What is the advantage of Steel Scaffoldings over Wood Scaffoldings?
a. More Expensive c. Shorter Time to Assemble
b. Requires more Space d. Can Only Support Light Loads
868 Study Formworks
869 . Given a Column/Footing with dimensions, compute for the number of plywood that wi ll
be used for its formworks
870 . Lift Slab Construction - Technique whereby concrete floor slabs are poured on the
ground , one on top of the other, and then lifted into place on top of columns by hydrau lic
jacks. Used for very tall multistory buildings , this method offers substantial savings in
formwork .
871 . What is the advantage of Space Frame Construction?
a. Random column placement
b. Column-free spaces
c. Minimal perimeter support
d. Controlled load distribution
e. Redundant integrity
f. Design freedom
g. Supports all types of roofing
h. Exposing building exterior to view adds color, texture and style
872 . What is Balloon Framing and Western/Platform Framing? The main difference
between platform and balloon framing is at the floor lines. The balloon wall studs extend
from the sill of the first story all the way to the top plate or end rafter of the second story.
The platform-framed wall, on the other hand, is independent for each floor.
873 . A system of framing a building in which the studs are continuous to roof, supporting
second floor joints is known as
a. Post and Beam c.
a b. Western Framing d.
874. In a Passenger Ferry Terminal , what system will an architect use if he wants to
minimize the use of columns considering the cost?
c.
rl a. Pre-stressed Beam
b. Space Frame d.
875 It is a Strand Cable composed of High-Strength Steel Wires twisted about a Core
a 876 . It is a kind of Jackbilt Blocks used for Beams

877. It is a Cable composed of High-Strength Steel Strand or Bars for Prestressing
a 878. The image sh own at right is

a.Anchor Bolts c. Expansion Bolts
b.Tendons d.
,
a 879 . Estimate the number of tiles needed for a given area
880 Estimate . Pa111t, Roofing , Ceiling (gypsum)
881 . Estimate the number of Plywood to be used on a 4m x 3m
room , Floor-Ceiling height is 2.70m , no window door
opening is 800mm x 2100mm, Double Walling . 'How many
board foot of 2" x 2" rough lumber will be utilized in the ~ ~
erection of this ..room? The o.wn:r decided to paint the wa lls Blue and the ce iling White. If
;ou areto use . Double Coating .. how ~any gallons of each color will you use? What
1yp.E: of pa111t will ~ou use? For his flooring, the Owner wanted Dark Blue Vinyl Tiles.
Using standard size, how many Vinyl Tiles will you install? Neglect materials used for the
, "1oor/Jam b as 1! will he provided by the Owner. For this project, assume NO WASTAGE .
/J/32. Est imate th e number of pcs of Angle Bars of 1Oft length spaced 0.60rn both wa on a
6s(.jm roorn ys
88'.:i Enumemtc !he cornm0rci;::il ·,izes of angle bar::;
611 I 78
1,n
Ll BLDG TECH
[J 884 . The clear distance between two columns is 6m . If the height of the
columns are 3m
each, determine the numbe r of CHB needed to erect a wall between
0 885. You are to erect a 2.4m high wall with a length of 4.8m . If you will
lumber , how many BF will be needed to construct this wall given stud
the two co lumns.
use 2" x 4" x 8' good
spacing of 0.60m
bothways?
j 886. Given a section of Beam and Column , compute the# of stirrups
given a spacing of:
1@50, 3@100 rest@1 50
887 . Estimate Electrical materials given the Specs of 2 wire and the total
J wiring works . Choices are in the numbe r of boxes with 1 box of #12 wire
also the number of RSC 's to be used (Note: RSC is available in 10ft comme
600 linear meters of
= 150m. Find
rcia lly)
888 . Which is not a reliable source for building construction estimates?
J a. Foreman's Estimate
b. DPWH
c. Langdon & Seah
d. Rider Levett Bucknall
889 . A local supplie r of electronic, lighting and electrical products.
1 a. Crown
b. lkhea
c. Atlanta
d. Avesco
890 . Given a 1.60m x 1.60 x 400mm footing, find the volume of concret
::1 a 1,024m 3
b. 1 024m 3
c. 102.4m 3
e?
d. 10.24m 3
891 . What is the Maximum Slope for Cut & Fill?
[j 892 What is a Corbel? a piece of stone jutting out of a wall to carry
any superincumbent weight. A piece of timber projecting in the
a same way was ca lled a "tassel" or a "bragger". The techn ique

of corbelling , where rows of corbels deeply keyed inside a wall
support a projecting wall or parapet, has been used since
Neolithic times.
[] 893. Material Testing
894. What do you call the process of excavating , moving the excavated
a
material , and using it
at a nearby location whereby the amount of excavated material roughly
matche s the
amoun t of filling material?
a. Earthworks Movem ent c. Cut & Fill
b. Earthworks Fill d. Soil Transference
895. What is the difference between a Cylinder Test and a Lump Test?
896. What is a Jib Crane?
897. What is a Porta-Lift?
898. It is a machine used to make Round Wooden Balluste rs
899 . What is a Tin Insulator?
a
e
a
'
'
b:i \ 78
171
BLDG TECH JP T REVIEW CENTER INC
j
a
~I w C
J
J
J
' ,,
"..', '
tl
I
I
I 0 I
-
I
I 900. From the figure above, which is a precision survey instrument used to measure vertical
and horizoltal angles?
a. A c. D
I b. C
901 . From the figure above , identify letter A
d. F
a. Automatic Level c. Theodolite/Transit

I b . Laser
902 . From the figure above, identify letter B
ct .Wye Level
a. Pitik c. Plumb Bob

I b. Spirit Level d . Dowel Center
903. From the figure above, identify letter C which is us.ed to suspend the layout strings
a.Batter Board
I b. Wooded Stake
904 . From the figure above , identify letter D which is used to determine if a surface is
horizontal or vertical
' a. Spirit Level

b. Inverter
905 . From the figure above , identify letter E
a. Backhoe
b . Excavator
c . Level Ma rker
d. Bubble Leveler
c . Payloader
d. Bulldozer
b6 I /8
171.
BLDG TEC H JPT REVIEW CENTER INC
J
J A
J
' f)
0
D
II
I
,.
I 111:!a\\
F G
II
~-
906. Figure A above is used for
a. Compacting c. Repairing
b. Erecting
I 90 7 Figure B above is used for
a. Compacting
d. Demolition
C. Polishing
rl b. Cleaning
908 . Figure C above is
a. Electrical
d. Cutting
c. Pneumatic
I b. Gasoline-Fed
909 . Figu re D above is used for
d. Thermal
-a
a. Cutting c. Bend ing
b. Welding d. Compression
9 10. Figure E above is used for
a. Cutting c. Bending
b. Welding d. Twisting
911 . Figu re F above is
a. Electrical c. Pneumatic
I b. Gasoline-Fed
912 . Fig ure G above is used for
a. Cutting
d. Thermal
c. Bending
I b. Welding d. Attaining Proper T orque

91 3. A simple instrument used to align vertical members
a. Pitik c. Plumb Bob
I b. Level Hose d . Spirit Level

9 14 . An instrument used for horizontal leveling (Spirit Level)
9 15. What do you use to measure a property line?
I a . T-squa re
b. Triangle
c. Steel Tape
d.
9 16. Used for cutting cu rves on thin plywood
a Jigsaw c.
b. Route r d.
91 7. Used to cut wooden baluste rs to its curved shape
a. Route r c. Jigsaw
IJ . Hand Saw d . Circular Saw
173
9 18. What Tool is used to Cut Wood into Curved shapes?

a . Hand Saw c. Circular Saw
b . Router d. Jigsaw
]
]
J A B C
I
I
'
I D E
9 19 . From the Figure above, A is?
a. Belt Sander c . Mitre Saw
I b. Orbita l Sander
920 . From the Figure above, B is?
d. Planer
-I a. Jigsaw
b. Mitre Saw
921 . From the Fig ure
a. Rotavator
b. Circular Saw
922 . From the Figure
above, C is?
above. D is?
c . Sabre Saw
d. Band Saw
c. Disc Cutter
d. Grinder
a. Orbital Sander c. Submersible Pump

I b Planer
923 . From the Figure above, E is?
d. Router
a. 3-D Printer c. Lathe Mach ine

I b. CNC Router d. Table Saw
a . -."'!"·-~~
~
~
l',i •0 4, !l
.. ◄
I
I
' 924 The Figure shown above Is used for

a W elding
b. C utting
C. Bend in g
d . Bending and Cutting
b8 I 18
17lf
-----.... -.. .,,u1e ... quesaons regarding air-conditioning system ...
J
1. How m_any tanners will you use.. (several choices are given) the required is 12- 13tons based on
j computations ...
a. 1 10-tonner c. Two 3-tonner plus one 4-tonner
b. Three 4-tonners
2. What will you pro_vide in the entrance door to control air from coming in and out?
a. Air Curtain c. Dehumidifier
. b. ~xhaust Fan d. Misting Machine
D 3. Th!s equipment uses a stream of compressed air directed downwards to form a shield to exclude drafts. Prevents
hot air as well as dust from going inside the building .
a. Air Sweeper c. Air Curtain
u b. Mechanical Exhaust
4. Where will you locate the ACCU of the convenience store?
d. ACU
a. on the ceiling c. in front of the store

J b. outside the store
5. Which is not needed in the said system?
d.at the corner
a. ACCU
c.AHU
J b. FHU
d. Condenser Drain Pipe
Situation: A home theatre is to be renovated...

l 1. What will you use on the walls to minimize sound transmission?
a. CHB
i b. Gypsum Board on studs
2. What part of the wall will you cover?
a. Upper panel c. Edges of the Door
3 b. Lower Panel d. Face of the Door
3. What inexpensive yet effective wall treatment will you suggest?
a. Sawali c. Bamboo
I b. Egg crate
4. What flooring finish is the best to use?
d.
a. Carpet tiles C. Vinyl Tiles

3 b. Wood planks
5. What type of door will you use?
d. Linoleum
a. Flush with hollow core c. PVC Door

I b. Panel type
Situation: Bunso is watching Cartoons inside the Movie Room constructed with Drywall Partitions. Ate
I is studying at the room adjacent the Movie Room ...
1. Will ate hear what Bunso is watching?

i a. Yes
b. No
c. Definitely not
d. Ate will slightly hear the Cartoons
a Situation: A client wants to open a Dance Studio on the ground floor of a building. The existing room
for the studio is fronting the road and the floor above is an office area.
1. What materials should be used on the flooring and on the ceiling?
2. What material should be used at the tront facing the road?
I/\fhich would you recommend for a wall facing a noisy crowded street?
a. Concrete Wall G. Bricks
b. Drywall d. Acoustic Foam
Situation: A client awarded you to design a medium-end BPO Office to be in an existing residential house of
1000sq.m ... it will be a renovation project...
1. In cor:s,deration of thP. cnbles, what s~1stcm will you use to conceal Uiern?
a. Raised Floor ~~13t 0 m" c. 01y Walls
b. On the r.eilings
0
I
2,q
2. If data are needed to be shared with others, what system is appropriate?
a. LAN c.
b. Router d.
3. What communication system is used to link one office to another for a private dialogue?
a. Intercom c. Telephone Door Entry System
b. PABX d. Fax
4. If data need to be amplified from the main server, what system is needed?
a. Router c. PABx
b. LAN d.
Situa tion: You were asked to design the parking tot for a mall and a hotel. Among your concern will be
the safe vertical height for vehicles to pass.
1. What is the highest point from which vertical clearances are based?
a. Slab c. Pipes
l b. Beams d. Pipe Supports
Situation: Your architectural team is designing a 3 storey Hospital...

j
1. How many elevators would you suggest?
a. Three, one for every floor
I b. One, but it is ideal to have one for passengers and one for the patients in stretchers
c. Only one for passengers
d. Only one for patients
I 2. What type of elevator would you suggest?
a. Electric c. Either traction or hydraulic
; b. Machine room-less
3. A vertical pipe extending from a water supply, especially one connecting a temporary tap to the main.
a. Siamese Connection c. Vent
b. Standpipe d.
I 4. Which fire suppression system is not integrated in the Building structure?
a. Wet Standpipe c. Fire Extinguisher
b. Dry Standpipe d. Sprinkler
I 5. Which fire suppression system is integrated with the building and is designed to be used by both building
occupants and/or fire fighters?
a. Wet Standpipe c. Fire Extinguisher
J b. Dry Standpipe
6. How many dry standpipe will you use?
d. Sprinkler
; a. 3
b. 2
7. Where is the best location for a Dry Standpipe?
c.O
d. 1
a. Stairway C.
I b. Pipe Ch ase d.
Situation: You were commissioned to erect a 9 Storey residential Condominium along C5 road.
I 1. How many elevators would you recommend?
a a. One Traction Type

b. Minimum of Two
c. One Hydraulic Type
d. None of the above
-
2. The last habitable storey of the condo is the 9th floor, but it has a rooftop with garden open for all occupants.
f. levalor's mach ine room is 1.20ht from the headroom of the rooftop. Where would you locate the last stop of the
elevator?
a. At the rooftop c. At the 8th floor
b. At the ni1 1\h floo1 d. There is no need for an elevator
::i. Which of the fullowirllJ w0L'. :d you least locate adjacent a lobby?
a. Service ~tairs c. Elevator entrance
b. Garbagf: chu l\.,' d. Lounge
il
'1
220
4. U~i~g an illust~ation (provided), how many (0.60m x 0.60m) floor tiles will be used at the kitchen, dining area,
and hvmg area w,t_h allowance? On the floor plan, the exact size per area was given in square meters.
Kitchen 12.S0 sqm
Dining 14.20 sqm
Living Area 16.50 sqm
Disregard other sections merging with the required areas like the foyer and hallway. The figures won't tally but get th e
closest answer using 15% allowance.
5. Which Fire Assembly is NOT necessarily integrated in the building?
a. Dry Standpipe c. Fire Sprinkler System
b. Wet Standpipe d. Fire Extinguisher
Situation: Owner A decides to hire an electrician to work for him instead of a professional electrical
l engineer. Upon roughing-in and installation, the electrician proposed to the Owner to alter the
specified wires into bigger sizes in order to accommodate larger electrical loads. The Owner agrees as it
seems to be reasonable and he was confident because his house was equipped by circuit breakers. Several
i days later, Owner A's house burned down. After inspection by the Bureau of Fire Protection, it was learned that
the fire was caused by faulty electrical connection.
I 1. Why didn't the circuit breakers function as designed?

a. The Circuit Breakers did not "trip" due to the oversized wires
b. The Circuit Breakers were not installed properly
I c. The Circuit Breakers were poor in quality
2. Who should be blamed for the incident?
a. The Architect, for not supervising the work done
I b. The Owner, for not hiring a Professional Electrical Engineer

c. The Electrician , for not following the Specifications
d. All of the Above
I 3. Who should make the first move to settle the problem?

a. The Architect, Arbitration is part of his services
b. The Owner, he was the one who gave the authorization
I c. The Electrician, he was the one who installed the incorrect wiring
d. The Bureau of Fire Protection, it is within their mandate
I The Owner hired an electrician to prepare and install the electrical wiring for the house. The electrician, with
the Owner's consen~ decided to use a larger size of wiring for the circuit breaker to anticipate overloading.
After some time, the house was on fire. After the investigation, it was proven that the cause of the fire was
I faulty wiring.
1. Why did the Circuit Breaker fail to detect the short circuit/overloading?
I a. The circuit breaker is defective

b. The capacity of the wire is too large
c. The circuit breaker was too far away from where the short circuit happened
I d. All of the above
2. Who should be blamed for the fire?
a. The electrician, he used a larger capacity for the wiring
I b. The owner, he did not hire a professional and master electrician

c. None, some people are just unfortunate
d. None, short circuits happen all the time
I 3. What should have been done by the electrician to prevent the fire?
a. Use the appropriate wiring capacity
- b. None, his plans and actions were appropriate

c. Studied more to become a Master Electrician and do better electrical plans
d. None of the above
-s
•
Q
I
ti
th
Situation: At a Textile Factory, the Manager has a picture drawn by his son. He wants to hang it on e
wall of his office.
n 1. What would you recommend he should use to emphasize/illuminate his son's drawing on his wall without consuming
1J too much power?
a. LPS Track Light c. Recessed Incandescent Lamp
fl b. HPS Spot Light d. Surface Mounted CFL

2. For the Production Area, which lighting is best?
a. Troffer Lighting c. Pendant Lighting
0 b. Industrial Lighting
Situation: You hired a Master Electrician to do the Electrical Works for your newly built house. You asked
0 the electrician to install the materials you recommended. After a year, problems in the electrical
works surfaced.
J 1. Who is responsible fo r this?

a. Electrician, because he knew from the start that he is installing defective or inappropriate materials.
b. You, because you were the one that recommended the materials used by the Electrician.
J c. None, because it is only normal for these thing to happen.
Situation: Given a schedule of Panel Board Circuits of a 2-Storey Retail Store ... (All Lighting Outlets have
:l 15A wire, while Power Outlets have 20A wire. IMC was used. Hindi kaagad mapapansin yung IMC kasi
sobrang liit ng text ... )
;J 1. If the Owner wants to add a 5000VA Signage, to what circuit can it connect?
a. Circuit 2 (256VA Lighting Circuit@ Ground Floor)
b. Circuit 3 (500VA Power Outlet@ Second Floor)
:J c. Circuit 7 (6000VA Signage @ Second Floor)
d. Circuit 13 (Spare 20A Rating)
2. Where will the switch for the new Signage be located?
l a. Ground Floor
b. Second Floor
C.
d.
3. What conductor was used?
:1 a.THW
b. THHX
c. IMC
d. uPVC
4. What conduit was used?
:J a. THW
b. THHX
c. IMC
d. uPVC
5. A Type of Electrical Wire suitable for Dry and Damp locations, THHN is commonly used in the Alternating
ii Current Distribution System usually at voltage levels ranging from 110-600 volts. What is meant by THHN?
••
a. Thermoplastic, HighHeat- resistant, Nylon coated
b. Thermoplastic, Heat resistant, and Moisture resistant
c. Thermoplastic and Moisture resistant
d.
6. What is THWN?
a. Thermoplastic, Heat and Wind-resistant, Nylon coated
••
b. Thermoplastic'. High Heat and Water-resistant, Nylon coated
c. Thermoplastic, Heat c1nd Water-resistant, Nylon coated
d.
7. What is XHHW?
a.XLPE (cross-linked Pol yeihylene), High Heat resistant, Water-resistant
ACOUSTICS
1. Prolonqed Sourid
2. Study RevP.rberation/f1drac·i01i/Diffu~ion
:-t Used to deflect soun:J
1. 1/1/hat is Ectiu?
S. Res,manr;r-;
6. 'Nh&t is .:in Octave?
7. What is the ratio of frequency to sound?
8. Percept_ual characteristics of sounds with High Frequency
9. What will happen to sound if it is in a long and narrow hallway?
a. Sound will bounce back and forth faster
b. Sound will be absorbed by the ceiling
C.
10. In a long narrow room, where would you best install acoustical materials?
a. Both sides (longer side)
b. Both sides (shorter side)
l c. Ceiling
d. All sides
11. The variation in pressure in a medium like air is called sound pressure. What is its effect on us?
l 12. What is the frequency for a 2m wavelength at 28,500fps?
13. What is Decibels?
14. Given Graphs and Illustrations, choose the Application that has the Best capacity to Control Medium Range
I Frequencies
15. Amplifiers & Speakers
16. What is the Amplification of Sound from a Source such that Repetitions are heard from Reflections as well as from
I the Source?
a. Electronic Sound Reinforcement c.
b. Natural Sound Reinforcement d.
I 17. Given thickness and transmission coefficient of RC wall, compute the Transmission Loss
18. What is Transmission Loss?
19. Location of insulation material
I 20. The transmission of sound along a curved surface
a. Echo c.Bounce
b. Creep d.
I 21. The Power of Sound
a. Volume c. Frequency
-I b. Pitch
22. It is the magnitude of sound
a. Intensity
b. Amplitude
23. Subjective term for Frequency
24. Loudness
c. Loudness
d.
25. What is the BEST way to Reduce Air-borne Sound?

II a. Cover the Source
b. Use Absorptive Materials
c. Relocate the Building
d.
•-
26. For a Music Hall with a lot of audience, what is the best flooring material?
a. Carpet Tiles c. Wood Planks
b. Vinyl Tiles d.
27. Stone (Rock) Wool Mineral Wool and Glass Mineral Wool are two very similar yet different products. Stone mineral
wool is made from volcanically originated stone, e.g., dolomite, diabase and basalt. Glass mineral wool is made of sand
and glass slag. The production process is similar,i.e., raw material is melted at high temperature until it is molten, then
- it is spun into fibers using centrifugal wheels from which the final product is made- slabs of stone or glass mineral wool.
As an architect you should know the subtle difference between these materials in order to provide better service to your
clients.
-
a. Which will you use for structures that require High Fire Protection?
b. Which is better in protecting BOILERS,i.e., high working temperature?
c. Which has a higher tensile strength?
--
28. Do nails affect the sound absorption quality of plywood nailed to wood studs?
a. Yes, depending on the size and spacing of the nails
b. No, since the nails are too small to be a factor
C.
29. From the situation above, what would affect the sound transfer?
a. Spacing of Sluds and Airspace
L 30. A limp fabric can be a good absorber if:
tl.
a. Tacked to edges and allowed to hang loose
b. Fastened on edges and must have a tight seal
C.
31. Most effective material against echo
a. Cavity Wall
c. Foam Insulation
b. Heavy Curtain d.
32. What interior element controls echo?
a. Concrete wall c. CeI.1.mg
b. Heavy Drapery d
33. If noise is coming from a large hallway, what is the sol~tion?
a. Textu~ed flooring c. Wallpaper
l b. Curt~ ns
34. Insulation definition
d.
35. In terms of Acoustics, arrange the ff. materials from best to worst:
l CHB , Concrete, Bricks, Wood, Glass
36. Which is the best Dry wall to keep the noise outside from entering the room?
a. :;J J c. IS 131
m -~
b. d.
l
37. Used to eliminate noise from flooring
I a. Install carpet
b. Curtains
c. AW Panels
d.
38. A showroom with an industrial look is having problem with acoustics, what should you propose?
I a. Install Acoustic ceiling
39. What is the best acoustical treatment for ceiling?
a. Plywood c. Hardiflex
J b. Gypsum d.
40. How do you prevent sound from spreading between two adjacent rooms?
41. How do you prevent sound from reverberating between floors?
I LIGHTING
1. What is luminous flux?
CJ SI unit of luminous fl ux - lumen (Im)
One lumen - luminous flux of light produced by a light source that emits one candela of luminous intensity over
a solid angle of one steradian
ti 2. The measure of brightness of a Light Source or an Illuminated Surface equal to the Luminous intensity per unit
protected area of the source or surface viewed from a given direction .
I(
a. Lumen c. Footcandle
ii b. Luminance
3. Wattage
4. Foot Candle
""J:I
5. Light Reflection
6. Directllndirect Lighting
7. Types of Lighting
8. Wh at kind of light is used at the Balcony? 0
9. Where wou ld you recommend using Pinlight with glass cover?
1o. Direct Lighting that emph asizes an area or an object in a room thereby adding drama or style by highlighting certain
aspects of or in the room.
a. Highlight Lighting c.
b. Accent Lighting d.
11. Lighting that calls attention lo a particular object or feature in the visual field, or that forms a decorative pattern on a
i:11 surface .
a. Sodium Lighting c. Accent Lighting
G::l I.J . Neon Lights d.

12. Which is a good Lighting for a Curved Ceiling with Wavy Design?
a. Indirect Lightino at thR Base of t11e Curve c. Downlight
¢l b. Direr:l d.
13. Wtn t <lo you call 2 I0•,al li ~1lli11y used tor a particular task on a work area?
1
14. Specific Task Lighting
15. Light used for reading
a. Task
b. Diffuser c. Accent
16. What type of Lighting is needed for a Reading Desk? d.
a. General Lighting · . . .
l b. Indirect Lighting
17. What !igh~ing should you use for Reading Area/Room?.
~- Specific Task Lighting
18 What lighting should you use for Working Area/Room?

l 19. Wher~ would be the most_practical location for a daylight source to be used on work tables?
20. What 1s the angle of spotlight for walls and paintings?
a. 20-35 degrees c. 10-15 degrees
l b. more tha~ 45 Degrees d. 36-45 degrees
21. What type of switch has a pilot lamp that allows it to be seen in the dark?
a. Glow switch c. Illuminated Switch
I b. Dimmer switch d.
22. What is used to create contrast and control the light intensity?
23. What type of advantage of a Filament Lamp {Halogen & Spotlight) over a Discharge Lamp?
I 24. Compact Fluorescent Lamp
~ompared to the ln~andescent Bulb, it consumes less power and has a longer rated life. There are two types of CFLs:
integrated and non-integrated lamps. Integrated lamps combine the tube and ballast in a single unit. These lamps allow
I consumers to repla~e incandescent lamps easily with CFLs. Integrated CFLs work well in many standard incandescent
light fixtures, reducing the cost of converting to fluorescent. 3-way lamp bulbs and dimmable models with standard
bases are available. Non-integrated CFLs have the ballast permanently installed in the luminaire, and only the lamp
I bulb is usually changed at its end of life. Since the ballasts are placed in the light fixture, they are larger and last longer
compared to the integrated ones, and they don't need to be replaced when the bulb reaches its end-of-life. Non-
integrated CFL housings can be both more expensive and sophisticated. They have two types of tubes: a bi-pin tube
I designed for conventional ballast, and a quad-pin tube designed for an electronic ballast or a conventional ballast with
an external starter. A bi-pin tube contains an integrated starter, which obviates the need for external heating pins but
causes incompatibility with electronic ballasts.
I 25. This type of light provides 80% savings in consumption and emits bright light
a. CFL c. Fluorescent
b. Incandescent
I 26. Where would you recommend using CFL?
27. What type of Lamp is best used for Car Parks?
a. Low Pressure Sodium Light c. Mercury Light
I b. High Pressure Sodium Light

28. What kind of Light is best for Outdoor Parking?
d.
29. What kind of light is best for indoor parking?

I 30. It is a type of lighting used extensively in signages and utilizes high electrical wattage.
31 . Banned by the government
-
a. Fluorescent - a tubular discharge lamp in which light is produced by the fluorescence of phosphors
coating the inside of the tube
b. CFL - any of various small, improved efficiency fluorescent lamps having a single, double, or U-shaped
-
tube, and often an adapter for fitting an incandescent lamp holder
c. Incandescent - a lamp in which a filament gives off light when heated to incandescence by the passage
of an electric current
--
d. Metal Halide·- a high intensity discharge lamp similar in construction to a, but having an arc tube to
which various metal halides are added to produce more light and improve color rendering mercury lamp
32. On what kind of project is the Daylight Lamp best suited?
a. Textile Manufacturing c. Restaurant
b. Bakery d.
33. What is used to intensify light?
- a. Reflector c. Troffer
b. Diffuser d.
34. PAR vs MR
35. Wh at is the effect of ambient lighting to occupants?
22.S-
'1 )
36. Light defining "somberness"
a. G~neral Lighting
b. Diffused Lighting
c. Spotlight
37. A type of light used in panaflex
l
l
. . \
I .._ ,·
.
I ~w~~ --
..._~-.i
I 38. From the figures above, identify Letter A.

a. Ground Light c. Magnetic Light
b. Pool Light d. Strobe Light
I 39. From the figures above, letter A is usually found at the
a. Ceiling c. Roof
b. Floor d. Wall
I 40. This is extensively used to highlight the landscape elements
a. Colored Incandescent Bulbs c. lnground Lights
b. Troffer d. Dim Lights
I 41 . From the figures above, identify Letter 8.

a. CFL Bulb
c. Halogen Bulb
d. HID Bulb
b. LED Bulb
I 42. From the figu re above, identify Letter C.
a. CFL Light
c. Halogen Light
d. HID Bulb
b. LED Light
I 43. From the figures above, identify Letter D.
a. Troffer
b. Diffuser
c. Light Reflector
d. Incandescent Reflector
I 44. What Lighting is good for a Production Area having Soffit on Suspended Slab?
a. Pendant c. Troffer
b. Industrial d.
45. Where would you use Troffer Lights?
a. Commercial c. Dining
b. Working d. Sleeping
I 46. Why do we use Oownlighi/Pinlight in stores?

a. Dramatic effect c. Gives the original tone of color and material
-
t
b. Emphasize the texture of the materials
47 . Identify the Cove Light from the given illustrations
a. Cove Lighting
b.
d.
48. An Indirect Lighting directed upward from an interior cornice at the edge of a ceiling .
c.
d.
11
22.,
I
I
j 49. A type of Lighting where light is directed both up and down
a. Cove c. Soffit
b. Valance d.
50. Has the most effect on light in a room
a. Material Texture c. Location of Window
b. Color d.
51. From the Figure below {left), which lighting position is best?
52. From the Figure be!ow (right), which lighting darkens the monitor?
53. From the figure {right), which lighting causes direct glare?
ll 54 . A type of light fixture wherein the finished housing is exposed, not flush with the surface.
a. Recessed Light c. Surface-mounted Light
b. Cove Light d.
ti 55. Where wou ld you recommend using Troffer Light?
56. Study best application for Day Light/Wami Light? Cool Light
57 . What Light Color would be best for Undergamient Manufacturing Plant?
ll 58. What is the best lighting for a Factory considering its effects in the work environmen t?
a. Day Light C. Wami Light
b. Cool Light
I ELECTRICAL
1. From the Service Entry to the Feeder Line going down to the Branch Lines, where does the Branch Line stop?
iii a. Panel Board
b. Circuit Breaker
c. Electric Meter
2. Study Riser Diagram

Ii 3. Study Circuit Breaker Diagram4.
4. It is the Final step prior to installation of electric meter and Service Energization of facilities .
• a. Contract for Electric Service

b. Certificate of Final Electrical Inspection
c. Final Inspection conducted by Meralco in the presence of the customer or his representative
•Ill d. Payment of Service Application Charges and Bill Deposit

5. What is a Service Drop?
6. A truck accidentally hits an electlic post. Will it cause damage to the circuit breakers/fuse?
Will it damage appliances?
7. Differentiate Cable Wire from Electrical Wire.
8. What is the use of a Ground Wire?
A ground wire is a wire that is literally connected to the earth and acts as a backup in case a neutral wire fails. Without
II one, the risk of electrical shock becomes a viable possibility. Ground wires are usually green or yellow in order to
differentiate between neutral wires and hot wires, and therefore it is easy to tell the difference between ft and other
wires.
II Each electrical circuit inside of a home has two types of wire: hot and neutral. Black wires are known as "hot• wires,
and they carry electrical currents; hot wires may a/so be red. White wires carry electrical currents away from a device,
--
and these wires are known as neutral wires.
When a white wire is broken, stray current is no longer carried away from a device, and neutralization is not possible
without the help of a ground wire. In most instances, the ground is connected to a circuit breaker. When a neutral wire
is no longer functional, this other wire will trip the corresponding circuit breaker and any electrical current is immediately
stopped.
Appliances will operate normally without the help of ground wires. In fact, if one is broken or missing, most people will
--
not be able to tell the difference. If a large amount of high voltage has come in contact with the appliance, however, a
person using that appliance may get a hefty electrical shock. Therefore, it is important that all appliances include a
grounded wire.
--
- 'J..17
I
j
I
1)
JI
I 9. Electrical Plan Reading; given a situation then determine:

a. How many power outlets are there in LP-9? How many lighting outlets are there in LP-9?
b. Short circuit happened to the elec. fan in the stair landing, which LP will the electrician check for the
I condition of the wires?
c. If LP-9 (PP) is shut-off, what can be done in the Master's Bedroom?
c.1. Watch TV
I c.2. Turn-on Computer
c.3. Turn-on lampshade
c.4.Take on hot shower
i 10. Electrical Plan Symbols
---+1-- Bl,T Tf:R) ' ,

0
FIR J:.1, u,QM !IOX,
s 6JNG LE , PO I.[
i ~VLTI Cf:LLS WALL TYPE SWJ TCII
-<:)~ SWI TC II !lRCAKER. 1!11

LI GHTING
t>Al'lr.L s. oOUllLl>POJ..E
SWtTCH
I At:TO~IATIC
RESt;r l!I REAKZR
POWER
VANCL ©
PULLSW!TCH
Ct:ll.lNC:
I BUS
BRANCH CtaC UlT,
CONC£ALED IN
Cf.!Lll>GOI\ WALL
-© P ULL$WlTCH
WALL
P.RA:SCH CUlCUIT, § nxr u1u: ,

f' LI.JOR £SCl'.NT,
© VOL?MElLR CONCEALF.Cl n; FLOOR C EI U Nv
-8
FIXTURE,
TOGG W: l!IMNCH ClltCIJlT, FLUORESCENT,
SWlTCII EXPOSED WALL
--o-->'o- DJ'ST
TRANS,-O kMF:R, JUNCTI ON BOX,
=111[ MAGNET l C F£EO£Ri; 0 C EJLll'lG

COR E
utlD£llF I.OOtl H /NC ?10N BOX,
rn JI F.1. L OUCTANO
JUNcnoN aox
-0 WAl,L
l.AMPHOLDER ,
0 0
tw BUZ. l E R , AC MO TOR CEll..ll'i C
+
C , (j ••in a: n1)1 ooun•c Hd J..AMPHOI.DER,
(not ne c e••b rily &t • 18] CONTROLL.£.R -0 ll>'ALL
qo<> ..,,~1• I
+
STREET LAM P HOLD&II
J \) !<CT ION 0 ucant:-1c

S TAN DAR D
WIT H PUL L
SWITCH, CUIJNC
LAM PHOI.O&R
T R>.t <5 YO R ME J\ ,
®
O UTLET, 0,.. 5'1>11\Nl1 T11CH,PULl.WAl.1-
=:J C OAS IC F'LOOR
@ SP ECIAL
-!- G ROUND
CONV &NLENCI:,
DUPLEX P llll POS [
[)<J Tl:l.t PHON E:,

0
Q f! T Lt: { ,
f'iL llJ N <; -0 f' AN , WA LL
S Wll C t-l!! OAA O
--0 O Vl J. f I,
... ... u, 0 f A.'1, C E I LIN G -0 T ll t:R MOO TAT
! !! l<Nln
---[:::::D,- ' ''> I ({? S WITCH
0 16 COMl l:C T E: D
[!] l'U'S II llUTTON
!18
l
j ST,._NDARD LIGHT
'y TELEPHONE JACK
$ 0
I $
STANO,',RD !W.1TCH
3-WAY S'MTCH I!)

fHERMOSf Af
OOOR6ELL
I + F ANLIGHf
REC FAN
€) SMOKE OEfECTOR
ti STANDARDOUfLET
ti
I CHANDELIER
-c:=::r BREAK.ER PANEL

o•
ffl
GFCI OU TLET
220 OUTLET
I CABLE HOOK-UP ¢} CEILING OUTlET
I
--
':, c,· --· '
ELECTRICAL PLAN I!
r - - - - - -- - - 1
I I
I
t(}
.S LEGEND
CFlllNGMO~.mrFn
I IGHT
Ii
1
1
I
I I
I - I
I ( ) t
( I- -t-
<J·
R!.CLSSLD 00,VN LIC 11l
I ct _,
I \ s:
"-.- ., ' ~ -::,
H 1 ERGENCY llGtlT
OUPlEX RECEPT,,CL E
.,,...., _.,d OUTLFT
I 'J t.r
\ _ j•
,( ,r --.
-H'--_) NURSf CA! I
I [<l: lll(PHOM. OUTll 1
5 TVOUTLET
I • s· A s- /_
r ·\
<_S) s,,iOKF DFTFCTOR
I S SWITCH
I
I 11 . From the Hospital Patient's Room shown above, how many switches are there?
a. 4 C. 5
I b. 3 d. 2
12. From the Hospital Patient's Room shown above, how many duplex receptacle outlet are there?
a. 2 C. 4
I b. 3 d.5
13. From the Hospital Patient's Room shown above, how many ceiling mounted lights are in the T & B?
a. 1 C. 3
I b. 2 d.4
14. From the figure shown above, how many TV outlet?
a. 1 C. 3
I b. 2 d.4
I
I
I
l
I
J
1
) 15. The Outlet for the Washing Machine is located at the?
tr!J
a. Garage c.
b. Laundry Area d..
I 16. Bulk of electricity
a. Generated c. DC
b. AC d.
I 17. Discuss different Cables

18. Characteristics of the new BX wire used in the market
19. Another term for Armored Cable
I 20. Another term for Underground Wiring

21 . Closed Raceways/Open Raceway
22. What is a Cable Tray?
ii 23. Alternating Current/Direct Current

24. What is used to convert DC to AC?
25. What is used to convert AC to DC?
I 26. It resists the flow of electricity

a. Insulator
b. Conductor
c. Semiconductor
d.
I 27. Ability of Conductor without overheating

a. Ampacity
b. Capacity
c. Resistance
d.
I 28. Different Types of Switches/Outlets

29 . What is a 3-way Switch?
30 . What type of switch will be used if a lighting fixture is to be used in 4 places?
Ii a. 2- 3way switch, 1- 4way switch

b. 2- 3way switch , 1- 2way switch
•II
c. 2- 2way switch , 1- 3way switch
-Iii 31. What is wrong with the Electrical Plan shown above?
Ill a. Too many ceiling lights

b. Switch is behind the door
c. No switch in the T & B
d. Nothing's wrong
Ill
--
-
l .I
l
l 32 . When design ing an electrical ligh ting layou t for the T & B shown, where would you loca te the switch plate ?
a Behind the door c. Outside the door
b Beside the door d. At the middle of the room
) 33. What is a Utility Box?
l
j L
l 34. 'Nh at Is being shown by the arrow In th e fig ure above?

35. 'Nhat is being shown by the arrow in the fi gure below?
! ~ - - ----------
J
36 Wh at is the usual sh ape of a Junction Box?
l a. Hexagonal
b Recta ngular
c. Octagon al
cl .
] 0 '
J I
I1
~''
I l,f- .
.Pfi,+ . . . ·'
37. 1/vtial ,s a Cirm t Breaker?

38. Given an Electrical Plan , a1 1olyLe it arid identify the symbols used. 5 ques tions were asked regarding th is plan
:!Sl Given an Electrical Plan, Find tl1e Total Number of Conductors, Switches, Ou tlets, etc.
40. Given aII Electr irn l Plan, choose which lamps in the circuit wou ld open si multaneously
J 41. Given an [ler,trical Plan , how many down lights are th ere in circuit #1?
42 :Jiven an Electrical Pla11, how many lights can be controlled by Switch B?
43. From a give11 Plan, determine the number of Pin Lights (Just Count but be carefu l coz th ere were drawings that
j 00ked Iik,, pin lights r:u t were nolJ
1
J 4 Fror1 th e give n plan, 1 de1 1tify i11e Fluoresce nt Lamps

40 From a give11Plan , delermine the location of outlets
.)6 Fru1r, a r~iver, Pl8n , dE: term1ne the Circu it with the most 11umber of Ou tlets
7. F'o111 a :Jiven Plan de1crmine 11ie uutlet that will be affected if a short circu it occurs
18 I rnrn ;:, given P:an ·Je11:11 11i: 1e l~1e 11umber of ou tlets i1 1a partrru lar circ1 1it
0
211
Ll
Q
I' 49 . What Is the maximum number of outlets for a 15 am p Circuit?
a. 6 b. 8 c. 9
50 . Given a problem, recommend the number of lighting fixtures to use
d. 10
a 51· A set of light bulbs we re connected in series connection . If 1 bulb is going to be removed what will happen ?
a The remaining light bu lbs will still be lighted
b There will be no light at all
I c. The bulbs AFTER the removed bulb will no longer be lighted

d. The bulbs BEFORE the removed bulb will no longer be lighted 0 0
52 . From th e given plan at right CR -1
I
I a. How many lighting fix tures are there?
b. Type of switch used in CR-2?
0
o I
c. Does the lavatory have a heater?
I
0
53. Which does not need an Individu al Branch Circuit?
a. Range c. Pum p
b. Microwave d. Airco n 0
I
0
54. Which of the fol lowi ng Consumes the Least Electricity?
a. Comp uter c. Electric Fan 0 0 0 0
b. Television d. Heater
lJ 55. What is the Amp acity of a Multipoint Heater?

a. 20a mp c. 40amp
b. 30amp d.
ti 56. The He ater shown at rig ht works with

i. Electricity
1i . Wa ter
ti 11i. Sunligh t
Iv. Pressu re
c. ii . iii an d iv
a. i1and iii
I b . ii and Iv
57 . What are electrodes?
d. i, iii and iv
••
58 . A flat silicon piece that can convert solar energy to Electricity
a Photoelectric c.
b Photovoltaic
59 . Com outation of Tran smission Loss Factor
60 . Wh at do ban ks use to have smooth transition to emergency power during power ou tages?
a UPS c. MTS
•Li
b. ATS d.
61 . What is the main reason why Cable wires and Grounding wires are shielded?
a. Cause magll et c. Protect ag ainst water
b Damage due to heating d.
62. Why are telephone wires and electrical wires NOT placed together?
a. He at accu mul ation c. Data lnte1i erellce
b. Tele phone wire will burn d.
1:1 63. Main rea son why insulators deteriorate

64. A safety device for computers to protect again st sudden surges (AVR)
65. A device used in ATM to ensure continuous supply of electricity (U PS)
(j 66 . It is used to provide smooth transition when power failure occurs (ATS)

67 . What do banks use to have smooth transition to emergency power during power outag es?
a. UPS c. MTS
i;, b. ATS d.
,38. Eli::ctricity is suddenly disrupted, bu t it was immedi ately restored by standby generators
a. Double th row switch c. Automatic tra1 1sfer switc h
rrJ b. Man11al trans fu switch

01 . lc\( nlity the Figure sl1ow11 at 11~ht
0
a. R!::d1fi t 1
d.
L:;t ! 1> 1ern ator

1
C UF-'3
J AT'.'.
E::l j
0
j
j 70. A machine used to convert mechanical energy to electrical energy.
a. Rectifier c. Alternator
b. Generator d.
I 71 . How do Generators Work?
a. Electromotive Induction c.
b. Electromotive Reduction d.
I 72. A Generator is to be placed inside a building . What will you provide to avoid and spare the building from the
constant effect of vibration corning from the Generator?
a. Provide Double Wall in the perimeter of the Generator Room.
I b. Provide Cavity Wall at the perimeter of the Generator Room.
c. Provide Neoprene Pad under the Generator Set
d.
I 73. What is a NEMA Wall?
74. If you are to relocate a large office space using numerous cables, aside from the size of ihe new location, what
should you know?
I a. Floor to ceiling height
b. Availability of transformer
c.
cl .
75. Raised Floor System
I 76. When choosing an office on a high rise building, what should you consider? (related to computers)
a. Location of raceways c.
b. d.
I 77. Wh ich is the most rigid?
a. EMT c. lMT
b. RSC
I 78. What material used as a conduit is threaded and much thinner than RSC?
a. EMT
b. lMT
I 79. What is used for service entrance?
a. RSC c. lMT
b. EMT ct.
I 80. What is RSC?
a. Rigid Steel Cable c. Rigid Steel Conductor
b. Rigid Steel Conduit
ll 81. Study Circuit Load/ Demand Load/ Electric Load/ Panel Load
82. Study Schedu le of Loads
II MECHANICAL - HVAC
1. What is the odorless and colorless gas present in air in varying quantity that affects relative humidity?
a. Oxygen c. Hydrogen
tJ b. Water Vapor
2. What do you call air when the relative humidity is 100%?
•Iii
a. Moist c. Saturated
b. Dehumidified d.
3. Study Air Conditioning System and its Elements
4.What is Evaporation in Air Conditioning Systems?
5. What is Condensation in Air Conditioning Systems?
6. Parts of Air Conditioner
7. How is Freon used in an Air Conditioning system? Discuss its fiow in the system
-"
8. Wh at is the Pipe that lead s to a Condenser from the Compressor?
a. Liquid Line c.
b. Discharge Line d.
9. What is the amount of refrigerant required for proper operation of an air conditioner?
a. Volume c. Operating Charge
b. Migration d.
t;I 1Q. A device used to determine the air temperature of a room?
a. Thermometer c. Wire gauge
-
b. Thermostat cl .
233
'I 11 . A component oi an HVAC sys tern used to sense and control air temperature of a room?
a Thermometer c. Wire gauge
b. l herrn ostat d. . t d e .
12 A component of a control system which senses temperature so that the systems temperature in main ain e 17 ar
the desired "setpoint."
a Thermometer c. Wire gaug e
I) Thermostat d. .
13. Most air conditioners are controlled by a thermostat which senses temperature , what 1s used by dehumidifiers to
se nse humidity?
l 14 . It 1s commonly used as a Re frigerant

15. What device is used to increase the pressure of refrigerant in an air con system?
a. Compressor c. Conden ser
b. Evaporator d.
16. Questions about Tons of Refrigeration
17. What is the average TR requ irement for a co nvenience store with 100sqrn of space?
a. 2-3 c. 8-10
b. 3-6 d.
18. What is the paramete r (sqm/TR) for a room that is exposed to Normal Conditrons?
0 a10-12sqm/TR
b. 16-18 sqmfTR
c.
d.
19. What are Cassette air conditioners?
Casse tte units work the same way as wall-hung split system units , with the
diffe rence being that cassettes are ins talled into the ceiling instead of on
the wall. The indoor unit itself sits flush to your ceiling and distributes
0 co nditioned air through two, th ree or four sides of the unit. The outdoor umt
of a cassette air conditioner is mounted outside. in much the same way as
it would be for a conventional wall mounted split system unit.
[!1 CasseHe units are fa irly unobtrusive and come in a range of sizes and
capacities. so yo u have a reasonable amount of freedom when choosing
where to install one. Generally speaking, cassette units are more appropriate for larger areas though . Because they
0 take up a fairly large amount of space on the ceiling - and because the ceiling is normally composed of beams and
Joists, you will need to consult an expert installer to figure out exactly where you can safely mount one. As a general
rule, a location that allows for clear, balanced air flow is a/so suggested for cassette un its. The guidelines for installing
tl an outdoor un it for a cassette type air conditioner are the same as those for any other split system air conditioner
Outdoor units should be mounted in stable places where they won't vibrate. where they have plenty of free space on
eith er side to allow airflow. where they're easily accessible for maintenance, and where they aren 't likely to be exposed
tJ to corrosive substances. Noise should also be considered.

The performance of casseHe units is generally comparable to that of other types of systems, although because they're
,,
most commonly installed 111 commercial or office areas, they tend to be more powerful than wall-mounted systems
r;J They are parlicular/y well suited to circumstances where wall-hung split systems or other system types might not be an
option Cassette units tend to be more expensive than other systems. It has the distinct advantage in tha t it can be
installed at the center of a room.
20 . Where will you find a Cassette-type Air Con?
a. Floor c. Wall
-d b. Ceili ng
b. 2.30m
d.
21 The minimum height of Refrigerant Pipe along a building passageway
a 2.44m c. 2.50m
d.
22 Mrnimum Clearance from Floor of Pipes for Air Conditioning Units when Crossing a Hallway or Corridor
! ~.
--
21 Whal 1s ari Arr Handlir1g U111t? 1'
Also kno wn as AHU, it is a device used lo condition and circulate air . ...1
,:,
"'-'!
' /"\,_
il '., pan of a heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system.
A11 air hancfle r 1s usually a large 111etal box containing a blower,
heating or coo/mg elements, filter racks or chambers, sound
at/1::11uator:,, a11d dampers. Air handlers usually connect to a ductwork
- ve11trla t1on systen1 that cldribu tes the conditioned r1ir through the
build1119 and return s it to the A/-/ U Sometim&s A/-/Us discharge
(~ upµly) a11d ad//l it /1d uru) arr cfiroct/y to and from tl 1e space servccl
;:
'I without ductwork.
Small air handlers, for local use, are called terminal units, and may
only include an air filter, coil, and blower; these simple terminal units
/\n air handl ing uni t: a ir flow is from the
right to lc fl in this ca~e. SomeAHU
components shown are
I - Supply ducr
are called blower coils or Fan Coil Units (aka Split-type). Alarger air 2 - Fan cornparlm enr
handler that conditions 100% outside air, and no recirculated air, is 3 - Vibration isolator ('nex joiJJt')
known as a makeup air unit (MAU). An air handler designed for 4 - I feating and/or cooling coi l
outdoor use, typically on roofs, is known as a packaged unit (PU) or 5 - Fi lter compartment
6 - MixeJ (rec irculated + outside) a ir duct
rooftop unit (RTU).
24. What is a Fan Coil Unit? Evaporator? Refrigerant?
I 25 . What do you call the component of a Split-type air con system

which is located outside the house?
a. Condenser c.
I b. Evaporator d.
26. What do you call the unit lhal includes the compressor, refrigerant and liquid line?
27. Best location of condenser?
!I a. Roof deck
b. Near the condensing unit
c. Near the AHU
d.
28. What is the limitation in the installation of Split-Type AC?
t1 a. Its tube shall not exceed 3m from the condenser to the evapora tor
b. It shall not be located near the floor
t.1
-c::::TI
tJ n
ti
29. From the given Plan of a Clinic, Where is the Air Curtain located?
&:I a.C
b.A
c. B
d.
30. What is the main disadvantage of Centralized Air con?
ii a. Noise from the AHU Room is hard to control

b. Room temperatu re can't be controlled
31 . Best Type of Air conditioning for Hospital
t.j 32. Cooling Tower
33. It is located at the Top of the Structure where Heat (from Water) is rejected
a. Cooling Tower
iJ b.
34. Best location for an AC Cooling Tower
a. Basement c. Service Core
tJ b. Roof Deck d.
35. You wiil be shown a Plan and asked to identify what type of Air conditioning was used.
r, a. Centralized
b. Chilled Beam
c. Window Type
d.
36. Wh ich of the following will be used in a small kitchen and T&B?
a. Dehu midifier
V b. Exhaust
37. Which is not an equiprnen t?
a. Exhaust Fan c.ACU
!i-1 b. Soap Dispenser

38. Appliance that need a11 individual circuit
a. Microwave oven
d.
c. Evaporati ve Air conditioner
t;.1 b. Air cond itione1

39. What is Energ y Efficiency Ratio (EER)?
d.
It is the ratio of the cooling capacity of an air conditioner in British Thermal Units (BTU) per hour, to the total electrical
inpw (in walls) under certain ~perified tests. Air conditioner EER ratings higher than 10 are considered most cost
effc:.:tivu. The hi!JhAr th A mtio the less the unit will cost to operate. Air conditioners that have been tested have Energy
~35
t
l Efficiency Ratios And are certified by the Association of Appliance Manufaclurers (AHAM). These umts will generally fist
their EER ratios in their product features
40. '<ou purchased an Air conditioner at a local store and you noticed a yellow rectangular lag attached on all the units.
I Upon closer inspection you noticed that it is actually an Energy Guide. What does those big bold numbers stand for?
a. Energy Etticiency Ratio
b. Energy Etticiency Factor
c. Energy Consumption
d. Rated Power Input
I 41 In purchasing an air conditioner, it is important to know the ratio of the cooling capacity in BTU per hour to the
electrical inputs in Watts . Which would you prefer?
a. Aratio ot I c. Aratio of 10
I b. Aratio below 10 d. The higher the ratio, the better

42. I\ allows heat to be circula\ed throughout a building's entire interior. The heat is generated from one location and
dis\ributed \hrough ducts and vents .
I a. Blower
b. Humidilier
c. Centralized Heater
d.
I fit I\
I \.'
;A, ,
'\fQ__ -~$
I A B C D E
I 43. From the figure above , Object A is installed where?

a Ceiling c. Roof Deck
I b. Garage
44 . Object A from the figure above is called?
d. Wall
a. Condenser c. Ventilator
I b. Solar Waler Heater

45 . From the figure above . where can you !ind object C?
d. Turbo Healer
a Ceilina c. Metal Roof
I b. Root Deck d. Wall

46 Ob1ect C from the fig ure above 1s used for what application?
a. Residential c. Industrial
I b. Commercial
47. Object 8 from the figure above is called?
d.
c. Wall Fan
a. Ceiling Fan
I b. Exhaust Fan
48 Ob1ect 8 from the figure above 1s installed al?
d. Cassette Air con
c. Wall
a. Ceiling
I b Floor
49. Ob1ect E from the figure above is installed where?
d. Hallway
a. Kitchen c. Wall
I b. Roal
50 Obiect D from the !lgure above is installed at?
d. Attic
a. Ceiling c Wall
I b Floor d. Hallway
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B C
I
A
I E
D
I 51 . Figure A above Is usually located at the

a. Floor c. Plenum
I b. Ceiling
52. Figure D above is located at the
d. Roof
a. Tower c. Roof deck
I b. Sou th Part
53 Figure E above is BEST located al the
d. Ground Floor
a. Roof (outside bldg) c. Ground Floor (outside bldg)
I b. Wall (outside bldg ) d. Inside the bldg
r .l
A B C
54 . From the Figures above, which Is primarily used for Natural Lighting?
a. Figure A c Figure C
b. Figure B d. Figure D
e. Figure E
55. From the Figures above, wh ich is a Gravity Vent primarily used as an "active fire protection" mechanism wh ich
employs the principle of buoyancy to vent the heat and smoke developed by a fire inside the building?
a. Figure A c. Figure C
e. Figure E
56. From the Figures above, which Is a Ven t Boot or Pipe Boot?
e. Figure E
57. From the Figures above, which is a Gravi ty Vent primarily used to take advantage of prevailing winds and thermal
buoyancy or stack effect to naturally ach ieve air movement with in the building?
e. Figure E
58 rrom the Figures above, which shows a lead pipe fl ashing?
e Fig ure E
237
'
j 59 -1~is a type of Glass that has been treated with a metallic coating. It is used to keep the heat from entering a building
and IS popularly used in many building fa9ade. This type of glass is used in environmentally friendly construction with
,, the goal of reducing heat gain and loss, making structures much cheaper to heat and cool.
a. Them,al Glass c. Tinted Glass
b. Reflective Glass d. Glass Mirror
NOTE: Reflective Glass is NOT re flective in the sense that it acts as a mirror, although some products DO indeed have
I a highly reflective surface, but rather in the sense that it reflects RADIATION rather than absorbing it. Its disadvantage
against ordinary glass is its high initial COST. However, this will be offset by savings in electricity in the long run.
60. What is R-value?
I 61. Which would you recommend for glass at west-facing side of buildings?
a. Vertical Louvers c. Heavy Tint
b. Horizontal Louvers d. Thick Curtains
I 62. What type of Floor Surface Material can be used to reduce heat transmission in the living room?
MECHANICAL - ELEVATOR
I 1. Waiting time for Elevators
2. Study Elevators
a. Shaft - vertical passageway for car and counterweights
I b. Car - a cage of light metal supported on a structural frame, the top member of which the cables, that
carry the car, are fastened
c. Cables - are the means for lifting or lowering the car, usually 3-8 cables placed in parallel fastened to
I top of car by cable sockets passing over a motor driven cylindrical sheave to the counterweights
d. Counterweights - these are the rectangular blocks of cast iron stacked in one frame which is fastened
to the opposite ends of the cables to which the car is fastened
I e. Guide Rails - are vertical tracks that guide the car and the counterweights
f. Machine Room - a room usually placed above the shaft in which the elevator machine room is housed.
It contains the motor --generator (MG) set which supplies energy to the elevator machine, the
I control board and the control equipment

g. Elevator Machine - turns the sheave that lifts and lowers the car
h. Controls - a combination of push buttons, contacts, relays, and devices, operated manually or
automatically to initiate door opening, starting acceleration, retardation, levelling and stopping of
I the car
I
I v · ?? 7
I 3. Identify the indicated Elevator Part

a. Railing
I b. Brake
4. Minimum height of a Elevator Machine Room
C. 2.0 m
a. 2.1 m
I b. 2.4 rn
5. Minimum depth of Elevator Pit
d. 2.7 m
a. 0.5 m c. 0.2 m
I b. 0.4 m d. 0.9 m
6. Buffer allowance for elevator· where safety devices are also located?
a. Machine Room c. Elevator Pit
I b. Elevator Car
7. A device that controls the Elevator Doors
d. Shaft
8. A device used to bring an elevator car to the nearest fioor during a power interruption
I g_ A device that automatically stop and maintain the elevator car within ½ inch of the landing regardless of the change
in load
a. Stop-Go Operotor c. Automatic Two-Way Levelling Device
I b. Homepark Devi, c d. Automatic Floor Actuator
I 219
I
I
I 10. Connections between car and openings
a. Trave\\ing cable c. Governor
b. Hoist d.
I · An elevator P?Wered by a piston that travels inside a cylinder. An electric motor pumps oil into the cylinder to move
m
It ~s PIston which tu~n sm_o~thly lifts the_ elev~tor c~b. Elec~ric valves control the release of the oil for a gentle descent.
I used extens1_vely In bu1ld1ngs up to six stones high and Is operated at speeds up to 61 meters {200 ft) per minute.
a. Electric Elevator
b. Trac~ion Elevator
c. Piston Elevator
d. Hydraulic Elevator
I 12. In an electric elevator, this cable provides electrical power to the car and travel with the hoist
a. Travelling cable
b. Hoist
c. Governor
d.
I -~ -~ - I m I WJ
I i
I 0.1 05 ; 05
_lI l .
\ 015
••
-\ _ 1~- --- ·---- '~ -- ooi _ 't1JJ
1~ ! l&Xl 2100 '8/J
Ill!) 2lOO 'JIii OJ)
ii m> ' r.oo lXO
••
•• 13. For the Elevator specs shown above, what is the loading capacity of the elevator having a rated power of 11 KW?
a. 1500 C. 2000
-•
b. 2500 d. 1800
14. For the Elevator specs shown above, what is the car size width of the elevator with a 3 ton capacity?
a. 1800 C. 3300
b. 21 00 d.3000
15. For the Elevator Specs shown above, what is the Shaft width of the elevator having a rated speed of 0.25 m/s?
a. 2000 C. 4000
-Ill
b. 2500 d. 4300
16. For the Elevator Specs shown above, what is the Machine Room width of the elevator having a tractor ratio of 1: 1?
a. 1100 C. 2350
b. 1500 d. 2800
17. After inspecting an old 5-storey building, the BFP required the owners to install an elevator and recommended that
it be located at the space in the stairwell. What is the primary consideration in identifying the size/dimension of the
--
elevator?
a. Elevator Car c. Elevator Door
b. Elevator Shaft d. Elevator Height
18. For a 3-storey building that is intended for a Senior Citizen Center with a limited budget and space, what is the
appropriate type of elevator?
a. Hydraulic Elevator c. Stretcher Accessible
-
b. Traction Elevator d. None (Not required)
19. What do you call the hoistway of an elevator?
20. In elevator default system, where would the elevator car go in case of fire emergency?
a. The floor where it last stopped c. It will be stationary
b. Uppermost floor d. Ground Floor
21 . What type of elevator is usually used for low-rise buildings where speed is not a main consideration?
22. What is the term of Rows of Elevator?
:
l
I
I -· · ·~· -
. '•
I B
I .,, ~. "-"•
g ,..,, C
23. Identify Pa rt A from th e illu stration above.

ra a. Elevator Hook
b. Car Hook
c Traction Gear
d. Sheave
24 Identify Part B from the illu stration above .
ti a. Car Stabilizer
b. Rail
c. Shaft Support
d. Hoistwa y Gu ide
25 . Identify Part C from the illustration above .
tJ a. Rail Bu ffe r
b. Buffer
c. Automatic Buffer
d. Oil Sup port
26 . Mou nted about 42"above th e fini shed floor, these button s illuminate when pressed and is used to request an
I elevator to your floor

a. Up and Down Buttons c. Floor Selection Bu ttons
d. Call Buttons
b. Hall Lan terns
II 27 . A small freigh t elevator designed to carry objects rather than people. It is often connected between two floo rs and
wh en located in restau rants or private homes the lifts generally terminate in the kitchen
a. Dumbwaiter (1. 20m - H)
II 28 . Wh o invented the firs t safety Elevator brakes in 1852?

a. Elisha Graves Otis
b. Charles Oti s
c. Norton Otis
d. Jason Goodwin
Cl
Cil MECHANICAL - ESCALATOR
1 What is the Maxi mum and Minim um Speed of Escalators?
2 Maximum speed of escalator
C. 125 fp m
a. 90 fpm
d. 150 !pm
b. 120 fpm
3. Usual speed of escalator
e:-;J a 75 !pm
b. 90 fpm
c. 120 fp m
d 125 fpm
4 What do you r,all the steps of an escalator?
c. Escalator Step Roller
s..::l a. Floor Plate
b. Deck Boa rd
5 Escal ator should not be used fo r
d. Escalator Step/Tread
a. Vertical Tran sport c. Dram atic Fea ture

b. F11e Escape d.
u . lv'1, nImum wid th uf an esr;alator as per ASME A 17.1
ii;l cl. 20 Ill

r, n in
C 24 Ill
d. 26 in
1 Ir, ;:11oosI n(,J th8 loca110n of an escala tor the main consideration would be
t;;l :J
Ar,s thF: ll CS
Conge;;\I01 , uf ,H ea
C
d
t
I
l 8. What is the most economical layout for escalators?
a. Criss-crossed c. Parallel
b. Straight d.
I 9. What is the advantage in arranging Escalators in a crisscross pattern?
a. Aesthetics c. Adds value to space
b. Less expensive to construct d. Less travel distance
I 10. Which escalator arrangement will be more economical in terms of building construction cost?
a. Crisscross
b. Parallel
I 11. Which escalator layout is best if the prime consideration is Cost?
a. Criss-cross b. Parallel
c. Multiple Parallel
I 12. You were asked to design a terminal for the MRT. Taking into consideration the huge number of passengers
alighting from the trains during rush hour, which arrangement for the escalators would you employ?
a. Crisscross c. Single
I b. Parallel d. Scissored
13. Why are fire preventive equipment installed in escalators?
a. Cigarette butts are always thrown on the steps and there is a great chance it might enter the Drive
System and cause fire
b. It also serves as a manhole for maintenance
a c. Escalators are not fire resistant

d. Escalators are prone to overheating and have caused several fires before
14. Slope of Escalator
15. It is used to start an escalator
I 16. What is best used for a 5-Level Shopping Center?
a. Escalator c. Elevator
b. Escalator and Elevator d.
I 17. Where can you find the main drive gear of an escalator?
a. Bottom c. Middle Third
b. Middle d. Top
l2 18. What is used, up to 12 degrees, to transport pedestrians/carts?
a. Walkalator c. Travelator
a
b. Escalator d.
19. Moving Ramp
20. The maximum length of a walkalator is 250 meter. What is the reason why it should be used for short runs only?
a. To allow users to exit at the sides c. To allow reversal of direction
tJ b. For main tenance control

21. Main pu rpose of a walkalato
a. To control the flow of traffic
d.
c. Aesthetics
GI b. Convenience of pedestrian d.
22. What can a moving ramp do !hat the moving walk and escalator cannot?
23. What cannot be achieved by an escalator that is possible with a travelator?
CJ PLUMBING - WATER SUPf~LY
'1 1. Plumbing Permit shall be invalid if work has NOT commenced after a period of:
a. 180 days
b. 6 months
c. 1 year
Cl 2. Where is "water meter" located?

a. Right after the main distribution line connection
b. Beside the water pumr,
c. Within RROW, riyht before the property line
d.
3. Wh at is the Standard WJtcr Pressu re from NAWASA/ Maynilad/ Manila Water?
a. 20psi c. 60psi
b. 40psi d. 80psi
4. What Is the standard wate1C'J11~u, nption (gallon/person/day) used in a 2-storey residence?
a.30-•'\0 c. 100-120
b. '1 0-GO d.
~ - 2'41
-.,.
j
I 5. What would you recommend for a water supply project if the gravity system is not appropriate?
When there Is a low pressure from the Water Main, what will you use to supply higher levels?
a. Booster Pump c. Sump Pump
I b. Pneumatic Pump
6. When water goes up through a vertical pipe, it stops at a certain height. Why?
a. Gravity and friction overcomes the pressure and the water stops
I b. The pressure inside the pipe equates to the pressure outside the pipe causing the water to stop at that point
where it happens
7. In high rise buildings, why is there a need to resize water supply pipes?
I a. Because different fixtures have different supply attachments
b. To use up the difference in pressure from the service to the supply fixtures
8. In a plumbing system, where is the highest pressure?
I a. The fixture closest to the supply riser has the most pressure
b. The fixture farthest from the supply riser has the most pressure
c. The fixture at the lowest elevation has the most pressu re
I d. Pressure is the same on all fixture because it's just in a single line
9. A vertical water supply pipe running from one floor to another is called?
10. Pneumatic Tank
I 11. What do you call a control valve used to shut off the water supply to a building in case of an emergency. It is
installed at a water service pipe and operated by means of a long key inserted through a curb box.
a. Curb Cock c.
I b. Corp Slop
12. A water supply service starts outside the building at the Water Main and then enters the building. It will have three
Stops prior lo the Water Meter. Which is installed between the Sidewalk and the Property Line?
I a. Curb Stop
b. Corporation Stop
c. Meter Stop
d. Gate Valve
13. This Stop is placed inside a cast-iron stop box that has a variable telescopic length and provides a water supply
I shutoff outside a building?

a. Curb Stop
b. Corporation Stop
c. Meter Stop
d. Stop Light
14. This Stop is placed as near as possible to where the water service pipe enters the building and also near the water
meter. It controls the flow of water into a building and is also used when measuring the amount of water used.
a. Curb Stop c. Meter Stop
b. Corporation Stop d. Gate Valve
15. In a building, where is the pump located?
a. Roof deck c. Cistern
b. Water Tank d.
16. Where is the pump best located?
a. Beside the Cistern c. Side by Side of the Cistern
b. On top of the Cistern d. Inside the Cistern
17. Would you recommend using a single Cistern to supply both potable water as well as for fire protection?
a. Yes, if the cistern can accommodate the required water volume for both
b. Yes, if the cistern has two separate chambers for each
c. No, because of contamination concerns
d. No, because the Plumbing Code prohibits it
18. Which should not be placed in close proximity with each other?
a. Water Meter and Electric Meter c. Pump and Tank
b. Septic Tank arid Cistern d. Pump and Electric Meter
PLUMBING - PIPES
1. Which pipe is susceptible to UV rays?
a. Cast Iron c. PVC
b. GI Pipe d.
2. What pipes are not U',ed underground?
a. PVC pipe c. Clay pipe
b. GI. pipe
3. Whal is the Color Coding of Pipes tor Potable Water?
a. Blue c. Yellow
b. Green
~4Z
4· What is the Color of Pipes used for Steam?
a. Light Blue c. Blue
lttl1 5 b. Gray d. Yellow

: Regarding Pipes and how they are joined, you must be familiar with their illustrations/images as sometimes only
pictures are shown and you will be asked to identify the pipes and how they are connected.
How do you connect 2 Copper Pipes?
I
a. Solve~t c. Threaded Fittings
b. Caulking
6- How do you connect 2 Copper Pipes? d. Gasket Fitting with Bolts
a. Solven_t c. Fusion Welding

b. Soldenng d. Crimping
IU 7. How do you connect 2 Hubless Cast Iron Pipes?
0
a. Cem~nt Plaster
b. Welding
c. Rubber Gasket and Coupling
d. Caulking
~- How do you connect 2 Cast Iron Bell and Spigot Pipes?
a. Cem~nt Plaster c. Rubber Gasket and Coupling
b. Welding d. Caulking
9. How do you connect Concrete Pipes?
a. Cement Plaster c. Rubber Gasket
b. Soldering d. Caulking
km 10. How do you "usually" connect GI Pipes?

a. Electrofusion
b. Soldering
C. Welding
d. Threading
11M 11. How do you connect Brass Pipes?
a. Electrofusion
b. Soldering
c. Welding
d. Threading
12. How do you connect PPR Pipes?
a. Arc Welding c. Solvent Cement
-
b. Soldering d. Electrofusion
13. How do you connect PPRC (Polypropylene Random Copolimer)?
a. Solvent Cement c. Coupling
b. Electrofusion d. Mechanical Fastener
•
14. How do you connect PVC Pipes?
a. Electrofusion c. Teflon
b. Solvent Cement d. Plaster Cement
I
15. How do you connect HOPE Pipes?
a. Electrofusion c. Soldering
b. Solvent Cement d. Arc Welding
16. How do you connect HOPE Pipes?
a. Solvent Cement c. Arc Welding
b. Butt Fusion d. Soldering
17. This materi al is used in threaded pipe connections to prevent leakage (Teflon tape)
Your client has a limited budget but wants to use a suitable pipe for his hot water line. Which will you recommend
knowing that cost is a major consideration?
a. PVC Pipe c. Copper Pipe
b. CPVC Pipe d. PEX Pipe
18. What is the commercial length of a Concrete Pipe in the Philippines?
a. 1m c.3m
b. 2m d.
19. What is the commercial length of a Copper Pipe in the Philippines?
,-r , 20. What is the commercial length of a Stainless S~eel_ Pipe in t~e ~hilippines?
21. What is the commercial length of a Cast Iron Pipe m the Ph1l1ppmes?
a. 1m c. 3m
b. 1.5m d.
"/2. Meaning of U i1 1uPVC
23_ uPVC - definition/use::. .
24 What Type of Pipe is NOT recommended for Water Line?
· n. Copper c. G.I.
b. Lead d.
I 25
· Which pipe is earthquake resistant?
a. PPR c. PVC
I ~6. For
7 th
b. CPVC
a D~ep Well, what kind of pipe is not
d. HOPE
applicable for use?
·_If to ere
mam the ispublic
a concern for Oil and Grease contamination, which pipe would you recommend to connect the building
sewer?
I a. PVC Pipe
. b. C_oncrete Pipe . . d.
C.
28
1, · Which pipe would you recommend 1f there Is presence of grease?
a. Concr~te Pipe c. GI Pipe
. b. PVC Pipe d. PPR Pipe
I 29. Which of the following might cause staining in the toilet fixture?
a. PP
b. PVC
c. GI
d. Cl
3 30. What do you call the end of a pipe used to connect another pipe?
a. Bell
. b. Hub
c. Spigot
d.
I 31. It 1s usually seen at basement parking which hung pipes using strings and hangers
a. U Bolt
b. Cable Tray
c. Eye Bolt
d.
j 32. According to the NPC, pipe support should be every

a. 3.00 m c. 2.00 m
b. 1.50 m d. 4.00 m
I 33. Storey height, not less than 2.43m (8ft), within which the horizontal branches from one floor or storey of a building
are connected to the stack.
34. It is' a Test Conducted lo check if there are Leaks in the Pipes
1 35. What is the principle governing the sizing of pipes in designing plumbing systems?
a. The bigger the pipe, the lesser the pressure; the smaller the pipe, the greater the pressure
b. The smaller the pipes, the lesser the pressure; the bigger the pipes, the greater the pressure
36. A pipe that conveys the discharge of water closets or fixtures having similar functions with or without the
discharges from other fixtures.
37. What type of pipe is used for a Water Closet?
38. What corresponds to the hidden line in the given plumbing plan?
39. Plan Reading: Identify cold water line from the given plan and determine if it has a hot water line
40. Plumbing Plan Symbols
41. When the water coming out of from the faucet is contaminated, what would be the possible reason?
tl a. Too much water pressure
b. Crossing of Sanitary and Water Supply Pipes
' c. There's a hole in the pipe
d. Rust I
42. What is the outside diameter of a 200mm PVC Pipe?
t1 a.200
b. 195
C. 100
d.205
43. What is the inside diameter of a 200mm PVC Pipe?
ii a. 194
b. 195
C. 188.2
d PLUMBING - FITTINGS
1_Which pipe fitting is used for Sanitary Pipes?

ii a. Long Sweep
b. 45 deg
c. 90 deg
. d.
2_The difference between upvc for plumbing and electncal
Ii 3_Illustration of a Cleanou t
4 Maximum Distance of Cleanouts
s: Where is the best location for a Cleanout?
Ii a. Inside the T&B

b. At the Exterior Wall o_f the T&B
6. ChangIny
.
c. Cleanouts are not provided when
. of hon•zontal directions -Al branch intervals of stacks
'1
d 244
7
_.A. Pipe fitting that both mounts a toilet to the floor and connects the toilet drain to a drain pipe. In a typical installation,
it is first mounted on the top of the floor with the hub fused around the drain pipe A wax ring is used to seal the gap
between it and the bottom of the toilet. The toilet is then bolted to it, not to the floor.
a. Toilet Drain c. Toilet Mounting Piece
b. Closet Flange d. Closet Rubber Ring
I ;{rm
\QC~l. ~ L~ ] ri1
I \ (~ cv (ff) ('.'},i (J_'J /
I \@~~ ()
L ---- - -- ---- - -
~ --1~
I 8. From the Figure above , which one is the 45deg bend?
9. From the Figure above, which one is the long sweep?
10. From the Figure above . which one is the cross tee?
I 11. From the Figure above . which one is the wye?
12. From the Figure above , which one is the cleanout cover?
13. From th e illustration , which figure has a P-Trap?
I a. Figure 4
b Figure 5
c. Figure 1
d. Figure 9
14 From the illustration , which figure is used to unclog the pipe?
I a. Figure 8
b. Figure 1
c. Figure 3
d Figu re 10
15. From th e illustration , which figure is used for electrical conduits?
I a. Figure 3
b. Figure 7
c. Figure 8
d. Figure 9
16. From the illustration , which fig ure is used to change the direction of the flow of water?
I a Fig ure 3
b. Figu re 9
c. Figure 2
d. Figure 8
17 _From the illustration , which figure is used to connect tw o pipes?
I a. Figure 1
b. Figure 6
c. Fi_gure 8
d. Figure 7
I
I
I
I
I
I ·I o! lhe followi11 g 1s ci Lu119 Sweep Elbow7
18. In !lie f1~u r8 , wI11 (; i c. G
I cl .
b. N
J
I t 45
t
19. In the figure , wh ich of the following fittings Is not used on Water Line?
a. M c. I
b. N
20. In the figure, which Is used in Electrical Connections?
a. B c. M
b. J d. H
21. In th e figure , which is used in Water Line Connection?
a. B c. F
b. K d.A
22. In th e figure, which is used in Water Line Connection?
a. B c. F
l b K
23 In the figure , which is used in Sanitary Line Connection?
d. A
a. E c. L
l b. N
24 . In the figu re, which of the following is a Male Adaptor?
d. J
a. E c. A
I b. K
25.ln the figure , wh ich of the following is a Reducer Wye?
a. B c D
d. G
I b. C
26 . In the figure , which of the following is a Junction Box?
a. L c. C
d. G
b. G
I
I Fig. 2
C
I
I
I 27 In the figure , which of the following is a 1/8 Bend FittinfB
a. D d. A
i 28 . In the
a. D
C , wh.ic h of the following is a ¼ Bend
b.figure c. BFitting?
d. A
b. C
i
A
I
B
C
ji
-
D .
29 In lh8 figu re, wr11ch 1c"' a R c:d UCII 19 Suck(;['/

c. B
a. D
f1f,
b. C
3 th d. A
o. In e figure . which Is a Double Socket?
a D
I b. C c. B
dA
31 . In the figure , which is a Flange Adaptor?
a. D
I b. C c. B
d.A
32. A Fitting threaded outside used to connect pipes/fittings
I a. Coupling
b. Nipple
33. A fitting used to split the flow of water.
c. Tee
l a. Coupling
b. Nipple
c. Tee
d. Splitter
34 . A short pipe fitting threaded at both ends used to connect pipes?
I 35 . What will you use to connect two pipes of unequal sizes?

a. Tee c. Reducer
b. Connector d. Hub
I 36. A pipe fitting that is threaded both inside and out used to connect pipes of different sizes
a. Adap tor c. Union
b. Reducer d. Bushing
I 37. Typica ll y used to connect two (2) pipes having similar diameter and in the same direction. It is also called a double
female
a. Cou pling c. Tee
I b. Nipple d. Elbow
38 . What type of fi tting is appropriate for connecting a Water Meter to the Water Main?
39 . Similar to a coupling , it is designed to connect and disconnect pipes with ease . It consists of a nut, a male and a
1, female end . When the male and female ends are joined, the nut then provides necessary pressure to seal the joint.
a. Reducer c.Un~n
b. Tee d. Bushing
I 40 . What is being indicated by item #9 in the figure below?
ph:""'.::::::cv,:::,,,'=====
:::,1
I
I
I
I
I 41. From the ill ustra tion below, identify A, B, C
a. Floor drain c. Soil Stack
I b. Cleanout d. VSTR
I
I
I
I /}_47
i
I
l
I -\2 . In the Figure at rigl1 t, which will you recommend?
a. A
c. Either will do
b. B
] d. Neither
l "
•"'\'
il u...,.1,1 • W-, 1 & \otb,on ,h

"'c""'""
J B ½~'\. ---=--.:~~ ,,.,.,.:,:,:•:,!..:·:•"·" ·
1 43 . From the illustration above . which will you recommend?

a. A
, 1 , .. " ' '"' "~
C. Either will do
] b. B d. Neither
44. For Back-to-Back Toi let installation , which wi ll you recommend?
a. Double Sanitary Tee
b. 45deg Double Wye Fitting
c. Combination Double Wye and 118th bends
d. Any wi ll do
51 l
rJ
t:l 8
C
[t1
-,5 Fru11 1tl1e 1Jive1 1[1 91 JrE. r1 I ll•Jht ldf11 t1fy "A, B, C"
rJ d. t-'- rr::ir
t) Foucol
C.
d
TeE::
'1
PLUMBING - TRAPS
1· Water traps are used to prevent foul odor from coming out. Which of the following DOES NOT t1ave a P- trap
a. Water Closet c. Kitchen Sink
b. Lavatory d. Floor Drain
2. For a T & Bat the Ground Floor, wh ich would you connect directl y under a Floor Drain?
a. Sleeve c. Elbow
b. P-trap d. Nipple
3. Differentiate a P-Trap from a House Trap
4. What is the Minimum Trap Seal?
l 5. A flow of liquid opposite to the usual or desired direction
6. A drain connecting one or more fixtures to a soil or waste stack .
a. Floor Drain c. Circuit Drain
l b. Comb ined Drain
7. Grease Trap - identify from the plan given and define
d. Branch Drain
8 · What is a Grease Trap and its advisable location?

I Vtnl
lh,0.9\ Rool
I t.tlt flOI
w~1
lhrtt,
fom9orlm1n!
I
I Im
lh1n
I ':·w.:.-iiJj
rt!_
I L_~~============::
~.enOremlo (rt1\r,11lirte
I PLUMBING - FAUCETS and VALVES
1, A sievelike device for mixi ng air with water flowing from the end of the spigot
I 2. Anothe r name for Spigot
a. Keg c. Faucet
b. Valve d. Grip
i 3. Bibcock
4. Wh at is another term for a fauce t?
a. Spig ot c. Tap
i b. Bibb d. Hose
5 The Faucet at righ t is best use outside esp . at a garden. What do you call this kind of faucet?
a. Thre aded Faucet c. Hose Bib
j b. Garden Faucet d. External Faucet
6. A return bend of small-sized pipe, one of which is about 75cm long commonly used as a fauce t for a pantry si nk
a. Spigot C. Bibb
j b. Faucet
7 Which comes before the water meter?
d. Gooseneck
a. Gate Valve c. Butterily Valve

j b. Check Va lve
8 A va lve right ang le to the flow of water
d. None
-Ji
Ii
I
r
9. Ref~rring to the Figure, what valve is turned off when repairing the water supply of the water closet?
I What 1s used to shut off flow of water during maintenance?
a. Angle Valve c. Check Valve
b. Gate Valve d.
I 10. Identify gate valve (illustrations were given)
I
I
I
I
I
I 11 . What is a Check Valve?
12. A valve permitting a liquid or gas to flow in one direction only
I 13. What Valve is used to control or maintain the flow of water to one direction only?
a. Gate Valve
b. Check Valve
c. Backflow preventer
d 14. Another term for Backflow Preventer

a. Backflow Stopper
b. Vacuum Breaker
c. Backflow Breaker
d. Vacuum Stopper
15. It is installed to prevent the reverse flow of storm water or sewage in the sanitary sewer line during flood or sewer
j blockage.
a. Downspout c. Backwater Valve
b. Globe
j 16. What is a Globe Valve?
17 . Plumbing accessory near the water tank used to cut off supply (gate valve/ball valve not among choices)
a. Check Valve c. Pressure Val ve
'
b. Globe Valve d.
1s. A Valve specially made tCJ conceal lhe pipe connection from the wall to the fixture.
c1 . Angle Valve c. Ball Valve
b. Gate Valve d. Check Valve
19 _It is used for Wale!' Clcsct ;"J;id Lnvotory?
a. An~le Bibb c. Angle Fuse
d b. Ang le Faucet d. Angle Vnlve
I
l 1 2 3 4
I 20. From the figure shown above , which is used to prevent backward flow of wa ter
a. 1
b. 2
C. 3
d. 4
I 21 Frorn the fig ure shown above, which is used to prevent backwa rd flow of water
a. 1
b. 2
C. 3
d. 4
I 22. From the figure shown above. which utilizes a wedge to control the flow of water. It is often referred to as a Sluice
Valve .
a. 1 C. 3
I b. 2 d. 4
23. From the figu re shown above , which uses a disc moun ted on a rod as a closing mech anism.
a. 1 C. 3
I b. 2 d. 4
24. From the figure shown above, which uses a pivoting ba ll to control the flow of wa te r?
a. 1 C. 3
I b. 2 d. 4
25 . What is installed 1n a fixtu re to alleviate the effects of too much water pressure?
a. Pressure regulator
I b. Floor drain to ta ke care of the splashes on the floor caused by the high pressure
.( ~11 d
I 0 ·
'if::;'/
I tllLl
-i f •
r ~r ~:-. .,. ,~\"\

t --<iJ)1J
I ~J.
'
J
~-d-··
.
26 . When a pipe is suddenly closed, the flowing ma ss of water or fluid will bui ld up a pressure and a resulting shock
I wa ve that causes a loud banging noise and someti mes the brea kage of pi pelines This is called ?
a. Water Ham mer
b. Su rge Wave
c. Pressure Hammer
d. Flow Wave
i 27 . To absorb the shock described in the previous number, th is hydropne umatic device {shown above), similar to a
shock abso rber, can be instal led to absorb the shock and stop th e bang ing .
a.Hydro Arre ster c. Waler Hammer Arrestor
b Pneumatic Arrester d. Air Valves
i 28 . The device described al the previous number is installed where?
a. At the Inlet of th e Pipe c. After the Faucet or Shut-Off Va lve
b. Befo re the Faucet or Shu t-Off Valve d. Before th e Water Meter
i 2~ In a pl umbing system, pipes are like electrical wires . Wh al is the eq uivalent of Switches?
a. Tee c. Elbows
I 30 11 is
b. Valve s
a Val ve used 1n Water Tank
d
j
251
'
I
I 31 . Th e figure shown above Is a
I a. Ball Valve
b. Float Valve
c. Diaphragm Valve
d. Globe Va lve
I PLUMBING - FIXTURES
1. A term used to describe Pu mps th at are interconnected with each other
a. Gang c. Battery
I b. Series d.
2. Wl1,1t is the ma xi mum number of water closet that may be connected to a soil pIpe 7
a. 4 C. 8
b. 6 d. 10
3. Which should not be placed In line with a Beam?
a. Lavatory c. Kitchen Sink
0 b. Water Closet
4 What is the best fixture for a pu blic comfort room?
a. Gate Valve c. Faucet
b. Flushometer d.
i 5. In 1998, HCG built a manufacturi ng facility in the Philippines to cater to both the Sou theast Asian and US markets.
Two years later. HCG became No. 1 in the Ph ilippines with more than 55% market share . They are a
I supplier/manufacturer of what?
a. Ba throom Piping
b. Bath1oom Fixtu res
c. Kitchen Fixtures
d. Heater
I 6. A Toilet Bowl in wh ich the flushing water enters through the rim & siphoning action initia ted by a water jet draws
contents of the bowl through the trapway
a. Siphon Jet c. Reverse Trap
n b. Siphon Vorte x
7 Given a pl an , identify the Kitchen Sink
d. Wash Down
8. Which plumbing fixture does not have a wate r-saving feature?

a. Lavatory with pop-up c. Flow Limiting Valve
I b.1 5-gallon Flush Water Closet d. Waterless Urinal
9. A wa te r closet with an option to flush a full tank or a half tank.
a. Du al-Flush To ilet c. Dual-Flushometer Toi let
i b. Flappe r- Flush Toi let d. Double-Trap Toilet
Ii
rj
-Ii A B C
t,,,.;:.
f ' t ,
:l .J
,I
:, '-' J
D E F
2.S1
1111
10. From the fig ures above , where can you find A?
a Laundry Area c. T & B (bathtub)
l b T & B (shower) d. Kitchen Area
11 . From the figures above, where can you find the Deep sink shown as B?
a. Laundry Area c. Janitor's Closet
l b. Kitchen Area
12. From the figures above, where can you find C?
d T &8
a. In the Kitchen c. On the Roof

I b. Near the Fire Cabinet
13. Fro m the fig ures above, where can you find C?
d. At the Front Desk
I a. In the Kitchen
b. Near the Fire Cabinet
c. On the Roof
d. At the Front Desk
14 . From the fig ures above , where can you find E?
I a. Beside the Gas Range

b. Beside the Oven
15 From the fig ures above, where ca n you find F?
c. In the Work Shed
d. Under the Sink
I a. Kitchen
b. Garden
16. From the fig ures above , F is used for/with?
c. T & B
d. Garage
a. Food Disposal
I b. Dishwasher
C. Bathtub
d. House Drain
I ~,--
B C
t!
I
I
I
,,
D F fi?
S-0 · ., ....
I , •¥ ~
- '
,'/
' W81 ; ,
')
i 17 . From the Figures above , which Is used to collect runoff water as well as water from downspouts?
i a. Fig A
b. FigC
c. Fig D
d. FigE
-ii
18 From the Figures above, which Is a bidet?
a. Fig B c. Fig D
b Fig C d. Fig F
19. From the Figures above, wh ich Is used to conserve water?
a. Fig B c. Fig D
b. FigC d. FigF
20 Fro m the Fig ures above , wh ich Is used to intercept grease before it enters a wastewater disposal system ?
ii a. Fig A
b. Fig C
c. Fig D
d. Fig E
21 . From the Figures above, which is used in lieu of a P-Trap?
iii a. Fig A
b Fig B
c. Fig C
d. Fig E
22 . Frorn the Fig ures above, wh ich 1s a non-scou ring trap that prevents sewer gases from coming in to a building
a Fig A c. Fig C
iii b. Fig B d Fig E
--
23 From thu Figu1es l1elow. which Is used in lieu of a Filter?
24 From u1e Figures below, wh ich Is used along with a downspout? .

25 . From the Figu res below, which will be 111 the absence of a cornrn unity STP?
11111
INSPtC I ION LI DS
1 2
l
l
I
l 3 4
I - -----~f.,.,
••
ilti!~~~ - .. _.,... :- "'-,.;
.. ..;,. P.
I ~:~~-;;.;.5~-
I
I 5
•• ~-.~·,f
,~
I
I
I
26 . What accessory can be found on both a lockset and a plumbing fixtu re? (Escutcheon)
I PLUMBING - FIXTURE DRAIN SIZES

1. Size of Trap and Trap Arm of Shower
i 2. Size of Shower Drain?

3. What would be the minimum size of a drain pipe for a 2" d1a. supply pipe?
4 Size of Pipe for Lavatory
j 5. Size of Pipe for Floor Drain

6. Size of Pipe connected to 5 si nks
-
a 3" C. 2"
b. 2 ½" d.
7 Minimum size of trap of shower dra111
a 3" C. 2"
j b 4"
8. Minimum size of fl oor drain (cover)?
d. 1 ½"
--
3 J X 3" C. 2" X 2"
b 4" x 4'
9 Minimum size of shower drain
a. 50 mm c. 150 mm
IJ 100 min d. 200 mm
-
ii
l . 5. sb.m.
! \
10. From the figure above, what is the standard size of the P-Trap for A?
t a.
b.
75 mm
50 mm
c. 38 mm
d. 32 mm
11 . From the figure above, wh at is the standard size of the P-Trap for B?
I a. 75 mm
b. 50 mm
c. 38 mm
d. 32 mm
12. From the fig ure above, what is the standard size of the P-Trap for C?
I a. 75 mm
b. 50 mm
c. 38 mm
d. 32 mm
13. What property is used to distinguish between Potable and Sanitary upvc pipes?
l a. Color
b. Thickness
c. Diameter
d.
14. Where is Sanitary pipes measured?
I a. Thickness
b. Inside Diameter
c. Outside Diameter
d.
15. How could you differentiate between a Soil pipe and a Waste pipe when laid side-by-side?
I a. Color
b. Material
c. Smell
d. Diameter
I
I
I B
I
i
i I '1/"
--r ~ ~ -- -~
'I
i1
16. From the fig ure shown above, identify N Identify B
17 Given a set of Drawing details, indicate which is the:
· a. Cleanout
b. Grease Trap
c. Floor Drain
d. Gate Valve
'1
2.55
II
l
'l
PLUMBING - SLOPES/GRADES
1. For buildings with fi xtures to be installed at a level below grade , what must be done beforehand?
2. When a fixtu re is below the crown of a sewer line, what needs to be done lo its piping?
3 What would be your Primary consideration as an Architect if you are to connect the Building Sewer to the Sewer
Main .
a. Distance between the Building Sewer and the Sewer Main
I b The Invert Elevation
c. Pipe Insulation
d.
I 4. What Is the typical slope of waste pipe?
a. 1% C. 3%
b. 2% (1/4" per ft)
I 5. Minimum slope of horizon tal pipes
a. 2%
d 4%
C. 4%
b. 3%
I 6. Allowable slope of sanitary sewer
a. 1ft of 1 meter c. ¼ of 1 meter
I b. ½ inch of 1 meter d. ¼ of 1 It
7. What will happen if your soil pi pe has a 4% slope?
a. Efficient flow discharge c. Loss of water seal
I b. Clogging
8. A pump used to ejec t sewage or liquid waste .
a. Centrifugal Pump
d. You need to have Pipe Sleeves
c. Rotary Pump
b. Sump Pump d.
I 9 A pump used to eject water from the lowest portion of a bu ilding .
a. Sump Pu mp c. Centrifugal Pump
b. Vane Pump d.
I 10 A pump with a hermetically sealed motor close-coupled to the pump body. It pushes water (fluid) up to the surface
as opposed to jet pumps that pulls water. It does not suffer from pump cavitation and is more efficient than jet pumps
a. Centrifugal Pu mp c. Submersible Pump
I b. Screw Pump d. Vane Pump
11 . A kind of pump used to remove water th at has accumulated in a water-collecting basin commonly found in the
basement. It has two types . submersible and pedestal
I a. Screw Pump
b. Radial Piston Pump
c. Vane Pump
d. Sump Pump
I SUMP PUMP 1- \i2 OI SCHAH. Gl

PI P{
/
I l
!
I' INICRIOR ORAIIIAGE
i I
.. · /
I SVS!EM
--
ClllC K
VA LVE- - I, fOUN DAIION DRAIN
1 • (WEE PING Tl~E PIPE )
SUMP
t ' , :,r:i(
c!J:J
7'5
I
11
1
~
~-
,,.,._!i, 1
'Jl_~ '-
A
..
'~t~
-•-
'
• •,
• -".\. ?
/
BASI N -~ . ttn:,.,f; ,' :,.:..:._ SUM P PUM P

- ·~ >V~"\ •\'
... _ ... ·.
--
\ 2 The Sump Pump used In the illustration above is
a. Pedestal-Type c. Cannot be asce rtained
b Submersible-Type d Not installed correctly
PLUMBtN G - VENTS
1. w et Pipe/Dry Pipe . . . .
2_A system ol pipes supplying a flow of air to or from a drain age system or providing a circulation of air within the
syste m to protect trap sea ls froin s1pho11age and back pressur_e
Ii a. vent System c. Storm Drainage System
-II
b. Drain age System d. Sewage Disr osal System
3. It allows for the equalization of pressure within the plumbing sys tem every time wa ter is poured or flushed into the
system
a. Trap c. Vent
b. Drain d. Valve
4. Storey height, not less than 24 3m (8ft), within wh ich the horizontal branches from one floor or storey of a building
are connected to the stack .
a. Branch Height c. Lateral Interval
b. Branch Interval d. Branch Horizontal
5. What is th e Vent used for 2 to 8 fixtures wherein no Individual vent is necessary?
6. Circu it Vent
7. A pipe connecting upward from a soil or waste stack below the floor and below horizontal connection to an adjacent
l ve
in nt
thestack at a point above the floor and higher than the highest spill level of fixtures for preventing pressure changes
stacks
a. Wet Vent c. Dry Vent
I b. Loop Vent d. Yoke Vent

8. It provides air circu lation between drain age and vent system It acts as au xil iary vent.
a. Relief Vent c. Loop Vent
I b. Wet Vent d. In Vent

9 Wh at is th e Vent used that rises under the fixtures to and connects back vertically to the horizontal branch?
10 An individual Vent for a plumbing fi xture located at the downstream of a trap .
I a. Vent Pipe
b. Back Vent
11 . It is used to filter gasses away from a home or business and is a cruci al component in an indoor plumbing system
I It typically runs vertically inside of the walls of a structure and is connected to the traps of plu mbing fixtu res so as to
ventilate them and prevent the water seal fro m being siphoned out. Most notably, they are used to vent sewer gas as
we ll as to create an air supply to allow the drains and toilets to operate smoothly.
I a. Ve nt Stack
b. Stack Ven t
12 What is a Common Vent?
c. Vent Pipe
d.
I 13. Part #20 in the Figure at rig ht is

a VSTR c. Waste Stack
I b. Soil Vent
14 Part #21 in the Figu re at right is
a. Vent Stack c. Waste Stack
-- 1 '4 '
I b Soil Vent
15. Part #22 in the Figure at right is
a. Soil Pipe
d. Stack Vent
b. Waste Stack
i
Ii I
~ ) ,,I
ti I !
~ I•~~
~J
' ®
-51 16. lc.JE:nt1fy lhe parts from \he Figure above
17. Given the figure, identify the different parts.
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
r ·7S)
\"..-
C'\
r
\..,
JZJ
257
r-~-------- - -\@
t I
1
I
( -_ - - -
I
I
II rp:
l iA]
-
I
I
L'JI
I
l
I
I 18. In the Figure above , it is provided to permit flushing and cleaning
a.A c. D
b. B d. E
I 19. In the Figure above , Bis a

a. Circu it Vent c. Unit Vent
b. Loop Ven t d. Double Vent
0 20 In the Figure above, C Is
21 . In the Figure above, a vertica l soil pipe that conveys fecal matter and wastewater
a. B c. D
0 b. C
22. In the Figu re above, E is a
d. E
a. 90deg Sanitary Elbow c. Double Sanitary Wye
I b. 45deg Sanitary Elbow

23 . In the Figure above, Fis a
d. Double Sanitary Tee
24 . The principal artery of the venting system
ll a. Local Vent
b. Stack Vent
c. Vent Pipe
d. Main Vent
25 . A vertica l vent pipe installed primarily for providing a circulation of air
D a. Local Vent
b. Stack Vent
c. Vent Stack
d. Loop Vent
26 . A Pipe above a waste or so il pipe that allows gas to escape from the system .
a. Ve nt Stack c. Vent Pipe
11 b. Stack Vent d.
27 . What is being shown by the arrow in th e figure below?
a
0
p
' , r.., J
' -'
0
r;t
Whol is !Je ll ,~ <;hJwn by liie a1 rm , ,n the. figu re\ t
22 " ·p , ·11~ c. ,.) or m 0 1a1n ,- :
'7;" - '·
ll . IJ O\'/ll :, 1J0 11 1 rl . l
,,.'-' i ,-
j
29. An extension to the atmosphere of a waSle stac ks or soila vent;
soil stack vent the highest horizontaI branch drain or fixtu re
wasteabove
branch that is connected to the stack. Also known a p-
a. Vent Stack c. Vent ipe
I b. Stack Vent ct.
30. What can back-pressure / siphonage do to the fixture .
s?
31. Pipe Chase - definition . ?

I 32. What do you call the recess in walls intended for pipes·
a. Chase c. Sleeve
b. Duct d.
I 33. An opening used to receive pipes
a. Shaft c. Ducts
b. Pipe Chase d.
I 34. Where should you place soil pipes for high rise structures?
a. Pipe chase c. RC Wall
I b. Partitions d. Column
35. Which of the following is not suited for a pipe chase?
a.
b. HB
Drywall c. Shear Wall
I 36. Best location to put soil pipes
a. Drywall
b..150mm CHB wall c. Pipe Chase
I 37. Should not be used for a pipe chase d.
a. CHB
b. Drywall c. Shear wall
I 38. Can you embed a 4" dia. Pipe in a 150mm (6") wall?
a.
b.
I
C.
d.
I PLUMBING - SEWAGE DISPOSAL

1. Cesspool
2. Privy
3. Latrine
I 4. Sump Pit
5 In a location where there ls no pcovlsion for drainage line, what is the next best thing?
i a. Store waste in tank and dispose in sanitary fill
b. Use drain tiles connected to open field
c. Connect to the nearest creek
I d. Any of the above

6. What is an alternative to the conventional Septic Tank?
a. Aerobic System
I b. landfill
7. How do Landfills affect us?
-- 8. Amount of waste discharged for a wastewater treatment facility

a. 300 gpm
b. 500 gprn
9. How do we size Sewage Pits?
a. Volume of Solid Wastes
b. Volume of Liquid Wastes
c. 30 cu.m/day
d. 50 cu.m/day
c. Volume of Solid, Liquid and Storm

10. The ~West hoci20nta1nm of pipe Inside the building Which ceceives the disch· , f· •
Ii aod conveys the same to the house / building sewe, age •om fixtuces and othe, bcanches
-II
a. Building
b. Branch Drain c. Primary Branch
11. What can discharge directly to sewer system?
a. Building Sewer c. Ashes
b. Oil and Grease d.
12. What do you call liquid waste (without urine, feces or indust · .
-
1
' · Gray Watoc c. Black Wate:'a waste) d1scha,ges into the sewen
b. Storm Water d. Ground Water
13· In the Recycling and Treatment of water for Low Cost and Economic use, where can you use grey water?
a. Flushing of Toilet c. Agricultural Irrigation
b. Washing Dishes d. Washing Clothes
I 14. Where can you use waste water from the kitchen sink?
15. Study Perforated Pipe
I PLUMBING -WATER TREATMENT
,, 1. Which Law governs the Quality of effluent being discharged from an STP?
a. DENR DAO 35
b. NPCP
c. NBC
d. WCP
2. It is a~ded to water to reduce salinity.
3. What Is the use of Chlorine?
I a. Water Disinfectant
b. Water Purifier
4. It is used tor Acid Liquid Wastes (Limestone)
I 5. A sewage treatment process that includes the exposure to air
6. A sewage tre~tment process that involves the use of hydrochloride to kill pathogenic bacteria
a. Aeration c. Distillation
b. Disinfection d. Filtration
7. What is used for water treatment?
a. Chloride c. Cyanide
I b. Sodium Chloride d.
I PLUMBING - SEPTIC TANK

1. What is an air-tight receptacle where human waste is delivered before it is deposited to its final facility where black
water is treated?
I a. Cesspool
b. Septic Tank
c. Privy
d. Latrine
2. What do you call the water-tight receptacle used to store household wastes?
I 3. What is the maximum depth of Septic Tank?
4. Minimum number of septic tank compartment
a. 2 c.3
ti b. 1
5. Whal is the capacity of the 1st compartment of a septic tank?
•li
6. In which part of the Septic Tank are raw wastes deposited?
a. Leaching Chamber c. Mixing Chamber
b. Digestive Chamber d.
7. It is the biggest Chamber in a Septic Tank. ..
a. Leaching Chamber c. Mixing Chamber
b. Digestive Ch amber . d. Effluent Pumping Chamber
-
8 A semi-solid mass that forms at the bottom of a Septic Tank
· a Scum c. Effluent
b: Sludge . d. Discharge . . ..
--
9 A 2 Om wide Septic Tank was designed to serve 300 persons. Assuming 0.07 cu.m./person and using the minimum
r~qui;ed depth as allowed by the code, what is the length of the septic tank?
a. 3.00m c. 6.00m
b. 4.00m d. 7.00m
1 0. Minimum distance of well to septic tank . .
11 _ There is a Septic Tank installed on top of a_
rock by the seashore. T~e tank Is exposed on_ low tide, and covered in
--
ater during high tide. Which of the follow1ng would be an appropriate waterproofing for 1t?
sea W . d. t .
a. Waterproof all surface, exterior an In enor
b. Waterproof all interior surface except the floor
c.
12 _Minimum Airspace of a Septic Tank
13 Parts of the Septic Tank . _
· Whal type of materi al is usu ally used for the base ?fa Septic lank?
14
· a. Earth Base c. Reinforced Concrete
f_: b. Mass Concrete d.

15. Why is the septic tank not placed under a garage?
1
6. If the site has no existing sewer system, what is your solution as per National Plumbing Code?
a. Provide Septic Tank c. Use the river
I b. Throw waste to the closest field d. Provide Portalets
17.Given the detailed section of a Floor Drain, Grease Trap, Septic Tank and Catch Basin, which of the following has
the same function, but different purpose?
l a. Floor Drain and Grease Trap
b. Septic Tank and Catch Basin
c. Grease Trap and Septic Tank
d. Catch Basin and Grease Trap
I 18. Where would be the best location of a Septic Tank?

a. At the rear part of the lot c. At the front part of the lot
b. Underneath the carport d. At either side of the lot
I 19. For a Bungalow with a 1-car carport, where is the best location of the Septic Tank?
a. Side of Carport
b. Back of Carport
c. Front of Carport
d. Below Carport
I 20. For the same house above, where is the best location of the cistern?
a. Side of Carport
b. Back of Carport
c. Front of Carport
d. Below Carport
I 21. A new house for a client will have a basement toilet for the drivers. The Sanitary Engineer recommends that the
Septic Tank should be placed just below ground level so that it could be tapped directly to the sewer main, while the
waste from the basement toilet will be pumped to the Septic Tank. Is the Engineer's decision correct?
I a.Yes, it's the most efficient and easiest way.

b. No, Toilets should never be placed at the Basement
c. No, the Septic Tank should be placed just below the Basement level, and the resulting effluent will be
pumped instead to the sewer.
I d. Doesn't matter
22. Your project is located at a sloping site and the client wants a basement with T&B. Where would you locate the
septic tank?
I a. Just below the basement T&B
b. Just below the ground level
c.
d.
I 23. For the same project, what if there is an existing septic tank prior to constructing the basement. What will you do for
the new T&B at the basement?
a. Use the original septic tank w/c is higher in elevation by using a pump
b. Create a new septic tank below the basement then use a pump
I c. Tell the owner not to make a T&B at the basement, it's too much work
d. What would be the consideration when providing a septic tank?
NOTE: There is an alternative not given in the choices. It's the Macerating Toilet System. It's basically a Water Closet
I with its own attached pump and a rotating cutting blade that liquefies human waste and Toilet paper. Once waste
material is liquefied, ii then pumps the liquid waste to an existing septic tank or sewer line. It is capable of pumping
waste 25' vertically and 150' horizontally.
I 24. What would be the consideration when providing a septic tank?
a. Location of the water supply
- b. Geography
25. What is an alternative to the conventional Septic Tank?
a. Aerobic System
b. Landfill
j ' PLUMBING - STORM DRAINAGE

1. A vertical conduit that conveys water
a. Downspout
b. Gutter
c. Vent Stack
d. Sill Cock
-- 2 It is used to convey water from the roof gutter to the catch basin
3: If your site is sloping to~ards your adjacent neighbor, how w!II the drainage be?
4_In storm drain system, 1t 1s used to prevent aggregates, debns and other unwanted objects from entering the
drainage system
a. Trap
b. Catch Basin (a receptacle for the run off surface water, which retains heavy sediment)
-- PLUMBING - SITUATIO~AL . ..
Mostly plumbing (madarn1 from refresher ut1/J/1es notes) ang lumabas and more on I. T. terms din
2,1
Plumbing brochure 3-5 items ang lumabas... basic fittings
Plan reading. Plumbing of simple Residence (basic plumbing 5 questions lumabas pero nasa 11/ustration lahat ng sagot)
Identify different symbols from the plans given
Reading Plumbing Layou t fro m the plans provided
What is the design principle "cluster/g roup utilities?"
l From a HOUSE PLAN provided , analyze :.. . ganito style ng tanon g..
1. What Is located at the end of the soil pi pe?
2 Wha t 1s the object between the kitchen sink and the laundry sin k?
3. Wh ich of the fi xtures are not vented?
l a. None
b. Lavatory
c. Lavatory and Floor Drain)
d.
I 4. What is the 50 mm diameter pipe shown behind the lavatory?

a. Vent b. Vent thru roof)
5 How does the vent connect between the laundry sink and kitchen sink?
a. above ceiling c. Under the slab
b. embedded thru low walls d.
6. PLAN READING :
a. Residential Plumbing and Electrical Plans
a.1. Location of Water Line
I a.2 . Isometric Drawings

a.3 . Size of Supply Pipe
a.4 Location of Pipes on Plan
a.5. From a set of Plumbing Layout
a.5.1. Identify the drain pipes that are vented
a.5 2. Compare the pipe sizes of the pipe coming from the storage (water tank) and the supply
I pipe of the last toilet fixture

a 5.3 Is th e service pipe layout overhead or under the floor?
a 5.4 Locate the Grease Trap
a.5 5 Locate the Cleanout
I a 5.6 Is Pipe A and Bon the same level?
a.5.7 What will happen if Pipe B is installed higher than Pipe A?
a.5.8 Wh ich Pipe serves as the Vent Pipe of the lavatory?
fl. b. Centralized Mechanical System
c. Given a set plans of a HVAC system as reference , indicate the following
c.1 ACCU
ti c.2
c. 3
Condensate Pipes
FCU
- d. Electrical Plan/Data Connection System for a Commercial/Computer Shop

d 1 Number of Computers in the system at the Ground Floor
d.2 Location of Server
d.3 Kind of Power Safety Device ideal for this kind of system
d.4 Size and Capacity of Wiring
7 During Site Inspection , the Arch itect notices that a Soil Pipe will cross a beam , what should he do?
a. Ask to relocate the pipe c. Do nothing
t:1 b. Resize th e diameter of the Soil Pipe d.

8. Prior to the scheduled concrete pouring, you were asked to inspect the column to be poured. You noticed that th ere
is a pvc pipe for vent stack inside the column. What will you do'1
t::1 a. Proceed with the pouring as It Is perfectly normal to have a pvc vent stack inside the column
b. Ask the engineer and contractor to relocate the pvc pipe before the pouring
c. Ta lk to the su pervisor and do not proceed with the pouring
;;I
9. lv l\ al should NOT be allowed to cross a beam?
,:~
·'
a. Soil Pipe c Waler Pipes
\.J . Electrical W1nngs d Aircon Duels
, C Thu r; are severc:J I reasons wt1y Soil Stacks are not allowed in columns . Wh ich 1s NOT a reason?
::i Pipr::s will in te rfere with rc1nforc1ng bars c. Cracks and leaks cannot be detected
h \he size of !he col u1 11ns will be larger d. The gas emitted will deteriorate concrete
-
11 -When water coming out of the faucet is contaminated and polluted, what could be the possible reason?
12. An opening of sufficient size for a man to gain access thereto ·
I a. Door
b. Manhole
c. Service Entrance
d. Accessible Door
l 13. Manhole/Manhole Dimension

14. Maximum Distance of Manholes for Sewer Line
15. Which is NOT a rule of thumb in designing a drainage?
I a. As much as possible, pipes must run in a straight line.
b. Underground drainage line should be on top of compacted soil.
c. It should be underneath the driveway.
I 16. Where storm sewers are usually placed?
a. Under the sidewalk on narrow road and under the road on wide road
b. Near the curb
I c. At the center of the road
17. Where to locate sanitary sewer
I a. Generally adjacent to cu rb on side streets and under the pavement in narrow streets
b.
C.
d.
I 18. Best location of water supply if street is narrow
19. Best location of water supply if street is wide
20. Best location of telephone lines
I a. Under the sidewalk on short roads and under the road on a wider road
b. Near the Curb
c. At the center of the road
I d.
I N
I
-ri ..,.
l I 'UJ,P
- 1' i1 E
s
II 21. From the illustration above, which fitting change directions of the water supply?
--
a. Gate Valve c. Check Valve
b. Elbow d. Angle Valve
22. From the illustration above, which fixture takes more pres~ure?
a. Water Closet · c. Urinal
b. Lavatory d. All are equal pressure
23 From the illustration above, which statement is NOT true?
. a. Vertical Water Supply embedded in the CHB Wall
- b. All Fixtures have an Angle Valve

c. The Lavatory has the most Water Pressure
d. Water Supply came from the West
- 24. From the illustration above, where did the Water Supply come from?
a. North
b. East
c. South
d. West
25_From the illustration ;:ii.Jove, where did \he water supply for the water closet come from?
"-
a. Floor c. Ceiling
b. Wall d. Partition
AUTOMATION and FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEMS
1.A common term for a building which is outfitted with automatic fire suppression and alarm system, inter office
communication lines, etc.
a. Intelligent building
b. Automated building .
2. A computer-based control system installed in buildings. It controls and monitors the building's mechanical and
electrical equipment such as ventilation, lighting, power, fire systems and security systems
a. Green Building System (GBS)
b. Building Management System (BMS)
c. Intelligent Building System (IBS)
l d. Automated Building System (ABS)
3. The general term for communication between two or more individuals by electronic means
4. Most popular network today
I a. Facebook
b. Skynet
c.lntemet
d. Ethernet
5. Difference between Internet and Intranet
I 6. A private network accessible only to an organization's staff using LAN and WAN
a. Internet c. World Wide Web
I b. Intranet d. Microsoft Share Point

7. A telephone network which allows a single access number to offer multiple lines to outside callers while providing a
range of external lines to internal callers.
a. Private Address Branch Exchange
I b. Private Automatic Branch Exchange
c. Private Branch Exchange
d. Private Access Branch Exchange
I 8. For an office plan that has a supervisor's office, work stations, clerical tables, etc ... What type of communication
system would you use?
a. Intranet C. LAN
I b. PABX
9. A supplier for Dataffelecommunication
d. Telephone
a. Aiphone c. Unitec
I b. Phelps Dodge
10. Which is not a telecommunication brand?
d. Visonic
- a. Fujitsu
b. Phelps Dodge
11. A brand for electrical fixtures.
a. Schneider
c.Aiphone
d. NEC
c. Moen
"-
b. Phillips . d. Osram
12. A telephone that uses radio and has a base unit.
a. Cellular Phone c. Portable Phone
b. Remote Phone d. Wireless Phone
13. What is installed in ducts an~ mechanical passageways to prevent fire from spreading quickly?
14. It automatically closes when It detects fire or s~oke. . . .
Ii 15. When water comes out as soon as the fire sprinkler system Is activated, the system Is:
a. Wet Pipe
b. Pre-action ·
c. Deluge
d. Dry Pipe
Iii 16_A Sprinkler System used for areas where sensitive documents and computer equipment are kept such as museums
and data centers.
-
a. Wet Pipe c. Deluge
b. Pre-action d. Dry Pipe
-
17 This is highly recommended for a sprinkler system designed for high hazard areas such as power plants off h
oil ·rigs, aircraft hangars, chemIca
· 1storage or processing ·I·t·
· facIIIes. , s ore
a. Water Mist c. Foam Water
-
b. Waterspray d. Wet pipe
18_It dispenses a stream or spray of water, usually controlled by a fusible link that melts at a predetermined
temperature.
2(,4
I
'
~ 1
I lE "'
19. Identify Figure 1A
I a. Heat Detector
b. Motion Detector
c. Smoke Detector
d. Fire Alarm
20. The FDC shown in Figure 1B is also known as a
I a. Safety Valve
b. Siamese Connection
c. Dry Standpipe
d. Wet Standpipe
21 . Iden tify Fig ure 1C.
I a. Blower Fan
b. Cen trifugal Fan
c Tornado Fan
d. Fire Siren
22. Identify Figu re 1D.
I a. Gensel
b. Fire Fighting Pump
c. Elevator Machine
d. Escalator Machine
23. Identify Figure 1E.
I a. Upright
b. Pendant
c. Pendent
d. Sidewall
I
I
I
2A 2B 2C
I
24 . Identify Figure 2A c. Pendent
I a. Upright
b. Pendan t
d. Sidewall
- 25. Identify Figure 28

a. Upright
b. Pendant
c. Pendent
d. Sidewall
- 26 Identify Figure 2C
a. Upright
nd
c. Pendent
d. Sidewall
b. Pe ~nh\ f Siamese Connection from the ground line?
-
27 . Minimum heig O c. 1200 mm
a. 38 mm d.
b 45 mm
-
28 Dry Pipe/Wet Pipe
29: Suppression System
30. Smoke prevention is
-
a. More _important than fire prevention c. As important as fire prevention
b. ~ess important the fire prevention d. It doesn't matter
31. Protective device used in the kitchen.
a. Heat detector c. Alarm
b. Smoke detector d. CCTV
32. Discuss Fire Alarm System/Code/Zones
33. Fire Alarm Systems
34. Types of Fire Alarm Systems
All Fire Alarm Systems essentially operate on the same principle. If a detector detects smoke or heat or someone
operates a_ break glass unit (manual break point), then alarm sounders operate to warn others in the building that there
~ ay be a fire and to evacuate. It may also incorporate remote signaling equipment which would alert the fire brigade
via a central station.
Fire Alarm Systems can be broken down into four categories:
• Conventional Addressable
Analogue Addressable Wireless systems
I Conventional Fire Alarm System
In a Conventio~al Fi~e A~arm System, a number of call points and detectors are wired to the Fire Alarm Control Panel in
Zones. A Zone 1s a circuit and typically one would wire a circuit per floor or fire compartment. The Fire Alarm Control
I Panel has a number of Zone Lamps. The reason for having Zones is to give a rough idea as to where a fire has
occurred. This is important for the fire brigade and of course for the building management. The accuracy of knowing
where a fire has started is controlled by the number of Zones a Control Panel has and the number of circuits that have
I been wired within the building. The Control Panel is wired to a minimum of two sounder circuits which could contain
bells, electronic sounders or other audible devices. Each circuit has an end of line device which is used for monitoring
purposes.
I Addressable Systems
The detection principle of an Addressable System is similar to a Conventional System except that the Control Panel
can determine exactly which detector or call point has initiated the alarm. The detection circuit is wired as a loop and up
I to 99 devices may be connected to each loop. The detectors are essentially Conventional Detectors, with an address
built in. The address in each detector is set by dil switches and the Control Panel is programmed to display the
information required when that particular detector is operated. Additional Field Devices are available which may be
I wired to the loop for detection only i.e. it is possible to detect a normally open contact closing such as sprinkler flow
switch, or a nom1ally closed contact opening. Sounders are wired in a minimum of two sounder circuits exactly as a
Conventional System. Loop Isolation Modules are available for fitting on to the detection loop/loops such that the loop
I is sectioned in order to ensure that a short circuit, or one fault will only cause the loss of a minimal part of the system.
Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Systems
Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Systems are often known as Intelligent Fire Alarm Systems. There are several
fl different types of Analogue Systems available which are determined by the type of protocol which they use. The bulk of
standard Analogue Detectors available are fairly stupid as ~e Dete~tors can only giv~ output signals representing the
value of detected phenomena. It is left up to the Control Unit to decide whether there 1s a fire, fault, pre-alarm or other.
tp With a true Intelligent Analogue System each detector effectively incorporates its own computer which evaluates the
environment around it, and communicates to the Control Panel whether there is a fire, fault or the detector head needs
cleaning. Essentially Analogue Systems are far more complex and incorporate far more facilities ~an Conventional or
Addressable Systems. Their primary purp_ose ~s to help prevent the occurren~e of false alarms. With the Analo~ue
Addressable System, up to 127 input devices 1.e.: S~oke Detectors_,.Call Pomts, Heat Detec~ors, Contact Monitors and
other interface devices may be wired to each detection loop. In addition to the 127 Input Devices, up to 32 Output
0 • s such as Loop Sounders, Relay Modules and Sounder Modules may be connected. Analogue Systems are
ev_ilc~I •n 2 4 and 8 loop versions which means large premises can be monitored from one single panel. Isolator
be connected between sections of detectors as described for Addressable Systems.
-1 Wireless Fire Alarm System

.
Wire 1ess I
..
ut1. 1ise
f're alarm systems are an effective alternative to traditional wired fire alann systems for all applications. They
.
re licence-free . •
radio communications to .in terconnec t th e sensors an d dev1ces
. (smoke detectors, call-points,
) ·th the controllers. It is a simple concept, w 1c prov, es many urnque ene I s and .1s a fuII analogue
secu , h' h 'd . b t·t
:~dn:sable fire detection system without the need for cable.
--
1111
r...a
I PROFPRAC Page 1 of 52
I PROFPRAC
I
I Situation: Newlyweds Architect Basha and Engr. Popoy decided to put up a
I Design firm. Architect Basha will do the Architectural Plans while Engr. Popoy
will take care of Structural design. Due to their hard work, good working
relations and a bit of luck, they were able to get several projects. However,
I since they were just starting out, they decided to get the services of a Master
-
Plumber on a per project basis for all their projects.
1 . How should they pay the Master Plumber?
a. Fixed Monthly since it will be cheaper as he is taking care of all the projects anyway
ii b. Per fixture, per project
c . Percentage of Cost
ii d . Per linear meter
2. Due to the numerous projects coming their way, the firm reached a point wherein
ii they became under-manned vis-a-vis their projects . Engr Popoy was tasked to
supervise the construction as the client specifically asked him because of his
reputation as a sought after engineer in Europe. There was an accident at the jobsite
ii wherein a beam collapsed and it was found out that it was due to the inferior materials
used by the Contractor. Who is liable under the Civil Code of the Philippines?
ii a. Architect Basha.
b . Engr. Popoy
I c. Contractor
d . Engr. Popoy and the Contractor
I 3. Due to the delay caused by the collapse of the beam , the project completion time
was delayed by over a month. The OWNER is asking to be compensated for the
failure to complete the work within the time frame set forth in the contract. What do
L1 you call this
II a . Punitive Dam ages

b . Liquidated Damages
c. Performance Damages
d. Contractor's All Risk Damages
II 4. After laying off several of their workers, Architect Basha took on more work load
and that includes Structural Conceptualization. How can she contribute under this?
,,
ti a. She can do Building Programming
b. She can make structura l design computations to help lessen Engr. Popoy's work
load.
c. She can conceive and develop the type, disposition, arrangement and proportioning
of stru ctural elements
f;I d. She can help in Value Engineering
JJ
Pa ge 2 o f 52
PROFPRAC
Situation: Mr. Yao is a very studious person. He first graduated as a Civil

Engineer and then after passing the Licensure Examination for Civil Engineers
decided to continue his studies and ultimately became a Registered and
Licensed Architect. Not yet contented, he also passed the Master Plumber
Licensure Examinations. As a professional with so many licenses, he became
very busy with his numerous projects as he too became a Contractor.
1. Because Mr. Yao is so busy, he can no longer handle the construction of his own
house. He hires a person to supervise its construction. To whom is this person
technically under?
a . Owner c. Architect
b. Contractor d. Engineer
Situation: You just passed the recent Licensure Examination for Architects
and...
1. What do you do next?

a . Go back to your old job and make it better.
b. Look for g ree ner pasture
c. Get ready for the Oathtaking
d. Put-up your own firm
2. Your friend , upon learning that you are now a Reg istered and Licensed Architect
referred his Aunt to you who as fate would have it was looking for an Architect to
design her dream house. You are going to meet your friend 's Aunt for the first time,
what attire will you wear?
a . Business Attire - a su it to show that you are a professional and will approach
this project in such a way thereby establishing a professional relation
b . Clean and Presentable and Comfortable-'- to make the client comfortable and
establish a friendly relation
c. Rugged - to convey to the client that you are easy to talk to and is willing to
negotiate and cut cost
d . Any- client will hire me based on my skills as an architect and not on how I look
3. This is a n "Alternative" start to a career in Architecture

a . Work as an employee in an Architectural Firm to gain more experience
b. Take a risk and establish your own firm
c. Establish a Firm with your friends
d. Go abroad
4. You want to be updated on the latest trends in Building and Construction. What
should you do?
a . Attend social activities of your Professional Orga nization
b . Be an active member of your Professional Organization
C.
d.
5. When is the Architect's Creed not recited?
a. IAPOA meeting c. Induction to UAP
b. Mass Oathtaking d.
6. In orde r to be attuned with the present times, the Profess ional Regulatory Board of
Archi tecture Adopted and Promulgated an amended Architect's Credo which became
effective on 21 .June 20 18 under Resolution No. __ Series of 2018 as endorsed by
the UA P.
a. 2 C. 4
b. 3 d. 5
2,1
PROFPRAC Page 3 o f 52
I 7 · The amended version of the Architect's Credo was endorsed by the United
Architects of the Philippines to PRBOA through NBD Board Resolution No. Series
I of 2017-2018 .
a. 97 c .99
d . 100
-
•~
b . 98
-[I
ff
8 . The new Architect's Credo was signed on
a . June 4, 2018
b . Ju~e 5, 201 8
c. June 6, 201 8
d. June 2 1, 2018
9. What Is not mentioned in the Architect's Credo?
a . Clients
b. Colleag ues
c . Ind ustry Partners
d . Government
10. Due ~o your excitement at being a new A rchitect, you misplaced your PRC
ldent1f1cat1on Card. You applied at PRC for a repla cement ID. How long will you wait to
get you ID card?
a. C.
b. rl :
13 the prof_
e ssional id ent ification card.
1, a sc hedu le of appointment shall be given as to when to claim
11. To get a re placeme nt PRC ID, you need to pay a fee and present your?
a. Special Power of Attorney c. 4pcs 2 x 2 picture
b. Notarized Affidavit of Loss d . Commun ity Tax Certificate
12. After practicing for several years, you noticed that your license is about to expire
on your b irthday. Which is now a requirement for renewing your license?
a. Affidavit of Loss c. CPD units
b. 4 pcs 2x2 picture d . Commun ity Tax Certificate
13. After paying the fee for the renewal of your license , how long before you can get
c;J the PRC ID?
a.
C.
d.
t;l b.
a schedul e of appointm ent shall be given as to when to claim
t;l t h e professi onal identificatio n ca rd.

14. Afte r pass ing the licensure exam , you decided to marry your boyfriend. Since you
w anted to update your professional records at PRC, you applied/submitted a Petition for
Change of Reg istered Name due to Marriage and/or Petition for Correction of Entries or
Data . What is the maximum processing time for PRC, from receipt of complete documents,
tJJ to act on you r petition?

a . 7 Days
b . 2 Weeks
c. 1 Month
d . 2 Months
Situation: You are now a veteran architect with your own firm . ..
1. As an Architect, you have a responsibi lity to your peop le. Which of the following
would you do to best show th is?
a . Train them to be good in their profession
b. Be an example of how to become a good professional
e::;J c. G ive them overtimes
d.
c;;J
r;;,
-,d
-II PROFPRAC
2 - As an A~chitect, how do you compensate your subordinates?

Page 4 of 52
II a . Provide good workplace/ environment

b. Provide salary commensurate to work
•
c. Provide minimum wage
d. Set an example/ be a mentor
3. How do you treat new members of the profession?

a. Do not give overtime?
b. Give equal opportunities like senior members
ta
c . Let them attend seminars and trainings
•
4. A well-managed office is like a car that
a. is running smoothly c. has plenty of gas and oil
b . is spick and span d. is in good condition
5. As a veteran architect with your own firm , why do you need a secretary?
a . to prepare contract documents and keep track of various ongoing projects
b . to secure client meetings
c. to keep office records in order
••
d. to prepare documents
6 . How do you compensate a "project-hired" Painter?

a. Per Hour c. Per Square Meter
b. Per Day d. Lump Sum
_7. How do you pay a Painting Subcontractor?
••
a. Per Hour c. Per Square Meter
b . Per Day d. Lump Sum
Situation: During the Summer holidays, a couple decided to have their house
repaired. They acquired the services of Architect "A" for this project. However,
they specifically asked Architect "A" to give the Roofing Repairs to their father
who happens to be a roofing contractor. Everything went well until the rains
1111 came. Now, the house is flooding and leaks coming everywhere. They asked
--
Architect "A" to make good the defects but the Architect refused.
1. Who is liable for the damages?
a. Architect "A, " he should have checked the work of the Roofing contractor
b . The Roofing Contractor, he was the one who repaired the roof
c. The Couple , they were the ones who asked that their father do it
--
d.
2. Due to the flooding and leaks, the whole house had to be rewired. After a
successful. mediation, Architect "A" continued with the project. How are Electricians
paid?
a. Lum psum c. Ask the Contractor
b . Per outlet, sw itches and complexity d. Based on Material Cost
-- Situation: An A rchitect drew up plans for a family ... the owners went abroad..
after a year, the owners returned but instructed the architect to help them find a
new lot.. . the task would entail the architect's personal time ...
1 . What stage in the Arch itect's services will the Architect perform?
--.,,,,,
a. Pre-design Services c. Compre hensive Arch'I Services
b . Reg ular Design Services d. Specia lized Allied Services
IJ.70
ta
--\I
PROFPRAC Page 5 of 52
2. What will be the ideal method of compensation that the Architect should use if he is to
find a new site for the project?
a. Percentage of Construction Cost c. MOPE
b. Per diem/Honorarium + Reimbursibles d. Reta ine r
IIJ 3. What can the Architect suggest to the owners to minimize spending?
4 . How much is the Architect compensated after he comp leted all plans and documents
for construction?
IS a . 65%
b . 75%
C. 85%
d. 90%
la Situation: Juan has been working at Saudi Arabia fo r almost 15 years but he
feels incomplete since he was not able to take the licensure examination when
he was still in the Philippines. He heard that the PRBoA is going to conduct
Ill FLEA at Jeddah. He asks his family to send his Transcript of Records, Birth
Certificate and Diploma.
ta 1 . What else does he need to be able to take the FLEA?

a. Diversified Training Logbook signed and sealed by a Filipino RI.A
••
b. Certificate of Employment from his company show ing his tenure and position
c. Recommendation Letter from the Consulate
d.
2. After passing the FLEA, his company had a big project. He was the one who made all
the drawings. To whom is he liable to?
••
a . To the Company c. To the Saudi Government
b. To the Philippine Government d. None
3. After passing the FLEA, who can administer his Professional Oath?
a. Any Reg istered and Licensed Architect working abroad
b. The Ambassador of the Philippines Embassy
c. The PRBoA will hold a special Oathtaking Ceremony
•- d.
Situation: A fter graduating from a BS Architecture course in the Philippines,
Juan decided to work in Singapore. He worked there for 2 years and decided to
go back to the Philippines to take the Architecture Licensure Exam.
-- 1. What should he do to file his requirements?

a. Fill out the DTE and let his Singaporean mentor sign it for him
b. His mentor should be a Filipino RLA if working abroad to qualify
c. He should just take the ALE in Singapore if it was offered there
d . Have his DTE signed by another Filipino Architect in the Philippines
Situation: Juan passed the ALE with flying colors and came back to his old job
1111 in Singapore. His boss was so impressed, that he wanted to put up an
--
architectural firm here in the Philippines.
1. What should Juan's boss, a Singaporean, do to practice architecture in the
Ph ilippines?
a. He shou ld collaborate with a Filipino Firm/Architect and be partners, to be able
to practice architecture in the Philippines
b. He should register his firm and begin practicing architecture in the Philippines
--
c. He is not allowed to put up an architectural fi rm in the Philippines
d. He could practice architecture in the Philippines anytime he wants
f.11
-
I 2 - If Juan's boss, a Filipino, could put up an architectural firm in the Philippines, what
should be his first move to register his business?
I · a. Register his company at DTI
b. Register his company at SEC
c. Get a license to practice architecture in the Philippines as a Foreign partner at
I PRC
d. Get a license to practice architecture in the Philippines as a Foreign partner at
UAP
I 3. The firm is now setup and ready to operate with several employees. In order to clearly
define each worker's duties and responsibilities, you should provide the workers:
a. A copy of the Labor Code c. Job Description
I b. Management's Rules and Regulations d. Organizational Chart

4 . If Juan and his boss were to be partners in a firm in the Philippines, where should their
company be registered?
c. DTI, SEC, and PRC only
I a. DTI only
b . SEC only d. DTI and SEC only
I Situation: Owner A hired Architect B to design his condominium located in a

commercial area. After several meetings, Architect B was able to produce a
Schematic Design which Owner A subsequently approved. However, Owner A
I had a change of heart and decided that he doesn't want Architect B for the
project anymore.
I 1. How much overall compensation is Architect B entitled to?

a. 10% of the professional fee
b. 12% of the professional fee
I c. 20% of the professional fee
d. None, since the project was not built
I 2. Architect B, being a neophyte architect and in his desire to get the project, did not
require Owner A to sign a formal contract. What will happen now that Owner A doesn't
want Architect 8 for the project?
I a. Architect 8 won't get paid c. Architect B will get just compensation
b. Architect B won't get just compensation d. Architect B will sue Owner A
I Remarks: Sort of compensation-related but a strange question. I chose C more of as

an optimistic answer: that Architect B will still be able to charge correctly for his
services despite not having a signed service agreement.
I 3. Was there any violation commited?

a. Yes by Architect B against the Code of Ethics
I b. Yes by Architect B against RA 9266

c. None. The Architect can offer his services to anyone he desires and at a
compensation he so desires as the construction industry reacts to market situation
I and he must adapt in order to get clients.

d. Ye!:l by Architect B against RA 9266 and the Code of Ethics and by Owner A
against RA 9266
I Situation: Architect Guevarra was commissioned to do a residential project.
Everything worked out until everything was done except that the owner ran out
I of budget to start the construction.
1. According to the law, how much is Arch. Guevarra entitled to collect?

I a. 80%
b. 90%
C. 100%
d. 85%
'
I
I
I Situation: An Architect specifies a particular material for a project that will be

sourced from a foreign supplier. Everything is going as scheduled until the
I Contractor reports to the Client that he will not be able to finish the project as
scheduled since the material needed and to be supplied by the foreign supplier
I is still not at the jobsite and delivery has been apparently delayed. There is an
upcoming event and the building will not be ready in time for the scheduled
activity. It will have to be cancelled and the Client is very unhappy due to the
I projected huge financial loss.
1. Whose fault is it?
I a. The Architect for specifying a product that is not available in the local market.
b . The Contractor for not informing the Cl ient and Architect about the delay before
it became critical
I c. The Event Organizer for scheduling events before the building was finished
d. Nobody 's fault, it's something nobody wanted
I Situation: Three siblings decided to form their own architectural firm. One is an-
Architect, another is an Engineer and the last is an Interior Designer.
I 1. How much should be the architectural composition of the corporation?

a. 50% C. 75% NOit: : e,o(nfOSITlai-.1
b. 60% d . 80% s~L.S
I 2 . What kind of business organization will they form?

a. Single Proprietorship c. Conglomeration
b. Corporation d . Partnership
I 3 . Where should they register their business?
a . S EC c. City Hall
rl b. DTI d . BIR
4 . If they are to apply for a business permit, where should they go?
a . SEC c. City Hall
II b . DTI
5 . An Architectural Firm should be registered with?
d. BIR
a . Board of Investment c. UAP

I b . PCAB d. PRBOA
6. You were hired by the firm as an Architect and they didn't require their employees to
ti wear uniform. As an arch itect working in the office, what would be your best attire?
a . Forma l/Business Attire c. Rugged
b . Casua l/ Comfortable d . Any
II Situation: Ana wants to build a rest house in her lot at Tagaytay. She talked with
her friend, Arch. A, about the project. Ana's daughter also recommended
Interior Designer B to her mom. However, while browsing a magazine, she
JI learned about Architect C, who also happens to be an Interior Designer at the
same time.
ti 1. Wh at is the best method for her to select the designers?

a . Select Architect A, since a friend c. Desig n Com petition
b. Comparative Selection d.
2. Why is it best to select Architect C?
a. She can get a discount on ID service s
b . She can best interpret the Architectura l Draw ings for the Interior Design
c. It's not best to choose Architect C since you don 't know her
d.
JJ 173
r,
l
l 3. If Arch itect C is hired, how will she be compensated?

a. 10% for Architect's regular rate+ 15% for ID's reg ular rate
I b . 10% fo r A rch itect's regu lar rate + 10% for ID's regular rate
c. 10% for Architect's regular rate + 12% for ID's discounte rate
d. MOPE
I S ituation: A contractor has a son who was born in the Philippines but was
raised and educated in New York. His son, John, is a licensed architect in New
I York. Upo n his father's p rodding, Arch. John returned to the Philippines to be
with his father. However, instead of j oining his fath er's firm, he decided to set-
up his own firm.
m 1. The son 's firm subm itted d rawings to the O BO for bldg . pe rmit but the drawings were
rejected. What went wrong?
a . John's firm is not registered with the DTI/SEC
I b. Arch. John is not allowed to practice Architecture in the Philippines
C. .. .
d.
I 2 . What can be done to remedy the problem ?
a . Hire a loca l Architect to sign and seal for him
b. Determine if a reciprocity agreement exist between the Philippines and New
I York
c . Pass the local Licensure Examination for Architects
d.
I Situation: Arch. Casia was commissioned by his friend as the Architect for a
Townhouse Project. He was specifically asked to prepare brochures for the
I marketing of the p roject.

1. What type of service did Arch . Casia rendered for the project
a . Regular Design Services c. Construction Services
b. Pre-Design Services d. Post Construction Services
II 2 . For helping his friend market the project, what type of compensation should Arch.
Casia receive?
a . Multiple of Direct Personnel Expenses c. Sa lary Cost x Multiplier
I b. Profession al Fee + Expenses d. Percentage of Construction Cost
Situation: Architect A is the Principal Architect of an Architectural Firm.
Architects B & C are Junior Partners and they are in charge of the Design Team.
I However, it is still Architect A who signs and seals all the drawings. Recently,
they hired Architects D & E, both RLA 's, to be in-charge of the Production Team.
I 1. What is the position of Architects D & E?

a . Draftsman c. Junior Pa rtner
d.
b. Junior A rchitect
I 2 . Who is liable for the drawings under the law?
a. A rch. A on ly
b. Arch . B & C
c. Arch. A , B & C
d. The Company
it 3 . Who owns majority of the shares in the company?

a . A rch. A
b. Arch. B & C
c. The Investors
d.
'-
4. In the absence of a written stipulation to the contrary, who has intellectual proprietary
rights over the A rch itectural documents?
a. A rchitect A, he signed and sealed all the drawings
b. Arch itect B & C, they are in charge of the Design
c. A rch itect D & E, they are in charge of Production
d . The Client, he paid for the documents
-- 274
PROFPRAC
I Page 9 of 52
5 -hWho has the proprietary rights to the architectural works such as plans, designs and
ot er documents but is confined for the use of such documents for the
I execution/implementation of the work described therein for one(1) or the origina l proj ect
only?
a . Architect A , he signed and sealed all the drawings
I b. Arch!tect B & C, they are in charge of the Design
c . A rchitect D & E, they are in charge of Production
d . The Client, he paid for the documents
I 6 - A clos friend of Architect A asked him to design a high-rise beachfront Hotel.
7
H_owever, Just before he could finish the work, he suffered a heart attack and d ied . Can
his work be contin ued by others in the absence of such a contingency in the contract?
I a. Yes by the same firm
b . No
c. Yes by whoever the Owner chooses
d.
Situation: A lot in Sampaloc, Manila has a depth of 30m and a frontage of 15m
I facing northeast. It has a 20m RROW with 1.5m sidewalk at both sides. The left
side of the lot is a school building while at the right is an office mid-rise
building. Located in the middle part of the intended fafade of your project is an
I electric post. The site is still vacant and there is no water connection yet.
1. Where do you apply for a temporary/permanent water connection?
I a . Brgy Chairm an
b. MWSI
c. DPWH
d. 080
2 . Who do you approach to have the "electric post" removed?
I a. Meralco
b . DPWH
c. OBO
d. Barangay
3 . What is the EffecUFunction of the following on your project
I a. DPWH
b. Meralco
4 . What is the AMBF percentage of the site
c. MWSI
d. OBO
I a. 60%
b . 50 %
C. 75%
d. 80%
Situation: Arch. Xis celebrating the 2Sfh year anniversary of his office. He wants
I to be featured in a magazine. To lessen the amount that will be spent on being

published, with his consent, he allowed his friend who is a writer to solicit from
advertisers under his name.
I 1. Is there anyth ing wrong here? If there is, whaUwho is wrong in this situation?
a. Nothing is wrong. Th is was done with everybody's consent and nobody was
coerced into doing anything.
I b. Arch itect is liable.
c. The Writer friend of Arch itect X
d. The advertisers _
I 2 . After the magazine was issued, another Archit~ct Y noticed tha~ some of _h is works
were being cla im ed by Architect X in the magazine articles. Architect X said that he
o nly d id it because he wanted hi~ write~ fr!end to get more advertisers. Is there
I something wrong with th is? If there Is, who Is liable._ _

a. Nothing since A rchitect Xis willing to settle with Architect Y
b . Arch itect X is liable of fraud for claiming Architect Y's wo'.ks. _
I c. Both Arch itect X (for fraud) and the Writ7r (for not ~heck1~g h1~ source)
d . The Pub lisher for not checking the veracity of Archite ct X s claims
3. Whe re should A rchitect Y file a compla int?
I a . RTC
b. PRC
c. Mayor's Office
d . NB!
4 . W hat will happen to A rchitect X, if found guilty?
I a. Suspensio n of Registry and Lice nse

b. S uspension of License _
c. His nam e w ill be deleted from the list of Reg istered Architect
r d. Revocation of his Certifica te of Reg istration
f.15
I
t
I ' PROFPRAC
Page 10 of 52
~ituation: As per Clients request, the Architect made some revisions. Si'!ce ti'!1e
ts of the essence, he decided not to coordinate with the Engmeermg
I Consultants. After concrete pouring, he discovered that a beam is set lower
than the required headroom clearance.
I 1. What is the lesson learned?

a. Always coordinate with consultants and project engineers
b. Being the "Boss" other Allied practitioners should adjust their design to conform
I with yours.
c. (Note: sometimes the answer is already in the situation given and you just
need your common sense)
Other Topics you should know
I 1. In 2004, an act to Institutionalize the Use of an Alternative Dispute Resolution in the
country took effect. Under th is law, Construction Disputes will now go to Arbitration/
I Mediation instead of the regular courts. What is this Law?
a. RA 9285 c. RA 9858
I 2.
b. RA 9262 d. RA 9255
Design build by maximum cost, how much is the arch itect remu nerated?
a. Built-in the maximum cost exclusive of arch reg fee
I b. 10% of PCC, exclusive of design fee
c. 7% of PCC, inclusive of arch fee
I 3.
d. Lump sum inclusive of arch fee
How is the architect remunerated for regular design services? Percentage of PCC
rd
4. The architect's fee for repetitive construction, non-housing project (3 unit)
I a. 70%
b. 50%
C. 40%
d. 25%
5. When is the first payment for an architect due? Upon sign ing of the service
I agreement (Collect 5% of fee)
6. If you purchased 1 million worth of furniture and equ ipment for the new office that
I you just setup, how much did you pay for the VAT?
a. 300,000.00 C. 107,142.86
b. 120,000.00 d. 267,857.14
I Note: to solve for VAT, you need to get the VATable amount first.
VATable = Cost/1.12 To Check:
VAT= Cost-VATable VAT= VATable (12%)
I 7. Questions regarding the fees that an Architect is su pposed to collect from his client
under different types of projects
I 8. If the Owner wants to bu ild a house after 1 year, how much is the fee?
g_ What should the Architect do if the Owner makes Change Orders?
a. Check with Contractor c. Neglect Owner
I b. Follow the Owner d.
1o. How much of the fee is the architect entitled to once the owner receives all the
I contra ct documents?
a. 75% C. 90%
b. 85% d. 100%
I 11. The _ _ _ _ _can order changes in the constru ction any time.
a. Architect c. Project Manager
b. Construction Manager d. Owner
I 12. The Architect's profe ssional fee for a Bakery project worth 2 Million pesos
Assu ming DADS (Detailed Architectural Design Services) only:
f
I
PROFPRAC
Page 11 of 52
• Fee = 3% of construction cost, since DADS only

• Fee = PHP 60,000
13. The Architect's RPF for a Residential project

Assuming DADS (Deta iled Architectural Design Services) only:
l a. 6%
b . 3%
C . 5%
d. 10%
14. If an A rchitect performs fu ll time supervision , what is his professional fee?
I a . 1.0- 1.5% of PCC
b. 1.5-3 .0% of PCC
c. 3.5-5.0% of PCC
d. 7.0-1 0.0% of PCC
I 15. Mr. Ju an Zubiri commissioned you for a restaurant project last year. Due to the
success of the restaurant, he wants you to do a 2 nd restaurant using the same
design , what w ould be your fee?
I a. 60% of RPF
b. 50% of RPF
C. 40% of RPF
d. 30% of RPF
16. Which among the following should the Architect's fee NOT be based on?
I a. Project Construction Cost

b . Contractor's Fee
c. Time spent on the project
d . Direct Personnel Cost
17. How m any % of tax is taken from RPF of the Architect?
I 18. It is a common method of compensation wh ich is also fair to both the client and
architect
I a . Pe rcentage of Project Construction Cost c. Lump Sum

b. Professional Fee plus Expenses
19. Which is better for the Owner?
d. MOPE
I a. Percen tage based on Project Cost

b . Guaranteed Maximum Cost
20 . It is the most flexible form of compensation for an arch itect. Percentage of PCC
I 21 . If the Ow ner requests for a model of the project, who pays for it? The owner
22. A client wanted your detailed architectural design services for his new house with a
Total Project Cost of Three Million (3,000,000.00) pesos
I a . Wh at is the percentage of your professional fee? 6%
b. Will the percentage of your fee change if the Client decides to postpone the
project for the following year? No.
c . How much will you get if the Cl ient decides to defer the start of construction for
a year? Assum ing the contract documents are already complete, the architect
can already collect 90% of the professional fee.
23. How is the Architect compensated if the clients asked for a Feasibility Study? Since
this is a predesign service, a time-based method like MOPE would be appropriate.
24. The Architect is engaged in a profession which ca rries w ith it civic responsibilities to
the public. As such , he
a. sha ll explain the condition al character of estimates and in no case shall he
gu arantee any estimates or cost of the work in order to secure a commission.
b. shall reject any offer of free professional engineeri ng or allied design service/s, or
receive any substantial aid, gift , commissions, or favors from any contractor or
subcontractor
c . shall respect and help conserve the systems of values and the natural, historic,
and cu ltural heritage of the community in which he/she creates architecture.
d . shall not render profession al services w ithout a professional service agreement
'277
PROFPRAC
Page 12 o f 52
l 25.As a Registered and Licensed A rchitect (RLA) , you made a very good workin g
I re lationsh ip with Contractor ABC after awarding them several projects. Now,
Contractor ABC (the client) wanted your services as the Architect for their new
buildi ng. All th ings went smoothly until the Client wanted you to alter your plans to
l accommodate their additional requirements. You implemented their revisions but

the Client was not satisfied with the re sult. They requested for another set of
changes to the plans but you disagreed with the proposed changes since the
I alterations being requested will result to violations with the local zoning regulations
and the building code . The conflict eventually lead s to a dispute between you and
I the Client.
a. Based on the Arch itect's Code of Ethical Conduct, you have a responsibil ity to
whom in this kind of situation?
I b . Where should the Client go if they wanted to file a complaint ag ainst you?
c. Who should initiate the first move to settle this dispute?
26. This method of compensation is based on technical hours spent and is only
I applicable to non-creative work since the va lue of creative design cannot be
measured by the length of time the designer has spent on his work. This is usually
I used for works such as accounting , secretarial , research, data gathering,

preparation of rep orts and the like.
a. PCC c. PFPE
I b. MOPE d . Lump Sum or Fixed Fee
27. Method of Compensation where the Architect will render his "personal" time such as
I attend ing meetings, conferences or trips; conferring with others regard ing
prospective investments or ventures and the like.
a . Per diem/honorarium + Reimbu rsib!es c . Professional Fee plu Expenses
m b. Retainer d . Unit Cost

28. Recommended Method of Compensation for Government Projects since th is will
entail more time-consuming efforts and paper-works.
LI a . Percentage of Project Cost
b. Multiple Direct Personal Expenses
c. Lump Sum
d. Professional Fee plus Expenses
29. Recommended Method of Compensation for a Housing Project involving the
ll construction of several residential units on a single site with the use of one (1) set of
plans/design, specifications and related documents.
II ,
1
~-1~ 1
12(·\\,: l\•_,'•• . -~ :=::l
. ' ' i rl 7 .\\·1 '
'I ·,, 1 II I \1 Onign ~ as
0 I . I I .
'"~-
)
_.. . ,. __r (DAD&')
·- --·- ... . , .. .
Flnlt('1~ °"'' : I, : '.
~~•1li
~--r--+-· ·---·--~~~-~~
--
1,
Fra:mtwo : 11 I i I i I· 1 . F4Ml forone urwtl)luS
I to I · ! . i , [. 1:
, ,1 ,.,. I 'br •
.:until , 30% ot RPf for ........
__ _..
,
~.~1;:1,:::;::
' ' ""
1
2
;_I. ·t,·;i: ·1t·· I.If~ lot ,o:~.·1. ~: "1'1
: to , , , 1 1 <10% of RPf! kl• e ; j' , 21~ pl RPF tor ucn
l
r If~ io ~illi~
I
thirty uno 111 .JO). · 1 ed<flbOnd, IC : additional unoe
J . 'F~ ktr' :io'u;.;,1~
--
Thirty:One ;;~;.~. T
I
I : pl~
to fb,
1 , :U,"Yt 01 ~ P f eam , ·1 :,iot,, of RPF 1o, e.-ct1
fi l'. w~;.~~~rl•I ·r~~ r~:t~=·

I
'~~~~-;;·u~;~-- -,·-•·i-·i;ir\1'1 i1
fifty unrt.1(31 -50) , ' ·'I I~ 1
• &ddl(:10~llf 1m1I J. ' 1 addlllorl.i unil
1
aoo~e (51 •) . 1 ,.\i .\l.. .,!..1\, L [lM~'.llfl" .' oddltional _unit
- - t79
Page 13 o f 52
PROFPRAC
l 30. For Group 1 buildings like a Public Market whose Project Construction Cost (PCC)
is less than Fifty Million , how much is the Recommended Professional Fee (RP F)
I · for the Detailed Architectural Design Services (DADS)?

a. 2% C . 4%
b. 3% d. 5%
l 31 . For Group 3 build ings like Hotels whose PCC is less than 50 Million , how much is
l the RPF for the DADS?

a. 3.6% c. 6%
b. 4.2% d. 7.5%
I NOT E: Study Methods of Compensation for different Groups and their comp lexities
32. Methods of Compensation for Professional Consulting Architects (PCA)
Salary cost x multiplier, per diem or hourly, retainer, lump sum
I 33. How is the Arch itect compensated in his capacity as a consu ltant?
A. Per Diem c. Like a Lawyer
I B . MOPE d. Salary cost x Multiplier

34. For which service is value-based compensation pricing recommended?
a . Predesign services c. Post-construction services
I b. Specialized architectural services d. Construction management services
35. When rendering expert testimony, which method of compen sation is appropriate?
a. Percentage of construction cost c . a lump sum
I b . A time-based fee d. a retainer fee
36. In the Salary Cost x Multiplier method , what is the recom mended value of the
I multiplier?
a. 1.0-2.0 c. 3 and above
b . 1.5-2.5 d. 5 and above
I 37 . Th is com pensation method is recommended for situations when the cl ient wishes to
be assured that the architect's services will be available when required, or when the
I architect's services are not required on a full-time basis.

a. MOPE
b. Reta ine r
c. Salary cost x multiplier
d. Value-based prici ng
I 38. If the overall fee for the Detailed Architectural and Eng ineering Design Services is
PHP 40 m illion, how much will the architect get?
c. PHP 24 million
a. PHP 2.4 million
I b. PHP 4 .0 million
d . PHP 40 mi llion
39. W ho is liable for a project if there is a Foreign Concept Architect hired by the Owner
I with a Registered and Licensed Architect (RLA) as an arch itect-of-record.
a. The RLA c. The Foreign Concept Architect
J b . The Owner d.
4 0. ls it ethical and legal, for an architect to hire employees on a per project basis
s ince SSS and Medica re is not required but only group insurance and employees
11 can be terminated eve n after 6 months?
-
41. Ethics - rega rd ing rebates and discounts from Supp liers and Manufacturers
42. In the Construction Industry, what is meant by SOP?
a. Setting-Out Point c. Suhol O Patong
b . Standard Ope rating Procedure d. Stock Option Pla n
J 43 . What sh all the architect not ask from sou rces such as material supp liers given the
-
fa ct that he a lready receives a profession al fee from the client?
44 .A newspape r editor approaches an architect fo r a n interview :
Ct
'I PROFPRAC
a . Is it okay to ask to be paid for the inte rview?

Page 14 of 52
b. Is it et hical to endorse a prod uct?

I 4 5. Attrib ute of an Architect that is the most needed today
a . A lways ahead of the project's deadline c . Flex ible in handling commitme nts
b . Firm in all decisio ns and undertaking s d. A ccepts as many project as possible
l 46. A client w ill us ua lly hire you based on several factors. But idea lly you should st rive
so that you w ill be hired based on
I a . Professiona lism
b . Integrity
c . Competence
d. Popularity
4 7 . A client wa nts you to be his Arch itect but you found o ut that the re is another
I A rchitect involved . Wh at would you do?
48. A clie nt w a nts you r design to be t he same w ith another Architect. W hat s hould you
I do?
4 9 . Y ou had a proje ct fo r a cl ient, a residential bu ild ing. Afte r t he construction , you
fo und out t hat the client used your desig n for another project w ithout your consent.
I What w ill you do?

a . Forgive and Fo rget c . Fi le a case with the PRC
b . Inform t he Mayor d . File a case with the IPOPHL
I th
50 . A 5 year Arch itecture student is asked and contracted b y his aunt to design a 2
sto rey reside nce fo r her. After the student finished preparin g all the Arch itectural
I plans, he asks his professor to sign and seal it. T he professor agrees to do it for a
sum of Php 6,000. Is there anything w rong w ith th is practice? If yes, who is liable?
What is the ca se if e ver?
I 51 .A s a good sta rt in you r practice as an Architect, w hich of the following shou ld you
do fi rst?
a. Explain to you r client the scope of your se rvices
II b.
c.
Accept projects fro m relatives befo re somebody else gets them
Give a se rvice agreement before any work is commenced
d . Accept a job that your friend has been offered fi rst. He wont mind, he's a friend
I 52 . You atte nded a child ren's party for your f riend's son . A t t he height of the
ce le bration , you learned that one of the guest is looking for an arch itect for his
Jl dream house. You are in dire need of a project to keep your firm afloat. What
sho uld you do?
a. A sk him to sign a service agreemen t
11 b . Do not w aste the opportu nity. Immed iately ma ke an on-the-spot presentation to
impress the prospective client
c . Introd uce yourself and the services you offer then discuss your professional
[) fee .
d . It would be inappropriate to approach the pro spective client during the party.
CJ A pproach the client some othe r day.

53 . Your prospective cl ient is asking you to provide him a initial sketch to give him an
idea of w hat you wi ll do fo r the project. W hat w ill you do?
tl a . Comp ly with the client's request as a sign of good fa ith.
b. A sk the cl ie nt to s ign a service ag reement prior to su bmitting the sketches
rJ c . Ask for money to cover t he cos t of the sketches

d . Show the client your portfolio of fin ished projects to g ive him a n idea
54 . W hat do you call the plan wherein it is viewed as if looking upwa rds instead of its
rJ1 norm al view from the lop?

a Lighting Plan c . Electrica l Plan
p1
180
tt1
01
l Page 15 of 52
PROFPRAC
l b . Reflected Ceiling Plan d . Inverted Plan
I 55 . Change Orders
56 . Supplementary Specs
57 .As per Supplemental IRR of Ra 9266, Standards of Professional Practice, what is
l the basis of the preparation of Contract Documents wherein the Arch itect prepares
the detailed designs, Construction Drawings and Technical Specifications in seve n
I (7) sets?
a . A pp roved Schematics and Conceptual Plan s
b . Arch itectura l Program
I c. A pproved Design Development Documents
d . Feas ibility Studies
I 58. It is the document describing the relationship between Owner and Contractor
a. Owne r-C ontractor Agreement c. Good Faith Certificate
b. Service Agreement d . Gentleman's Agreement
I 59. What is meant by Fabricate and Delivered to Jobsite?

a . Install c. Provide
b . Furnis h d.
I 60. How do you Specify Pipes?
a . Inside diameter c. Gauge
I b . O utside diameter
61 . A rch itect of Record
d.
62. Which is not a qu alification of a specs writer?

I a . degree and experience in construction management
b. con tact w ith suppliers
I c. library or references
d . degree and experience in latest construction trends and materials
63 . You we re hired as an A rch itectural Research Writer. Of the following, which would
I you need to know the MOST?

a . Design trends c. History of Architecture
b . A rchitectural Writing and their styles d. Build ing Materials
I 64. You were hired as an Architectural Research Writer. Of the following, which would
you need to know the LEAST?
a . Desig n T rends c. History of Arch itecture
I b . A rchitectura l W riting and their styles
65. It is the stage when the construction
d. Building Materials
manager informs qualified bidders of
II supplementa ry info prior to bidding

66 . It is issued to bidders in order to clarify, amend or modify items in the bid
documents
tJ a . Invitation to Bid
b. Gene rals Condition
c. Bid Forms
d. Bid Bulletin
67 . It is signed immedi ately when the contractor is awarded the contract
Ii 68. Your client are asks you to determine the viability of a proposed development by
-
providing a detailed analysis of the project. What are you providing?
a. Consultati on c. Site Utilization and Land-Use Stud ies
b. Feasib ility Studies d. Value Management
69. The first ph ase for architect's Regu lar Design Services
rJ a. Project Definition Phase

b. Schem atic Desig n Phase
c. Design Development Phase
d. Contract Document Phase
" 2QI
PROFPRAC
-
l 7 o. Befo re. subm 1trmg sketches to a client, what must the arch itect first do?
Page 16 of 52
. a. Sign a service agreement

l 11 P
b . Discuss about image board for presentation de.
r · . ·
.
· re irnm a ry drawings done by the A rchitect.
l a . Preliminary Sketches
b . Sch ematic Diag rams
c . Conceptual Drawing
d w k' D ·
72 . The th ird phase of the arch itect's services . or mg rawing
73. In the developme nt 0 f t h
new ec nology, 30 and computer graphics had been widely
used . What is the benefit?
I 74
a . More efficie nt and realistic
b. Cheaper
C.
d.
. It is a scaled or full-sized model used for d emonstration and design evaluation
purpose s . A popu lar one-liner explains its importance . .. You can fix it now on the
drafting board with an eraser or you can fix it later on the construction site with a
s ledge hammer ©
(j a . D isplay c. Mockup
b. Built up d. Sketc hup
ll 75. Who pays for the Mockup?

a. Owner c . Contractor
b . Architect d. Suppl ie r
ti 76. What service is performed by an architect if activities such as physical, economical,
soci a l and infrastructure are accomplished?
77 . Wh e re does Contract Docu ment fall in the Architect's Services?
ti a . Pre-desig n Services
b. Regula r S erv ices
c.
d.
78. Where d oes Asse ssing the Needs of the Client fall?
t1 a . Feasibil ity Study

b . Pre-design Services
c. Regu lar Services
d.
79 . Where does Planning services fall in the Architect's Services?
ti a. Pre-design Services
b. Reg ular Services
c.
d.
80. For specia lized architectural services, what is the detai led planning and design of
t1 the interior/ enclosed areas of any proposed building/ structure?

a . Interior Design Serv ices c.
b . Architectural Interior Services d.
t! 81 . Under spe cial ized arch itectural services, what involves the detailed planning and
design to control sound transmission for com patibility with the architectural design
concept.
r;;t a. Arch itectural Interior Services
b. Acoustic Design Services
c.
d.
r, 82 . Which of the fo llow ing does not fall under Specialized A rchitectural Services?
a. Acoustic De sign Services
b. Arch ite ctural Interiors
c. Architectural Programm ing
d. Arch itectural Lig hting Layout
83 . Wh at is co vere d by Comprehensive Architectu ral Services?
r) a. SPP Doc. 201 - 205
b. S P P Doc . 202 - 206
c. SPP Doc. 202 - 207
d. SPP Doc. 203 - 208
84 . In a Bidding, w hat is the Role of the Architect? _
""
a. O rgan iz e the Bidding c. Choose the Construction Manage r
b . Awa rd the Project to the Contractor d.
85. S itu ation al q uesti ons reg ard ing bidding. What s hould be cons idered in the
se lectio n of the w in ning bid?
"
j
PR OFPRAC Page 17 of 52
I 86. The Owner likes a particular bidder. He is delayed and fails to beat the deadline.
What factors can be considered so that he can still join the bid?
I 87 . The Architect has chosen a bidder but the Owner doesn 't approve . What can be
done?
I a . Rebid
b . A sk the Bidder to adjust the Bid
c.
d.
88 . If the Owner wants to change the estimated cost after awarding to a winning bidder
I due to econom ic basis, what should he do?

a . Change Order c. Change A rchitect
b . Revise scope of contract d.
I 89. Which is not a part of Contract Documents?
a . Agreement c . Model
b . Contra ct Drawings d.
I 90 .A "business" Architect deals with?
a. A rchitectura l Design c.Professional Services
b . Desig n-Build d. Real Estate Development
I 91 . If there is a discrepancy between the text and drawing, which one will prevail?
a. Drawing c. Ask the designing architect
b. Text d. Ask the Contractor
I 92. Who does the Architect approach for Sound Control?
a . Electronics Engr c. Electrical Engr
d b. A co usti cs Engr d. DJ
93 . Who is directly responsible in ensuring that the elevator shaft has the correct
dimension s and alignment?
ll a . Elevator Supplier
b. Gene ral Contractor
c. Architect
d. Project Engineer
94 . Who is responsible for preparing the bending/cutting-list?
(I a. Eng inee r c. Rebar Supplier
b. Architect d . Steelman
95. To be fair to the Contractor, the Architect must
a . Promptly inspect the work accomplishment c.
b . Reject infe rior workmanship d.
tJ 96 . Who approves the PERT-CPM chart?

a. Ow ner c. Contractor
d . Project Engineer
b. A rc hitect
tj 97. W hat does PERT in PERT-CPM stand for?
98. Who prepares the preliminary Estimates?
c. Contractor
Cl a . Ow ner
b. Architect
99 . Who prepa res preliminary estimates?
d. Trainee
a . Architect c . Contra ctor

b. Project Engineer d.
100 . W ho prepares the Bill of Materials?
r;1 101 . \/I/ho prepa res the Shop drawings?

a . Contractor c.
b. Architect d.
r;1 102. What is the role of the Architect between the client and contractor?
a. Med iator c. Consultant
b. To execute judicial orders with impartiality d.
103. Wh at is the foremost role of an Architect with regards to his Client?
a. Advise r c. Design Consultant

b . Desig n Manage r d.
I 104 . Soi l Testing is the duty of
a. Enginee r c. A rch itect
l 105.
b. Const. Manager d . Owne r
Whose responsibility is it to obtain a Certificate of Occupa ncy upon com pletio n
of the project?
I a. Architect
b. Contractor
c. Owner
d.
I 106. In a m edium-sized co nstruction , who plans the time-schedu le ?

a . S uperv isor c. Architect
b. Construction Manager d.
I 107 . Who should Orient the Contractor and make sure that he understands the
Contract Documents?
a . Project M anager c. Owner
I 10 8 .
b. Architect d. None, it's the Contractor's responsibility
Wh~ is responsible in asking for a Final Inspection of a project?
a . Architect c. Engineer
I 109.
b. Ow ner
Who seeks permits and licenses?
d. Contractor
a. Owner c. General Co ntractor
I 11 0 .
b . Arch itect d.
Who is resp onsible for carryi ng out the A rchitectural Design Plans and Details
in the actual construction?
ii a . Project A rchitect
b. Project Engineer
c. Project Manager
d. Owner
111 . Who is the professional responsible fo r the design of the overall appearance of
ti the project proposal?
a. Project Manager c. Owner
I 112.
11 3.
b. Project Engineer d. Registered and Licensed Architect
It is the primary power of the architect over the contractor during construction
What do you call the action of the construction manage r in the contract
ll document phase wherein he organ izes bid packages of the various trades?
A ssembly of Bid Pa ckages
114. What does the construction manager do in the Design Phase wherein he
iJ advises the architect on material cost, construction techniques, and cost & time
contro ls? Technical Consultation
11 115.
116.
Duties of Construction Manager
Which is not a duty of a Construction Manager?
a. Project Coordination and Supervision c. Cost and Time Control
JJ 117.
b . Preparation of A s-Built Plans d. Keeping of Record s
A rchitects in business are usually involved in
a. Design-Build c. Rea l Estate Development
ti 118.
b. Teach ing d. Design Consultancy
W hat is 1'he difference between a Site Plan and a Master Plan
ti 119.
120.
What is the difference between RA 9266 and RA 545?
New provi sion in RA 9266 not found in RA 545
121 . IAPOA is an acronym for?
tJ a . Irish American Police Officers A ssociation

b . Integrated and Accredited Professional Organization of Architects
tJ
tt1
'I PROFPRAC
Page 19 of 52
c. Integrated Association of Professional and Organized Architects

I d. Integrated Architects of the Philippines Organica lly Associa ted
122. What is UAP responsibility as IAPOA?
I 123. During the UAP Presidency of Ar. Robert S. Sac. who was the PRBOA chair?
I a. Ar. Yolanda D. Reyes

b. Ar. Rola ndo L. Cordero
124. Who can change members of the PRBOA?
c. Ar. Robert M. Mirafuente
d. Ar. Dominador N. Alli
I a. PRC Chairman
b. President of the Philippines
c. IAPOA
d. PRBOA Chair
125. When UAP was designated as the IAPOA, who was its President?
I 126. It refers to contracts or arrangements involving the transfer of systematic
knowledge for the manufacture of a product, the application of a process, or
I rend ering of a service including management contracts; and the transfer,

assignment or licensing of all forms of intellectual property rights.
a. Knowledge Transfer c. Foreig n Counterpart
I 127.
b. Franchis ing d. Technology Transfer
What law covers the Intellectual Property Rights?
128. Under Sec. 22 of RA 9266 , the board my refuse to issue a Certificate of
I Registration and Professional Identification Card to a person
a. who has paid money to secure a Certificate of Registration
I b. who is of unsound mind

c. who has fa lsely impersonated a practitioner or a former practitioner
d. who has undertaken architectural service without a valid service agreement
I 129. A duly notarized written contract or equivalent public instrument stipulating the
scope of services and guaranteeing compensation of such services to be rendered
by a registered and licensed Architect.
I a. Statement of Fees and Scope of Works c. Service Agreement
b. Standards of Professional Practice d. Manual of Procedure
I 130. It is the housing program of the government only for the underprivileged and
homeless citizens
a. National Housing c. Resettlement Program
I 131 .
b. Socialized Housing d.
Wh o prepares the budget for government projects?
a. Central Bank c. Office of the President
I 132.
b. NEDA d. DBM
HLURB - Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
''
In order to ach ieve the goal of rational !and use, the HLURB performs the twin roles
of enhancing and reinforcing rational housing and real estate service delivery throu gh
the implementation of the following three (3) strategies: policy, planning and
reg ulation. HLURB approves condominium plans; protects buyers of housing un its and
home lots as well as condominium units from unscrupulous practices; and issues
-- licenses to sell. Approved condominium plans and licenses to sell provide added
assura nce to the buyers tha t the real estate project tru ly exists.
133.
134.
135.
NEDA - definition/function
NHA - definition/function
HDMF, wha t is its function?
- 136. UHLP - Unified Home Lending Program
-
M
PROFPRAc
I 137
Page 20 of 52
- The COFJLCO is an umbrella-organization of consultants accredited by the

I Government Procurement Policy Board (GPBB) in a non-exclusive manner for the
· following types of professions and/or services: architecture, environmental
I pla nning/investigation/consulting, engineering (civil/structural , geodetic, electrical,

mecha nica l, sanitary, electronics and communications), master plumbing,
landscape arch itecture, interior design , accounting , project/construction
I management, management con sulting and real estate consulting .

a. Council of Filipino Consulting Organization
b. Chinese Federation of Consulting Organization
I c. Congregation of Filipino Consulting Organizations

d. Confederation of Filipino Consulting Organizations
138.
I Wh en you form a corporation, you go to the SEC . What does it stand for?
a. Security of Exchange Commission c. Secondary Exchange Commission
b. Securities of Exchange Commission d. Securities and Exchange Commission
I 139. After securing your company's Articles of Incorporation and By-Law, where
should you register before starting to operate your business?
a. Professional Regulatory Board of Architecture
I b. Professional Regulation Commission

c. Department of Trade and Industry
d. Loca l Government
I 140. An Arch itectural Firm needs to be specifically registered with
a. PCAB c. PRC and PRBOA
I 141.
b. DTI d. SEC
Who accredits the national organization of architects?
a. PRC c. President
I 142.
b. PRBoA d.
What do you call an Architect who wishes to practice architecture and is
registered with the DTI? (Sole Proprietor)
I 143. For a Pa,i nersh ip, which agency should they reg ister with?
a. DTI c.
I b. SEC d. _ _. .
144. If an A rchitect wants to register a "single propnetorsh1p firm , where will he
register?
I a UAP c. DTI
145 b. : ,~ t should be secured first before appliin~~i a Bu~iness Permit?
I · ,
a. Mayor s Permit
b DOLE Permit
. c Brgy Permit
d. DTI Permit
·_ ?
146 · W here will they apply for a Business Permit.
I · .
a. City Hall
c. OTI
d. BIR
147.b Sic~ just finished the design for your very first project- a museum. Where will
I you go next?
a. 080
c. Brgy
d. NCCA
I 148b. Zonmg
A Per RA 9266 how man y sets of Plans and Technical Specifications
· Architect
an s .
C. 7
·1 d· p
should
·p
prov1-de 'to th e Owner for purposes of obtai ning a Bu , mg erm1 -
a. 5 d. 8
I 149
b.
6
PD 1096 how many sets of A rch itectura l Plans and Specifications are
As per ' · · B ·1 ct· P rmit?
~eeded fo r th e purpose of obta111mg a u1 ,ng e .
I
I
I
PROFPRAC
Page 21 of 52
I a. 5 C. 7
b.6 d. 8
I 150. What is RA 9266?
a. Architecture Act of 2003 c. Architecture Act of 2005
b. Architecture Act of 2004
I 151. When was RA 9266 approved and signed into law?
d . Architecture Act of 2006
a. September 15, 2004 c. March 17, 2004

I 152.
b. January 29, 2004
When was the IRR of RA 9266 approved?
d. July 28, 2004
a. September 15, 2004 c. March 17, 2004

I 153.
b . January 29 , 2004 d. July 28, 2004
Who is responsible for the implementation of RA 9266?
a. PRBoA c. DPWH
I 154._
b . 080 d. The Commission and the Board
Who is responsible for carrying out the provisions of the Building Code in the
field as well as the enforcement of orders and decisions made pursuant thereto?
I a . DPWH Secretary
b. Building Official
c. Municipal Engineer/Architect
d. PRBoA
155. Who is responsib le for the administration of the provision of the Build ing Code
I and its IRR, including the imposition of penalties?
a. DPWH Secretary c. Municipal Engineer/Architect
b. Building Officia l d. PRBoA
ti 156. Is the Office of the Build_ing Official one and the same as the Office of the
City/Municipal Engineers?
ti a. Yes
b . No
c.
d.
157. Which of the followi ng is NOT a qualification of a Bu ilding Official?
ti a. Duly registered Architect or Civil Engineer

b . A member of good standing of a duly accredited organization of his profession
fo r not less than two years
t1 c. Has a Master's degree in building design and construction
d . A Fil ipin o citizen and of good moral character
ti 158.
least
No person shall be appointed as a Building Official unless he possesses at
of diversified and professional experience in building design and
p construction.
a. 2 years
b . 5 years
c. 8 years
d. 10 years
159. Which Section in RA 9266 refers to Continuing Profe ssional Development?
tJ a. Section 27
b. Section 28
c. Section 31
d. Section 33
Cl 160.
16 1.
What is an Architect?
Who is entitled to be an Architect?
What is a successful Architect?
c:, 162.
a.
b.
High Profile
Many project due to low fees
c. Good w orkmanship and ethical
d. Rich
When plann ing to start an Arch itectural Firm in a certain locality, what should
Cl
163.
you secure?
a. SEC Permit c. Mayor's Permit
0 b. DTI Permit d.
164. Zoning V ariance
2.27
I' PROFPRAC
165.
166.
How do you apply for a Zoning Exception? Reclassification?
Page 22 of 52
Who or what body is responsible for Zoning Exemption , Reclassification, or
I'
Change of Zone Ordinance?
c. City Council
a. Mayor
b. Governor d. HLURB
167. What is another term for C-3 or Commercial 3?

a. Metropolitan 3 c. Business and Mercantile
j b. Metropolitan Commercial d. Circumferential 3
168. Where no repair work is done except exchange of parts and maintenance
I a. Division G-1
b. Division E-3
c. Division D-3
d. Division E-2
169. What is the best way to provide for the convenience of both people in wheelchair
I and blind persons?
a. Ra ilings
b. Tactile surfaces/blocks in the immediate vicinity of crossing s
I c. Brightly painted Zebra crossing
d. Light controlled crossings with pedestrian phases and audible signals
I 170. In order to aid visually impaired persons to read ily identify the men's washroom,
th is signage is use.
a. An equilateral Triangle with vertex pointing upward
I b. An equilateral Triangle with vertex pointing downward
c. A Circle whose diameter is 0.30m long
I d. An Oblong that is 7.5mm thick with a stick figu re

171. The ideal height of PWD signages on walls and doors
a. 1. 1Om to 1. 30m c. 1.40m to 1. 60m
I b. 1.30m to 1.50m d. 1.50m to 1.70m

172. Signages labelling public rooms and places should have raised symbols, letters
or numbers with a minimum height of
I a. 0.50 mm
b. 1.00 mm
c. 5mm
d. 10 mm
I 173. According to BP 344, what is the comfortable clearance for knee and leg space
under tables for wheelchair users?
a. 0.60 m c. 0.65 m
I b. 0.70 m
174.
d. 0. 75 m
As per BP 344, what is the minimum width for a Corrid or?
a. 1.10 m c. 1.40 m
'' b. 1.20 m
175.
a. 1.10 m
b. 1.20 m
d. 0.90 m
As per NBC, what is the minimum width for a Corridor?
c. 1.40 m
d. 0.90 rn
176. As per NBCP (Only), what is the minimum dimension of an Aisle serving on ly
ll'
ONE side?
a. 1200 mm c. 1000 mm
b. 800 mm d. 900 mm
177. As per NBCP (Only), what is the minimum dimension of an Aisle serving BOTH
sides?
JI a. 1200 mm
b. 800 mm
c. 1000 mm
d. 900 mm
,
pl 2i8
ti
I PROFPRAC Page 23 of52
I 178. A s pe r FC P, what is the m inimum width of a Corridor for Apartments w ith a

required capacity of MORE than 50 persons?
I a. 0.91 m
b. 1.00 rn
c. 1 10 m
d . 1 12 rn
I n 9. As per PD 1096, what is the maximum distance to exit of a building if it is

equipped with sprinklers?
a. 45 m c. 60 m
I b. 46 rn
1 80.
d. 61 m
As pe r RA 95 14, what is the maximum distance to exit of a building if it is
I equ ipped with sprinklers?

a. 4 5 rn c . 60 m
b. 46 m d . 61 m
a 181. What is the distance of the Building Ma in Entrance to the Elevator?
a . 40111 c. 20m
b . 30m d. 50m
u 182. Whal is the minimum dimension of an elevator door width? (asked 3 times)
a. 0.70 m c. 0 .80 m
g 183.
b . 0 .75 m d . 0.85 m
As per BP 344 , what is the m inimum size of an elevator car?
a. 1.10 x 1.40 m c. 1.40 x 1.80 rn
I 184.
b. 1.20 x 1.50 m d . 0.90 x 1.20 m
As per BP 344 , what is the minimum door opening for elevators (single door)?
185 . What is the maximum distance of Elevators considering the handicapped?
I a . 30 m c. 40 m
b. 35 m d. 45 m
I 186. What is the min imum clear width of a Door under BP 344?
a . 0. 80 m c. 1.00 m
b. 0.60 m d . 0.90 m
I 187.
188.
T he mi nim um width of a doorway
The minimum number of doors used for egress
a. 1 C. 3
I 189.
b. 2 d4
Under B P 344, w a lks should have _ _ turn/groove in order to gu ide the blind
a . 45 degrees c. 90 degrees
b. 60 degrees d.
190. Parking for R1, R2 and R3
1 g 1. D istance of parking for the d isab led from build ing entrance
a . 50 m c. 80 rn
b . 60 rn d.
192. An a ccessible parking slot should have a m inimum width of?
a. 2.70 m c. 3.70 m
b. 3.00 rr. d. 3.85 rn
193. Whai ic; 1he dimension fo r an average automobile parking s lot designed fo r
perpend 1c11/r1r parking?
a . 2 . 1Smx6.00m c 2. 15mx5.00m
b. 2 .50m ;: o.oom d. 2.50m x 5.00rn
194. A stnnci31 J tru ci : or bus parking/lo ading slot must be computed at a minimum
of?
PROFPRAC
c. 3.60m x 18.00m
I a. 2.50m x 6.00m
b. 3.60m x 12.00m
d. 3.00m x 9.00m
195. An articulated truck must be computed at a minimum of
I a. 2.50m X 6.00m
b. 3.00m x 9.00m
C. 3.60m X 12.00m
d. 3.60m x 1s .oom rk d
I 196. For parking areas of PWD, a walkway between the front ends of pa
shall have a minimum clear width of _ _ __
e cars
a. 1.10 m c. 1.30 m
I b. 1.20 m
197.
d. 1.40 m
Under BP 344 , the maximum slope/gradient for ramps is
I a.1:10
b.1:12
c.1 :14
d.1:16
198. As per BP 344, a ramp that leads down towards a sidewalk should be
I a. provided by railing across the full width of its lower end, not less than 1.80m from
the foot of the ramp.
b. equipped with curbs on one side only with a minimum height of 0.20m
I c. provided by handrails on one side
d. provided a 90 degree turn
I 199.
a. 3m
Under BP 344, the length of a ramp should NOT exceed
c. 6m
b. 5m d. 8m
I 200. Under BP 344, ramps whose length is longer than the maximum length set
should be provided 1.Sm
I a. Dropped Curbs
b. Landings
c. Lay-aways
d. Berths
201. Under BP 344, ramps should have a minimum clear width of
I a. 800mm
b. 1000mm
c. 1200mm
d. 1500mm
I
I
I 202. From the figure shown above, what is the minimum dimension for A?
a. 0.025m c. 0.10m ·
I b. 0.25m
203. Under BP 220, the minimum
d. 150mm
clear width of a Main Door is
I a. 0.60 m
b. 0.70 m
c. 0.80 m
d. 0.90 m
204. Under BP 220, the minimum clear width of a Bed D .
I a. 0.60 m
b. 0.70 m c. 0.80 m
room oor 1s
205 U d d. 0.90 m
I . n er BP 220, th e minimum
a. 0. 60 m
b. 0.70 m
clear width of a Bath
c. 0. 80 m
D
room oor 1s
.
206 E d. 0.90 m
. very ro om not provided by rff . I .
windows with a total free area of a I 1?1a ventilation shall be provided a window
opening equal to at least or
2Cfo
I PROFPRAC Pdge 25 o f 52
I a. 10% of floor area

b. 15% of floor area
c. 20% of floor area
d. 25% of floor area
I
I 207 . For a room without artificial ventilation whose dimension is 2.50m x 3 .00m ,
which is the requ ired minimum window opening?
a. 0 .65m x 1.20m c. 0 .75m x 1.00m
I 208.
b. 0.50m x 1.20m
Prefe ra ble height of Doorknobs
d . 0 .75m x 2.00m
I a. 0.82 m
b . 0.90 m
209 .
c. 1.00 m
d . 1.06 m
Which i::, NOT a recommended Doorknob height?
I a. 1.06m
b.0.82rn
c. 0.90m
d . 1.10m
21 0 . Grab bar for disabled (height in mm)
I a. 600
b. 900
c. 800
d . 700
211. You r cl ient asked you to design and convert his current 5,000sqm 1-storey
I warehouse into a Call Center. How many Water Fountain (Drinking Fountain) will
you provide if the client simply wants to comply with the provisions of BP 344?
I a. 1
b.2
2 12 .
C. 3
d.4
Your client asked you to demolish his current 5,000sqm 1-storey warehouse
m and design a 3-storey Call Center building having 1,500sqm per floor. How many
Water Fountain (Drinking Fountain) will you provide if the client simply wants to
comply with t he provisions of BP 344?
ti a. 1
b. 2
C. 3
d. 4
[J 213. W hat is the maxim um height for a Water Fountain?

a. 0.75m c. 0.85m
b. 0.80m d. 0.90m
rl 214 . Yo u were informed by your client that he already bought the Water Fountain
un its w ithout consulting you. Upon inspecting the specs of the units, you found out
that their heig ht is SLIGHTLY MORE than the maximum allowed by BP 344. Your
ti client was very adamant that he will not return the units and insist that you use
-II
them . He also said that he w ill not buy another unit of smaller height. What is the
sol uti on to this dilemma?
a. Eke out the slab to provide ample height for the Water Fountain units
b. Stand you r ground. Either he replace them or you resign
c. Agree with the Owner and provide no solution. Nobody will inspect and measure
it anywqy
-II 2 15.
d . Simply provide paper cups to make it accessible
A ci rcle of _
tu rni ng spaces.
a. 1.10 m
b. 1. 50 m
_ in diameter is a suitable guide in the planning of wheelchair
c. 1.75m
d. 2.00 m
-- 2 16. A ngle of turn of embossed ti les for the blind

a. 4 'J degrees
b . 80 d09rees
c. 30 deg rees
d. 60 degree s
,. Ml
I
PROFPRAC
I 217.
Page 26 of 52
U nder BP 344 , what is the maximum height of handrail if it is for protection at

great heights?
I a. 0.90 m
b . 1.00 m
C. 1.06 m
d.1 .10m
I r'
• I
,
f'! . *11
0
'
I D
-,
('i -i
~I ~-
' fi
,I Al'' e iI
iI
I -~! 'J
,
e.
1
I 218 . From the Figure above, If above steps or ramps , Handrails must be installed at
a height of A and B?
a . 0 .70m and 0 .90m c. 0.70m and 1.06m
I 219 .
b. 0.90m and 1.00m d . 0.90m and 1.06m
Under BP 344, what is the minimum diameter of a Handrail that requires a full
grip?
I a. 20 mm c. 40 mm
b. 30 mm d. 50 mm
I 220. U nder BP 344 , Handrails attached to walls sh ould have a minimum clearance
from the wa ll measuring
a. 20 mm c. 40mm
I 22 1.
b. 30 m m d. 50 mm
M inimum clearance of a table from the floor considering the handicapped
I 222. Considering PWD, what is the maximum height for lavatories?

a . 0 .60 m
b. 0.70 m
c . 0.80 m
d. 0.90m
II 223. The minimum height of knee recess for lavatories when considering PWD is
a. 0.50 m c. 0.70 m
b . 0 .60 m d . 0 .80 m
II 224 . Urinals shou ld have an elongated lip whose maximum height is?
-
a. 0.45rn c. 0.50m
b . 0 .48m d. 0 .60m
225. What is the preferred design for 3 stair considering users of crutches?
a. S lanted Nosing c. Open Riser Stairs
b. Projected Nosing d . Right Angle Stairs
226. Maximum height for a stair rise
a . 150 mm c. 2 50 mm
II 227.
b . 20 0 mm d . 300 mm
Under the 1977 NBCP , what a re the maximum Rise and minimum Run
dimension (in meters) of a stairway?
" 228.
a . 0 175 and 0.275
b. 0.2 and 0.275
c. 0.2 and 0.25
d. 0.2 and 0.28
Wh at is the minimum width of a stair under PD 1096?
a. 0 .90 m
t.,_ 0 .70 m
c. 0. 75 m
d. 0. 80 m
"
:,;
"" 22 9. Under the NBCP, what is the min imum wid th of run if it is to be used as an exi t?
a . 2 :.iO rn rn c . 300 mm
"
PROFPRAC
I b. 275 mm
230.
d . 325 mm . G
nd in rivate stairways in ro u
Winding Stairways . In Group A occupanc~ ad "dt: of run is provided at a point
p B
I occupancies winders may be used if th e require wi .

'
not more than _ _ mm rom
f the side of the stauway
b
where the treads are
.
than 150mm at any point.
narrower but in no case shall any wid th of run e Iess
I a. 250 C. 300
b. 275 d . 325 as an exit provided the
I 231. Circul ar Stairways. Circular stairs may be used
minimum width of run is not less than _ mm.
a. 250 C. 300
I b. 275
232. Under the New Fire Code, if t here a
d . 325
re 50 or less occupants , what is t
h
e
I minimum stair width?

a. 0.715 C. 1.12
b. 0.915 d. 1.42
I 233 . Under the NBCP, private stairways serving an occupant load of less than 10
should have a minimum width of
a. 600 mm c. 800 m
I b. 750 mm d . 900 mm
234. What is the minimum clear width of a hallway/corridor under BP 344?
I a. 0.90 m
b. 1.00 m
c. 1.10 m
d.1 .20 m
235. Dimensions of doors and windows conforming to accessibility law
I 236. What general conditions of design are important for the aged?
a. Size, location, design c. Grab Bar
I b. Height of lavatory is from the waist d. All of the above

237. What is the maximum lavatory counter height for the disabled?
a. 0.60m c. 0.80m
I 238.
b. 0.70m d. 0.90m
What is the minimum floor area of the water closet stalls for the handicapped?
- a. 1.70 x 1.80 m
b. 1.50 x 1.70 m
c. 1.50 x 2.25 m
d . 1.70 x 1.90 m
-II
239. Water Closet Stalls should have a minimum dimension of?
a. 1.50m c . 1.80m
b. 1.70m d . 1.90m
240. Water Closets should have a maximum height of?
a. 300 mm c. 400 mm
b. 350 mm d. 450 mm
Ill 241 . A grab bar for an accessible Water Closet Stall shall be installed at a height of
_ _ mm measu red from the floor finish to the top finish of the grab bar.
- 242.
a. 700· mm
b. 750 mm
Flush Control for a Water Closet should have
c. 800 mm
d . 850 mm
. .
-,.
a. 0.75 m a maximum height of?
b. 1.00 m c. 1.20 m
243 Wh t . d . 1.25 m
. a is the preferable height of lighting switches?
a. 1.50rn ·
b. 0.90 to 1.20 rn c. 1 ,20 to 1.30 m
d. 1.30to 1.40
I PROFPRAC
Page 28 of 52
I 244.
. f · h f m the latch side of the
What is the maximum horizontal distance o a sw1tc ro
door.
I · a. 0.1 0 m
b. 0 .20 m
c. 0.30 m
d. 0.40 m
245. Height for convenience outlet
I a. 0.30 m
b. 0 .20 m
c. 0.40 m
d. 0 .50 m
I 246 . Public Te lephones should have a clear, unobstructed space of 1.50m x 1.50m
in front Wall-Mounted and Free-Stand ing units. Coin slots, dialing controls ,
receivers and instructional signs should be locked at a maximum height of how
I many meters above the floor?

a . 0 .80m c. 1.00rn
b. 0.70m d. 1.50m
I 247. Minimum door width for hospital nursing units
a . 1.20m c.
I 248 .
b. 0.80m d.
What is the minimum width of a door considering BP 344 only.
a. 0.80m c. 0.70m
I 249.
b . 0 .90m d. 1.00m
Considering PD 1096, what is the minimum door width if installed at exit
doorway?
I 250.
a . 0 .80m
b . 0 .90m
c. 1.10m
c. 1.20m
Considering PD 1096, what is the maximum Door Leaf width?
I a . 0.90m
b . 1.00m
c. 1.10m
d . 1.20m
251 . What is Central Refuge?
I 252. What should be provided in the immediate vicinity of crossings as an aid to the
blind?
2 53. What is the minimum depth of a Central Refuge?
II a . 1.0 m
b. 1.5 m
c. 2.0 m
d. 2.2 m
254. From BP 344, What is the maximum width of a ca rriageway where a central
II refuge is not required?
a. 6 m c. 10 m
II b. 8 m
255 .
d. 12 m
Under BP 220, how much in terms of% of Gross Area is allocated for
-Ill Commu nity Facilities if there are 152 Dwelling Units?

a. 1.00
b. 1.25
256 .
C. 1.50
d. 2.00
l!nder BP 2_20, the required setback of the sides and front is 1.50 meters. What
then Is the required yard at the rear? (Asked twice)
a . 2 .00 m c. 1.50 m
b . 1.00 m d . 3.00 m
257. l! nder BP 220, ~hat is the minimum lot area of a single detached socialized
-
housing? (Asked twice)
a . 36 sqm c. 64 sqm
b . 54 sqm . d . 72 sqm
258 . Under BP L'. 20, what Is the minimum floor area for a Sing le-Family Ee ·
dwelling? onom ic
a. 18 sqm c. 28 sqm
Page 29 o f 52
I PROFPRAC
d. 36 sqm
I 259.
b. 22 sqm
As per BP 220, Doors for economic and socialized housing, sha ll ha~e a
I m inimum height of ___ except for Bathroom and Mezzan ine Doors w hich s ha ll
have a m inimum clear height of 1.80m .
I a . 2.00
b . 1.85
260 .
c. 2.10
d . 1.90
As per BP 220 , the minimum Ceiling height for habitable rooms shall be
I a . 1.80m
b. 2 .00m
c. 2 .10m
d. 1.90m
26 1. Under BP 220 , Minor Roads shall have a minimum Right-of-Way of
I a . 5.00m
b . 5.50m
c . 6 .00m
d. 6.50m
I 262. Under BP 220, cu l-de-sac shall have a maxim um length of

a. 80 .00 m c. 120.00 m
b. 100.00 m d . 150.00 m
I 263.
a . 50
As per BP 220 , the prescribed % of Open Space for Residential Inside Lot is
C. 10
I b.20
264.
d. 5
Wh ich law w as amended by PD 1216, by defining "open space" and requiring
Subd ivision Owners to provide roads, alleys, sidewalks and reserve open for parks
I or recreational use?
a . BP 220
c. PD 1096
d . BP 344
I b . PD 957
265. W hich law provides for minimum design standards for economic and socialized
housi ng projects?
II a . BP 220
b . PD 957
266.
c. PD 1096
d . BP 344
Under PD 957 for medium to high density subdivisions, what is the area of
II parks and p laygrounds?

267. For open market and medium cost subdivision Under PD 957 with a density of
20 lots per hectare, how much in percentage of the gross area is allocated for Parks
II and
a.
Playgrounds?
3.5
c. 5.0
d . 6.0
II b.
268 .
4 .0
Under PD 957, open market and medium cost subdivision having 1500 lots is
-Cl requ ired to have the following except:

a. M ulti-Purpose Hall
b. Convenience Stores
269 .
c. Tricycle Terminal
d. High School
For both economic and socialized housing under BP 220 with a density of 150
lots per-hectare , how much in percentage of the gross area is allocated for Parks
and Playgrou nds?
a. 3.5 C . 5.0
b. 4. 0 d. 6.0
270. For both economic and socialized housing under BP 220 with a density of 200
cJ lots per hectare, how much in percentage of the gross area is allocated for Parks
and Playgrounds?
C . 5.0
a. 3.5
"r,
b. 4.0
d. 6.0
f4S
I PROFPRAC
Page 30 o f 52
I 27 1. For projects more than 1 hectare in area, how much is the m inimum area
I allocated for Parks and Playgrounds?

a . 50 sqm c . 125 sqm
b. 100 sqm d . 150 sqm
I 272.
273.
Collector Road
Road Right-of-Way
I 274 . Which governs low cost housing projects?

a . BP 220
b . PD 957
c.
d.
I 275.
276.
Under PD 1185 for mercantile occupancy, what is the exit width?
Study Fire Code terminologies
277. The active principle of burning, characterized by the heat and light of
I combustion .
a . Flame c. Combustion
I b . Fire
278 .
d. Pyrotechnics
A building unsafe in case of fire because it will bu rn easily or because it lacks
-I adequate exits or fire escapes.
279.
a. Fire Exit
b . Fire Proof
c. Fire Hazard
d. Fire Trap
Any condition or act which increases or may cause an increase in the
probability of the occurrence of fire, or which may obstruct, delay, hinder or interfere
with fire fighting operations and the safeguarding of life and property.
I 280.
a. Fire Lane
b. Fire Hazard
c . Fire Trap
d. Explosive
Any visual o r audible signal produced by a device or system to warn the
II occupants of the building or fire fighting elements of the presence or danger of fi re .
-
a. Electronic Arc c. Curtain Board
b . Fire A larm d. Damper
281. A group of fi refighters performing fire suppression activities w ithin a specified
•ti
jurisdiction is called
a . Fire Volunteers c.
b. Barangay Fire Brigade d.
282. A collective term that is used to refer to a group of firefighters primari ly
performing fi re suppression activities in areas such as. but not limited to,
commun ity/barangay, company, and other government and non-government
ti
establishments.
a . Fire Vol unteers c. Fire Brigade
b . Community Fire Brigade d. Government Fire Brigade
283. A group of Firefig hters rendering firefighting activities in the premises of a
" public office .

a. Fire Voluntee rs
b . Commun ity Fire Brigade
c. Fire Brig ade
d. Government Fire Brigade
-
284 . A pe rson who e nters into firefighting service th roug h an organized group
recognized by the BFP and undergoes the same discipline as that of BFP
firefighters.
a. Fire Vo lunteer c . Fire Brigade
b . Commun ity Fire Brig ade d. G overnme nt Fire Brigade
r,«
,,
I PROFPRAC Page 31 o f 52
ii 28 5. It is the active principle of burning, characterized by the heat and light of
a combustion .
a. Fire
b . Ember
c. Blasting Agent
d. Fulminate
I 286. An integrated network of hydraulically designed piping installed in a building,

structure or area with outlets arranged in a systematic pattern which automatically
discharges water when activated by heat or combustion products from a fire.
g a . Standpipe System
b. Sprinkler System
c. Suppressant System
d. Pyrophoric System
287 . As per RA 9514, what is the minimum width of egress?
Q a. 0 .900m
b. 0.915m
c. 1.000m
d. 1.100m
tJ 288. Under the Fire Code, what is the minimum width of stairs where there are less
than 50 occupants?
a. 0.900m c. 1.120m
ti b. 0.915111
289.
d. 1.420m
Under the FCP, the minimum width of egress shall NOT be less than
•ti a .0 .900m
b. 0.915m
290. What is the Fire Rating of Fire Exit Doors
a. 1.00 hr
b. 1.50 hrs
291 .
c.1 .120m
d. 1.420m
c. 2.00 hrs
d. 3.00 hrs
Automatic-Closing Vestibule Doors shall be actuated by a Smoke Detector
ti located within how many meters away from the door?

a. 3m
b . 5m
c. 6m
d. 9m
Cl 292 . A releasing device installed in Fire Exit Doors that causes the door latch to
open the door in the direction of exit travel once a force of no more than seven
kilograms is applied
rJ a . Self-Closing Device
b . Fire Door Closer
c. Panic Bar
d. Auto-Release Lock
293. A fire resistive door prescribed for openings in fire separation walls or
partitions .
a. Self-Closing Door c. Panic Door
b. Fire Door d. Auto-Release Door
" 294. For a 3-Storey structure or less, the exit enclosure shall be protected by a
separation with a Fire Resistance Rating of
a . 1.00 hr c. 2.00 hrs
-
b. 1 .50 hrs d. 4 .00 hrs
29 5. For Bu ildings four (4) storeys or more in height, enclosing walls of floor
openings serving stairways or ramps shall have a Fire Resistance rating of
a. 1.00 hr c. 2 .00 hrs
b. 1.50 hrs d. 4.00 hrs
296. For Buildings four (4) storeys in height, the maximum opening allowed at the
fi re wall is?
C . 2 .00
a. 0 .00
b . ·1.00 d. 4.00
297. A 6 " ·'Filled " CHB W all has a fire rating of
a . 1 hou r c. 3 hou rs
~17
I b. 2 hours
298.
d. 4 hours
A solid Masonry Wall (8 in) and a solid Concrete Wall (7 in) both have a fire
I rati ng of
a . 1 hour c. 3 hours
I b. 2 hours
299.
d . 4 hours
A Fire Wall is a wall designed to prevent the spread of fire. It shall be designed
to have sufficient structural stability to remain standing even if construction on either
I side collapses under fire conditions. Its minimum Fire Resistance Rating should be?
a . 2 .00 hrs c. 6.00 hrs
b . 4.00 hrs d. 8.00 hrs
I 300. Dwelling units in Row Apartments shall be separated from each other by a
-I
Partition Wall having a Fire Resistance Rating of
a . 1.00 hr c. 2 .00 hrs
b. 1.50 hrs d. 4.00 hrs
301 . Under RA 9514, a dead-end corridor may be allowed provided that
a. the Fire Exit signage is clearly visible and well lighted
b .it shall not extend more than 6m beyond the stairway or other means of exit
c. there is a Fire Hose along the corridor
I d. a Sprinkler System is introduced
302. What does FALAR stand for? Fire And Life Safety Assessment Report
I 303. Who prepares FALAR 1?

a. Architect
b. Engineer
c. Contractor and Const Manager
d . Building Owner
I 304. Under RA 9514, FALAR 2 is submitted by the Building Owner. Who prepares
it?
a. Architect c. Contra ctor and Const Manager
I 305.
b. Engineer
Who prepares FALAR 3?
d. Building Owner
a . Arch itect c. Contractor and Const Manager

I 306.
b . Engineer d. Building Owner
If th~ Plans and Specifications of the project does not conform with the
I requirements of the Fire Code of the Philippines, who disapproves it?

a . BFP c. Building Official
b. Owner d . Barangay
I 307.
308.
Capacity of Fire Escape Stairs
Questions from Fire Code about the following :
a. occupant load , number of egress for sleeping institution
I b. occupant load, number of egress for nursing institution
c . exit, corridor length
I 309 .
d . door width for nursing institution
What do you call the portion of a roadway or public-way that should be kept
opened and unobstructed at all times for the expedient operation of fire fighting
I units.
a. Fire Lane c. Fire Hydrant Area
I 310 .
b . Carriageway d. RROW
What do you call the space in another building provided just after a horizontal
exit on approximately the sa me level?
I a . Fire Lane c. Area of refuge

d . Safety Exit
-
b. Eg ress
I
I
'-I
!I 311 - It is a way of passage through or around a wall or partition to an Area of Refuge
ti on approximately the same level in the same bu ilding which affords safety from fire
or sm oke from the area of escape and areas commu nicating therewith .
a. Fire Lane c . Corridor
tJ 312 .
b . Horizontal Exit d . Safety Exit
A Fire involving flammable liquids and gases is classified as?
a. Class A c. Class C
ti 313.
b . Class B d. Class D
A Fire is caused by Burning Paper, Cloth , etc., what Type of Fire is this?
ti
a . Class A c. Class C
b . Class B d. Class D
314 . Fires involving e ne rgized electrical equipment a re called?
ti a . Class A
b. Class B
c . Class C
d . C lass D
a 315 . Fires involving combustible materials such as sodium , magnesium, potassium ,

and other similar m ate ri als are?
a. Class A c . Class C
u b. Class B
316 .
d . Class D
Fires in cooking appliances that involve combustible cooking media (vegeta ble
or animal oils a nd fats) are called?
tl a. Class A
b . Class B
c . Class C
d . Class K
a 317 .
23m?
What is the size of a Dry Stand Pipe if the Height of the building is more than
a . 2"
b. 2 ½ "
C . 3"
d.
318 . What is the width of Zebra Crossings?
319 . What is the Fire Code of the Philippines?
a. RA 9514 c. BP 344
tl 320.
b. BP1096 d . RA11 85
What is prohibited for low density residential (R-1 ) uses or occupancies?
p a . 3.20m abutment for carport support

b. 7.0m long abutment
c. an abutment 50% of prop line
d . firewa ll
321 . What is the fire rating for a hotel room door?
1;l a. 1.5 hrs
b . 30 m ins
c. 1 hr
d . 20 mins
322. It is a Zone wherein only non-combustible materials of no less than three to
tJ fo ur-hour fire resistivity are allowed to be used as construction material throughout
the structure. Only Type IV and V constructions are permitted in this area.
0 323 .
a. Non-Fire Restricted Zone
b. Moderate Fire Restrictive Zone
c . Fire Restrictive Zone
d . Highly Fire Restrictive Zone
These are areas often located in the country sides or rural areas where
"t'-
com mercial/i ndustrial and other bui ldings are sparsely constructed or may be
clustered in sma ll g roups like farm lands wherein dwellings are built of indigenous
materials such as bamboo, sawali, nipa, cogon, palm leaves and wood up to Types
I and II Con struction .
a . Non-Fire Restricted Zone c . Fire Restrictive Zone
b. Mod e ra te Fire Restrictive Zone d . Highly Fire Restrictive Zone
""
I
I 324 - In this zone, buildings are prescribed to have exterior walls with at least two-
hour fire resistivity. Usual locations in suburban areas are permitted to be built w ith
I at least one-hour fire resistivity TH ROUGHOUT as TypP.s II , Ill to IV Construction .
a. Non-Fire Restricted Zone c. Fire Restrictive Zone
b. Moderate Fire Restrictive Zone d. High ly Fire Restrictive Zone
I 325. Electrical Fire should be suppressed by?
a . Class A Fire Extinguisher c. Class C Fire Extinguisher
b. Class B Fire Extinguisher d . Class D. Fire Extinguisher
I 3 26. A magnesium fire could result in an explosion if the wrong extinguishing agent
1s u sed. What should be used to extingu ish such a fire?
a . Class A Fire Extinguisher c. Class C Fire Extinguisher
I 327.
b . Class B Fire Extinguisher d . Class D Fire Extinguisher
Which type of fire extinguisher will you use for flammable liquids?
I 328 .
a . Class A Fire Extinguisher
b. Class 8 Fire Extinguisher
c. Cla ss C Fire Extinguisher
d. Class D Fire Extinguisher
Build ing Classification under the Fire Code
329 . A W all designed to prevent or delay the spread of Fire.
I a. Fire Block
b. Fire Wall
c. Partition Wall
d. Curtain Wall
330. When any 2 living units abut each other, a _ __ _ shall be required. It shall
I be of masonry construction, at least 100mm and shall extend from the lowest
portion of the wall adjoining the 2 living units up to the point just below the roof
I covering or purlins .
a . Firewall
b. Fireblock
c. Partywa ll
d. Curtain Wall
I 331.
a. 37.8
Combustible liquid is any liquid having a flash point at or above __°C
c . 60 .0
b . 93.3 d . 100
I 332. What agency has ju risdiction over the quality of effl uent from septic tanks?
a. DENR c . DOH
I 333.
b . Local Gov't d.
As of 2008, who is in-charge of allowing/ disallowing buildings near Ph ilippine
Airpo rts
I a. (ATO) Air T ran sportation Office

b . (080) Office of the Building Official
c. (CAAP) Civil Aviation Authority of the Ph ils
d . (FAA) Federal Aviation Authority
334_ The transportation of goods is very important. Which is in-charge?
I a. L TO c . Office of the President
--
b. DOTC d . DPWH
3 35. Who manage s the sewage water treatment plant?
a . DOH c . Loc al Government
b. DENR d. DPWH
336. W h a t is n o w allowed by RA 9 2 66 which was not a llowed in RA 545?
a. Corporate P ractice c. Exp . B4 Graduation
-- 337.
b. Sign ing of pla ns by a n architect n o t prepared by him d .
F o re ig n Arch itects are c a n be allowed to pra ctice in the Ph ilip pines prov ided
th a t t hey s ecure a special/temporary permit from the B oard subject to the approval
-
of th e C o m m ission. Provided, fu rther, that they there is recip ro c ity afforded to
Filip ino Arc hite c ts in the ir country, that they are le g all y qua lifie d to practice
'
I
... "Vt-t'RAC
Page 35 of 52
arc_hitecture in their country, and that they must work with a Filipino counterpart. In
which Section of RA 9266 will you find this provision?
· a. Sec. 37 c. Sec. 39
b. Sec. 38 d. Sec.40
338
- How long is the validity of a Specialrremporary Permit given to Foreign
Architects?
a. One Year c. Co-terminus with the Project
339b. Two Years d. Depends on the permit applie? for
· A fore ign architect working in the Philippines without the necessary permits can
be sued by
a. PRC c. Any Architect

b. IAPOA d. Anyone
34
o. This agreement on Architectural Services signed by the ASEAN Economic
Ministers on 20 November 2007, facilitates th~ mobility of architectural
professionals within ASEAN and enhances information exchange in order to
promote best practices on standards of architectural education, professional
practices and qualifications. What is this agreement?
a. ASEAN Cross Border Act (ACBA) c. Trans-ASEAN Archl Practice Act (TAPA)
b. ASEAN Architects Arrangements (AAA) d. Mutual Recognition Arrangement (MRA)
341. It refers to the local Philippine architect, partnership or corporation that mu~t
work in association with a foreign architect, partnership or corporation, on a proJect
on Philippine soil.
a . Filipino Architect c. Consulting Architect
b. Registered and Licensed Architect d. Filipino Counterpart
342. Under RA 9266, can a Registered and Licensed Architect perform Interior
Design for small projects?
a . Yes c. Yes, provided there is consent from PRBoA
b. No d. Yes, if personal project
343. Any person not duly licensed to engage in the practice of architecture or any
person who violates any provision of RA 9266, its IRR, the Code of Ethical Conduct
and Standards of Professional Practice, or any policy of the Board or Commission,
shall upon conviction be sentenced to a fine of not less than Php 100,000.00 but
not more than Php 5,000,000.00 or to suffer imprisonment for a period not less than
6 months or not exceeding 6 years or both, at the discretion of the Court. He/she is
guilty of what?
a . Infraction c. Felony
b. Misdemeanor d. Estafa
344 _ Under RA 9266 a person who requires or compels a Registered and Licensed
Architect to undertake any service under the General Practice of Architecture
without valid agreement shall be guilty of misdemeanor and shall upon conviction
be fined an amount not less than Php 200,000.00 or suffer imprisonment for a
period not exceeding six (6) years or both. This agreement is referred to in RA
9266
Rule I Section 3.4.10 as a
a . Notarized Work Agreement c. Owner-Architect Agreement
b. Service Agreement d. Scope of Work
3D1
PROFPRAc
I 345. The Certificate of Re . .

Page 36 of 52
.
suspended 9 Istration and Professional Identification Card will be
I Specificatio
or revoked 1
a. Signed and Aff·
·t R .
a egistered and Licensed Architect
Ixed his na . ·
me or seal on Architectural Plans and Designs,
ns, or other sim'II d . .
i b Paid m
·
f
oney or the reg I i
Registration
ar ocuments prepared by his subordinates
.
u ar ees provided for to secure a Certificate of
c. Has practiced und .
d Has . . er a registered Corporate name
· 1
open Y sohc1ted pr · t
without a vard . OJec s by actually undertaking architectural services
I service agreement.
346 - Under Section 24 f
Professional ldentific ? 926 6, an Architect's revoked Certificate of Registration/
and for reasons dee~ ,~n a rd may be reinstated by the Board, upon application
a. 6 months e proper and sufficient, after a period of?
i b. 1 year
347 · A pers on .I11egally · · .
c. 18 months
d. 2 years
discretion of th practicing architecture, shall upon conviction and upon the
il months but note~ourt, .be s~ntenced to suffer imprisonment for a period of six (6)
fine? ceedrng st x (6) years OR pay a fine OR both. How much is the
ti a . 1O,OOO to 20,000
1
b. oo,ooo to soo,ooo
c 10 000 to 50 000
d:
100,000 to s:000,000
4
I 3 8 . For violating the Code of Ethics, what is the minimum fine?
a. Php 100,000
b. Php 200,000
c. Php 1,000,000
d. Php 5,000,000
I 349.
filed?
If an Architect is suspected of unethical practice. Where should the case be
a. Professional Regulation Commission
I b. Department of Labor and Employment

c. Professional Regulatory Board of Architecture
d . Municipal Trial Court
I 350. The Architect is engaged in a profession which carries civic responsibilities
towards the public. As such, which of the following must the architect do?
I a. He shall explain the conditional character of his estimates and in no case, shall
he guarantee any estimates or cost of the work in order to secure a commission
b. He shall reject any offer of aid, gift, commission or favors from any
I contractor/subcontractor nor shall he offer free professional services
c . He shall respect and help conserve the system of values and the natural, historic
and cultural heritage of the community in which he/she creates architecture.
l d _ He shall not render professional services without a professional service
agreement. . .
l 351 _ If the Architect assists the O~ner 1n pla~nmg Promotional Services for the
. ct w ho should the Owner hire to coordmate the overall activities concerning
proJe ,.
~ep~ect? .
l a. Building Administrator
b. Full Time Supervisor _ _
c. Co~struct1on Manager
~--ProJect Manager
_ If a n Architect is hired as a Building Administrator, .w_hat is his_p~imary function?
( 352
Collection of Rent c. Superv1s1on of Building Personnel
a. d
b. Building Maintenance .
t'
t
l 3o2
11
353. In construction, what is usually awarded as a suo-1.,u "~ -
the client and not part of the general contract?

a . Waterproofing c.
b. Tiling d. . t0 ensure
354. What is given to the client by the contractor after all the work is done,
a properly functioning and efficient building?
a. building operations manual c.
b. post construction evaluation d.
355. Who should be held responsible for damages/accidents at the site?
a . Owner c. Architect
b. Contractor d. th
356 . After submission of all the Plans and Specifications that conforms with all e
pertinent Code, Rules and Regulations, and upon payment of the required fees,
building perm it w ill be issued in how many days?
a. within 3 days c. within 15 days
b. within 7 days d . within 30 days
357. Prior to issuance of a Building Permit, you are required to get a clearance from
the _ _ _ _ if the lot is adjacent to a creek or river etc
a. MMDA c. OPWH
b. DENR d. NGCP
358. Prior to issuance of a Building Permit, you are required to get a clearance from
the _ _ _ _ if the lot is near transmission lines.
a. MMDA c. OPWH
b. DENR d . NGCP
Prior to issuance of a Building Permit, you are required to get a clearance from
359.
the _ _ _ _ for Condominium projects.
c. NGCP
a. DENR d. HLURB
b. DPWH
360. A building permit shall expire and become null and void after how many days
since work is suspended or stopped after it has commenced?
a. 30 days c. 90 days
b . 60 days d. 120 days
361. In the performance his duties, when can a Building Official enter any building or
its premises within his jurisdiction to inspect and determine compliance with the
Building
a. Code?
Anytime c. At all reasonable times
b. When somebody reports an anomaly d . Upon the invitation of the Owner
52 . During construction , a Building Official found out that the building work is
3 contrary to the provisions of the Building Code. What may he do?
a. warn the Contractor c . Consult with the Architect
b. Order the D iscontinuance of the Occupancy d . Order the Work Stopped
· A build ing _permit shall
. expire and become null and void after how man Y month s
363trom issuance 1f work Is not commenced?
a. 3 m onths c. 12 months
b . 6 months d . 18 months
_ In w hich circumstance will a Building Permit become invalid?
364 _ when construction has not commenced with in 1 year from date Of .
1 _ when work is suspended tor 365 days issue
Il11 l _ whe n work is suspended for 180 days
3,J
PROFPRAc
Page 38 o f 5 2
IV - When work is suspended for 120 days

a. II and 111
b. I and Ill c. I and II
365 . . d . I and IV .
· What is needed in applying for a Building Permit if the applicant Is the NOT th e
Owner?
a. C urrent Real Property Tax Receipt c. CTC of TCT
b. Contract of Lease/Deed of Absolute Sale d. Tax Declaration
366 . What is needed to determine the lot boundaries?
a. LRA Certificate c. Tax Declaration
367 b. TCT nd d. Real Estate Tax
· A La Registration Document issued when a land has been adjudicated a nd
decreed in the name of the Owner in a Reg istration Proceeding for the first time in
pursuant to such a decree.
a . Transfe r Certificate of Title (TCT) c. Certified True Copy (CTC) of Title
b . Owners Certificate of Title (OCT) d. Original Certificate of Title (OCT)
368
- When a Land Title is cancelled and replaced by another title by reason of sale
or transfer, the new ceriificate issued is called?
a. Owners Ce rtificate of Title (OCT) c. Transfer Certificate of Title (TCT)
b. Certified True Copy (CTC) of Title d. Subseq uent Certificate of Title(SCT)
369. W hat is a n OCT?
a . Origina l Certificate of Title c. Owner Compliance of T itle
b. Owner Certificate of Title d. Original Compliance Title
370 . It is exempted from payment of building permit fees .
a. Public Build ings and Traditional Indigenous Family Dwellings
b . Structures less than Php 20,000
c . Ch urches
d. Schools
371 . What is not included in PD 1096?
a . Mechanical Discipline c. Elec trical Discipline
b. San itation Discipline d. Socialized and Economic Housing
372. What is not included in PD 1096?
a . T raditional Dwelling c. Electrical Plan
b. A rchitectural Plan d. Data and Electronics
373. Mecha nical Plans should abide with
a . Ph ilippine Mechanical Code c. Mechanical Code of the Philippines
b . Ph ilipp ine Mechanical Engineering Coded . Mechanical Engg Code of the Phils
374. Electrical Plans should abide with
a . Nationa l Electrical Code of the Phils c. Electrical Code of the Philippines
b. P hilippine Electrical Code d. Electrical Engineering Code of the Phils
_ T he Build ing Official may order or cause the non-issuance, suspension or
375
revocation of Bu ilding Perm its on any or all of the following grounds except
a . E rrors in the Plans and Specifications c. Incorrect Data Supplied
b . Incorrect Assessment of Fees _ d. Non-compliance with the Code
It is requi red if the lot Owner intends to abut the building to his property line if
376
; hat side of the lot has an existing neig hbor .
'2 U der the Revised IRR of the NBCP , what 1s the specific Subsection that
...,77. · ·ing an d sea 1·rng of arc h·tI ect ura I documen ts?
.dn fo r the sign
pro vI e 5 ·
s ection 302 .3 c. 303. 2
~: s ection 303. 3 d . 302 .2
30«f-
•
PROFPRAc Page 39 of 52
I 378. What d 0 you call the plans, sections, elevations, perspective,

·
th s pecifications and
o er outputs of an architect?
I · a. Architectural Working Drawings c. Architectural Plans
b. Contract Documents d. Architectural Documents
379
t - What should you do if a subdivision is fronting a busy highway?
a. provide Sm setback c.
b. provide a 3m local street d. . ?
380
t 3 1· What law protects the Architect from the reproduction of copies of the contract·
8 . !"n Architect refuses to give the original plan to the Owner. Why?
a. fhe owner is entitled only to the blueprint
t b. The Architect's work is covered by intellectual property rights/law
c. In order to prevent the owner from making duplicates and/or constructing
l d.
without his knowledge
All of the above
382 . What papers are usually seen at the jobsite?
I 383. Based on PSA standards, by how much number of population should a place
have before it is categorized as a barangay?
384 . Composition of PRBoA
i 385.
386 .
Responsibilities of an Architect
Responsibilities of an Owner
I 387.
388.
Coverage of Predesign Services (SPP Doc. 201 )
Scope of Regular Design Services (SPP Doc. 202)
389. Scope of Specialized Allied Services (SPP Doc. 203)
[ 390. Construction Services (SPP Doc. 204)
391. Post Construction Services (SPP Doc. 205)
392. Comprehensive Architectural Services (SPP Doc. 206)
393. Design Build Services (SPP Doc. 207)
394. Methods of Compensation
395 _ Methods of Architect Selection
396 _ Other function of an Architect
a. Project Manager c. Manufa cturer
b . Fabricator d. Supplier
397 . Who has more authority and responsibilities between a Project Manager and a
Construction Manager?
a. Project Manager c. Depends on the Job Specifications
b. Constru ction Manager d. None, they are the same person
398 _ The A rchitectural Plans must bear the Architect-of-Record's Signature, Seal
and the following with the exception of:
a. IAPOA Membersh ip Number c. Residence Certificate Number
b. PRC Reg istration Number d. PTR Number
_ Where can you apply/pay your PTR?
399
c. PRC
a . Barangay d. Municipality/City
b. BIR S rety Bonds, Performance Bonds and Guarantee Bonds?
400. What are
W hat lnsuranu ce borne by the Contractor will cover injuries, deaths and other
40 1. incidents at the site? _ _ _ _
unw anted f •shed by the Bidder Is a form of security that Is submitted to the
A bond urn1
4 02party
. . . . . the bid . It guarantees that the bidder will enter into a contract within
sol1c1tIng
3os
I
I a specific
.
period 0 f t·ime and will
. furnish
. any required
. pe rforma nee ' labor and
I material bonds. It is typically referred to as a bid bond.

a. Performance Bond
b. Guarantee Bond
c. Surety Bond
d. Proposal Bond
I 4 o3 . It is a bond that is an approved form of security furnished by the contractor as a

guarantee to execute work in accordance with the terms of the contract
a. Performance Bond c. Payment Bond
I b. Proposal Bond d. Guarantee Bond
4 o4 . Aside from the Bond, another instrument used by the Owner to ensure that th e
Contractor properly completes the activities required of them and that they make
m good any defect is to defer the release of payment (often 1-5%) until such time that
th e project is properly completed and any defect made good. This tool is called
i a. Cash Retention
b. Cash Deposit
c. Cash Receivables
d. Deposit-in-Escrow
405. After Project Completion and making good any defect, a typical Retention is
i released after
a. 1 month c. 6 month
b. 3 months d. 12 months
j 406. In the construction Industry, it is a person, firm or corporation that provides
guarantee or undertakes an obligation to pay in the event of failure on the part of
I the Contractor to fulfill his part.

a. Co-maker
b. Surety
c. Financer
d. Owner
I 407.
408.
Specs writing should be _ _ (manner)
In Specswriting, how do you refer to money?
a. How many c. Amount
I 409 .
b. How much
Study RA 9266 its IRR and terminologies
d. Volume
r 41 o. Interior Design - a practice concerned with anything that is found inside a

space (walls, windows, doors, finishes, textures, light, furnishings and furniture). All
of these elements are used by interior designers to develop a functional, safe, and
r aesthetica lly pleasing space for a building's user. The work of an interior designer
draws upon many disciplines including environmental psychology, architecture,
product design, and traditional decoration (aesthetics and cosmetics) . They plan
the spaces of almost every type of building including: hotels, corporate spaces,
schools, hospitals , private residences, shopping malls, restaurants, theaters, and
airport terminals. Today, interior designers must be attuned to architectural
detailing including: floor plans, home renovations, and construction codes.
4 11 . Scope of Specialized Allied Services (situational questions)
41 2. Bidding Rules & methods
41 3_ When can a contractor terminate a contract?
414 _ When sh ould Build ing Operations Manual (BOM) be submitted to the owner by
the contractor?
a. 30 days after issuance of certificate of Occupancy
b. A s soon as th e building is finished and ready fo r occupancy
c. As soon as the owner asks for it and all billings paid
d.
Page 41 of 52
PROFPRAC
415. Cons·d · f service zone so

1 enng office space, what is the minimum clearance O a
as not to obstruct walkways between 2 work units?
a. 0.60m c. 1.00m
b. 0.80m d.
416 · Considering office space, what is the minimum width that will also serve as
access from the work unit to the wall?
a. 1.00m c.
b. 1.20m d.
417 • What is preferred to control the movement of people inside a building?
a. Limit access to 4 c.
b. Well lighted hallway and stair d.
418. What do you call the raised edge at the sidewalk?
a. Zocalo c. Curb
b. Gutter d.
419. What is between 2 lots and is intended only for pedestrians?
a. Corridor c. Alley
b. Walkway d.
420. What type of street is used for pedestrian, animals and bikers?
a. Sidewalk c. Main Artery
b. Narrow Lane d. Alley
421. Sidewalks widths shall be based on the following considerations except:
a. Volume of Pedestrians c. TypesNolume of Street furnitures
b. Width of Planting Strips d. Provisions for Sidewalk Vendors
422. It is the basis for determining the MINIMUM sidewalk width for public
conven ience.
a. Volume of people passing through c. Space for vendors
b. Consider PWD and accessibility d. Shrubs, Trees and sidewalk aces
423. The minimum Planting Strip width for a 1Om RROW is
C. 0.40 m
a. Optional
b. 0.20 m d. 0.60 m
424 . In a 15 storey highrise building situated within a through lot with a frontage of
20 meters facing a major road and 15 meters depth. The rear of the lot faces a
service road. The front and side has a setback of 8 meters and 5 meters
respectively. What is the minimum number offire exits?
a. 2 main exits including the service stair
b. Provide 3 exits from ground to 8th floor, and 2 exits from 9th to the 15th floor
C.
42 5. Situated outside of private property limits, it is a public land that should be
enjoyed equally by all members of the community.
a. Ya rd c. Setback
b. Easement d.
426 . The Waterline surface along easements must be established by the?
a. DPWH c. Office of the Build ing Official
b. Office of the City Engineer d . MMDA
427. The following Developments are allowed W ITHI N Easeme ntS .
a. Linear Park c. Govt Leasing for small s ·
Footpaths d R d emi-permanent stalls
b• . oa way
428. What is the minimum floor area for Economic and s • . .
ocIa 11zed Housing?
3o7
Page 42 of 52
PROFPRAC
429 W h t · th • . . d socialized Housing

· a is e m1nrmum width of minor road for Economic an
subdivision?
430. Specs - given the reflected ceiling plan
431 - Specs - given floor pattern
432 - When can an architect do design concepts parallel to other designing
architects?
a. During Design Competitions c. During Design Development
b. Before Project is Conceived d.
433. When is the best time for an Architect to do several development projects?
a. During Design Competitions c. During Design Development
b. Before Project is Conceived d.
434. It links the skills of human with existing and available resources for
development
a. Human Resource Development c. Construction Skills Development
b. Bldg Technology & Methodology d.
435. Prior to construction, a building permit should first be obtained. What may the
Building Official allow even while the Building Permit application is still being
processed subject to the payment of corresponding fees?
a. Bending/Cutting of Rebars c. Ground Preparation and Excavation
b. Fabrication of Forms d. Delivery of Materials
NOTE : Other activities allowed but not in choices are covered under ACCESSORY
PERM ITS like:
1. Encroach ment of Foundation to Public Area
2. Fencing, fo r Fence NOT exceeding 1.80m high
3. Sidewalk Construction
4 . Temporary Sidewalk Enclosure and Occupancy
5. Erection of Scaffolding
6. Erecting, Repair and Removal of Sign
7. Demolition
NOTE: The question is WHAT the Building Official ALLOW ... you don't need permission for
a, b and d.
436 . Before demolition is commenced, a Notice of Intention to Proceed shall be
provided to :
a. The Architect c. The Contractor
b. The Engineer d. Owners of Adjoining Building/s
437. All debris arisin~ from_ a demolition should be kept damp by means of spraying
water from a hose with a fine spray to prevent dust from arising . Why?
a. To keep the workplace clea n
b. For the health of the workers
c. So adjoining
. bldg
. owners/occupants and pedestrians are not inconvenienced
· ·
d. To avoid lawsuits that will delay the work
4 38. Wh ere the sidewalk is permitted by the building official to be full .
fenced-off or enclosed, what is req uired to be pla d d. Y occupied and
a. Safety Net ce a Jacent to the curb line?
c. Temporary W alkw
b. Protective Railing ay
. d. Protective Gano
4 39. Footings located at least 2 40m bel d PY
· h · · ow gra e along 1·
h1g way may proJect not more than how man ·ir na ional roads or public
a. 300 Y m1 ,meters beyond the propert 1·
b. 500 C. 600 Y tne?
d. 750
30&
Page 43 of 52
PROFPRAC
th nd
440 h 5
As per NBCP, Footing for Group A dwelling should be at least 2 omm ick a
ow many millimeters below the surface of the ground?
a. 300 ·
b 400 C. 500
. d. 600
441 · '.oundations may be permitted to encroached into public sidewalk areas th
provided that the top of the said foundation is not less than 600mm below t e
es!a~lished grade; and provided further, that said projections does not obS ruct anyth
existing utility such as power, communication, gas, water, or sewer lines, unless e
owner concerned shall pay the corresponding entities for the rerouting of the parts
of the affected utiiities. What is the maximum width , in millimetres, allowed for such
an encroachment?
a. 300 c.600
b. 500 d. 750
442. What is known as the "Architecture Act of 2004?"
a. RA 9622 c. PD 1097
b. RA 9266 d. PD 1185
443. It is also known as UAP Doc. 200
a. Code of Ethical Conduct c. Architect's Responsibilities
b. Standards of Professional Practice d. Pre-Design Services
444. The Code of Eth ical Conduct is an integral part of?
445. The minimum number of elevator for a 4-storey building
a. 0 C. 2
b. 1 d. 3
446. Remedial work done on any damaged or deteriorated portion/s of
bu ilding/structure to restore to its original condition
a. Renovation c. Addition
b. Repair d. Alteration
447. Any physical change made on buildings/structures to increase the value,
quality, and/o r to improve aesthetics
a. Remodelling c. Addition
b. Renovation d. Repa ir
448. A change in the use or occupancy of buildings/structures or any portion/s
thereof
c. Demolition
a. Remodelling
b. Renovation d. Conversion
449. Any new construction which increases the height and/or floor area of existing
buildings/structures
b. Renovation d. Alteration
450 . Works in building/structures involving changes in the materials used,
partition ing , location/size of openings, structural parts, existing utilities and
equipment but does not increase the building height and/or floor area.
b. Renovation d. Alteration
451 _ s tudy the following:
a. Code of Ethics
b. Liabilities/Responsibilities of Architect to Owner, Contractor, Public Supplier, etc
c. Methods of Compensation
d. Lega l Actions to be taken , Civil Court
30'1
Page 44 of 52
PROFPRAC
452 · After a Change of Use of a building what should be secured?

a. FS!C_ , c. Certificate of occupancy
· b. Building Permit d.
453. Before a building can be used. what should be secured?
a. Building Permit · c. Sanitary Permit .
b. Certificate of Occupancy d. Certificate of Compl~tion
454 · A GEi is issued if upon inspection it was found out that the bwldmg has met or
complied with the necessary provisions of the code. CEI stands for .
a. Complete Electrical Installation c. Certificate of Engineering lnsp~ction
b. Certificate of Environmental Inspection d. Certificate of Electrical Inspection
455. Where do you secure a Building Permit?
a. DPWH c. OBO
b. MWSS d. DENR .
456. If the Owner asks you to be his representative for securing a Building Permit,
what should you present to the OBO?
a. Notarized Authorization Letter or SPA c. Endorsement Letter
b. Letter of Delegation d.
457. Plans, Models and Perspectives are
a. Instruments of Practice c.
b. Documents for Presentation d.
458. What do you call Working Drawings, Specifications, Estimates and General
Conditions?
a. Construction Drawings c.
b. Contract Documents d.
459. it defines the relationship among the Owner, the Architect and the Contractor
and stipulates the norms by which the contractor shall perform his work. It is a
standard document for use by all practicing architects in the Philippines
a. Standards of Professional Practice c. General Conditions
b. Service Agreement d. Memorandum of Agreement
460. What is the standard size of Working Drawings?
a. A3 c. 10 X 15
b. 30 x 40 d. 20 x 30
461 . Wh at is NOT usually employed by the Owner in commissioning a small
residential project?
a. Bidding c. Direct Selection
b. Architectural Design Competition d.
462. This method of selecting an Architect involves: Invitation, Prequalification,
Interview, Verification , Evaluation & Ranking and Negotiation .
a. Direct Selection c. Comparative Selection
b. Architectural Design Competition d.
463. ~his is an e~pensive and time-consuming method of selecting an Architect.
a. Direct Selection . c. Architectural Design Competition
b. Comp~rat,ve ~election . d. Bidding
464. A basis for Direct Selection of Architects
a. lnvita~ion c. Verification
b. Interview d. Recommend t'
465 . A Client commissions you for a project. Since the Client~ ron h d
insisted that he should be the one to supply the mate . 1 nd as ar ware, he
job~ite. The Contractor uses them and installs the sa~: sa de~rve~s
th them to_the
noticed that the materials being used are substa d d · ~very rng is fine until you
specifications you prepared. This angers you ar an does n~t fo llow the
Contra~tor' s billing. The Contractor complaintt~ 1iou refused to sign the
Owner Is ang ry too because of the work st e Owner and stops all work . The
nd
Now everybody is angry and everything ?~a?e a also feels insulted by you
a. Architect 9nn s O
a halt. Who should say sorry fi · ?
b. Owner c. Contractor rrst.
d. No one. Let's settle this in cou rt.
Ito-
---,
466 - An outline · · I to be
used? specification enumerating the type or trade names of matena s
. a. Bid Bulletin S h d le of Materials and Finishes

b. Gene I C .. c. c e u
. ra ond1t1_ons d. Specifications
467Th' A _kInd of Sp~~1fic~tion wherein it requires the use of a single approved prod~ct.
is kind of spec1f1cat1on can lead to the perception of favoritism towards a certain
manufacturer and eliminates competition .
a. Performance Specification c. Product Specification
b. Pres?riptive Specification d. Proprietary Specification
468 - Basic function of an open door
a. Fire safety C.
b. Means of access d.
469. How do you order a Door Jamb?
a. Exterior Dimension c.
b. Size of Door d.
470. Allowable projection for the signage of a building that is NOT arcaded
a. 0.90 C. 1.20
b. 1.00 d. None of the above
471 . Minimum signage height of a building that is NOT arcaded
a. 4.0m c. 5.0m
b. 3.0m d. 6.0m
472. Minimum signage height of a building that IS arcaded
a. 4.0m c. 5.0m
b. 3.0m d. 6.0m
4 73. The minimum arcade height above the established sidewalk grade is
a. 4 .0m c. 5.0m
b. 3.0m d. 6.0m
474. Allowable projection for the signage of a building that IS arcaded .
a. 0.90 C. 1.00
b. 0.60 d. 1.20
475. The erection of electric neon signboards or other advertisements of similar
nature projecti ng over roadways or public streets shall be allowed provided that
clear distance between signboards erected on one building is NOT less than
a. 2.00 c. 4.00
b. 3.00 d. 1.20
476. Footings located at least 2.40 meters below grade along national roads or
public highways may project not more than _ _ mm beyond the property line.
a. 300 mrn c. 600 mm
b. 500 mm d. 700 mm
477 . In order for a Foundation to be allowed to encroach into public sidewalk areas
To a width not exceeding 500 millimeters, it shall have a minimum depth of
millimeters measured from the top of the said foundation up to the established
grade, provided further that it does not obstruct any existing utility such as power
communication, gas, water, or sewer lines. '
a. 300 mrn c. 600 mm
b. 500 mm d. 700 mm
478 . Identify the kind of lot in the figure at right
a. Through lot c. Inside Lot
b. Corner lot d. Corner through Lo
------- - ---
31I
Page 46 of 52
PROFPRAC
479. Identify the type of lot in the figure below.
I I I I I ~. 1/" J''/
i"{
I I I I J · l 11
J I I .I l I I 1
4 80 . Identify the types of lots in the figure below indicated as #1 and #2
·-·- -- ·-
.,,--•
481 . Who prepares the Comprehensive Land Use Plan?

a. HLURB c. Environmental Planner
b .Arch itect d . Engineer
482. Who adopts the land use plan when HLURB already approved it
a . Office of the mayor c. DPWH
b . Sangguniang panglunsod d.
483. What is being planned by the HLURB
a. Housing and Development c. Comprehensive Land Use Plan (CLUP)
b. Urban Land Use Map (ULUM) d . CBD Plan
484. After passing the Sanggunian, who implements it
a. NHA c . 080
b . DPWH d.
485. The CLUP is the blueprint for future physical development of cities and
municipalities that is mandated under the Local Government Code (RA 7160) and
enacted by the Sangguniang Panglunsod through a
a . CBD Plan c.Urban Land Use Map
b. Zoning Ordinance d.
486. Which will you least or NOT consider in making a Comprehensive Development
Plan?
a. Social c . Transportation
b . Economic d . Political/Institutional
487. ~hich is NOT considered in a Master Development Plan?
a. Site Develop_m ent c. Building Height
b. Urban Planning d.
488 . What is meant by R3 in residential zone?
a . Medium density housing c Gen • .
b . High d~nsity housing d: eral density housing
4 89. Wh at Is meant by R2 in res idential zone?
490. Seek perm it from the DENR when ·
a. Cutting large trees
C.
b.
d.
3lt-
491 . Dr .
called awing ' spe ci.fiications,
. budgetary cost, models, furnished by an architect are
· a . construction document c.
b . architect's proposal d.
4 92 . Specifications contain .
a . Bill of Materials c. Quality of Materials .
c . Responsibility of Clients d. Other Conditions of Services
493. What is the purpose of Bill of Materials? .
a. Bidding c. Construction Guide
b . Loan d . Reference on Cost
494. Who is responsible for making/ producing Architectural Drawings
l a. Draftsman
b. Architect
c. Engineer
d. Office Staff
495. Who can best interpret Architectural Drawings
I a. Foreman
b . Trade Professional
c. Architect
d. Draftsman
496. Who should sign Architectural Drawings
I a. Foreman
b. Architect
c. Consultant
d. Draftsman
497 . Which is not a Structural Plan?
I a. Foundation Plan
b . Schedule of Beams
c . Floor Framing Plan
d . Roof Framing Plan
498 . The following are needed for the application of Building Permit except?
I a. TCT and/or Contract of Lease c. Tax Declaration
b. Five (5) sets of Signed & Sealed Plans d. Intended use or occupancy
499. You were commissioned to do a Masterplan. What should you do first?
I a. Study the existing laws
b. Survey the location
c. Coordinate with the local government for tracing of history
I 500.
d. Direct all department heads
Responsibilities of an Architect: when she/he conducts the checking of
materials and works done if in adherence with the specification
I a. Job site management

b . Project supervision
c. Quantity surveying
d . Full time supervision
501. How often does the Architect-of-Record visit the jobsite?
I a. Once a week
b . Twice a month
c. Never
d. As often as he/she wants
502 . Specifications should be clear and easy to understand . What must be avoided?
I a. Superlative Adjectives
b. Sentence with double meaning
c. Quantitative Description
d.
503. Mayor A wants to build a new Health Care Facility for his constituents. He asks
I his M_ u nicipal Architect, Arc_h. B,_to de~ign this facil ity given a specific budget. Arch .
B obhge~ _but after completing his design, he found out that his design went over
the spec1f1c budget allocated for the project. What should Arch B recommend to
I Mayor A .
a. Replan and find a better solution that may meet the required budget
-
ll
b. Start the stru~ture phase-by-phase as it is a common practice
c. Rem?ve less important space to meet the budgetary requirement
d. Architect B c~n recommend 1 or all of the said options
504. A cooperative arrangement between governme t d •
typically in volves a private entity financing canst ~- an th e pnv_ate sector which
return for a promised stream of payments dire ti r~c mg or managing a project in
-- from _u sers ove~ a specified period of time .

a. Pnvate-Pubhc Partnership
b. Pu blic-Private Partnership
c Y rom the government or indirectly
C.
d.
-
ti
313
Page 48 of 52
PROFPRAC
505. A KPO is · d with the SEC

a. not allowed allowed as an Archl Firm c. to be reg i5tere
b. to be registered with the DTI d. dafter the
506 - The records of test materials and of concrete m ust be preserve
completion of the project for at least
a. 2 years c. 5 years
b. 3 years · d. cured?
507. After a Change of Use (Renovation) of the Building, what should ~e se ·
a . Fire Safety Inspection Certificate c. Certificate of C?mpletion
b . Certificate of Occupancy d . Certificate of Final Payment
508 . A permit secured prior to the Commencement of a Project.
a. Excavation Permit c. ECC
b. Building Permit d. Sidewalk Permit
509 . For a Building Permit to be legitimate, it should be
a . Duly Signed c. Duly Notarized
b. Duly Sealed d. .
510 . In determining the amount of fines to be imposed , the following are considered
g rave except
a . Non-compliance with work stoppage order for construction/demolition without
permit
b. Unauthorized change in type from more fire restrictive to less fire restrictive
c. Use or occupany of the building/structure without appropriate Certificate of
Occupancy
d . Non compliance with order to demolish
511 . For violations of the NBCP, the Secretary is empowered to prescribe and
impose fines not exceeding
a. Php 10,000 c. 50 ,000
b . Php 20 ,000 d. 100,000
512. Any person who violates any provision of the NBCP shall upon conviction be
punished by a fine not exceeding _ _ _ _ or by imprisonment of not more than
two years or by both such fine and imprisonment.
a. Php 10,000 c. 50,000
b. Php 20,000 d. 100,000
513. A permit secured prior to the Occupancy of a Building
a. Build ing Permit c. Occupancy Permit
b. ECC d.
514. What is ECC?
a. Environ~ental Cl!mate Cha_nge c. Env!ronmental Certificate of Compliance
b. Energy vast effic1~ncy _Certificate d. Environmental Compliance Certificate
515. ~ hat_are the qu~hftcat1ons of someone who wishes to take the Ucensure
Examination for Architects?
a . Filipino Citizen c.
b. A graduate of A rch itecture d.
516. After how many days can a Contractor stop work if the A h I·t t'
th e change of work is delayed? re ec s approval for
a . 1O days c 30 d
b. 15days · ays
517. A n Outline Specification enumeratin 9 thedt.
be used and finishes is known as ype o r trade names of materials to
a. Estimates
b . PERT-CPM c . Bill of Materials
518. A_clien~ asked Maria, a licensed archite t S?~edule of ~aterials and Finishes
the clle nt will look at a potential prop rt th c · to Jom a daytnp to Roxas City wh
fl You t ·m the morning
· e Y at c an bed I . ere
and fl y back to M ·1 . e~e oped into a resort Th
re commend ed meth od of compensati a~1 a in_the evening . What is the . ey
a. Honorarium or Per Diem + R . ban _or this?
eIm urs1bles
3ftf'.
Page 49 of 52
PROFPRAC
b. Retainer
c. Professional Fee + Expenses
d. A fixed fee of PHP5,000 per appearance . t this time to
519 . Th~ following week, Maria was invited again by the same_ clie~x~s City . The
~eet with a potential Chinese investor for the planned resort in R . What is the
investor was difficult to deal with and was at times even rude to Mana.
recom mended compensation method for this?
a. Honorariu m or Per Diem+ Reimbursibles
b. Retainer
c. Professional Fee + Expenses
d. A fixed fee of PHP5,000 per appearance . . . - eters?
520. As per PD 1096, what is the minimum horizontal d1mens1on of court in m
a.1.00 c. 1.50
b. 2.00 d. 3.00 .h
521 . As per PD 1096 ' all inner courts shall be connected to a street or ..yard, ei~
~fu~ er
by a passageway or a door through a room or rooms. What is the minimum
this passageway?
a. 1.00 C. 2.00
b. 1.20 d. 2.20
522 . Minimum Front Setback for R-1
a. 4.50 C. 5.00
b. 6.00 d.
523. Minimum Side Setback for R-1
a. 2.00 C. 4.00
b. 3.00 d.
524. Minimum Rear Setback for R-1
a. 2.00 c. 4.00
b. 3.00 d.
525. Using the 1977 National Building Code, what is the minimum setback for R-1
a. 3.0m c. 5.0m
b. 4.0m d. none of the above
526 . What is the minimum front setback for R-4?
a. 3. 0m c. 5.0m
b. 4.5m d . none of the above
527. Maximum height of a Party wall - 3.0 m
528. What is the difference between a Party Wall and a Fire Wall?
529. What is the minimum ceiling height for Habitable Rooms with Artificial
Ventilation of a single-storey structure?
a. 2.1 Om c. 2.40m
b. 2.70m d. 1.80m
530. What is the minimum ceiling height for Habitable Rooms with Artificial
Ventilation at the Second Floor?
a. 2.10m c. 2.40m
b. 2.70m d. 1.80m
531 . What is the minimum ceiling height at the ground floor f H b·tI bl
with Natural Ventilation? or a a e Rooms
a. 2.10m c 2 40
b. 2.7~m .. d·. 1·.ao:
532. Height of ceiling at 5th floor with Natural V t·I 1.
a. 2. 10m en I a 10n
b. 2.70m c. 2.40m
1
533 . (from Qatar Exam) If the Residential C d. -~~m .
Airconditioned, what shall be the . . o~dominium Units are to be
Ist
Finished Floor Line (FFL) and the~~u,:n~m d ~.nce (in meters) between th
a. 2.40 mis ed Ce1lmg Line (FCL) at the 5th Fl e
b. 2.70 c. 2.10 (ans ... succeed· oor?
ct . 1.80 ing storeys)
315
Page 50 of 52
PROFPRAC
NO . . ked about this question,

TE. question is Finished Ceiling Line and NOT Ceiling Height. When as
PR BOA confirmed that indeed the answer was 2.10 ©
534. What is the minimum dimension of a Kitchen?
a. 2.00 m x 3.00 m c. 1.50 m x 1.50 m
b. 1.50 m_ x 2.00 m d. 2.00 m x 2.00 m lk side-
535. In a Sidewalk with a width of 1.80m, how man elder! eo le can wa
by-side at the same time? Provision for person w it h cane is approx 0 .90 X 2= 1.80m
a. 2 C. 4 answer is 2 ELDERLY PEOPLE. Kung wheelchair naman ang
b. 3 d. 5 tanong, its 0 .75m x 2= 1.50m so 2 pa rin ang sagot .
536. What is the width of a walkway as access going to the parking for the physically
challenged?
a. 1.50 C.
b. 1.20 d.
537. Width of Drop Curb
a. 0.90m c. 0.80m
b. 1.00m d.
538. Maximum height of Spire, if made of combustible material, above the BHL?
a. 6.0m c. 6.50m
b. 7.0m d. limited only by Structural Design
539. Maximum height of Spire, if made of incombustible material, above the BHL?
a. 6.0m c. 6.50m
b. 7.0m d. limited only by Structural Design
540. Allan, a 5th year student of Architecture was asked by his Aunt and Uncle to
prepare Architectural Plans for their dream house. Both parties mutually agreed on
their Contract stipulations as well as the Contract price. However, since Allan is still
NOT licensed, he asked his professor, Arch. Luna to sign and seal his work. Arch.
Luna obliges after checking that everything is compliant with existing codes. He
asks and receives a Signing Fee. Is there something illegal in this situation? If yes,
what is it?
a. Yes. Estafa
b. Yes. Violation of Intellectual Property Rights
c. None. Because everybody involved mutually agreed as evidenced by their
contract
d. Yes. Misdemeanor
541 . \Nho is liable for this unprofessional act?
a. Allan c. Owners
b. Arch . Luna d. All of them
542 . Who is liable for aiding in this unprofessional act?
a. Allan c. Owners
b. Arch. Luna d. All of them
543. If Allan is guilty, how much is he liable for?
a. Php 100,000 to Php 5,000,000 c. Php 200,000
b. Php 50,000 to Php 500,000 d. none coz he's not guilty
544. If for ttle sake . of argument ' there was no Contract betwee n All an ,s A unt and
Unc Ie an d A reh1tect Luna, How much are the Owner's liable for?
a. Php 100,000 to Php 5,000,000 c. Php 200 000 .
b. Php. 50,000 to Php 500,000 d. none '
545. Mr. Ayala wanted to have the Interiors of his h
that his long-time friend Arch. D is now an Architec~u~e renovate? · U~on learning
Arch . D's of fi~ ~t D & Z Partners. Mr. Z, Arch D' , e we~t to give ~1m a visit at
Aft~r several vrs,ts, Mr. Ayala was convinced ~nd s pa_ r tner is an Interior Designer.
pro~ect since the estimated project cost was ·th· d~_cided to push through with the
proJect be aw_arded? wi in is budget. To whom should the
a. Arch. D, since Mr: Ayala is a personal friend
b. D & Z artners, since in a partnershi th
wa s usmg hrs office/ resources at th: ~y sho~ld share everything plus A h
pa nersh1p to conclude the deal re . D
3,,
PROFPRAc
Page 51 of 52
c. Mr. Ayal~ can rightfully hire another Designer and can use the eS t imateS/
. d. ~urg~es~ions pr~vided by his friend
5 46 _ · ' since he '~ the Interior Designer
A group newly licensed architects and their friends wanted to put-up an
rch_,tectural Firm. How many % of the corporation should be owned by th e
architects.
a . 50ro C. 75%
b. 701/o d. 60%
547
. A_n Architect, an Interior designer & an Engineer, who are all siblin~s. ~re ?
planning to set-up an Architectural Firm. How many % will be the Architects share·
a. 75% C. 70%
b. 60% d. 33.33%
54
a. It is a Type of Business Organization wherein if the company fails and has to
close operation , the individual shareholders are NOT liable for the company's
debts. Each shareholder loses only the money he spent in buying his shares.
a. Partnership c. Corporation
b. Single Proprietorship d. Limited Liability Company
NOTE: the Limited Liability Company (LLC) does NOT exist in the Philippines.
549. It is a widely used Third-Party Verification for green building certification
developed by the USGBC that aims to help building owners and operators to be
environmentally responsible and use resources efficiently.
a. CASBEE c. BERDE
b. LEED d. TUV Rheinland
550. What is Value Engineering?
It is an organized approach to the identification and elimination of unnecessary Cost
or the acquisition of necessary function or services at the lowest Cost. The following
are functions of value engineering:
- Preparing and administering maintenance programs.
- Forecasting expenditure flows.
- Advising on cost limits and preparing budgets.
- Advis ing on Cash Flow Forecasting.
- Advis ing on Life Cycle Costing.
- Cost Ana lysis .
- Cost benefit Analysis.
- Estimating
- Evaluating alternative designs.
- Undertaking feasibility Studies.
- Investment Appra isal
_ Measuring and describing construction work but only in terms of cost planning.
551. What does an Appraisal Architect do?
a. Estimates a proposed project c. Determines faults in design/const methods
b. Gives value to a bldg d. Formulates safeguards in work activity
552. A Comprehensive Development Plan will include the ff components except
a. Appraisal c. Transport
b. Socio-Cu ltural d. Legal and Administrative
553. In the determination of Room sizes, the Air Space req uirement for a Workshop
is?
a . 3 cum/person c. 12 cum/person
b. 8 cum/person d. 14 cum/person
554. Air Space requirement for a Habitable Room .
a. 3 cum/person c. 12 cum/person
b. 8 cum/person d. 14 cum/person
555. Air Space requirement for a school room per person
a. 3 cubi~ meters c. 14 cubic meters
b. 12 cubic meters d. 16 cubic meters
·1,,
PROFPRAc Page 52 of 52
556
· What is the unit area per occupant of a Conference Room (Occupant Load)?
a. 1.00 sqm c. 1.40 sqm
557 b. 1.20 s~m . d. 1.60 sqm
· What is the unit area per occupant of a Dining Room?
a. 1.00 sqm c. 1.40 sqm
b. 1. 20 sqm d. 1.60 sqm
558
- What is the unit area per occupant of a Dance Floor, Auditorium, Place of
Worship and Lodge Room?
a. 0.50 sqm c. 0.75 sqm
b. 0.65 sqm d. 1.00 sqm
559. What is the unit area per occupant of a Classroom?
a. 1.50 C. 2.00
b. 1.80 d. 1.90
NOTE: as per PD 1096 = 1.80
As per RA 9514 = 1.90
560. What is the unit area per occupant of an Office?
a. 18.60 C. 22.40
b. 20.00 d. 9.30
NOTE: Please see RA 9514 and PD 1096 for other OCCUPANT LOADS
MUST KNOW: SPP 201-209 (Doc Name), PRBoA, Contract, IAPOA, Methods
of Compensation, Proposal Fee, Responsibilities of the Architect to
Contractors, Subordinates and Society, Bldg Laws.
For Situational Questions:Always put yourself in the shoes of the Architect.

Thi nk as if you are already an architect. Before deciding on an answer,
always consider the Code of Ethics and the effect of your answer to other
people.
3f&
I
ARDES. Part 1
Page 1 of 32
PARTl Republic of the Philippines
Reader Professional Regulation Commission (PRC)
Professional Regulatory Board of ARCHITECTURE (PRBoA)

Warm-up ... Familiarization
Licensure Examination for Architects (LEA)
SUBJECT : ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN AND SITE PLANNING

LA NON - MANUAL DRA FTING (KNOWLEDGE-BASED CUM COMPETENCY-BASED)
EXAMINATION FORMAT THA T REQUIRES THE PRIOR PREPARATION BY THE EXAMINEES
OF MANUAL DRAWINGS AND SKETCHES (NON GRADED) IN ORDER FOR THE
EXAMINEES TO SELECT THEIR ANSWERS (GRADED) UNDER A MULTIPLE CHOICE
EXAMINATION FORMAfl
WARNING: If there are conflicts between a stated word and the number/ amount/ figure described, the
stated I spelled word shall prevail. Should there be conflicts between two (2.0) stated quantities, the
higher figure shall prevail.
IMPORTANT NOTE: For this reformat of the examination in this subject, the Examinee shall be allowed
to make full use (open books) ONLY of Rule VII and Rule VIII of the 2004 Revised Implementing Rules
and Regulations (IRRJ of Presidential Decree (P.D.J No. 1096, otherwise known as the 1977 National
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP) i.e. ONLY as downloaded and reproduced from the PRBoA
website at www.architectureboard.ph. The use of other /RR versions are specifically disallowed during
this examiniltirm.
DATE/ TIME: (Sunday), 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.
VENUE : City of Manila, Philippines (PH)
A. PROJECT NO. 1 TITLE (and General Description)
Proposed Open Market Residential Prototype Project consisting of Two (2.0) Storey, Single-
Detached House with an 77.0 Sq.M. Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA) cum Site Development
Planning Project for a Cluster of Ten (10.0) Prototype House and Lots, on a Site with a Ten
Percent (10.0%) Slope
B. STATEMENT OF THE ARCHITECTURAL PLANNING and DESIGN PROBLEM:
A Multinational development company {the "Client', has decided that its property, a one thousand
nine hundred thirty four point seventy two square meter (1,934.72 Sq.M.) inside (or regular) lot,
with a low density residential (R-1) zoning classification, and located in the better parts of the Municipality of
Taytay in Rizal . Province (Luzon Island), shall be developed to host an open market residential
development. The 10 Prototype Houses shall be exclusive/ semi-upscale structures, 6 of which shall be
on lots each with a 132.0Sq.M. Total Lot Area (TLA) and a 12.0m depth. The stated 77.0 Sq.M. TGFA
of the Prototype Houses only _refers to the _enclos!d floor areas above grade (or natural ground) level and
excludes all other floor areas, 1f these are still to be introduced at a later time.
C. PROJECT SITE FEATURES:
The 1,934 .72 Sq.M. Grand Total Lot Area (GTLA) making up the entire Project s·t -
rectang ular in shape and has thi~y two (3~.0) m wid~ frontage facing east. The property may be
via a fifteen meter (15 .0 m) wide street 1.e. the main road right-of-way (RROW) which ha .
paver-lined sidewalks o~ each side. The Surface of the main RROW sidewalk closest to the p . sct1·8_ m wide
be considered as elevation 0.0 m. _An 8.0 m wide clu ster street bisects the Project Site at i;: r Sit~ shall
intersects the main RROW at the right angle. The Project Site uniformly slopes at ten t Ong axis and
west to east, which Is also the direction of the cluster street serving as the direct percen {10.0°/o) from
each side of the clus~r street. The 2 end lots at the westernmost portion of the t? the 10 lots, 5 on
wider than the 6 lo~s at lhe center of the development. The corner lots defi ned b h~ Site approx. 31.45%
RROW are 2.0 m wider than lhe 6 lots at the center of the development. Y t e cluster street and main
S1'1
,
ARDES. Part l
'
Page 2 of 32
l D. DESIGN OBJECTIVES:
a. To create exclus· I .. . .
l zoned property; tve semi-upscale, low-nse, single-detached residential building to be sited on a R-1
b. To plan and des·
Proiect
I •
host area; tgn a c osely-knit residential cluster that rnay serve as a model development tn the
,
~- ~o pla~ the development to maximize profits for the developer; and
0
· design the Prototype Houses to serve as landmarks in the Project area.
Problem No. 1 (Low Density Residential 01x:upancy)
A. PROJECT NO. 2 TITLE and General Description:
A Proposed Medium-Rise APARTMENT BUILDING Project i.e. a development with Basement

component and on a Project Site having an 8.0% slope.
B. STATEM ENT OF THE PROBLEM:
A Development company has decided that its newly-acquired property with a Total Lot Area (the
"TLA") of six thousand square meter (6,000.0 Sq.M.) shall be developed to host a medium-rise
apartment building (the "Project''). The property is zoned as a high density housing lot (Maximum R-
3), located somewhere in the better parts of Pasig City (the "Project Site"). Only two (2.0) types of
rentable/leasable apartment units shall be provided, as follows:
1) Studio-Type apartment units with a twenty two square meter (22.0 Sq.M.) Gross Floor Area (GFA); and
2) One (1.0)-Bedroom (BR) apartment units with a GFA of fifty (50.0) Sq.M.
For greater market acceptance, the minimum parking requirements for the Project under the 2004 Revised
Implementing Rules and Regulations (R-IRR) of P.O. No. 1096, otherwise known as the 1977 National
Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP), should be exceeded.
The Project Site is rectangular in shape and is an interior lot with a fifty (50.0) m. width. As there is
no other means of direct access to the Project Site, a two (2) lane right-of-way (ROW) still has to be
negotiated with the owner of the adjoining vacant lot that faces north, where a twenty meter (20.0m) wide
street i.e. a road right-of-way (RROW) is located. The said RROW has two point four (2.4) m wide sidewalks
on each side. The Project Site uniformly slopes at eight percent (8.0%) towards the vacant lot in front,
which is only 80.0 m deep but also uniformly 8.0% slopes toward the RROW. The surface of the sidewalk
adjoining the vacant front lot shall be considered as elevation O.Om. To the left of the Project Site is a private
high school building . To its right is a residential condominium building. To the rear of the Project Site are
proposed three (3.0)-storey single-detached residences.
D. DESIGN OBJ ECTIVES:
a. To design a medium-rise apartment building, marketable and attractive to middle income

renters/lessees;
b. To design the apartment building in a way that can maximize rentals and leases for the Developer;
the ratio of saleable versus non-saleable spaces shall be 70:30; if attainable, the overall
rentable/leasable areas for the building could be at approximately eighty five percent {80.0)% of the
TGFA or better, which must include the parking spaces at the basement; and
c. To design a building that shall serve as a landmark in the Project area, with sustainable plan/design
features and' deliverable at the least cost.
520
I
ARDES. Part 1 .
Page 27 of 32
-
- 29 7 · Which is NOT · ·
I •
a. Fittings
b. Fixtures
included rn the Architectural Interi ors?
c. Furnitures
d.
I 298 Wh· h ·
·
NOTE : This was asked two (2) t imes
a. Furnishings
· .
IC is NOT included m the Architectural Int eriors?
c. W all
d c ·1·
I 2
b. Floors . e1mg
99. Which is NOT an Architectural Interior (Al) element?
a. Eaves c. Unit Part y Wa ll
,,
I b. Elevat ed Lob by Ceiling d. Bathroom Floo r
3 0 0 . W hich is NOT an Interior Appliance?
a. Exhaust Fan c. Microwave Oven
b. Electric Fan d. ACU
3
o1. Wh at is th e b est p aint color for a Roofdeck? {asked repeatedly for each problem)
a. Da r k Gray c. Light Gray
I 3
b. Da r k Beige d. Light Beige
o2. What is the best paint color for exterior walls? (asked repeatedly for each problem)
a. Dark Gray c. Light Gray
I b. Dark Beige d. Light Beige

303 . What pa int color is not recommended for the exterior of a Firewall?
a. light Gray t o M edium Gray c. Black
ti b. Dark Gray d. Beige

304. What is NOT a re co m mended color for a Firewall?
a. White c. Blue
ti b. Black d. Beige
305. Considering that Firewall is not allowed for R-1, an abutment of 3.20m from established
grade line may be permitted but solely for supporting a carport roof. Which material can be
ti used?
a. Steel Railings above 2.0m measured vertically from the established grade line
b. Decorative Concrete Blocks above 1.S0m measured vertically from the established
(I grade line
c. Glass Blocks above 1.20m measured vertically from the established grade line
d . Wood above 1.80m measured vertically from the established grade line
[I 306. What is specifically not allowed in an R-1 lot development?
a. firewall c. Perimeter Wall
b . Reta in ing Wall d. Zocalo Wall
pl 30 7 . For an R-1 property, what is the maximum height of the wall?3.20 m abutment 1.80 m max
308. Maximum height of (R-1) wall of fence without beam above grade
a . 1.20 c. 2.00
t'1 b. 1.80 d.
309 _ Maxim um height of (Indu strial) wall offence without beam above gradel.80m
3 10. What shou ld be the prominent line for an R-1 two-storey townhouse with a Frontage of
tJl 9 m?
a. Horizonta l
.
c. Diagonal
d. Curve
dJ 31
b. Verti ca l
1. ff an own er of a Firewa ll decides to rent-out his firewall and use it as a bi llboard for
advertise rs fo r him t o gain extra inco me. How.w ill he go about th is undertaking?
a. Paint or Sticlcer
b . Tarp au lin on Steel Fram e
c. Tarpau li n on St ee l Fr ame with Spot light s at the bottom
- d. Tarpau li n Mou nte d on Firewall with Concrete Nails
3i5
Ji
I ARDES. Part 1 Page 28 of 32
I 312. Your client asks you to put a firewall for his .house, where should the CENTER-LINE of the
I Firewall be located?
a, 600mm from the Property Line c. 4" from the Property Line
b. Exactly at the Property line d. lm from the Property line
I 313. In a crowded and noisy hallway, which will you not provide in terms of.acoustical
t rea tment?
a. Carpet c. Curtains
I b. Gypsum board d. Glass
314. Which will you not provide a manager's office?
a. Conference Room c. Visitor's Chair
I b. T&B d.
315. Which will you not provide a secretarial position?
c. File Drawer
I a. Side table
b. Desk d. Executive Chair
316. For a Commercial Establishment, what is the maximum height of Curtain Walls?
a. 4m
I b.2m
c.3m
d.
3 17 - Given a 14-storey structure, what is the incremental setba ck of the building from the 9
th
I Floor? 1.17m x 5-= 5.85front = Osides & rear 7 x .3 =2.1from sides and rear p.14-1
Setbacks
318. What is the Front Incremental Setback at the 4 th Floor?
I a. 1.17
b. 3.51
c. Answer not among the choices
d. 0.00
319. What is the Front Incremental Setback at the 9th Floor?
I a. 0.00
b. 2.34
c. 3.51
d. Answer not among the choices
320. What is the Front Incremental Setback at the 10th Floor?
a. 1.17 c. 0.30
b. 3.51 d. Answer not among the choices
321. Areas that belong to AMBF
322 . Minimum USA for R-1 USA=Yl
323. Maxi mum ISA for R-1 ISA= Y2+Y3+Y4
324. NBC Rules 7 & 8 specially the Annotations
325. What is the TGFA of an R-1 inside lot?
a. 3 X 50% C. 3 X 70%
b . 3 x 60% d. 3 x 80%
326. What is the Occupant Load for a Conference Room?
a. 1.40 C. 22.30
b. 11. 10 d. 18.60
327. What is the maximum door leaf width?
C. 1.10
a. 0.75
b. 0.90 d. 1.20
328. Which of the following is not an ideal height of a door knob?
a. 0.82 m c. 1.02 m
b. 1.06 m d. 1.12 m
329. Stan dard hei ght for Lavatory
a. 0.90 c. 0.80
b. 1.70 d. 0.70
33 0. What w il l be t he best Roofing for an Industrial structure th at sits near a River?
a. Steel Deck c. Steel Roof
b. Con cret e Roof Deck d.
I ARDES. Part 1 Page 29 of 32
I 331 · What w ill be the best Roofi ng fo r a Residential structure th at sits near a River?
I a. St eep Aluminum Roof

b. Slightly Steep Gable Roof
c. Roof Deck
d.
332. For a m assive factory structure, what should be t he prominent architectural. 'lines' to be
I seen from t h e street?
a. Vertical c. Diagon al
b. Horizontal d. Cu rves
I 333 . What should be t he ideal treatment for the fac;:ade of the Warehouse?
a. Glass and Concrete c. More on Concrete and Less Glass
I b. More on Steel d. Concrete and some Plastic

33 4. If the project site is located in a lake, what should be the ideal roofing material?
a. Concrete (deck) c. Asphalt Shingles
I b. Long Span G.I d.

335. For a Cottage near the sea, which roofing is preferred?
a. Polyca rbonate c. Aluminum
I b. G.I. Sheet d . Gl ass

336. For a Beach Resort House in Batangas, which would you use for the truss?
a. Angle Bar c. Bamboo
I b. Square Tube d.
337. Zoning Map- a device of land use planning used by local governments; the practice of
designating permitted uses of land based on mapped zones which separate one set of land
uses from another.
338. Cadastral Map a map showing the boundaries and ownership of land parcels. Some
cadastral maps show additional details, such as survey district names, unique identifying
numbers for parcels, certificate of title numbers, positions of existing structures, section or
lot numbers and their respective areas, adjoining and adjacent street names, selected
boundary dimensions and references to prior maps.
339. Topographical Map- A map that indicates the topography of the ground, and
includes physical features such as rivers, woods and habitation.
Topography: a precise description of a place; a detailed graphic representation of
the surface features of a place or object; the features themselves (the terrain)
the surveying of the features
340. What is not included in Topographic Maps?
a. Elevation of Adjacent Buildings c. Natural and Man-made Features
b . Contou rs of Adj acent Lots d.
341. What type of pl an does the Sangguniang Panlungsod adopt?CLUP
342. What is a Lan d Use Map? shows the actual use/or the land at the present time.
343. What plan guides the design of.a structure?
a. CLUP c. Land Use
b . Zoning d.
344. W h at type of map guides the planning and design of structures in a municipality?
a. Zoning c. CLUP
b. Land Use . d.
345 . In Housin g Design, what would be the prim ary consideration?
a. Orie ntation c.
b . Density d.
346. Pag-aralan ang anthro pomet rics... dito ak o di nugo sa co m putation eh ... hehe
e pag co ~ fo rtab!e na_natul~g ano size ( ~aki check u_n g kay faj ardo at AGS .. try na rin nila pag
m ay Interi or design sil ang fri en ds na reviewer may size din ng anthro dun Fil ipi no b d )
• · k d ase ...
34 7_ ano daw ang 1sa sa pin a aunang. apat gawin ng isang arkitecto ... ito 3-4 t imes lumabas
pareh as na tano ng parehas na choice .... Ar plann ing, space plan nin g, sit e pla .
· · d" b' · nnmg, research
(iba ang term na ginam1t 1to pe ro in 1gay nya ung exp lanat ion obviou
. .. . . . .. s1Y un g research ang
pm ilt ko .. kas 1ana lysis ko dyan d1 ka pwede m agpl ano hanggat di mo al . .
.· k am cnten a especia lly
zo ning, rules an d regu Iatlo ns nun g ung san mo gagawin ung proJ·ect ) · '
.... sa exam
I ARDES. Part l Page 30 of 32
I
I 34
Pinadikdiktikan na dapat sumunod sa law ... isa pang punto yun ng rule 7 and 8 kaya andyan
van na Pinagdid ikdikan nila ngaun ...
8. pa rking space ng r1,c1 ect .. nakasulat
3 49. ung bubong na steep lumabas na naman ... ito mga pampagulo sa exam multi storey ang
I usapan tapos biglang steep roof sa forest ... kailangan talaga presence of mind .. pag ito naman
pinakawalan pa eh ewan ko na lang ...
I 350. maging mapagmasid sa question may questions sya dito ang answer nasa book as in un na
un ang sagot ... see the drawing/ illustration for maca, isa, usa ... if you are not keen ..
magcocompute ka .. (na ginawa ko ..hehe) pero pag binalikan mo marerealize mo na kung ano
I ang nasusulat un ang sagot ..

351. ung ISA= ung nasasulat sa book
352. ung USA= ung nakasulat ulit sa book
I 3 53. ung MACA ganun din .. wala kang kailangan i-compute .. sabi nga ni brad pit .. basa!
354. pina identify ang classification ng GOCC..
355. ano ang PSO ng R1 tignan mo kung computation by setback o ung nasusulat ang dapat na
J isagot mo pero most likely kung ano nakasulat un ang sagot pipili ka lang kung ung sa 7 ba o
ung sa 8 basahin ng mabuti ang tanong give away yan pag naintindihan ang tanong
356 .. accdg sa class nun gocc ano ang ambf
ti 357. ano naman ang pso tandaan di kailangn magcompute nasa book ang sago.t-..
358. ano naman daw ung FLAR
359. ano ang parking reqt.
Cl 360. GFA ... nakasulat yan ... pag mali ang identification mo sa una nyan automatic 4-5 ang sablay
mo
ti
361. roof deck, metal, gi sht, steel...etc ... basic knowledge lang po pero nadiscuss naman po ito
sa review .. kailangan lang talaga maging attentive ung reviewees at syempre experience and
common sense na rin langang labanan dyan .... Ung iba talaga galing na rin sa refresher at
review ... ilan be ses itinanong pero iba ibang sitwasyon.kaya nga minsan wala na sa hulog ung
ti tanong
362. Which is not an. Architectural Interior element?
tJ a. Suspended Slab Soffit

b. Floor
c. Wall
d. Furnishings
... pinagpilian ko lang dyan ung suspended slab soffit at furnishing ... na-praning ako alam ko
II soffit ang sagot .. pero papano kung ung suspension na un eh sa stairs ... parang ung pilian na
microwave ang sagot un ang naging basis ko sa pagsagot kailangan pa rin pag isipan minsan
ung imposibleng sagot ang dapat piliin eh ... kailangan isipin talaga ... furnishing pinili ko dito
tJl eh ... kasi lahat part ng building eh .. (wall floor soffit)

363 . lighting .... Anon g dapat na ilaw sa ganitong space .
364. Alamin differences ng Zoning, Land Use, Ordinance, building code
iii 365. ano naman d aw orientation r:ig rrow facing the prop .... If the prop is facing south
366. incremental setback ... again nakasulat ung 1.17 un lang ang sagot no computation needed
-
367. What type of Roof is best for a Government Building situated in a forested area?
a. High-pitched c. Flat
b. Low- Pitc.h ed d.
-
Note: this q uestion is always repeated but with different choices. Understand the
answers, DO NOT memorize. Same goes for other items in Refresher Notes. same
questions but different answers. Analyze the choices given and look for KEY WORDS in
-
the qu estions or situations given .
368. What typ e of (R-1) foundation should be used if the adjacent lot is sloping upwards?
a. Reta inin g W all c. Trapezoidal
--
b . Isolated d.
36 9, Und er th e NBCP, which is the mi nimum corridor width of an R-1 development?
a. 1.10 C. 1.50
b. 1. 20 d . 1.80
Jj
I ARDES. Part l
Page 31 of 32
I
370 ·
I . On a swampy area, what type of soil should the foundation rest on?
a. Hard to very hard
b. Very soft to soft
c. Medium to ...
d.
37
l 1. Assuming the site will be on a converted rice field, on what soil must the foundation rest?
a. Soft c. Hard
b . Medium d. Very Hard
I 3
72 . Assuming the site will be on a flood plain, on what soil must the foundation rest?
a. Soft c. Hard
b. Medium d. Very Hard
I 7
3 3 _ Assuming the site will be on Adobe soil, what foundation w ill you use?
a. Bored Pile c. Isolated Footing
b. Sheet Pile d. Footings w ith Ti e Beams
I 374. A form of Driven Piles that use thin interlocking sheets of steel to form a barrier that
protects the adjacent lot against disturbance & potential damage?
a. Bored Pile c. Isolated Footing
r b. Sheet Pile d. Footing with Tie Beams
375 . Which presents the MOST disturbance to neighboring lots?
a. Bored Pile c. Isolated Footi ng
I b. Pile Driving d. Footing with Tie Beams
376. On an ordin ary site, where should the foundation rest? hard to very hard
I 377. On a site located in Pasig City near the Marikina Fault Line, where should the foundation
rest ON PllES/SM AWAY FROM FAUlT llNE
378. What type of Foundation should be used so that the construction would not affect the
adjacent structures?
I a. Pile/ Caisson
b . Strip Footing
c. Sheet Pile
d.
I 379. Which should you use to minimize disturbance to adjoining properties?

a. Bored Piles
b. Driven Pi le s
c.
d.
I 380. Sizes of Furnitures.

381. A 4sqm wa ll is to be covered with tiles. If you will use 0.30m x 0.30m tiles, how many will
be needed? 4.00/(.30x.30) = 4.00/.09 = 44.44 = 45 tiles
I 3.8 2. A building is FU NCTIONAL if

a. The building has all the necessary spaces
b. There is no Dead Space
c. The bu ild ing's Form follows Function
d.
383. Wh at ki nd of Tre atment should best fit the Fac;ade of a Garment Factory?
a. More on Concrete with less Glass and Steel
b . More on Glass and Steel with less Concrete
c. Comb ination of Concrete and Plastic
d . More on Steel
384. What kind _of Treatme nt should best fit the Fac;ade of a Government Office Building?
a. More on Concrete with less Glass and Steel
b. More on Glass and Steel with less Concrete
c. Comb ination of Concrete and Plastic
d . More on Steel
38 5_ The project is a Facto ry fronting Riverside. Wh at kind of Roofing should you use?steel
deck/metal deck
386 _ Which of t he follow ing Structural Element s can be erected along a Side or Rear Pro pert
Line if the propert y is resting on relatively flat terrain ? y
a. Firewall s and Per imeter Wa ll s c. End Wall
b. Retainin g W oll d. Zocalo Wall
3'19
l ARDES. Part 1 .
Page 32 of 32
7
I
I A Proposed Medium-Rise Apartment Building
387
l - Project 2. Using the maximum Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA) and the Build ing
Height Limit (BHL) that are allowed for the Project under the NBCP, what shall be
the resultant TG FA per floor (in square meters)?
I Note : To arrive at the answer, the examinee must determine the total lot area (TLA) from
th
e '.nformation given in the Project description, then make use of table/s from the 2004
Revised IRR of P. D. No. 1096/ NBCP (open books) and finally use a simple calculator.
I a. 2,666
b. 4,222
C. 5,444
Actual Computation is 4,800
Since its NOT among the choices given, the answer is
I d. 3,888 4,222
A Proposed 4-Storey Condominium Pro ject
I 388. Wh ich Style would yo u recommend for this building?

a. Neo-cla ssical c. International Style
b. Modern d. Stylized Classical
I 389. · What line s should be prominent for this building?
a. Horizontal
b. Diagonal
c. Vertical
I
m
s
e STREET CROSS SECTION
WARNING!!!
no sca le
I
DO NOT Share t his material with your friends. Although PRC denies that there is a QUOTA system, Statistics
show otherwise. We cannot independently verity this as fact but ONE thing Is SURE- this is your ADVANTAGE
over fellow·examinees. Sharing t his with others would mean that in effect you are LOWERING your chance of
PASSING o r TOPPING the exams. You may only SHARE this AFTER the exams so it won't have an effect on you .
I NOTE:
l. All the given questions during the actual exams will be composed of2-4 sentences at the very least.
jl Brush up on your reading comprehension and vocabulary.
2. Some words w i 11 be inserted in the question just to confuse you.
3. Don't rush, there 's enough time given for you to fini sh the e.xams. Don' t he pressured by the proctors or
by th ose who fi nish early . . . . . ·
4. If possi ble, draw the problems .. . it wi ll help you visualize and refresh your mind
5 . Some of the choices arc ALL correct. It's like ... Good, Better and Best. Run thru all the choices and
choose the Best a 11swer.
6. If you really don' t kno w the answer, elim inate the choices which you feel are WRONG, then choose
from the remainfog
7 . Many .of the q uestions are just repeated, they are just trying to test if you really k now the.answer. Stick
J to your answers .. . h' s all or nolhmg.. . , . . .. .

8 _ Some of the quesrions are repealed BU~ w~th d1flere_nt c~o1ce.,,. Be careful, remember. .. Good, Better
d Best. Yo ur answer shou ld be the BES r g 1vc11 the s1tuat1on and cho ices.
an_C,OD 13Jess, Good luck a,1 d sei: you alt he 1·est1mo111al
· · and Onthtaking ©
9
F tllc)s ., who wish t'.> atte nd J PT's Te~ti m. o.nial Dinner and Award inn of PlacJtics / C . - - .
·r or otcl
·v . • . <:·
,crs and 1•a~:..crs. h.1n clly n:g 1s tcr wnh us by text rng yo ur na m e @il 0i) I 7 :,-3
1,.;r1111cates t or
opn - 53347 ()r 09 49-591637!
350
a
I
ARDES Part 2 .
Page 1 of 28
I PART2 Republic of the Philippines
Lecture
'l This is it pancit
Professional Regulation Commission (PRC)
Professional Regulatory Board of ARCHITECTURE (PRBoA)
Licensure Examination for Architects (LEA)
l ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN AND SITE PLANN IN G

A. PROJECT TITLE:
1,
Proposed Lawyer's House (R1)
I B. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:
I A prominent husband and wife team of lawyers with two sons aged 14 and 16 i_s erectin_g
a one-storey residence on a 1,000 sqm. through lot (Rl) in a low density area in Makat,
City. The lot has a 2% slope towards a 14m-wide RROW on the west side and has a 24-
meter frontage. The husband intends to work at home so that he can spend more time
I with his family. Observe proper setbacks.
The following are the features of the house:
I • Office Library = 35.00 sqm

• Bedroom with T&B for sons = 94 .00 sqm
• Master Bedroom with T&B = 66-68 sqm (NE)
I • living Room = 7m x 12m (SW)

• Foyer =Sm x Sm
• Dining/Kitchen = 84 sqm (near Carport)
• Service/Maid's Room = 47sqrn
I • Carport (for 4 cars) abutting a 12m (firewall) perimeter wall at the north side; 6m
driveway
I Note: According to students who took the exam, firewall was given.
However, for R-1, firewalls are NOT allowed. Hence, this was changed to
"perimeter wall."
I 1. What is the building footprint if the owner used the minimum required setbacks,
but increased one side setback to 6m in order to accommodate the carport?
a. 522.72 sqm c. 892.50 sqm
I b. 653.40 sqm d. 369.28 sqm
2. What is the PSO of the project based on the setbacks used in the previous item?
I a . 55%
b. 60%
c. 50%
d . 52%
-p 3 . What is the ma ximum allowable ISA based on the setbacks used in item #1?
a. 30.00%
b. 20.00%
C. 26.00%
d. 36.92%
4. What is th e m inim um required USA based on the setbacks used in item #l?
a. 15.00% c. 10.00% ·
J s.
b. 10.80% d . 22.00%
What is th e TOSL of t he project, based on the setbacks used in item ?

a . 48 .00% C. 36.92% #l.
''
b. 40.80% d. 52. 72 %
3JJ
' Pagel of 28
ARDEs Part 2 Page 2 of 28
6
- What is the CA for the project, assuming that th e 0 wner maximized the ISA
allowance from the NBC?
a. 74.00% c. 82.00%
b. 78.00% d. 72.00%
7 • What is the FLAR designation for this project, according to the NBC?
a. 1.50 C. 1.80
b. 2.10 d. 1.60
8. What is the BHL fo r this project?

a. 10.00 rn C. 9.00 m
b. 15.00 m d . 8.10 m
9. What is the maximum allowable GFA for the project?

t a. 2,100 sqm
b. 1,800 sqm
c. 1,500 sqm
d. 1,600 sqm
[ 10.What is the m aximum allowable TGFA for the project, based on the GFA?
a. 2,250 sqrn c. 2,400 sqm
b. 2,100 sqm d . 2,242 sqm
I 11.For Group A dwellings, the minimum live load for design consideration at the first
floor shall be
I a. 100 kg/sqm
b. 150 kg/sqm
c. 200 kg/sqm
d. 250 kg/sqm
I 12.For Group A d welli ngs, the minimum live load for design consideration at the
second floo r shall be
c. 100 kg/sqm c. 200 kg/sqm
d. 150 kg/sqm
I d. 250 kg/sqm
13. What is the m eaning of the acronym MACA?

a. Maximum All owable Construction Area c. Maximum Area for Construction
I All owed
b. Minimum Allowabl e Construction Area d. Minimum Area for Construction
Allowed
I 14.Assuming a fl at hori zontal soffit, estimate the number of plywood for the eaves?
a. 30 pcs c. 40 pcs
I b. 36 pcs d. 43 pcs
15.How much Paint is needed for the final coat of the eaves, assuming 2 gals per
sq.m.?
a. 62 gals c. 186 gals
b. 124 ga ls d. 248 gals
16. What is the length of t he Gutter?
17.Assum ing 6" sla b, estimate the Vol ume of Concrete for the Slab.
a. 77 cu.m. c. 8 5 cu. m.
b. 79 cu .m. d. 98 cu.m.
18. Wh at is th e weight of Concrete for the Slab?

a. 179,000 kg c. 189,000 kg
b. 185,000 kg d. 20 3,00 0 kg
152. Page 2 of 28
l
ARDES Part 2 Page 3 of 28
I 19
·f you wil l use Class A
· How many bags of cement wil l be ut ilized for t he 5 1a b 1
concrete?
I a. 474 bags
b. 5 10 bags
c. 588 bags
d. 711 bags
l 2
0 . What is the t otal w eight of Steel in the Slab assuming 40cm distance between bars?
a. 1,800 kg c. 2,600 kg
l b. 2, 20 0 kg d . 3,000 kg
21.How many 30 x 60 Tiles will be needed for the Living , Dining and Foyer?
a. 437 pcs c. 1,073 pcs
I b. 839 pcs d . 2,145 pcs
I 22. What is the weig ht of a 250X450 Girder/Beam above the Foyer using 6- 16mm m ain
bars w ith 3-l0mm stirrups?
a. 1,425 kg
I b. 5,675 kg c. 7,100 kg
d. 11,600 kg
23 .If a portion of t he li vi ng Room has a cl ear distance of 3.00m between columns and
I floor to ceil ing height is 2. 70m, compute for t he number of 6" CHB needed for the
wa ll if y ou include 5% for wastage .
a. 102 blks
c. 115 blks
I b. 107 blks
d.
24 .Considering t he sam e situation in t he preced ing number, how much sand w ill you
I a.
use for block layi ng assuming no wastage.
b. c. d.
I 25 .What is the t otal length of Pipe going to the public sewer?

a. b. c. d.
26.If the fence is 1. 2m high , how many gallons of paint will be used for 2 coatings of
m ONE side assu m ing coverage is 20sqm/gal for the first coating and 30sqm/gal for
t he second coati ng ?
a. b. C.
m 27 .How many 16" x 16" til es will be used in the Foyer?
d.
a . 60 pcs c. 157 pcs
'
b. 61 pcs d.
28. Ho w m any Vinyl Tiles will you use for the Servi ce/Maid's Room?
a. b. c. d.
29 .What ~pe of Flooring material becomes very sl i~pery when dust or sand is present?
a. Gra nite c. Ceramic
b. Vinyl d.
30.lt covers t he joint b~tween t wo flooring materia ls and prov ides weather r t .
at an ext eri or door. P o ectIon
a. Mu llion c. Threshold
b. Astraga l d. Doorm at
3 1. Given clea r distance betwe en co lum ns ond fl oor to ceil ing hei ht
r,u m ber of CHP, nee<.J ed for th e wall. g ' com pute f or the
a. c.
b.
rl .
r1 isi Page 3 of 28
v
ARDES Part2 Page4 of28
32.What do you call a window on a roof?

a. Dormer Window c. Bay Window
b. Picture Window d. Oriel Window
33.In a tropical country, which of the following would be the best window?
a. Awning c. Sliding
b. Casement d. Jalousie
34.Where do you orient the small windows?
a. S & E c. N & S
b. E & W d. N & E
35.0ne of the client of the couple is a prestigious hospital in the Makati area: They
learned from their client that they used a Paint manufactured by Boysen m the
interior of their hospital because of its anti-microbial properties. It is also the first
paint in the world to contain Teflon. This revolutionary product combines the
aesthetic elegance of flat paint with the washability of glossy paint. It is protects
l against bacteria, mold and fungus. What is this paint?
a. Wallguard c. Permacoat
b. Virtuoso Silk Touch d. Healthy Home
[ 36.In Feng Shui, a house at a T-junction is not good because the Chi coming directly
from the road is rushing too strong towards the house and in most cases negatively
affects the energy of the house. In many cases you can feel how the energy
literally hits the house with a sharp, aggressive Sha Chi energy. In feng shui, the
traffic on the road is often compared to the flow of the river. The stronger the
traffic, the stronger the river flow. Disregarding, feng shui, why is it frowned upon
l for houses to be directly at the T-junction?
a. It is Bad Luck c. It has no Privacy
b. It is Prone to Accident d. It is Noisy
I 37.A device for protecting electrical appliances from lightning

a . Voltage Regulator
b. Lightning Arrester
c. Lightning Regulator
d. UPS
38.Which of the following is not part of the Interior
I a.
b.
Interior trim
Soffit
c.
d.
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed QUADRUPLEX cs-sets) for Executive Employees

A company has decided to provide Housing for 20 of its employees by erecting s
sets of 1- Storey Quadruplexes on its 2,400sqm lot in Quezon City. The lot, with a 2%
I slope, is to be divided equally with 10 units at the North Side and another 10 units at the
South side. The lot comprises One (1) rectangular block with the South side measuring
90m. RROW on all sides is 12m. Each division will be 120sqm or 480sqm per Quadruplex.
Features:
2- Bedroom
Living/Dining Room
Kitchen
Common Toilet
court/Patio with Common Firewalls between 4 units
Unroofed Carport
Laundry Area at the back
Design Objective:
Proper Ventilation
Project will be a model for future residential units in the area
39 .An occupied space between building lines and lot lines other than a yard· free
and unobstructed by appendages from the ground upward. ' ' open
a. Atrium c. Dispersal Area
b. Court d. Exit Passageway
351/ Page 4of28

• ARDES Part2 Page5of28
I
I 40.How many floors above established grade is allowed for this kind _of development?
41.Which Rule under the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP prescnbes that for each
type of building use/occupancy, the Allowable Maxi~u~ Total Gross Floor Area
I (TGFA) shall be the product of the Building Height L1m1t (BHL) and the Allowable
Maximum Building Footprint (AMBF)?
a. Rule VIII c. Rule VI
I b. Rule VII d. Rule IX

42.The ceiling of the square dining area with an 11.0 ft. side has a 1.0 ft recessed
~eiling in the middle measuring 7.0 ft. x 7.0 ft. How much 2"X2" dimension lumber
I 1s needed if the ceiling is framed equally@ 1.0 ft. O.C.B.W.?

a. 88 bd .ft.
b. 98 bd.ft.
c. 107 bd.ft.
d. 122 bd.ft.
I 43.How much Plywood is needed to cover the whole ceiling?

a. 3 pcs
b. 4 pcs
c. 5 pcs
d. 6 pcs
I 44.If the partition wall between two units is a.om, and the wall height is 3.0m at the
end and 6.0m at the middle, how many 6" CHB is needed?
a. 300 pcs c. 600 pcs
b. 45_ 0 pcs d. 750 pcs
r 45.If the said wall in the previous number is instead a 12cm-thick solid concrete, what
is the weight of the concrete?
a. 6,912 kg c. 10,368 kg
b. 8,640 kg d. 12,960 kg
46.If the said solid concrete wall in the previous question is to be painted on all
surfaces, what is the area of coverage?
a. 24.00 sq.m. c. 48.00 sq.m.
b. 37.00 sq.m. d. 74.00 sq.m.
47.If, in the said wall in the previous number, a G.I. sheet flashing shall be installed on
the sloping edges with 9cm sleeves on both sides, how many 3ft. by 6ft. G.I. Sheet
is needed?
a. 1 C. 3
b. 2 d.4
48.How much paint is needed (using 2 sq.m./gal coverage) to paint the area of
coverage as determined in the previous situation?
a. 40 gals c. 54 gals
b. 48 gals d. 100 gals
49.Estimate the Tiles
a. b. c. d.
SO.How many square meters of roof truss needed in the project if there is 1.2 meters
eaves surrounding the building
a. b. c. d.
51.Ideal size of a Dining Table for 4 persons
52. What is the ideal height of a Dining table?
a. 0.60m b. 0. 75m c.
53.Size of a comfortable Dining Chair
d.
a. 0.50 x 0.50 b. 0.45 x 0.45 c. d.
54.Usually mounted on a wall, it houses one or more receptacles at which current is
taken to supply an electric device or appliances.
a. Terminal c. CATV Outlet
b. Convenience Outlet d. Switch
55.What is the color coding of a Ground Wire?
a. Red b. White c. Blue
56.Best way to let hot air escape. d. Green
a. Plenum c.
b. Exhaust Fan near the ceiling d.
57.How many chambers does a Septic Tank have?
a. 1 b. 2 c. 3
ass
d. 4
Page 5 of28
j
Page 6of 28
ARDES Part 2 .
I 58 .A concrete or masonry retaining wall at the inlet of a drain or culvert that protects
th e c!rea around the inlet from scour and also direct the channel flow.
I a. Wing Wall
b. End Wall
c. Fire Wall
d. Trombe Wall
59 .Under the NBCP, what is the minimum width of the court of a Quadruplex
I a. 2.S0m
b. 2.00m
c. 1.50m
d. 1.30m
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Residential Condominium (R3)
. A pro~erty developer is erecting a 4-storey residential condominium at its property

I inQue~on City. The lot is 1,040sqm in area and faces south with a 3% slope towards a
10m-w,~e RROW and has a 40m frontage. The building shall have 13 units per floor with
each unit occupying about 33-34 sqm. The least dimension for each unit will be 4.80m. A
I 200sqm party area will be located at the roof deck. Observe proper setbacks.
Features:
52. Laundry/Drying Cages of+/- 3.00 sqm with a least dimension of 1.20m
I 33-34 sqm Front Lobby w/ Stairs (least Dimension 4.80m)

2m wide Corridor w/ Fire Escape at both ends at each floor
Parking Space at front
I Design objective: Maximize profit.
60.What is the AMBF for the project?

a. 832 sqm c. 576 sqm
I b. 676 sqm d. 728 sqm
61.What is the maximum allowable PSO according to Table 8.1 of the NBC?
I a. 55%
b. 65%
c. 70%
d. 80%
I 62. What is the maximum allowable ISA for the Project?

a. 30% c. 20%
b. 15% d. 10%
I 63.What is the minimum required USA for the Project?
a. 15% c. 25%
I b. 10% d. 30%
64. What is the minimum required TOSL of the Project?
I a. 40%
b. 45%
C. 55%
d. 60%
65. What is the MACA for the project?

I a. 85%
b. 80%
C. 75%
d. 70%
66. What is the FLARmax for the project?

a. 9 .00 c. 9.00
b . 34.00 d. 8.10
67.What is the BHL for the project?

a. 27 m c. 36 m
b. 30 m d.48 m
- Page 6 of28
ARDES Part2 Page 7 of28
68 · What is the maximum allowable TGFA for the project, based on setback
requirements?
a. 3,100 sqm c. 2,844 sqm
b. 2,944 sqm d. 2,996 sqm
69. What is the TGFA using multiplier on table VII.G.2 of the Rule 7 IRR of the National
Building Code?
a. 9,984.00 sqm c. 3,366.83 sqm
b. 3,412.80 sqm d. 3,466.83 sqm
70.How many floors above established grade is allowed for this kind of development?
71.Which Section under Rule VII of the 2004 Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP deals with
parking?
a. Sec. 706 c. Sec. 708
b. Sec. 707 d. Sec. 709
72.A common rule of thumb in determining the estimated number of elevators during
the initial design process for the design of condominiums.
a. 1:60 units c. 1:100 units
b. 1 :80 units d.
73.If catch basin starts from the rear corner of the building at both sides, and
traverses up to property line abutting the RROW, what is the linear meter of storm
drain needed for the project?
a. 24 meters c. 48 meters
b. 32 meters d. 66 meters
74.Using the same situation in the previous number and disregarding the dimension of
the catch basins, how many catch basins will you construct if the distance O.C.
I between catch basins is 3 meters.
A. PROJECT TITLE:
I Proposed Residential Condominium (RS)
B. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM:
I A residential condominium will be constructed on a 1,500 sqm lot in Quezon City. It

wil l be 12 stories high and will have an open court, 20m x 10m (focal point) in the middle.
Each floor will have 8 units with each unit having a depth of 7m. Of the 8-units, 4 will be
I 84 sqm each and the remaining 4 units will be 70 sqm each. There will be a total of 88
units. Two (2) basement levels will serve as parking. The lot is facing west with a 2%
slope towards a 20m-wide RROW. There is a 1.20m-wide sidewalk at the front side. The
lot has a 42m frontage. The structure must be modern yet simple. Observe proper
I setbacks.
75.What is the building footprint resulting from the minimum required setbacks and
I the open court in the middle?
a. 1,050 sqm
.
c. 962 .56 sqm
b. 1,200 sqm · d. 761.56 sqm
I 76. What is the PSO of the project based on the previous item?
a. 70% C. 51%
b. 80% d. 64%
I 77 .What is the maximum allowable ISA of the Project?
a. 20%
b. 10%
c. 15%
d. 30%
l l8. What is t he USA of the project, including the courtyard and assum·
owner maximized the ISA allowance from the NBC?
a. 10% C. 29%
th
mg at the
b. 24% d. 26%
J
1
I ARDES Part 2 Page 8 of 28
I 79
-What is the TOSL of the project, including the courtyard?
a. 30% c. 44%
b. 34% d. 49%
SO.What is the CA for the project, assuming that the owner maximized the ISA
allowance from the NBC?
a. 71% c. 66%
b. 61% d. 81%
Bl.What is the RANGE of the FLAR for the Project?
a. 7 . 10 to 8.10 c. 3.60 to 9.00
b. 6.00 to 9.00 d. 6.00 to 18.00
82 · What is the RANGE of the BHL for the Project?
a. 10.00m to 30 .00m c. 36.00m to 54.00 m
b. 10.00m to 15.00m d. 36.00m to 180.00m
8 3.How many floors above established grade is allowed for this kind of development?
12 to 18 floors
84. What is the TGFA of the Project based on the building footprint (taking into
consideration the courtyard)?
a . 9,138.72 sqm c. 9,000.00 sqm
b. 13,500.00 sqm d. 11,538.72 sqm
85 .What is the maximum TGFA based on the incremental setbacks rule alone?
a. 21,600.00 sqm c. 9,629.37 sqm
b. 7,732.59 sqm d. 14,400.00 sqm
86.A type of wood product that is made out of wood particles. It includes Particle
Board, MDF and Hardboard. It is heavily used in the furniture industry and a veneer
of wood is usually glued onto it to give it the appearance of conventional wood.
a. Plywood c. Fiberboard
b. Lawanit d. FICEM
87.If you decide to use Shingles, which will you recommend for your roof sheathing?
a. Ficem board c. G.I. Sheet
b. Marine Plywood d. Ordinary Plywood
88. For the 84sqm unit (neglecting partitions), how much T-Runner will you use?
89.In a building, what do you call a room for leasing that has no Kitchen?
a. Apartment c. Hotel
b. Condominium d.
90. What is the size of a King Size Bed?
91.What is the size of a Queen Size Bed?
92. I t is a small door/panel used to hide and give access to valves which are unsightly
a. Entry Panel c. Access Panel
b. Va lve Door d. Valve Access
93.A cabinet sink inside the comfort room, built below or around a bathroom sink,
primarily to hide exposed pipes. _ _
a. Medicine Cabinet c. Laundry Smk Cabinet
b. Vanity Sink Cabinet d. Counter
94.An easily bent electrical conduit made of plastic used for the protection and routing
of electrical w iring.
a. Galvanized Rigid Conduit c. Flexible PVC Pipe
b. Electrica l Metallic Tubing d. Flexible Hose
95 .A form of Indirect Lighting built into ledges, recesses, or valences in a ceiling or
high on the walls of a room. It directs light up towards the ceiling and down
adj acent wa lls. . . . .
a. Rope Lighting c. I~d1r~ct ~1ghtmg Fixtures
b. Cove Lighting d. Pm Lighting
96. What do you ca ll a Scenic but Environmentally Critical Area?
a. Tourist Spot c. Environmental Preserve
b. Cultural Heritage d.
158 Page 8 of28

Page 9of28
ARDES Part 2
A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Car Repair Shop

A businessman has decided to build on his vacant 2,400 sqm lot a car repair shop
(the "Project") to take advantage of the busy thoroughfare passing along the property•

. The project site, located in Caloocan City, is a rectangular inside lot with a 40.0 m.
wide fron~age facing north and sloping down 1.5% towards a 14.0 m. RROW. The
prop~rty Is <:lassified as Industrial (Zone I-1) under a zoning ordinance and Building
Official specifically prescribes a 6.0 m. front setback for the property.
. Th~ concluded layout of the structure provides for an 8-meter wide unroofed
driveway m t_h~ !11iddle to separate the east wing and from the west wing. Each wing shall
have three d1v1s1ons and shall have the following areas:
East Wing
a. 168.0 sqm. Receiving area/parking for cars to be repaired near the entrance
b. 168.0 sqm. Area for body repair and upholstery section
c. 168.0 sqm. Locker and rest area with toilet/shower facilities, and storage portion
West Wing
a. 168.0 sqm. Office/reception area with kitchenette, toilet, and small storage for
car parts
b. 168.0 sqm. Mechanical/electrical area
c. 168.0 sqm. Temporary parking
As per the owner's requirement, the whole facility must be able to accommodate 18
cars at any given time.
97.What is the minimum side setback required for the project?
a. 2.00 m. c. 4.00 m.
b. 3.00 m. d. 6.00 m.
98. What is the depth of the lot?
a. 30.00 m. c. 60.00 m.
b. 40.00 m. d. 80.00 m.
I 99. As per NBCP, what is the minimum rear setback?

a. 2.00 m. c. 5.00 m.
b. 3.00 m. d. 6.00 m.
I 100. Determine the AMBF.

101. What is the maximum allowable PSO?
a. 60 c. 75
I b. 70%
102. What is the PSO (actual)?
103. What is the maximum allowable ISA?
d . 80
a. 10 c. 20
I b. 15
104. What is the minimum USA?
d. 30
C. 20
a. 10 d. 30
b. 15
105. What is the minimum required TOSL?
106. What is the MACA?
107. What is the applicable FLAR for the project according the NBC?
108. What is the BHL for the project?
109. What is the maximum allowable GFA based on the FLAR?
. What is the maximum all?wable TGFA based on the maximum allowable GFA?
110
11
1. What is the length of drainage?
a. 30.00 m.
b. 40.00 m.
c. 50.00 m.
d. 60.00 m.
,s, ·
Page 9 of28
I
ARDESPart2 Page 10of28
I 112
- What is the appropriate roofing for this facility? .
a.G.L roof on steel truss c. Aspha lt shingle on plywood sheath rng
b. Tile r~of on G.I. sheathing d. Concrete roof deck
1 13. What 1s the floor volume using 6" concrete slab?
a. 130 cu.m. c. 260 cu.m.
b. 195 cu.m. d. 324 cu.m.
114 - How many cars can park perpendicular in front of the road?
a. 9 c. 15
b. 12 d. 18
115. What is the Ceiling height?
a. 2. 70 m. c. 3.60 m.
I b. 3.00 m. d.
116. How many rolls of insulation foam are needed for one wing?
a. 8 rolls c. 16 rolls
I b. 12 rolls d.
117. Twenty concrete columns of 0.25m x 0.40m dimension and 4.00 m. height shall
compose the structure. Each column has 1.2 depth and supported by a 2.00m X
I 2.00m X 0.30m footing. Home many 16-mm bars are needed for the columns?
a. 40 c. 120
b.80 d. 160 .
118. What is the total concrete volume requirement for the columns and footings?
a. 9 cu.m. c. 27 cu.m.
b. 18 cu.m. d. 36 cu.m.
I 119. How many bags of cement is needed using Class AA mixture?

a. 110 bags
b. 220 bags
c. 330 bags
d. 440 bags
I 120. What is the weight of concrete?

a. 1,800 kg
b. 2,400 kg
c. 3,000 psi
d. 7,850 kg
121. What is the usual GRADE of a 10mm dia Rebar?
I a. 33
b. 40
c. 60
d.75
122. What is the usual GRADE of a 16mm dia Rebar?
I a. 33
b. 40
c. 60
d. 75
123. What is the "usual" GRADE of Weldable Steel Bars?
I a. 33
b. 40
c. 60
d. 75
124. Medium & High-rise structures use High-Tensile Grade Rebars which is also
I classified as GRADE
a. 33
b. 40
c. 60
d. 75
I 125. Structural Grade Rebars are used for

a. Low-rise Buildings
b. Medium-rise Structures
c. Medium & High-rise Structu res
d. Power Plants and the like
126. A GRADE 60 Rebar is equivalent to
a. PNS 230 c. PNS 415
b. PNS 275 · d. PNS 500
127 . These bars are not readily available and its production is usually on a per order
basis .
a. 33 C. 60
b. 40 d . 75
128 . T he owner has an available 4X8 polycarbonate sheets and he intends to use them
for the middle driveway roof. How many pieces shall he bring to the site?
a. 3 2 C. 96
b. 64 d . 124
360 Page 10of28

I
ARDES Part2
Page 11 of28
I 129
- The office division has a CHB wall enclosure 2.80 m. high. How much CHB is
needed?
I a. 1,000 pcs c. 3,000 pcs
b, 2,000 pcs d.
13
I 0. For the CHB wall enclosure of the office division, using 10mm Reinforcement Bars
(6m length), how many pieces will be needed?
131. What is the weight, in kilograms, of the 10mm Reinforcement Bars used for the
I CHB wall enclosure of the office division?
l32. How many gallons is needed to paint the inside if the wall? Assume 2 coats.
a. 8 C. 12
b. 10 d.
I l33. How many boxes of Hornitex wood laminates are needed to cover 50% of the
office division area?
a. 25 boxes
I b. 50 boxes
c. 75 boxes
d. 100 boxes
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Medium-Rise Office Condominium Project
A developer has decided that its C-3 property (the "Project Site"), with a total lot area of one
I thousand three hundred and fifty square meters (1,350.0 sqm) and located in Pasig City shall host
an 8-storey office condominium building (the "Project").
The developer specifies the ground floor to be 25m x 24m, and that 11m x 24m at the east
I side be allotted for a commercial bank; and 6m will be for a driveway/ramp and 6m x 12m will be
for mechanical room/electrical room / storage located at the upper end of the ramp. Main entrance
is 8m. The lot is facing south towards a 20m RROW. The lot is sloping 3% to the rear area where a
shallow creek is located. From the 2 nd Floor to the ath Floor, there will be 6 office units ar.d common
toilets per floor. Provide stairs, elevators and hallways. Observe proper setbacks. It shall have a 3-
level Basement having 6m two-way ramp. A 7-slot parking space shall also be provided and
located at the front of the bank. Rear parking shall also be provided for a minimum of 3 to a
maximum of 16 tenants. ·
I C. PROJECT SITE FEATURES:
I. The Project Site is a rectangular inside lot with a creek easement at the rear. It is located along a
twenty (20.0) meter wide street i.e. the road right-of-way (RROW), with a thirty-one (31.0) meter
wide frontage facing the south.
65.
I 134. What is the building's actual footprint?
a. 945 sqm c. 1,147.50 sqm
b. 600 sqm d. 1,012.50 sqm
I 135. What is the actual PSO of the Project?
a. 80% c. 70%
I b. 44% d. 85%
136. What is the· difference between the actual PSO and the PSOmax in Table 8.1?
a. 36% c. 45%
b. 40% d. 55%
137. What is the maximum allowable ISA for the Project?

a. 20% C. 5%
b. 10% d. 15%
13 8. What is th e min im um req ui red USA, based on the actual PSO?

a. 5% C. 41%
b . 36% d. 38%
'" Page 11 of28

I ARDES Part 2 . Page 12of28
I
I 139 · What is the actual TOSL of the Project?
a. 25% c. 46%
b. 46% d. 56%
I 140. What is the construction area, assuming that the project maximized the allowable
ISA from the NBC?
I a. 64%
b. 55%
c. 59%
d. 54%
I 14 1. Which of the following produces the largest value as determined from actual site
analysis?
a. AMBF
b MACA c. TOSL
I . d. USA
MACA = PSOmax + ISAmax; PSOmax = AMBF
I 142. What is the maximum FLAR allowed for this project?

a. 3.00
b · 9 · 00
c. 34 . 00
d. 6.00
I 143. What is the BHL of the Project?

a. 10.00m to 15.00m c. 48.00m to 180.00m
b. 18.00m d. 48.00m to 135.00m
I 144. How many floors above established grade is allowed for this kind of development?
I 145. What is the TGFA (actual) of the Project?

a. 45,900 c. 3,360
b. 4,800 d. 12,150
I 146. What is the GFAmax for the building?
a. 4,050 c. 8,100
I b. 12,150
147. What is the TGFAmax of the Project?

d. 45,900
a. 30,375 sqm c. 6,960 sqm

I b. 7,200 sqm d. 28,350 sqm
148. How much is the minimum easement dimension for the project?
I a. 1.50 m
b. 3.00 m
c. 5.00 m
d. 6.00 m
I 149. If a spire is placed at the top of the building, what is the maximum height of the
spire if it is made of combustible materials?
a. 4m c. 8m
I b. 6m d. 10m
I l50. The storey of a building that is wholly or partly below ground is called a
a. cellar c. portico
b. storage d. basement .
I lSl. A room or set of rooms, used for storage, wholly or partly below ground beneath
a building is called a
c. portico
a. cellar d. basement
I
,.2
b. storage
I Page 12 of28
I ARDES Part 2 . Page 13 of28
I 152. If the commercial bank is made of 20cm thick solid co~crete 3-~ete~ high wall
enclosure with an aggregate opening of 60 sq.m., what Is the weight (m kg) of the
I concrete?
a. 73,200 c. 73,400
b. 73,300 d. 73,500 . .
l 153. Given the same situation in the previous number, how many gallons of paint are
needed to cover the vertical exterior of the bank enclosure? Assume 30 sq.m.
coverage per gallon.
I a. 5
b. 9
c. 18
d.45
154. How many 0.60m X 0.60 tiles will be needed for the commercial bank area?
I a. 732
b. 733
c. 734
d. 735
155. If the ground floor slab is a 20cm thick flat plate, how much sand is needed using
I Class AA concrete mixture?
a. 45 cu.m. c. 90 cu.m
b. 60 cu.m. d. 108 cu.m.
I 156. What is the weight of the ground floor slab reinforced concrete in kilograms?
a. 227, 000 c. 297,000
b. 297,000 d. 327,000
157. If 16mm Reinforcement Bars@ 0.30m o.c. B.W. will be used for the Ground
Floor Flat Plate, how many pieces will be needed?
a. 575 c. 660
I b. 625 d. 700
158. What is the weight of the steel bars in kilograms?
a. 5,750 c. 6,600
I b. 6,250 d. 7,000
159. Assuming that the GFA per floor from 2nd to 8 th Floor follows the given AMBF,
what would be the size of each office unit if 30% is allotted for common area on
I each floor?
a. 60 sq.m. c. 180 sq.m.
b. 70 sq.m. d. 420 sq.m.
1, 160. Given the same situation in the previous number, what would be the hallway area
if hallway width is 1.2m, and toilets, stairs, and elevator/s comprise 40% of the
common area?
I a. 100 sq.m.
b. 108 sq.m.
c. 120 sq.m.
d. 180 sq.m.
161. How many plywood is used for the hallway ceiling?
I a. 240
b. 265
c. 295
d. 440
162. If an office unit is 60 sq.m., how many boxes of 0.60 X 0.60 tiles will be needed?
a. 25 c. 42
I b . 32 d. 45
163. If incremental setback is applied on two sides of the building, what is the floor
area of the 8th Floor?
I a. 72 sq.m.
b. 96 sq.m. ·
c. 348 sq.m.
d. 528 sq.m.
164. Using the same situation in the previous number, compute the roof area for a 2-
I meter high gable roof mounted on the deck (9 th floor level) enclosed by parapet.
Assume 0.20m offset from the parapet for gutter provision .
a. C.
I b. d.
165. Using the same situation in the previous number, compute the weight of ste
1
angle (L2"X2"X5mmX6.0m) to _be used fo~ the truss with vertical webs at 1.0~
I a.
interva ls, and trusses at 2.0m intervals with end trusses attached to parapet.
c.
b. d.
I
Page 13 of28
I
I 16 6. How many ½" FICEM Boards will used for a 0.30m Fascia
. 7
·
I a.
b.
c.
d.
167. A vertical framing connected to a wall
l a. Furring
b. Wal l end framing
c. Wall Angle
d.
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed 5-Storey Government Building
I B. STATEM ENT OF THE PROBLEM:

On a 1,360sqm rectangular inside lot, a 5-Storey government building is to be
I erected. The lot is facing north and is sloping 3% towards a l2m RROW and has a 40m
Frontage. The building will house 7 branch offices. The lobby shall occupy 20% of the
AMBF, the main hall 67% and the remainder will be for service areas. Open parking for 30
I Cars will be at the western side and shall comprise 53% of the TLA.
NOTE: According to the previous board examinees, the actual problem was for a 7-
storey Government Building. However, based on the NBC pag e 90, BHL for Institutiona l is
15 m. Hence, we rectifi ed the design problem to address th is concern.
168. What is the AMBF of the Project?

a . 680 sqm c. 816 sqm
b. 972 sqm d. 952 sqm
169. What is the actual footprint of the project?
170. What is the maximum allowable PSO of the Project?

a. 50% C. 70%
b. 60% d. 80%
I\ 171. What is the PSO (act ual)?
172. What is the ISA (ma x ) of the Project?

I a. 5%
b . 10%
c. 15%
d. 20%
I 173. What is t he USA (mi n) of the Project?

a. 10% C. 20%
I b. 15% d . 30%
I 174. What is t he TOSL ( act ual) of the Project?

a. 52% C. 57 %
b . 67% d. 62%
I
175 . What is t he MACA7
a . 53 % C. 65%
b . 60% d. 70%
176. What is th e FLAR of t he Project ?

a. 2 . 50 C. 1.50
b. 3 .50 d . 3 .00
I
I
I
177. What is the BH L of the Project?
l a. 15.00m
b. 18.00m
c. 10.oom
d . 30.00m
I
178. How many floors above established grade is allowed for this kind of
I development?
I 179. What is the actual TGFA of the Project?

a. 3,400 sqm
b. 2,268 sqm
c. 2,040 sqm
d. 4,080 sqm
I 180. What is the TGFA max based on Table 7 .1?

a. 4 ,080 sqm c. 4,522 sqm
b. 5,100 sqm d. 4,250 sqm
A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed City Council Hall {GI) Project

l On a l,320sqm rectangular corner lot adjacent to the City Hall, the city council has
unanimously approved the construction of a building that will serve as the City Council
Hall. The lot is facing east and is sloping 3% towards a 20m RROW and has a frontage
I 33m. On the north side is another !Sm RROW. Once completed , it will include the offices
of the 14 councilors, a gallery that can accommodate 40 persons, a Councilor's Main Hall
at the Northwest corner (50% of AMBF), a Councilor's Lounge (25% of AMBF), a waiting
area/ma in lobby facing the Councilor's Lounge and a Committee Hearing Room adjacent
to the main Lobby at the front (10%).

I a. 660 sqm
b. 800 sqm
c. 792 sqm
d. 924 sqm
I 182. What is the PSOmax of the Project?

a. 60% C. 70%
b. 50% d. 80%
I 183 . What is the I SA (m ax) of the Project?
a. 10% C. 20%
I b . 15% d. 30 %
184. What is the ·USA ( m in) of t he Project?

I a. 20%
b. 30%
c. 15%
d . 10%
I 185. What is the minim um required TOSL for t he Proj ect?

a. 40%
b. 50%
C. 30%
d. 35%
I 186. What is the MACA?

a . 60% C. 65%
b. 70%
I d. 80%
I Page 15 of 28
I
187 · What is the FLAR m aximum of the Proj ect?

a. 2. 50 c. 5 .00
b. 3. 50 d. 6.00
188 · What is the BHL of the Project?
a. 15m c. 27m
b . 21m d. 30m
189 - How m any floors above established grade is allowed for this kind of development?
190. What is the GFAmax of the Project?
a. 3,300 sqm c. 6,600 sqm
b. 4,620 sqm d. 7,920 sqm
191. What is the TGFAmax based on Table 7.l?
a. 3,9 60 sqm . c. 5,775 sqrn
b . 4,~50 _sqm d. 6,145 sqm
19 2. Which 1s a good d imension (in meters) for a clerical table with no side return
a. 1.00 X 1.80 c. 0.90 X 1.60
b . 0.60 x 1.20 d. 0.80 x 1.50
193. Which NET floor area (in square meters) best applies to a clerical station with side
return provision and 2 visitor's chairs?
a. 3.00 c. 5.40
b. 4.60 d. 3.80
194 . Which of the foll owing applies for a clerical station w ith side return provision for a
desktop computer?
a. 3.20 c. 2.10
b. 5.40 d. 4.30
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Bus Terminal with Firewall

I A bus terminal is to be constructed on a 5,400sqm rectangular inside lot in Pasay
City. The lot is facing sout h and is sloping 2% towards a 40m RROW . The lot frontage is
60 m . It will be serving 17-25 buses at any given time and has a wa iting area (20m x
I 16m ) that can accommodate 150 persons, rentable locker (15m x 15m), bus maintenance
repair shed (20m x 25m) at the rear northwest corner, a restaurant (18m x l0m), food
I court (18m x 18m), and an open-air bus parking (60m x 50m) . There is an abutting
fi rewall at the westside near the front.
I 19 5. What is th e A MBF of the Project?

a. 3,240 sqm c. 2,700 sqm
d. 3,780 sqm
b. 3, 8 50 sqm
I 196. What is the PSOmax of the Project?
a . 60% c. 70%
d. 80%
b . 50%
I 197. Wh at is the ISAma x of the Project?
a . 40% c. 15%
d . 30%
b. 20%
I 198. What is the USAmin of the Project?

a. 20%
b. 30 %
c. 10%
d . 15%
199. Wh at is the TOSLmin of the Project?
C. 60%
a . 40%
b. 50% d. 45%
200. Wh at is th e MACA 7
a. 80% C. 65%
d. 70%
~·
b . 90 %
Page 16of 28
201. What is the FLAR maximum of the Project?

a. 3.00 c. 2.20
b. 1.00 d. 2.50
202 . What is the BHL of the Project?

a. 21m C. 27m
b. 15m d. 18m
203. How many floors above established grade ·,s allowe d f or th is

· k'nd
1 of development?
204. What is the GFArnax of the project?

a. 16,200 sqm c. 10,800 sqm
b. 5,346 sqm d. 8,100
205. What is the TGFAmax based on Table 7.1 of the NBC?

a. 16,200 sqm c. 8,019 sqm
b. 24,300 sqm d. 6,750 sqm
20 6. The Architect specified 0.60 x 0.60 Tiles for the Waiting Area . How many boxes
must the contractor procure?
207. What is a Berm?
208. Which of the fol lowing is NOT considered as architectural interior/ interior design
pla ns/ drawings?
I a. Architectural Exterior Perspective
b. Space Plan d.
c. Floor/ Ceiling/ Wall Patterns
209 . Wh ich does not fall under Architectural Interiors

I a. Wall Paint
b . Ceiling treatment
c. Furniture
d. Built-in Cabinets
210. Wh ich pavers will you use to help in passive cooling?
I a. Concrete Pavement
b . Green Asphalt d.
c. Black Asphalt
I A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Parking Building (UTS) Project

A three-storey parking building will be erected on a 5,350sqm rectangular inside lot
in Pasig City. The lot is facing south and is sloping 3% towards a 12m RROW with a depth
I of SOm . Each floo r can accom modate 150 cars. The building footprint is 70m x 36m. The
ram ps are located 20 m from both sides.
I 211. What is th e actua l footprint of the project?

a. 2,520 sqm c. 5,3 50 sqm
b . 2,675 sqm d. 3,210 sqm
I 212. What is t he actual PSO of t he Project?
a. 50% C. 47%
i b. 60% d. 57 %
21 3. What is th e I SA (max) of the Project?

a. 30% C. 20%
b . 40% d. 15%
2 14. What is th e USA m inimum of the Project?

a . 10% C. 13 %
b. 15% d. 17%
3.G,7 Page 17 of 28
ARDES Part 2 . Page 18 of 28
215. What is the actual TOSL of the Project?

a. 57% C. 50 %
b. 53% d. 40%
a. 80% C. 77%
b. 90 % ( SO PSOm ax + 40 ISAmax) d. 87%
21 7. What is the ma x im urn FLAR allowed for the Proj ect?
a. 1.00 c. 3.00
b. 2.20 d. 2.50
218. What is the BHL of the Project?
a . 21m c. 18m
b. 27 m d. 15m
219. How many fl o ors abo ve established grade is allowed for this kind of development?
2 20 . What is th e m ax i mum GFA al lowed based on FLAR?
a. 5,3 5 0 sq m c. 16, 050 sqm
b . 11770 sqm d . 13,375 sqm
221. What is the TGFAmax from Table 7.1?
a. 13,375 sqm c. 23,867.85 sqm
b . 24,075 sqm d. 17,655.00 sqrn
222. Under Rule VII of th e Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP, w hat is meant by PSO?
a. Percenta ge of Spa ce Occupancy c. Planned Site Occupan cy
b. Percentage of Si te Occu pancy d. Planned Space Occup ancy
223. Under Rule VII of th e Revised IRR of the 1977 NBCP, wh at is meant by AMBF?
a. All owa bl e Mi nim um Building Footprint c. Allowable Maxi mum Building Footpr int
b.Allowa bl e Minim um Bu lk and Footprint d. Allo wable Maximu m Bu lk and Footprint
224 . At Php 550/ bf , how mu ch is 120pcs - 2"x4"x8'
a. b. c. d.
225. If Cement Boards w ere used for a 106 sqm office wall partitio n, how many pieces
w ill you use?
a. 37 b . 39 c. 74 d. 78
226. If you w ill paint the same Cement Boards in the prev iou s questio n using 2 coats
a n d assu mi ng a con stant 20 sqm/gal, how m any 16-liter cans will you buy?
227. Assumin g 5% wa st age, how much Ceramic Tiles will you buy for a 1.20m x 1.20m
T&B if you w il l use 0.3 0 x 0.30 t iles?
2 2 8. Which is J\JOT part of Arch itectura l Interiors (AI)?
I a. Eaves b . Ceili ng
229. W hi ch is NOT considered a fixtu re?
c. Wall Partition d. Lobby Flooring
a . Ce iling Fan c. Toilet Pape r Hold er

( b. Luminai re d . W all Hanging
23 0 . W hat kin d of lig hting conta ins mercury and its sha pe is t ube?
a . Fluorescent b . Mercury Light c. CFL d. Inca ndescent light
I A. PROJECT TITLE AND GEN ERAL DESCRIPTION
A Pro posed Restaurant Plaza on a Project Site Hav in g an 8. 0% Slope.
l B. STATE MENT OF THE PROBLEM
A develo pment com pa ny ha s decid ed that its newly acqu ired property with a total
I lot ar ea (th e "TLA") of four tho usand five hundred squa re m eters (4,500 sqm .)
sh al l be develuped to host a restaurant plaza (th e "Project " ). T h e property is zoned
as C-2 and is located somewh ere in the bet t er p arts of Pas ig City (the "Pr oject
Si te " ) .
1. A fron t setback sev e~t een m eters (17.0 m .) dee p shall be provide d to
accnmmo date a pa rking lot at th e front of th e property .
2. Each sice of the l_ ot shall h av e a setbac k five meters ( 5 .0 m.) Wide .
tl 1e ,edr sh all a six - met er ( 6 .0 m.) w ide setb ack The s·id e a d 'While
~;ctba, t-:s 5 h d II b e used as d ri.vew ay s around t h e ·buil di ng . n rear
Ii
11
~•~- Page 18 of 28
3. The project shall be a one-storey restaurant plaza with an outdoor dining

a rea at the front and eight (8) enclosed kitchens at the rear to
accommodate eight (8) tenants.
4. There sh all be a three-meter (3.0 rn.) deep sidewalk at the front of the
building , oriented parallel to the RROW . This sidewal k shall be part of the
seventeen-meter (17.0 m.) front setback. __
5. The sidewalk shall lead towards a six-meter (6.0 m .) deep outdoor dining
area located in front of the enclosed kitchens. Th is dining area shall be
I one continu ous strip, such that there shall be no p e rmanent partitions
separating one tenant's dining area from another's.
6. Th e rema ining sixteen meter (16.0 m.) deep area at the rear shall be
I subd ivided into eight kitchens arranged side - by- side. Each kitchen shall
be enclosed , with an access door at the fron t and a service door at the
rear access ible from the driveway. Fenestration s shall be provided on
I each kitche n's front and rear sides only.
For greater m arket acce ptance, the minimum parking re quirements for the Project
I under ~he 2004 Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations (R-IRR) of PD 1096,
otherwise known as t h e 1977 National Building Code of the Philippines (NBCP),
sho ul d be exceeded and shall be positioned at the front area.
I C. PROJECT SITE FEATU RES

T h e project site is rectangular in shape and is an insid e lot with a one-hundred
meter (100.0 m. ) wide frontage. Provide a five-meter (5 .0 m .) wide driveway on
I both sides and a six-meter (6.0 m.) wide service driveway at the back. The project
site uniformly slopes at eight percent (8.0%) towards a twenty-meter (20.0 m.)
wi de road ri ght-of- way (RROW) located in front. The sa id RROW has 2.40 m. wide
I sid e wal ks o n each side . The surface of the sidewalk adjoi ni ng th e vacant front lot
sha ll be consid ered as elevation 0.0m. To the left of th e project site is a private
h igh school b u ild ing . To its right is a residential condom in ium building. To the rear
of th e project site are proposed three-storey single detached residences.
I D. DESIG N OBJECTIVES
a. To design a r estaurant plaza, marketable and attractive to m iddle income
re nters/ lessees;
I b. To desi gn t he r estaurant building in a way that can mazimize rentals and
leases for the developer; and
c . To desig n a bui ldin g that shall serve as a landmark in t he project area, with
I sustaina ble pl an/desi gn features and deliv erable at the least cost.
Building Laws Questions

I 23 1. Based on th e 2004 revi sed IRR of the PD 1096, w ha t is the maximum allowable
PSO for th e si te if the project will not have firewalls?
I a. 7 0%
b. 75 %
c. 85%
d. 90%
23 2. What is the a pplicable FLAR desig nation for the site, based on PD 1096?
a. 1.70 up to 3.0 0 c. 9.00 up to 34.00
b. 3. 60 up to 9 .00 d. 1.50 up to 2 .50
233. c ompu te fo r th e ma xi mum GFA using th e FLAR designation applicable to the
project .
a. 13,500 sqm . c. 153,000 sqm.
b. 40,5 00 sqm . d. 11,2 50 sqm .
234. Wh en co nvertin g t h e obtained GFA to TGFA, what con version facto r should be
RI used?
a . 1. 2 0 c. 1.33
b . 1 .2 5 d . 1. 50
2 35. W hat is t h e maximum al lo wable height (i n m et ers) fo r the building?
R a. 6. 0 0 m . c. 18 .00 m.
b. 15.00 m. d. 36.00 m.
a
'"' Page 19 of 28
236 . If the owne r wan ted to use a firewall for the project, w h at would be the
m aximum tot al length of all firewall construction accordi ng to the NBC?
a. 11 5- 150 m b . 150-210 m c. 210 -245 m d. 24 5-270 rr:1
23 7. What is t he maxim um allowable AMB F fo r the proj ect if no fire wal ls will be
used ?
a . 315 0 sqm c. 3478 sqm
b. 3375 sqm d . 3825 sqm
238. What is th e mi nimum front setback required for t he project?
a . 3 .00 m. c. 6.00 m .
b. 5.00 m. d. 8.00 m.
23 9. Wh at is t he mi nim um ceili ng height required fo r t he kitchens?
a. 1. 80 m. b. 2 . 10 m c. 2.40 m . d . 2. 70 m
24 0. Trim s and Moldings are
a. Stone w ork b. Mill work c. Steel w or k d. Masonry work
2 4 1. Wh at is the minimum open space required for the project?
a. 15% b. 20% c. 25 % d. 30%
242. W hat is t he min imum area required by the NBC fo r ki tchens ?
a. 1. 20 sq m. c. 6.00 sqm.
b. 3.00 sqm . d. 10.00 sqm .
24 3. Wha t is t he m in imu m dimension required by the NBC for kitchens?
a . 0. 90 m c. 1.50 m
b. 1.00 m d. 2.00 m
244 . Wh at is t he occupa nt load prescribed by t he NBC for kitche ns?
a. 1.40 sqm/person c. 18.60 sqm/perso n
b. 2.80 sqm/person d. 28.00 sqm/person
2 4 5. Whe re should the accessible parking slot be located?
a. Near the property entrance/exit gate c. Near the bathrooms
b . Near t he bui ldi ng/restaurant entrance d . Near the serv ice entrance
246. What are the minim um dimensions required for an accessible t oilet stall?
a. 1.10m x 1.40m c. 1.70m x 1. 80m
b. 1. 50m x 1. 80m d. 3.70m x 5 .00m
24 7. Accord in g to BP 344, w hat idea height of gr ab bars in an accessible toi let
st a ll ?
a. 600mm from fl oor c. 800mm from floor
b. 7 00mm from fl oor d. 900mm fro m flo or
248. A t urnabout space should be provided outside toil et stalls for PWDs. How big
shou ld t his t urnabout space be?
a. 2. 00 sqm, m ini m um dimension of 1.50m
b. 2 .25 sqrn , mi ni m um dimension of 1.50m
c. 2.50 sqm, m inimum dimension of 1.50m
d. 2. 75 sqm, m inimum dimension of 1.50m
249 . According t o the NBC, which occupant load applies to com m ercial kitchens?
a . 1 .80sqm/ person c. 18.60sq m/person
b. 9 .30sqrn/person d. 28. 00sqm/person
2 50 . Accord ing t o RA 951 4 , what is the ma xim um ri ser height fo r new stairs?
a . 100mm c. 200 mm
b . 180mm d . 250mm
251. W hat is t he recommended minimum lot size for C- 2 inside lot s, according to
t he NBC?
a. 96 sq m. c. 204 sqm.
b . 120 sqm. d . 30 1 sqm .
252 . I f you subtract th e ISA fro m t he MACA, what will you get?
I a. USA
b. PS O
c. T LA
d . O FB
253 . What is t he minimu m window area required for each kitche n of the project?
I a. 9 sqm . c. 144 sqm.
,,o
b. 18 sqm . d. None of th e abov e
l
Page 20 o f 28
l ARDES Part 2 Page 21 of 28
254. What is t he difference in height between the highest an d low est points of t he
lot?
a. 1.80 m c. 5.60 m
b . 3.60 m d. 8 .00m
255. Based on t he g uideli nes prescribed by the NBC, whi ch sha ll be considered as
t h e established grade eleva t ion when measuring build ing heig h t if the edges o f
t he bu ild ing footpri nt running perpendicular to the RR OW ha s a difference in
elevation of m ore than 3.0m?
a. The lowest elevation of the lot
b. Th e highest elevation of the lot
c. Th e averag e bet ween the lowest and highest elevat ions of the lot
d. The fin ish flo or level of parking lot
256. In order to satisfy t he parking provisions requ ired by the NBC, t he project
may m ake use of a permanent parking buildin g if t he said bui lding is how far
from th e project?
a . No m ore t han 50 .0 m. away from the p roject
b. No more t han 100.0 m . away from the p roject
c. No m ore t han 200.0m. away from th e project
d. All parking provisions must be provided on-site
25 7 • For d el ive r ies , t he own er asked you to provide pa rking slots for three
delivery trucks . W hat are the minimum dimensions r equi red by the NBC for
standa rd t r ucks?
a. 2.50m x 5. 00m c. 3 .60m x 12. 00m
b. 3.00 x 9. 00 m d. 3.60m x 18. 0 0m
2 58. What is the m ini mum width requ ired for a drop ped curb that leads to a
1. l Om-wide crossing ?
a. 0.90m b . 1 .00m c. 1. 10m d. 1.20m
2 59. For the 20 - meter w ide RROW fronting the property, what is the minimum
sidewalk wi dth requi red by the NBC (t otal at both sides of t he RROW)?
a. 1/4 to 1/3 of t he RROW width c. 1/6 to 1/4 of the RROW width
b . 1/6 t o 1/ 3 of t he RROW width d. 1/4 to 1/2 of t he RROW width
Estimates Q uestions
260. Estim at e the qua ntity of floor tiles required for one kitchen if the owner
wants to use 30 cm x 30cm ceramic tiles. Provide a 5% allowance for
brea ka ge .
( 261. Estimate the vo lum e of concrete required for th e floo r slab of the outdoor
dining ar ea if t he slab wil l be 125mm thick.
26 2 . If a parap et is int rod uced wit h an overha ng of 1. 20 m. from the outer faces
l of the bu ilding, how much concrete will be requi red fo r t he perimeter roof
beam if the beam 's cross section dimensions are 200 mm w ide x 400mm deep?
263 . If each kitchen is separated from each ot her by 150mm thick masonry wall,
l how m any concr ete holl ow blocks will be needed fo r each partition?
264 . How man y gallons of paint will be needed to co ver both si des of a partition
wall if th ree coat s of paint are required?
265 . o ne of th e owners wanted to add an indoor dining area so he decided to
I construct a drywa ll partition to separate the kitchen and the indoor dining
area. If the partition m easures 11.25m w ide x 3.20m high, how many sheets
of 4' x 8' plasterboard w ill be needed to const ruct the drywa ll ?
I Design q uestions
2 66. How big should a circul ar di ning t able be in order to seat 8 people?
I a . 36 inches diameter
b . 48 inches diam eter
c. 60 inches diameter
d. 72 inches dia meter
267 . For wor k kitch ens, w hat is the optim u m co unter height?
I c. 7 00 mm -80 0mm
d . 7 50rnm -8 50mm
c. 8 50 mm-900mm
d. 9 50 mm - 1000mm
I
I
I
268. What is the idea l din ing table hei ght for comfortable dining?
. a. 600mm c. 900mm
b. 750mm d. 950mm
269. Wh at is the ideal seat height for comfortable dining?
a. 300mm c. 600mm
b. 450m m d. 700mm
270. Which are the minimum dimensions needed for a rectangular dining tab le if
ten diners will be accommodated"?
a. 750mm x 1800mm c. 750mm x 2400mm
b. 750mm x 2000mm d. 750mm x 3200mm
271. For busy commercial kitchens, what countertop finish would you recommend
if ease of cleaning and low maintenance requirement are primary concerns?
a. Ha rd wood in oil finish c. Stainless steel
b. Ceramic til es d. Solid surface
272. What needs to be installed in the kitchen to keep cooking oils and other
similar contaminants from entering the public drainage system?
a. Kitchen/ range hood c. Septic tank
b. Grease trap d. Sink garbage disposer
273. What constit utes the work triangle in a kitchen?
a. Refrigerator, cooktop, and sink c. Work counter, cooktop, and sink
b. Oven , cooktop, and sink d. Refrigerator, work counter and cooktop
274 . What pa int co lor would you recommend if the restaurant owner desires to
increase th e turnover rate of diners (decrease the time spent by customers
inside the restaurant)?
a. Bold, bright colors c. Earth colors
b. Cool and rel axing colors d. Whites and neutrals
275. It is a movabl e shelter supported entirely from the exterior wall of a building
and of a type which can be retracted, folded or collapsed against the face of a
supporting build in g. Its horizontal clearance from the curb line shall not be less
than 300mm and the vertical clearance from its undermost surface and the
pavement or ground line shall be not less than 2.40m.
a. Movable Roo f c. Canopy
b. Mova ble Awn ing d, Porte-cochere
276. What shou ld you add t o the colors red, yellow and orange to produce a color
th at will have a CHEERFUL effect?
a. Brown c. Royal Blue
b. Wh ite d. Green
277. Which of the fo ll owing does NOT belong?
a. Sh opping Cent er c. Financial Institutions
b. Resta urants d. Department Stores
278 . Many custom ers of an enclosed restaurant and bar complain about too much
noise in the space . Which option can be recommended to the owner?
a . Add soft materials like carpets and drapery
b. Remove the wood paneling on the walls and expose the concrete
surfaces
c. Add m irrors on some of the walls
d. Increase t he lighting of the space
PROJECT T I TLE:
A Proposed Con d ominium Unit
STATEMENT OF THE P ROBLEM
A young co uple bought a condominium unit from thei r agent who is common
friend. Th ey didn't bother to read th e fin e print of t he co ntract because they
t ru sted th e agent. However, upon tu rn -over of the unit, t hey soon realized that
what they bou ght was a ba re unit. Having no extra money, they had to acquire
a loan fro rn t he bd nk. They then asked you for you r help as they are y
our c 1ose
friend s.
279. What is the dimension of a twin size bed?

· a. 38" x 76" c. 99cm x 190cm
b. 0.90m x l.80-2.lOm d. 54" x 75"
280. A Full (Double) Size bed is
a. 54" X 75" C. 60" X 80"
b. 39" x 80" d. 76" x 80"
281. What is the dimension of a Baby's Crib? .
282. The branch of biology that deals with the relations and int eractions of
organisms to one another and to their physical surroundings.
a. Ecosystems c. Environmental Planning
b. Ecology d.
283. How much will it take to complete the finishing?
a. Php 100,000 c. Php 80,000
b. Php 90,000 d. Php 70,000
NOTE: Th e Floor Area as well as the Floor to Ceiling Height was not given.
You will discover t hat there will be questions in the actu al board exams that w ill
seem to be impossible to answer. Oftentimes, you will need to search for clues
for missing data from the succeeding numbers or even pages. Sometimes, you
will need to be creative, make assumptions and ... gu ess. When this happens,
eliminate th e obviously incorrect choices and from the remaining choose the one
that is most realistic and appropriate given the situation .
284. The 1-BR Cond om inium Unit has a lm x 2m Bathroom . Using 300mm x
300mm Til es at 30 pesos each and labor at 150 per sq uare meter, How much
will the ti lework cost?
a. Php 100,000 c. Php 30,000
b. Php 14, 00 0 d. Php 12,000
285. For the rest of t he unit, how much will tilework cost using 400mm x 400mm
Tiles at 60 pesos each and labor at 150 pesos per square meter?
a. Php 15,000 c.
b. Php 40, 000 d.
PROJECT TITLE: 4 - STO RE Y COMMERCIAL BUILDING
A. Project Tit le and Gen eral Description

A Proposed 4 -Sto rey Commercial Building on a C3- Zoned I nside Lot
B. Statement of the Problem

Two OFW architects w ho worked in Dubai returned recent ly to Philippines. Not
wa nt ing t o keep t heir savings stagnant and wanting to t ake advantage of the
burgeoni ng office ma rket in Cebu City, their hom etown , t he two decided to
jointly develop a fo ur-st orey building with leasable offi ce spaces. They also
I decided t o become developers and that their office w ill be t he uppermost floor
of this build ing .
l • The buildin g sha ll have firewall s on three sid es of th e lot, but air wells
on each rear co rn er measuring 2 x 2 meters shall be provided for
ventil ation . Th ese airwells sh all traverse th e entire height of the
I •
bui lding , and sha ll serve to ventilate each floor .
The front 1 O.SO rn -deep portion of the site adjacent to the road shall be
a parking lot.
I • The gro und fl oor wi ll have an area of 140 squa re met ers and shall have
a stai rcase taking up a space of 3 x 3 m eters in plan. This stai rcase sh
be locat ed on the1 sout hwest corn er of th e building . On the s th 'd _a 11
1 a 1. 50 m-w1 .d e h a, 1wa y t h at starts from t he stai rcase and t OU· SI e IS
th e east end of th e building. Th is hallway is pa ral lel t o t h er~inates on
fronl s t he leasablc comm ercial spa ce . · e s reet, and
i • The second fl oo r sha ll be Identi cal t o th e first floo r .

be a IJalcony in fro 11t , 3 .5 met ers deep, t aking u t~xcept tha~ there w ill
p e Whole Width of the
l
1 ~,o.
Page 23 of 28
bu il ding. The total area of the second floor, me · Iu ding the ba lcony and
the st ai rs, is 191.80 sqm . h d floor
• The third and the fourth floors shall be ident ical to t e secon , d
. larger an d w I·11 pro trude 2 meters towar
ex cept that the fl oor plate Is . hs
t he r oad. This 2 meter protrusion shall be a ba lcony also, span_ning t e
enti re width of the building. The overall area, including the stairs and
th e balcony , is 221.40 sqm .
• Th e roof shall be a concrete deck with a parapet in front and a storage
room located between the staircase and the air well at the rear. The
sto rage ro om shall be as wide as the staircase and shall be 15 square
met ers in area .
C. Project Site Feature s

Th e site t hey acqui red is a r ectangular inside lot in Cebu City. It is zon ed as C-3 and
is 14.80 meters wi de an d 20.50 meters deep. It is bounded by neighboring lots on
t he east, west, and north sides, and a 12-met er-wide RROW on the south side with
no sidewalks .
286. What is the m axi mum allowable PSO for this pr oject?
287. What is the m inim um required USA?
288. Wh at is the ma xim um allowable ISA?
289. What is the maxi mum height allowed?
290. What is the actual TGFA of the project?
29 1. What is the m aximum allowable TGFA of the project?
292. What is the actual GFA of the proj ect?
293. What is the m aximum allowable TGFA of the project?
2 94. What is the actu al FLAR of the project?
295. What is t he maxi mum allowable FLAR of the project ?
I 2 9 6. How much of the lot do the air wells occupy?
297. What is the maxi mum allowable firewall length fo r t he project, according to
the NBC?
I 29 8. W hat is t he m inim um firewall extension required by the NBC over the roof?
2 99. What is the m inimum fire resistivity rating required by the Fire Code for the
firewalls of the proj ect?
l 300. For their office at the top floor, they decided t o put a Computer Desk for
the ir secretary. What is the ideal height of the desk?
301. What is t he idea l height for the Computer Keyboa rd ?
I 30 2. To serve t he buil ding occupants, the Owners de cided to put up a restobar at

the groun d flo or. Wh at is the ideal height of the Bar Counter?
303. What is the id ea l height of the Bar Counter Stool to go w ith you r Ba r
Counte r?
I 304. If yo u wa nt an Extra Tall Bar Counter, what is its Height?
30 5. Th e height of your Stool for t he Extra Tall Bar Counter sh ould be?
i 3 06 . If y ou r Bar Counter has a height of 1.10 m, what is t he ideal height of your

st ool?
307. If y our Bar Counter h~ight is 0 .75 rn, what is t he id eal height of your stool?
I 308 . For th e comfo rt of t heir cust omer$, the Partners d ecid ed to place a sofa in
fron t of a 42 " TV. What should be th e di stance between the TV and sofa f th
optimum view ing pl easure of th e customers? or e
I 309. Th e partn er s ar e car afi cionados a nd t hey w an t their v ehi cles to be ark
a secu r e and private 2-car closed garag e. What wi ll be t he area all ttpd ed in
su ch a ga r ag e? 0 e for
.
a . 28 sqrn c.
b . 35 sqr n d.
3 10. If t he 2 sc-da ns are t o be pa r ked side-by-sid e w h at ·i1 b
gara ge? ' · wi e the Width o f t h e
3 1 1. If t he 2 :;erl a 11 s are to be parked side-by - sid e w hat -
garage? ' wi 11 be t h e leng th of the
Page 24 of 28
7170
l ARDES Part 2 Page 25 of 28
3 12. What is the standard parking size for a sedan?

313. What is the standard parking size for a van? . .
314. When you submit documents to the OBO for building permit, in what color
expandable envelope will you place such documents considering that the
project is commercial?
a. Green c. Red e. Brown
b. Yellow d. Blue f.
OUT Of TOPIC
315. The base of the pyramid of Khufu Is
a. Rectangular c. Square
b. Triangul ar d. Irregular
316. What color promotes Confidence and Enjoyment but can also be
distracting/depressing
317. What color promotes happiness but is also associated with mourning?
318. What color stim ulates focus, concentration, clear thought and increases
productivity ?
319. A very emotional intense color associated with energy, war, danger,
strength, power and determination as well as passion, desire and love.
a. Black and Red c. Yellow and Black e.
b. Red d. Black f.
320. A road on t op or crossing an elevated road
a. Cloverleaf c. Skyway
b. Freeway d. Flyover
Note: we feel that this question is based on the "local" context as such a
definition/ description will not hold true in other countries. Remember that the exam is
about choosing the BEST (Good-Better-Best) answer or choosing the LEAST wrong or it
m ight even be choosing the NEAREST correct answer. There were even cases were the
correct answer was n ot among the choices... use your best judgment. In any case, you
must come up with an answer.
321. An act authorizing the Ministry of Human Settlements to establish and
promulga t e different level of standards and technical requirements for
Economic and Social ized Housing Projects in urban and rural areas.
a. US Affordab le Housing Act c. BP 220
b. PD 9 57 d. BP 344
322. How do you specify a Door Jamb Width?
a. Panel Door Width c. Door Jamb Outside Width
b. Door Jamb Inside Width d. Door Jamb is not specified
323. How do you specify a Door Jamb Height?
a. Panel Door Height c. Door Jamb Outside Height
b. Door Jamb Inside d. Door Jamb is not specified
Height
324. During const ruction, you noticed a colony of termites. What will you do to
prevent t he fu tu re termite infestation?
a. Use Mapecon products upon completion of the building
b. Use agricultural che micals on the soil
c. Hi re a termite control service contractor
d . Apply termite poison on the buildin g's foundation and the perimeter
or where there is co ntact with the soil
32 5. Strippi ng of forms- Slabs
a. 24 hours c. 96 hours
b . 48 hours d. 120 hours
Note : Sometimes, the questions are downright silly as they can't be
ans wered with certainty with the data/info provided. Stripping of forms
depends on a lo t of factors notably the type of concrete used
a d mix tures a nd obviously the SPAN invol ved . But during the 'exam
n eed to come up with answers- no matter wha t. For this p articuf s, you
q u estio n, you can immediately eliminate 2 of the ch oices. You ar,
with 2 which a r e both co rrect. 1-fowe ver of th e 2 le ft o ne . thare eft
' ... is e answer
IF you are dealing with SPANS over permanent supports 3m apart or

less. I would recommend that answer. You need to second-guess the
examiner. Go inside his brain @
326. Stripping of forms- Beam Soffit d h
a. 24 hours b. 48 hours c. 72 hours · 96 ours
327. In the construction industry, time is money. The faster you can rem?ve those
forms and reuse them the better your bottom line will be. Hence for big
projects, contractors have resorted to determining the concrete strength
through testing of samples under job conditions. What is the recom~e~ded
minimum compressive strength of concrete before you can start stripping? .
a. 500 psi b. 600 psi c. 1200 psi d. 1500 psi
328. For a Warehouse-Factory, which would you recommend for partitions?
a. Plywood c. Hardiflex
b. Marine Plywood d. CHB
329 . What is the dimension of a Collegiate Basketball Playing Court?
a. 28m x 15m b. 94ft x 50ft c. 84ft x 50ft d.
330. Which would you recommend for the flooring of a soft drinks warehouse?
a . Rubber Pads c. Concrete Finish Painted White
b. Concrete Finish d. Ceramic Tiles
331.. Archetype for a warehouse intended for storing soft drinks?
a. Concrete and Glass c.
b. Con crete and Steel d
332. If you wil l introduce a standard Two-High Stacker Mechanical Parking
designed to acco mmodate cars ONLY, what is your minimum clear floor-to-
ceil ing height?
a. 7'6" b. 8'6" c. 9'6" d. 10'6"
333. Which office arrangement should not be applied in order to lessen
distractions
a. Side-by -Side Office Tables c. Low Partition between Tables
b. Office Tables Fronting One another d. Office Tables facing a window w/
a v iew
334. For a Din ing Chair, what is the standard height of the seat?
a. 4 5 0 mm c. 400mm
b. 500mm d. 550mm
335. Handrails installed above steps or ramps shall have a minimum height of
a. 0 .7 0m c. 1.00m
b. 0.90m d. 1.06m
336. Consideri ng the handicapped, what should be the maximum depth of a
counter?
I a . 0 .30m
b . 0 .40m
c. 0.60m
d. 0.80m
337. Considering t he ha ndicapped, what should be the m aximum depth of a shelf?
a. 0. 30m c. 0.60m
b. 0 .40m d. 0 .80m
338. Considering accessibilit y for the handicapped, the difference in height
between a co unte rtop and an overhead shelf should be no greater than?
a. 0 .60m c. 0.80
b. o·. 7om d. 0.90
33 9. Best cl addi ng for a commercial building considering maintenance, aesthetics
an d cost .
a. Alum in um Composite Panel c. Grani t e
ij b. Steel and Con cret e d.
ij
Page 26 of 28
ARDES Part 2 . Page 27 of 28
340. A recently married young couple, Rey and Vicky, · move.d in· a t Rey's old
nd
apartment unit located at the 2 floor. However, when Vicky bro_ught her_
things, which in cluded a piano, they found the unit a little constricted. Bei_ng
an architect , Rey thought of a nice solution to solve this problem. He d~c,d~d,
and got permits, to renovate the place and introduce a ~IN_D~W ~hat will bnng
more natural light and create the little extra space for h is wifes piano. What
kind of window will he install?
a. Sliding Window c. Casement Window
b. Bow Window d . Transom Window
341. Best residential exterior paint
a. Enamel c. Latex
b. Elastomeric d. Acrylic
342. Paint on wall is considered
a. Architectural Interiors c. Perma nent
b. Interior Design d. Graffit i
343. In estimating, the value 2.88 is used for
a. Acoustic Tiles c. CHB
b. Plywood d. Pavers
344. A recess in the ceiling used to hide the curtain rod from sight?
a. Curtain Cove c. Cove Curtain
b. Drapery Pocket d. Recessed Pocket
345. I f your structur e is without Septic Tank (straight to sewer line), what will you
provide for easy maintenance?
346. A look-up Plan is a
a. Ceiling Plan c. Electrical Plan
b. Reflected Plan d . Reflected Ceiling Plan
347. What do you call the vertical, horizontal or both that separates two
occupancy?
a. Occupancy Separation c. Separation
b. Occupancy Permit
34 8. What do you call the washing and removal of top surface with chloride?
a. Bleaching c. Brushing
I b. Scraping d. Washing
349 . JPT Review Center brought a parcel of land, for its rev iew operations,
bounded and d escribed as follows: A PARCEL OF LAND (LOT 4-B-20) OF THE
SUBDIVISION PLAN PSD-00-080480, LRC RECORD NO. 158), SITUATED IN
TH E DISTRICT OF SAMPALOC, CITY OF MANILA, ISLAND OF LUZON, BOUNDED
ON THEW, ALO NG LINE 1-2 BY CALLE CAYCO; ON TH E N, ALONG LINE 2-3 BY
LOT 4-B-19; ON THEE, ALONG LINE 3-4 BY LOT 4-B- 21 ; AN ON THE S,
ALONG LI NE 4 - 1, BY CALLE LEPANTO, ALL OF PSD- 8 52 3). BEGINNING AT A
POINT MARKED " 1" ON THE PLAN BEING N. 0 DEG 38 ' E., 477 M. FROM F.H.
NO. 476, CITY OF MANILA; THENCE N., SOM TO POINT 2; THENCE E., lOOM
TO POI NT 3 ; THENCE S., SOM TO POINT 4; THENCE W ., lO0M TO THE POINT
OF BEGI NNI NG. ALL POINTS REFERRED TO AR E INDICATED ON THE PLAN AND
ARE MARKED ON T HE GROUND BY PS CYL CONC MON S. 15 X 60 CM;
BEARI NGS T RUE; DATE OF ORIGINAL SURVEY ON JUNE 30 - DEC 8, 1915
( MANILA CA D.), THAT OF THE SUBDIVISION SURVEY ON APRIL 9, 2011, AND
APPROVED ON APRIL 20 , 2011. Note that the property is SLOPING 8%
t owards Calle Le pa nto.
Fro m t he giv en tech ni cal description, what is the TLA ?
a. 15, 000 sq m c. 7,500 sqm
b . 1.0,00 0 sqm d. 5,00 0 sq m
ij
,,,
Page 27 of 28
350 JPT wanted t o provide a parking area/open space for its students, faculty a nd
;isitors. Being the Fengshui expert, Arch. Annie Pugeda w~s tasked to ~ome up
with the dimensions/location for this area. She came up with the following
specs:
Dimenson: 28m Wide x 80m Long x Sin thick
Location: at the corner of Cayea and Lepanto
Concrete: Cl ass B
Elevation: finish ed elev of paved parking lot all throughout is same level as
sidewal k which will be considered elev 0.
a. What is the volume that needs to be excavated in order to finish this
endeavor?
b. Using 10-tonner trucks, how many truck load is req uired to remove the
excavated materials?
c. What is t he volume of sand that will be used?
d. If you use a 15-tonner truck to haul the sand, how rnany truck loads will be
needed?
e. What is the volume of gravel that will be used?
f. If you use a 7-tonner truck to haul the gravel, how many truck loads will be
needed?
g. How ma ny bags of cement will be used?
h. After con crete pouring, how will you prevent cracking brought about by
rapid drying due to high temperature of the environment?
351. An interi or subdividing wall such as that between bedrooms is called?
a. Part Wa ll c. Plaster
b. Masonry Wall d. Partition
352. A process of rem oving paint from walls with the use of a chemicals
a. Scraping c. Heating
b. Sa nding d. Stripping
353. For safety con sideration, especially of children, the maximum size of a ball
that can pass between Balusters should be
a. 3 3 /4" c. 8"
b. 7" d. 27"
354. As per Fire Code of the Philippines, vertical balusters sho uld be spaced not
more than
a. 1 5 . 2 5 cm c. 20 .35 cm
I b. 17 .75 cm
355. Identify the figure shown as Part A.
a. Head er
d. 68.50 cm
c. Can opy
1 d. Porte Coch ere
I
I
r
I)
Page 28 of 28
I ARD ES Pcirt 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
PRACTICE SOLVING THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PROBLEMS@
PART3 HOME. You are given SIX (6) Hours and THIRTY (30) .
Minutes to solve ALL Problems. In the actual board exams,
I Va~adation you w ill need to do the sketches. However, for this exercise,
w e have provided some of the sketches (not to sca le}.
I Dry Run - Practice muna bago exam ! Actual exam will have 9-10 problems with lots of
ESTIMATES.
PROJECT NO. 1- TWO-STOREY DUPLEX HOUSE (R2)
+ ·I
Given :
TLA = 270sqm
Front Setba ck = 6m
RROW = 14m
Fronta ge = 18m
Inside Lo t
N
RROW
1. Ho w much is the Side Set backs? '

a. 2 .00m c. 4 .00m
b. 3.00m d. 6.00m
2. Wh at is the De pt h of th e lot ?
a. 7 .00m c. 9.00m
b . 13.00m d.15 .00m
3. How m uch is the Rear Setback?
c. 4.00m
a. 2 .00m
d . 6.00m
b . 3.00m
4 . Det erm ine t he AMBF.
5. W hat is th e maxim um allo w abl e PSO1
c. 65
a . 55
d . 70
b. 60
6. W hat is t he PSO (actua l)?
7 . Which PSO should go·1ern?
8. What is t he maxim um allowa bl e ISA?
a. 10 b. 15 c. 20 d. 30
9. What is t he m ini mum USA?
a. 10 b. 15 C. 20 d. 30
10. What is the USA (actual )?
11 . W hich USA should govern ?
12 . W hat is t he TOSL?
13. Wh at is th e MACA?
l LI . W hat is t he FLAR ?
15. Wh at is the BHL?
16. What is t he GFA?
17 . Wh at is t he TG FA 7
18. Ho w ma ny gallo ns of pa int is r,eeded fo r th e partitio n betw ee n t he unit s if you apply t w o coats?
19. How ma ny CH B w ill you use fo r the pa rti tion between t he units?
1,,
20 . W h;c, t is t he minimum \I ii< k11ess for th is w all that serves as a partition?
21 . W h at is the Fi re Tl at ing 1nr Part y W al ls?
a. 1-hr c. 3-hr
b. 2-hr d. 4-hr
Page 1 of 17
-
I ARDES Pa rt 3
JPT nEV IEW CENTER
PROJECT NO. 2 - FIVE-STOREY APARTMENT

I Given: 6.0 I 40.0 I I
6.0
TLA = 1,560 sqm
Set backs= A5 shown
I
Inside Lot 2.0
1 un it = 72 sqm
l
8.0
12.0 RROW
1. As per NBCP, what is the minimum Side Setbacks?

a. 2.00m c. 4.00m
b. 3.00m d. 6.00m
2. What is the Depth of the lot?
a. 34.00m c. 30.00m
b. 22 .00m d. 39.00m
3. As per NBCP, what is th e minimum Rear Setback?
a. 2.00m C. 4.00m
b. 3.00m d. 6.00m
4. Determ ine the AMBF.
5. What is the maximum allowable PSO?
a. 55 c.65
b.60 d. 70
6. Wh at is the PSO (actu al)?
7. Wh ich PSO should govern ?
8. What is the maximum allowable ISA?
a. 10 c. 30
b.20 d. 40
7. What is the min imum USA?
8. What is the USA (actual)
9. W hich USA should govern?
10. W hat is the TOSL?
11. W hat is the M ACA ?
12. W hat is the FLAR?
13. W hat is the BHL?
14. What is the GFA'?
15. What is the TGFA?
16. What is the diffe rence in ete,,ation betwee n the leftmost and rightm ost part of the lot?
17 What is the minimu m width of t he sta irs?
18. W hat is the m inimum w idth of Co rrid ors?
19. What is the maximum d ist ance to Exi t s?
20. How many eleva to rs are re quired?
21. W hat is the m inimum size of elevator car?
22 . Wh;;t is an appropriate co lor of t he pavement'
23. Hovi many parking slots are required ?
jl
,'
't80
Page 2 of 17
(
- ARDE S Pa rt 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
PROJECT NO. 3 - SIX- STOREY GOVERNMENT OFFICE BUILDING (Similar to Previous Exams)
/
jz. .oo .
/
f ,oO
"'2 ~,
"2. I
I
(j I
f
Cl
s.'.l
I
0 I
...I llJ0
0
:·1
~'i I
ll.! I
Q
V)~ L - ___ ,L._ ________ I
"'3'
I / r
/ I
_ _...cl_ _ _ - - ----- - - - - --
~rr
fol. . 00 ,.,, ]1)1
.I
pp,1\/ATE
fLO/H)
_,, ~.,,.
1-15 samE: questions

16. W hat is t he vo lume of concrete for t he floor slabs?
17. Wh at is the we ight of tem pe rature bars for each floor?
18. What 1s the best pa int col o r for the Roof Deck?
19. W hat ;s the approp riate li ne for t his kind of bui ld ing?
20. W hat is t he appropriate w aterp roofing for the Roof Deck?
21 . How many parkin g slots ca n be provided at the sid e Parking area?
22. W hat is t he best glas~ t int fo r this build ing?
23. If t he lot is sloping 2% towards th e No rt h, w hat is the di fference in elevation between the Rea. d F f
the lot. · 1 an ront o
24. What is the weight of t he Tem pe rature Bars at the Roof Deck?
,~
,,,, Page 3 of 17
D
AR DE S Pa rt 3 JPT REVI EW CENTER
PROJECT NO. 4 - NURSERY BUILDING Ii......~:.-i...i4-I... _ _ _ _ _ _ _.-::.:.~ --

3.0 27.0 I I
3.0
-------1.. .... - ~
..
GIVEN : - ~-
Setbacks = as shown
N
8.0
TLA = as shown
Quadrangle= lOx 33
Parking= 6 x 33
l
Slope= 1.25% to RROW
<!>
23.0 z <C
F LU
a:::
<C
4.88 COVERED ENTRANCE
9.0
.,
19.0
QUADRANGLE T
---L. -.. -··-.. -··-.. -·. -·. -·.-.. -..-..-..l _j_6.0
16.0_,__l_ __ _ R_ROW_ _ _
1 - 15 same questions
16. What is the volume of concrete for the Quadrangle if it is 4" thick?
17. If the waiting area is l.Sm wide, how many 0.5 x 1.0 blocks will you use to pave it?
PROJECT NO. 5 - 20- STOREY CONDOMINIUM W/ PODIUM, TOWER & BASEMENT PARKING {C-3)
Given : 1
.
... 12.0 I... 56.0
. ... .
1
12.0 I
TLA = as shown
Setbacks= as shown
Inside Lot
1 Basement
Grd Fir= Commercial Spaces
2nd - 4 th Fir= Podium Parking 50.0 RlSID fNTIAL
5th - 2otl1 = Residential
Setbacks= as shown
Lobby= 470 sqm
Com merc ial = 600 sqm 9.0
Driveway Ram p = Sm w ide
@ Left po rtion of Bldg
20.0
RROW
N lit
1 - 15 sc1m e questi ons
16. How ma ny parki ng slot~ c,rn you place at t he Basement?
17. How many parking ~lot s can be placed at t he Podium Pa rk ing?
1 18. How much is t he volu me ot co ncrete th at will be needed fo r th e or·1 R
vew ay , amp?
312 Page 4 of 17
11
ARDES Part 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
19. How much is the volume of concrete that will be needed for the Residential Roof Deck?
20. How many elevators will you provide?
21. How much area will you allot for the stairs?
22. If the difference in elevation between the rear and front is Sm, what is the slope?
PROJECT NO. 6
A. PROJECT TITLE:
Proposed Shed-Type WET & DRY PUBLIC MARKET Project
B. STATEM ENT OF THE PROBLEM:
A City Local Government Unit (LGU) has decided that its commercial 2 (C-2) property (the "Project Site"),
with a Total Lot Area (TLA) of five thousand nine hundred fifty square meters (5,950.0 Sq.M.) and located in
Quezon City (M etropolitan Manila Area), shall host a shed-type wet and dry public market (the "Project'').

The Project Site is a rectangular inside (or regular) lot. It is located alo ng a twenty-meter (20.0m) wide
street i.e. the road right-of-way (RROW), with a seventy meter (70.0 m) wide frontage facing the east. The site
slopes very gently (2%) toward s the street with one point eight (1.8) m wid e sidewalks. The surface of the
sidewalk shall be considered as elevation 0.0 m .
The Project shall be a Market Shed measuring 40m x 40m . 24% shall be allocated for the Fish and Meat
Section, 14% for Vegetable Section, and 38% for Dry Goods Area. The Market Administration shall comprise 2.5%,
Public Toilet 2% and the garbage Pit 1.5%. Parallel parking for at least 6 trucks (3 along each side) shall be
provided . Each Store will have an allocation of 48 sq.m. A 10m Driveway will serve as access. Setback at the front
is 35m, 10m at the North and West sides, and 20m at the South side.

a. 4,165 sqm c. 1,600 sqm
b. 4,760 sqm d. 4,462 sqm
2. What is the PSO (actual) of the Project?
a. 75% C. 80%
b. 27% d. 77%
3. What is the ISA (max) of the Project?
a. 10% c.15%
b. 30% d. 20%
4. What is the USA of the Lot?
a.10% C. 49%
b.48% d. 53%
5. What is the TOSL (actual) of the Project?
a. 20% C. 73%
b. 78% d. 54%
6. What is the MACA (actual)?
a. 37% c. 42%
b.47% d . 57%
7. What is the Range of th e FLAR for the Project?
a. 3.60 to 9.00 c. 9.00 to 34.00
b. 1.70 to 9.00 d. 6.00 to 9.00
8. What is the BH L of th e Project?
a. 10m c. 15m
b. 45m d. 18m
9. How many fl oo rs above est ablished grade is allowed for this kind of development?
10. What is the GFA (actu al) of the Project?
a. 21,420.00 sqrn c. 1,600 sqm
b. 53, 550.00 sqm d. 5,950 sq m
J l. What is th e prevaili ng TGFA of th e Proj ect ?
a. 53, 550.00 sq m c. 2,132.00 sqrn
b . 2,128:00 sqm __ d. 49,980.00 sqm
12. What 1s t he General Class1f1ca tion of Use or Zonin g Cl ·f· -
,,,
.tut1
a. Genera l lnst 1 .ona l ass1
. . . 1cat1on for wet· a 11 d d ry ma rkets?
. c. Ut1ht1es Tra nsport r
b. Business r1n d M ercan ti le d Pl ' . a io n and Services
· anned Unit Developmen t
Ii Page S of17
I~
ARDE S Pa rt 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
13. What is the m inim um rl:!quired parking slot by vendor?

a. 1 parking slot : 100 sq.m. floor area c. 1 parking slot : 300 sq .m. fl oor area
b. 1 parking slot : 150 sq.m. floor area d. 1 parking slot : 1,000 sq.m. floor are~ . .
14. If eleven (11) jeepney/shuttle parking slots are provided for customers, how much area 1s occupied with
respect to the site area?
1. 2.33% c. 7.99%
2.4.99% d. 11.99%
15. Wit h all given amenities covered, what is the maximum possible length of walking aisle if its width is
1.20 meters?
a. 120 meters c. 240 meters
b. 180 meters d. 300 meters
16. Rule VII of the 2004 Revi sed IRR of the 1977 NBCP deals with what aspect/s of design?
a. Classification & Requirements of Buildings by Use and Occupancy
b. Light and Ventilation
c. Light, Ventilation and Occupancy
d. Classification of Bu ildings
17. If the floor slab is 10cm thick, how many bags of cement are needed for the slab using Class A concrete
mixture?
a. 960 bags c. 1,440 bags
b. 1,200 bags d. 1,920 bags
18. Wh at is the weight of the floor slab concrete in kilograms?
a. 320, 000 C. 440,000
b. 380,000 d. 520,000
19. If 10mm Reinforcement Bars@ 0.40m O.C. B.W. will be used for the Concrete Floor Slab, how many
pieces will be needed?
a. 1,212 C. 1,414
b. 1,313 d. 1,515
20. What is the weight o f th e steel bars in kilograms?
a. 3,200 c. 4,400
b. 3,800 d. 5,200
21. How many 12" x 12" tiles will be use for the Admin Office?
22. Which corner is the most appropriate location of the Dry Goods Area?
a. Northeast c. Southeast
b. Northwest d. Southwest
23. Which corner is the most appropriate location of the Garbage Pit?
a. Northeast c. Southeast
b. Northwest d. Southwest
24. What eleme nt will define the architectural composition of the building?
a. Column c. Roof
b. Floor d. Wall
25. What element is least li ke ly used for this specific Project?
a. Column c. Roof
b. Floo r d. Wall
26. To have sufficie nt drainage facilities in the market, at least one (1) floor drain shall be provided at every
46.50 sq.m. of floor area. At least how many floor drains should be inst alled for the Project?
a. 9 c. 27
b . 14 d.35
27. Based the IRR o~ the Code of Sanitation, what is the minimum height for tables in stalls for fish and
meat ?
a. 46 cm (1.5 ft.) c. 91 cm (3.0 ft)
b. 75 cm (2.5 ft .) d . 122 cm (4.0 ft)
28. W hich of the followi ng products could be included in the dry m arket?
a. Eggs c. Packaged Food
b. Non-Pe ris hable Food d. Vegetable
29. Wh at is the total area o f Leasable Space?
:l 30. What type of drainage will you use for the Fish and Meat Section?
a /\rea Drain Catch Ba si n c. Trench canal w/ St ee l Grati ng
b. G" Floor Drain w/ P-trJp d. Perfora ted Pipes
1
ARDE S Part 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
31. What is the appropriat e flooring finish for this project ?

a. Pla in Concrete c. Vinyl
b. Ceramic Ti les d.
32. What is used fo r co nnecting the web members of Trusses?
a. Collar plate c. Gusset Plate
b. Web plate d.
33 . What material is used for the counter of the fish section
a. Ceramic 4" x 4" c. Plain Concrete
b.Granite d.
PROJECT NO. 7 (Similar to January/ June 2015)
A. PROJECT TITLE:
PROPOSED 3-STOR EY DUPLEX
A developer wanted to build a mod el duplex house on a Lot in Marik.ina City zoned as R-2. Each
unit had a uniform 198 sqm. lot area for a total of 396 sqm .with a 1.9% down slope towards the
street and 2% down to the east.
To maximize the use of the lot, each dwelling unit shall be unifomtly built with common wall at the
middle and will be allotted 91 sqm. per floor. Total GF will be 182 sqm . for the duplex.
C. PROJECT FEATURES:
The structure will have a setback of 6.00m at front, 2.00m at the sides and 3.00m at the rear area.
Each unit shall have the following features:
l. Ground Floor
a. 7.00 x 6.00 unroofed carport
b. 3.00 x 3.60 entrance foyer and 2.40 x 3.60 U-stair abuttiJ1g the common wall
c. 4.00 x 6.00 li ving area fronting carport and the side easement
d. Next to living area is 6.00 x 7.00 combined kitchen and dining with 1.50 x 2.40 toilet
abutting the Zomruon wall and rear service area (no need to draw details of toilet)
e. Open service kitchen-laundry area at the rear yard
2. Second and Third Floor (typical)

f. Two identical bedrooms occupying an area of4.60 x 3.50 each located at the front
g. Master bedroom measuring 6.00 x 7.00 located at the back with 1.50 x 2.40 c above and
1.50 x 2.40 toi let at the grow1d
h. Common toilet 1.50 x 2.40
1he project site is a rei.:tangu lar inside lot with a total frontage of 18.00 x 22.00 toward north to
14.00m RROW .
1. Wh at is t he AMBF of t he Project?
a. 522 sqm c. 892 sqm
b. 653 sqm d. 182 sqm
2. Wh at is th e PSO (actual) of t he Project?

a. 50.96% C. 45.96%
b. 60.96% d . 52.96%
3. What is l he ISA of t he Pro ject 7

a. 30.00% C. 26.00%
b. 20 .0 0% d. 36. 92%
JB5
Page 7 of 17
4. What is the minim um USA of the Project?

a. 15.00% C. 10.00%
b. 20.00% d. 24.04%
5. What is the actual TOSL of the Project?

a. 49.04% C. 47.04%
b. 39.04% d. 54.04%

a. 70 .96% c. 82.96%
b. 75 .96% d. 86.96%
7. What is the FLAR of the Project?

a. 1.50% c. 1.80%
b. 2.10% d. 1.60%
8. What is th e BHL of the Project?

a.3 c. 9
b. 5 d. 12
9. What is the allowable GFA of the Project?

a. 495.00 sq m c. 594.00 sqm
b. 475.20 sqm d. 526 .68 sqm
10. What is the allowable TG FA?

a. 618.75 sqm c. 742.50 sqm
b. 594.00 sqm d. 658.35 sqm
11. Considering a 1.50 m. eaves throughout t he exterior face of the house what is the applicable range of
t he t otal ce iling area for this project.
a. 480 to 490 c. 495 to 500
b. 724 to 738 d. 630 to 660
12. Find the applicable range no. of 0.60 x 0.60 granite FLR. Tiles for all the interior floor of 1- unit only.
a. 780 to 850 c. 510 to 550
d. 680 to 750
b. 410 to 470
13. Find t he applicable range in no. of 1.20 x 2.40 gypsum board if installed in the interior ceiling of
1-unit.
C. 65 to 80
a. 100 to 120
d . 160 to 180
b. 135 t o 155
14. Find t he ra nge in no . of 1.20 x 2.40 gypsum board if installed at the ground floor interior ceiling of
1-un it .
C. 47 - 52
a.60 - 69
d. 22- 28
b. 32- 39
15. Fin d the rang e qf GAL. of paint needed ( 3-coats using ratio of 20.sq .m . pe r GAL.) to cover the GRND.
Floor int erior ce iling of th e duplex.
c. 8 to 12
a. 45 t o 50
d. 14 to 20
b. 26 to 32
16. Cv nside ring a unifo rm 0.13 slab thickness of cone. Find the ran ge in cu. Meters the slab (cone. Vol.
on ly) of t he interio r gro und FLR. of 1-unit only.
14 to J s
c.1. c. 11.00 to 12 .00
h. 1.00 to 7 .OU d. 18 to 19
Page 8 of 17
It
AR DES Part 3
JPT REVIEW CENTER
17. Considering a uniform 0 15 b . ·
· s1a th ickness of F d h
only) of the interior third FLR c?ne. in t e range in cu. Meters the slab (cone. Vol.
a. 36 to 38 · of 1-unat only.
b. 39 to 40 c. 20 to 22
d. 27 to 29
18. Under rule VII sec. 701 TAB VII l f
· · o the 2004 · d IR f
type of bldg is not allowed in A-2 R-2 revise Ro PD1096 (1977 NBCP) what principal
a. Social Centers ' ·
b. Church c. Spa Centers
d. Lying-in Clinics
PROJECT NO. 8 (Sini ·1• t J
'· • ar o anuary/June 2016-2017-2018-2019)
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN AND SITE PLANNING
A. Project Title and General Descripti
A Proposed Administration Building Ext:n~ion
B. Statement of the Problem
The Department of Education has decid d t O b .1 . .. •

as GI, inside the Baguio Teach , Ce u, d an extension fac1hty on an available open area, zoned
storage facility for the already- _e? an:ip. Th~ two-~torey extension facility shall mainly serve as a
exis mg main administration office, but shall also contain additional offices.
C. Project Site Features
f
Jhe ~te is corner lot with 1Om-wide roads at the east and south sides of the lot The road at the east
oun ary s opes down at 3% to_wards the north and the road at the south boundary slopes down at 1.5%
towards the west. The south side has a beautiful, unobstructed view overlooking the Camp John Hay
Golf Club. To the east across the street are residential dwellings. To the north is a vacant lot while to
the west are more bu ildings of the Teacher's Camp. '
The en!rance gate !s located on the southwest corner of the property, and opens onto a 6m-wide, 60m-
long driveway ~loping down northwards at 3%. The driveway terminates at a 20m-deep open parking
area. The parking area stretches from the property line on the west to the end of the building length on
the east.
The building itself is separated from the driveway by a 3m-deep landscape buffer which is adjacent to
the retaining walls for the downwards-sloping driveway. This landscape buffer stretches from the RROW
on the south side all the way to the open parking area on the north side. The rectangular building footprint
is also offset by 36 meters from the two roads located on the south and east sides, and is separated
from the open parking area by a 4-meter deep, paved patio. The length of the patio is equal to and
coincides with the frontage of the building, and the patio FFL is higher than the parking area by 100mm.
Apart from the driveway, the parking area, and the patio, all other outdoor areas shall be left unpaved .
The building has three main areas, all located adjacent to one another.
D The first is an 800 sqm. storage room (Storage Room 1) located on the northwest corner, 3 meters
away from the driveway.
O The second area is another storage room (Storage Room 2) that has the same depth and half the
area as Storage Room 1.
D The third area (Office Extension) contains tile offices and is the only two-storey portion of the building.
This is further subdivided into two areas:
o The west half 25 meters wide and 20 meters deep, contains tile lobby and the business center on
the ground fl oor ' and offices on the second floor. The lobby takes up the front part of the ground floor
and is 6 meters deep.
o The east half with an area of 500 sqm ., has a double height ceiling and therefore has no second
fl oor. This area f~nctions as a workshop area/multipurpose hall.
Storage Room 1 is intended to be a commercial storage room, ~reas of which may be leased out to
clients needing sto rage space (for non-flammable, no~-explosrve ,'terns onl~) - _Storage ~oom 2, o~ the
other hand, is reserved solely for the use of the Baguio :eac~ers Camp. S1mIlarly, while the business
center mult ipurpose hall and offices in the Office Extension will be leasable spaces, some of the offices
on the' SE:cond floo r will ' be reserved for the Baguio Teachers' Cam p's Purchasing Department and
Engineering Department.
~,,•9of17
AR DES Par l 3 JPT REVI EW CEN TER
o. Design Objectives
To design an extension building th t ·11 ··
·1 providing much-need d dd ' . a w1 generate add1t1onal revenue for Baguio Teachers' Camp
whI e . . e a 1t1onal offices and storage space ;
o To maxIm1ze
. . . the returns
. from the income-generat·ing po rt·ions of th e d eve 1opment;
[1 To mInim1ze construction cost while still achieving an un·mp
1 · d b ·1d·
1. What is the length of Storage Room 1 aire LIi ing program.
a. 20.00 m . C. 50.00 m.
b. 40.00 m. d. 110.00 m.
2. What is the length of Storage Room 2?

a. 20.00 m. C. 50.00 m.
b. 40.00 m. d . 110.00 m .
3. What is the length of the Office Extension (Area 3)?

a. 20.00 m. c. 50.00 m.
b. 40.00 m. d . 110.00 m .
4. What is the length of the landscape buffer?

a. 20.00 m . C. 64.00 m .
b. 60.00 m. d. 80.00 m.
5. Based on the description , the front of the building is facing which direction?
a. North c. Northwest
b. South d. Southeast
6. If the administration wanted to add a viewing deck, which direction should it face?
a. North c. East
b. South d. West
7. According to the PAGASA, what is the mean annual temperature of Baguio City?
a. About the same as the national mean annual temperature
b. Around 4 degrees Celsius lower than the national mean annual temperature
c. Around 6 degrees Celsius lower than the national mean annual temperature
d. Around 8 degrees Celsius lower than the national mean annual temperature
8. What is the MACA for this project?
9. What is the maximum ISA allowed for this project?
10. What is the actual ISA of the project?
11. What is the minimum USA required for this project?
12. What is the actual USA of the project?
13. What do you call a company or an individual who rents a space for commercial/business
purposes?
a. Lessor c. Renter
b. Le aser d. Lessee
14. What spaces are located underneath the offices located on the second floor?
a. Storage Room 1 c. Lobby and Business Center
b. Storage Room 2 d. Multi-purpose Hall
15. Following NBC standards , how many steps should be provided between the open parking area
and lhe patio? c. 5 steps minimum
a. 3 steps minimurn
d. 6 steps minimum
b. 4 steps minirru im
ARDE S Part 3
JPT REVIEW CENTER
6 What is the difference in elevation betw th .

the
1 . driveway
. ?. een e 1owest point of the driveway and highest point of
a. 180 mm. c. 1.80 m.
b. 360 mm . d. 180 m.
th
17. For _car~ climbing
th a ra~~· e ramp break~ver angle is critical to ensure that cars will not scrape
when climbing and en exiting a ramp. What Is the typical maximum breakover angle?
a. 5 degrees c. 15 degrees
b. 10 degrees d. 20 degrees
18. If the lobby floor will be finished with 600x1200mm ceramic floor tiles, how many tiles will be
needed? Add 5% for breakage and 3% for attic stock.
a. 200-210 pcs. c. 240-250 pcs.
b. 220-230 pcs. d. 260-270 pcs.
19. In order_to shield !he business center from the noise coming from the adjacent multipurpose hall,
insulation will be applied on the wall of the business center facing the multipurpose hall. If the wall is 3
meters high, how many square meters need to be covered with the insulating material?
a. Around 40 sqm. c. Around 60 sqm.
b. Around 50 sqm. d. Insulation will not work because these two
rooms are adjacent to each other.
20. What kind of insulation would you recommend if the wall between the business center is made of
gypsum drywall, and the goal is to provide sound and thermal insulation?
a. Foil-faced insulation (polyethylene foam covered on both sides by aluminum foil)
b. Rock wool insulation
c. Plywood insulation
d. Insulation will not work because these two rooms are adjacent to each other.
21. What kind of insulation can be recommended to insulate the roof and prevent extreme heat in the
double-height multipurpose hall? . .
a. Foil-faced insulation (polyethylene foam covered on both sides by aluminum foil)
b. Rock wool insulation
c. Plywood insulation ..
d. Insulation will not work because the space has a double-height ceiling.
· Is
22. If cost-cutting · the pnmary
· concern, what floor finish can be recommended for the storage
rooms? c Epoxy
a. Concrete with sealer and hardener d. C t
b Ceram ic tiles · arpe
. . and hygie
23. If ease of cleaning, presentab1hty, . ne are the primary concern , what industrial-grade floor
finish can be recommended for the storage rooms? c. Epoxy
a. Concrete with sealer and hardener d. Carpet
b. Ceramic tiles
24. Where should the truck parking slots be locate d inside the open parking area?
a. Somewhere on the east half
b. Somewhere on the west half
c. On both the east and west halves . en arking area
d. Trucks should not be allowed to park m th e 0 P P
. b ase d onc.the
25 . In the project, which is the largest quantity description of the development/layout?
MACA
a. lSA d. PSO
b. USA
•--~ Page 11 of 17
ARDE S Part 3 JPT REVIEW CENTER
pROJECT NO. 9 (Similar to Janua l'y /June 2017-2018-2019)
A. PROJECT TITLE AND GENERAL DESCRIPTI ON

A pr oposed Truck Hub and Se rvi c e Center
s. STATEMENT OF THE PROBLEM

A yo u n g , successful busi n es sman has decided to devel op his one-
hectare, _c3-zoned lotloca ted in a busy commerc ial area in Cavite City
into a mixed-u se property cont ainin~1 a gas s t a t ion , c ommercial/office
sp aces , a car wash , a par king lot for his tru ck bus i nes s , and a new
b igger residence for him and hi s growing family . '
1. The o ne -hectare lot s h a ll be d i vided into three main zones .
The f ront zone shall be used p ri mari l y for comme rcia l
f u nctions a n d shall contain the g a s station , the commercial
build i ng, and the s mal l c arwas h bu s in ess . The middle zone
shall be used fo r light industrial fun ctions and shall serve
as a pa r k i ng lot for t he owner ' s truck business . The rear zon e
of the lo t s h all be used f o r the owne r ' s r esiden ce. Each zone
is se parated from o n e another b y concr,=,t e f e nces 1800mm-high .
2. Th ere s h al l b e a9 - meter-wide p r i va t e , intern al ro a d on the
eas t s ide of t he p r ope r t y , s tarting at t he fro ntage/national
hi ghway a nd rea c hing the res i dent i al area at the rear. This
priva Le road sha ll provide vehicular acce ss to both the truck
parking lo t i n the middle and th e r esidenc e at the rear, an d
s h all ha ve a l.20m-wide sidewalk on its west si de only (curb
only on the east side).
3 . The depth of t he front commercial zone sh all oe e qual to 40%
of the lot depth . The d ept h of middle tr u~k par ki n g zone sha ll
be e qu ~l to 30% of the lot depth. The depth of t he re ar
residen tia l zone sha l l also be equal to 30 % of t he lot depth .
4 . The front commercial zone shall be furthe r subdivided i nto
three main are a s .
a . The fr on t a r ea of this commerci a l zon e shall be 24 met ers
d eep and will be occupi ed by a gas station containing 6
p u mp s . . .
b. The middle area of this cornrnerc1.al zone w1.ll be 18 me t ers
deep and will be used for a covered car wash f acility t hat
~ an serve 4 cars a t a time , a s well as s ma l l, one - storey
;tructure housing a small convenience store a nd separate
toi l e t s for men a nd women . . .
c. The r e ar p o r tio n of t h .i s commerci a. l z one , wh i:h has an a rea
o f a p p ro ximate ly 1, 55 0 sqm., will h ave a two - st ore y_
comme rc J.a · -1 b u1.' l di'ng • Each s t ore y ha s an a r ea mea sur1.ng. 28
,,.,tPrs ThP primary a ccess t o t he comme r c 1. a l
met ers x "" '· me - · - · . . . _
buJlding W;.'11 be fr om t h e pr i va t e i n ternal r o ctd (9 meters
. • .
• • b · 1ct1.· ng wi ll be locat ed clos e t o the pr1.va te
wide) . T1e 1 ui . . b h' d
- -cc e ss and to l eave suff1 c1.e n t s pa ce e in
road for P. asy a • . . _ _ _
ll for possi e -
'b l future expans1.on . Parki ng f o r at l e as t 10 cars
. · . h · 1
-
Wl 1 1 a 1 SO
be prov -
1.de d f o r the us e r s oE t e commerc1. a
building. k A
·ri1 e rrii ddle z o n e will be us e d_ as a p ar k i ng Jot (or t r ue .s .
s mal · l · o u tho use wi ll be prov~ d e ct fo~ f our of fi ce sta ff.
· I t 1. l e t wi 11 a l so b e pr ovide d, a nd
Sl e ep ing q uar ter s w1.t1 a .o - .
11 qh 0 i 1 lrl be a bl e t o accommoda t e two pe rsu ~s. .
- - bP f or the own e r ' s L~o-s t oxey res ide nce .
6 1 he r r-ar ;,.o ne 1-1.1. 11 - · .
· · - . ·h · ·L l ha v e a 200 sqm. foo t p ri n t but a to ta l
'''hr r P 5 7 d o n (:(; t; a .
• • .. ·- - ~ -· uf 5 60 sqm. The o wner La s ag r eed to provi de a
r r ss f l)o r art:! o · ·1
,,. ,.. · 0 118 11
- a i r p .lay grou!ld for ll L S d11 d1·en , a s we l l
?00 - :){ ; 11 1. .... \:..,
,~ 4\.i
~cuo .Page 12 of 17
,ARDES Part 3 JPT REVI EW CE NTER
as a s mall gazeb o ~ e asu ring 6 meters by 6 me te r s . T he o wner

h a ~ r equ e S t ed su f f i c ie n t buf fe r b etwe e n the res ide nce and the
adJ ace nt tr uck pa r king in t h e mi d dle z o ne .
c. PROJECT SI TE FEATURES
1 . The s ite is a ~n e -h e ctare ins ide lo t with a frontage of 50
me ter s . Th ere . . h ·way 1 ocated a l ong
i s an 18-met e .r n ati o n al h ig
the south s ide o f the property . Thi s n a t ional
s i d e wal k s . hi g hwa y ha s no
2 . The s i t e s lopes 2 % towards th e r oad in front , and i s z o n ed as
a C-3 lo t b y the l o c a l gove r nme nt .
3 . The adj ace n t p roperty on the west i s a mul t i- st o r ey park ing
b u i ldi n g wi t h commer c i al spa ces on t he firs t two le vels.
Towards t h e e ast i s a big c o nstru ct i o n supp l i es store . The
nei g h bori ng l ot at t h e r ea r i s an empty lot .
D . DESIGN OBJECTIVE S
1. To max i mi z e r e t u r ns from t h e comme r ci a l a n d i n c ome - g e nerating
compone n t s o f t h e mi xe d-use de v e lopme n t .
2 . To mi n imi z e construct i on and o p erating c osts e s p e cia l ly of t he
in come -g ene rati n g component s o f t he mixe d - use development .
3. To creat e a p l ea s a nt a nd c a l mi ng e n v i ro nme nt f or a r e s ide nce
loca ted i n a bus y commercial a r e a .
QUESTIONS
1 . Wh at i s the min imum parki ng slot s i ze requ i r ed by the NBC fo r s t anda rd
trucks? c. 3 . 60m x 2 0. 0 0m
a . 3. 60m x 1 2 . 00m
d. 3. 60m x 2 2.00m
b. 3 . 6 0m x 1 8 . 0 0m
2. Wh a t is the mi nimum par k ing slo t size required b y the NBC f or
articul a t ed truc k s ?
a . 3 . 6 0m x 1 2 . 00m c. 3 . 6 0m x 2G .00m
ct. 3 . 6 0m x 2 2 . 00m
b . 3.60m x 18. 0 0m
3 . Fo r t h e to ilets in l oca t ed beside t he con v eni ence st o re , what minimum
dimens i on d o e s the NBC requi re?
a . 60 0mm c. 900mm
d . 1200mm
b . 7 50mm
4 . If t he c o nveni ence store wil l b e a r t i fici a lly ventila t ed , wh a t is the
mi nimum ceiling h e ight r equi red by the NBC?
a . 2 . 10m c . 2 . 70m
b . 2 .40m d. 3 . 20m
5. If th e ga z e bo i s c o n st r u c te d one ye ar a f ter th e ma in h ouse, woul d a
bu i ldi ng permit s t il l be r equ i red b e fo re cons truct i ng i t ?
a . No . It is ex emp t b e cause i t is a n addi t i on .
b . No . It is e x e mp t be cau se i t i s s ma l l e nou gh .
c. Ye s. I t is n ot e x e mp t becau se i t is not small enou g h .
d . Bo t h A a n d B
6 . According t o Tab le 8 . 1 , what i s the ma x imum t ota l foo tprint a ll owe d
f o r t he entire Jo t , as sumi ng n o fi r ewa ll s wil l be used?
3.. 70 'u of TLA c . 80 % o f TLA
b . 75 ? o f TLA d. 90% o f TLA
5
7 . I f th e o wne r wanted to add mo r e b u il di ng s t o t his proper ty , whi c h
h 1 ti l d i11g t ype wou l d yo u le a st r e commend? c . A s o ap proce s s ing p l ant
a . A liquo r shop d . A mass age cli ni c
b . n p ri nting s h o p a ll o wed f o r t h i s p r op er ty?
3 • vlha t h· t· 1:J cc, ma >'. i mwn b u i ldi n g h e igh t c . 4 8 fl oors
,. . 60 fl oors d . 180 fl o ors
ll t . _ l, fl o o r s
11
ft 1,q1
Page 13 of17
11
•
9 Wha t i s the dif fer en c e in elevation betwe e n th e lo west a nd t he highes t

· p oints of t he lot ?
a. 1. 0 0 m
c . 4 .00 m
b . 2 . 00 m
d. 10 . 00 m
10 . What i s t he rec omme nded minimum lo t s ize
for C-3?
a. 3 65 s qrn
C . 813 sqm
b. 600 sqm
d. 10 , 000 sqm
ll- Ba s e d o n Table VII .1 o f PD 1096 ,
what is the max i mum TGFA a l l owed
for t h i s property a s s uming that t h e r e
will b e n o firewa lls?
a . 30x75 %
c . 30x8 S %
b. 3 0 x 8 0 %
d . 3 0x90%
12. Wh at is the ma x imum a llowable FLAR f or the p r op e rty ?
a . 3 . 00
C . 9 . 00
b. 3. 60
d. 34 . 00 . .
13. Based on t h e maximum allowabl e FLAR, wha t is the max i mum
allowable gross f loor are a f o r this prop er ty ?
a. 34 0 , 000 s q m . c . 36,000 sqm .
b. 90,000 sqm. ct . 30 , 000 sqm .
14 . Th e pla y g ro u n d des c ribed in the p r obl e m is p art o f the
a. ISA c . MACA
b . USA d . Both A a nd C
15 . If the e ldest d a ught er de c ide d to turn a port i on o f the rear yard
into a vegetab le ga r den, this area wou l d b e part o f the
a . ISA c . l'1ACA
b . USA d . Both A and C
16 . If the a r e a of the lobby of the comme rc ial b uild ing is equal to
20 % of the corome r cia l building ' s footprint, ho w many 60 0mm x 600:mrn
homo g enous ti l es wi l l be r equired to fini s h t he l obb y ? Add 4% fo r
breaka g e, a n d 3 % f o r attic stock .
17. If t he fron t comme r cial zone and the middl e tru c k p arking zone
are sepa r ate d by a 18 0 0mm- high masonry wall, how many p i eces of 10 0 - mm
t hi c k CHB wil l b e needed to construc t t he wal l ? Allow 5 % for breakage.
18. If 1 60 c ubic ya rds of concrete are neede d and o ne tr u c k carries 8
cubic ya r ds o f conc r ete , h ow many trucks should be as s igned t o the
j ob ? Conside r that t he round trip time t a kes 95 min utes during peak
hours and unl o ad i ng a t the jobs i te h appens ever y 1 5 mi nutes.
19 . 1 c ubic y ard of common ea r th , when excava t e d , becomes l oose and
wil l swell in volume t o :
a. Aro und 2x i t s o r i ginal volume
b . Ar o und l . Sx i ts origi n al vo l ume
c . Around l.2 Sx its o r i ginal volume
d . No chang e . The vo l ume of common earth i n i ts lo ose c ondi t ion is
t h e s a me as i ts vo l ume in its bank/in - s i tu c ondit i o n.
20 .
If 30 cub i c y ar d s o f con c rete are needed a nd one t ruck carries 10
Cub i c ya rds of con cr ete , how many trucks sho uld be assi gned to the
job? Co nside r that the ro u n d t r ip t i me takes 7 5 mi n ut es during peak
21 hou r s a nd un l oa d ing at the jobsite h appen s e v ery 1 5 minut e s.
· For t he tr uck p a r king l ot, wh a t rninimwu width wo uld y ou rec ommend
fo r t he ga t e j_f t: r affi c wi ll be t wo -wa y?
a . 16 f eet d. Th e park ing lo t shou l d
b . 23 feet n o t h ave a gate
<'.2
c . 32 fee t
· What mi n i mum wid th is recommended f o r o n e-wa y se r vi c e roads f or
t r11cks?
a · 17. f ee t c . 2 4 fe e t
b . ., 8 t c.; (" i: ct . 36 f eet
J'f2
Page 14 of 17
JP T REVIEW CENTER
23
· What minimum width i s re c ommende d for two -way se rvice roads for
trucks?
a . 12 f eet c . 24 f e e t
b. 18 fe et d . 3S fee t
24
· For t h e ci rcul at ion within and around t h e t r uc k par king fac il i t y ,
wh ich gen e ral c i r cul a tio n patte rn is recommende d?
a . A gen erall y c lockwi se cir c ulation pat t ern
b . A gene r a l l y c ounterclock wis e circulat io n patt e r n
c. A c ir c ulation p a ttern tha t is neithe r clockwise nor
count er c loc kwi se
d . It do es not r ea l ly matte r
25 . Which wo u ld b e recommended to s eparate th e resi d e nt ial a rea from
t h e t ruck p arking area?
a . A 5 00rnm - h i qh wall, wi t h dense a nd tal l vege t a t i on on t he s ide of
the tru c k par k ing lot
b . A 1800mm-- h igh wall , with d ense and t a ll v egetati on on the sid e o f
th e r e sid ent ial ar e a
c . A 700mm- hi g h wall , with a water featur e on t he side of t h e
res i d e n c e
d. No wa ll, jus t a natural f e nce using gumamel a shrubs a nd small
pa lm tr e es
26. Which fini s h would be r ecommended fo r t he pave d o u t door play area
f o~ t he chi ldre n ?
a. Homo geneous til es , ma tt e finish
b. Natura l stones li ke granite to c omplement th e garden
c. Ext e rior- grade rubber flooring
d. Concrete p ave rs with slots for grass to grow t hrough
27 . trJithin the house , whe r e would you re commend t o loc ate most of the
bedrooms?
a. Nor t h side c. West si de
b. East side d. South side
28 . For this project, wher e would you recorr@end to locate the serv ice
areas of th e house?
a. So uth c. No r t hwest
b . Nor theast d . West
29 . If the owner wa nted to add a secluded and quiet lanai on the
g r ound fl oor , which side of the house would probab l y b e the best
location ?
a. No rth or We st c. Ea st o r West
b . Sout h or Eas t d . Sout h o r North
30 . How ma n y pe ople can s it around a round dining table wi th a
diamete r of 1500rnrn ?
a. 4- 5 p e op le c. 9 -10 pe ople
b. 7 - 8 p eopl e d . Mo re than 10 people
31. The o wne r r eque ste d that the a r chitect fin d excel lent locally-
p ro d uc ed f ur n it u re f or the ho use. Ho w tall sho ul d coffee tables in the
li •1ir-g r oom b e?
a . At l e as e 6 inches lowe r than t he sofa s eat
b . I t sho u l d be within 4 inche s of the so fa s ea c
c . 3 5 0mm
d. At least 5 i n c h es h i gher than the sofa s e at
32 . Hoi.-1 much cle i.: iranc e sho u ld be provide d from t he edge of the d. .
t a b le i f p assa ge on l y i s re qu i red (no s eat ing ) ? ini ng
a . 2 5 0mm c . 900mm
J--, . ?"; OOmm d. 1 200,nm
33. How much clearance should be provided in front of cabinets or
drawers in the bedroom, to ensure that they can be used comfortably
despite the swing-out doors or drawers?
a. 450mm c. 900mm
b. 600mm d. 1200mm
34. How high should the highest shelf in the lavatory medicine
cabinet be?
a. Maximum of 1200mm c. Maximum of 2000mm
b. Maximum of 1800mm d. Maximum of 2375mm
35 . The owner r equested a separate "dirty" kitchen located in a semi-
open space in the service core of the house. Since most of the heavy
cooking and food preparation will happen here, which countertop finish
should be recommended to the owner?
a. Stainless steel c. Corian
b. Homogeneous tiles d. Plain concrete
in the
36. Which floor finish should be recommended for the offices
commercial building?
a. Tiles c. Granite
b. Laminated wood d. Marble
37. For the commercial building parking lot, if economy of space
(e.g. as many parking slots in the smallest practicable space) is the
primary concern, which is the better configurat i on?
a. A central driveway with two rows of cars and 90-degree parking
b. A central dr iveway with two rows of cars and diagonal parking
c. Both are equally space-efficient
d. This cannot be determined until the parking lot is actually used
38. For the commercial building parking lot, which parking slots
should be made slightly wider than the other parking slots?
a. End slots, especially if beside a building or a driveway
b. Middle slots, because it is harder to park
c. Parking slots on either side of a PWD parking slot
d . Parking slots that may be visible from the lobby
39. Where should the cashier's counter in the convenience store be
located?
a. Near the entrance/exit of the store
b . In the middle of the convenience store, to give the cashier a
good view of the entire store
c. Near the storage room
d. Beside the manager's desk
40. If the trucks will docked in a sheltered area, what is the
minimum clea r ceiling height recommended?
a. 3.70m c. 5.20m
b. 4.20m d. 6.00m
DID YOU GET IT CORRRECTLY... and in time? We provided answers to Project 7, 8 and 9
so you will know if you're doing it correctly. Do not memorize, what you need to know
is the process.
I
I ,,,
Page 16 of 17
ARDES Part 3
JPT REVIEW CENTER
ANSKEV for Project No. 7
r--------------------- ---------------------,
1
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I _____________________ JI
L---------------------
1. 182 sqm 8. 3
2. 45.96 % 9. 594.00 sqm 15. 26 to 32
3. 30.00% 10. 742.50 sqm 16. 11.00 to 12.00
4.10.00% 11. 630 to 660 17. 27 to 29
5. 54.04% 12. 680 to 750 18. Spa Centers
6. 75.96 % 13. 100 to 120
7. 1.50 % 14. 32-39
ANSKEY for Project No. 8
l.b 10. 3180 sqm or 25.65% 19.a
2.a 11. 30% 20.b
3.c 12. 7020 sqm or 56.61% 21. a
4.b 13.d 22.a
5.a 14. c 23.c
6.b 15.c 24.b
7.d 16. C 25.b
8. 70% 17.b
9.20% 18.b
ANSKEY for Project No. 9
1. a 12.d 23. c 34.b
2. b 13.a 24.b 35.a
3. C 14.d 25.b 36.a
4.b 15. b 26. c 37.a
5. C 16. 200 pcs 27.a 38.a
6.c 17. 993 blks 28.a 39.a
18. 7 trucks 29. a 40.b
7.C
19.c 30.b
8. a
20. 3 trucks 31. b
9. C
21. b 32. b
10.b
22.a 33.c
11.a
Page 17 of 17

All Refresher - NO ANSWER

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

All Refresher - NO ANSWER

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

..,.

722. What is economical, safe in backing-out, and the most efficient?

723. What is economical, and safest? .

La 724. Non-temporary parking for single space.

725. Which is your least consideration for parking spaces?

727. Identify the type of lot for #1

728. Identify the type of lot for #2

Given the figure:

734. What is the most expensive to develop "plumbing-wise"

735 . For a La keside development, wh ich is least de sired?

31\ \ ; ;>T - i1FF RE5Ht: k

0 738. Fcom the gi"eo fig"'° • ,deot, fy w hat is iodk.,tc<I r ~-/)\

739. Fro m t he give n fi gure, iden l ifv t he type of strPet.

c::::1 74 6 What is ti ,e itif al ',lope fm Pl;iy Arr>,.1?

747. The ideal slope of th e land for econom ic subdivisio n ho · · · • .

In Subdivisi o n Plan ni ng, w hat sho uld yo u avoid?

J A. Inte rse ctio n

753. Wh ci t is a Topo graphic Map?

756. Wha t is considered most lega l?

757. Whic h part of M etro Man il a is allowed t o have Ar cades?

758. Who determines if a pla ce ~hall be arcaded or not ?

Given a Plan of a Subdivision .

..,._,t• . :.tt· '.... """· "

.,.·.r.. .·~ -" ' .

" · ,-;_' , ~Y::' , ,

. .•... ' .·•' .·•.. ·;..._•"'lt-•

760. . How do you descri be the lots near the road?

761. Identify the Cul -de-Sac.

766. Which is the least valuable?

767. Wh ich is the hardest to sell?

i Carbon Footprint and Embodied Energy

768. Which has the least embodied energy?

Situation: In a condominium high rise design ....

Situation: Match the following

o Situation: Other topics you should know

Q 1. W hich will you apply last before Painting ?

0 3. A pail of paint has how many gallons?

10. What type of Paint is used for Metal?

c. Pacific Paints (Boysen) Philippines Inc.

tj b. Davies Paints Philippines Inc.

tj b. ~av1:s Paints Ph1l1ppmes Inc.

tJ 14. Wh at type of raint is used for Con crete?

15. What Paint Finish is NOT used for Ceiling?

35 . A lligatorin g - The formation of cracks on the surface of pa int layers Jl'i~11HWJ1t

crop up within a day, or not until a year later.

d should k11 ow?

::l ,., 'O

b Epo xy E11..rn re l d. /\qua Epoxy

;1 b. Staining d. Use sand paper and seal cracks

JPT RE VIEW CE NTER INC

74 . Xyladec or is manufac tured by ?

l 76 . Which is best for waterpro ofing walls and floors?

b. 3/16" thk Membrance d.

Cl shown 1n Figu re A above . However, an advancement

membrane thereby improving the membrane's effectiveness and insulation efficiency as

a. In between the slab and ·topping c. Under the Slab

102. A treatment of Concrete or Mortar to retard the passage or absorption of water or

"- 108. What type of waterproofing is shown in Figure E?

b. Liquid d. Ben ton ite

110. What type of w aterproofing is Aquashield Plus?

150. What is the usual gauge of a Longspan G.I.?

-l:i Deaiqnat ion DiJlon•io na

J 181. What is a system of triang les used to support of roof?